diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-0.txt | 7701 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-0.zip | bin | 133673 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-h.zip | bin | 237630 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-h/63156-h.htm | 9963 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 52000 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 22436 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63156-h/images/i253.jpg | bin | 23837 -> 0 bytes |
10 files changed, 17 insertions, 17664 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b70cbeb --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #63156 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/63156) diff --git a/old/63156-0.txt b/old/63156-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 3d3895f..0000000 --- a/old/63156-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7701 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of the Central, by I. T. Thurston - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Boys of the Central - A High-School Story - -Author: I. T. Thurston - -Release Date: September 8, 2020 [EBook #63156] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE CENTRAL *** - - - - -Produced by Demian Katz, Craig Kirkwood, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net -(Images courtesy of the Digital Library@Villanova University -(http://digital.library.villanova.edu/)) - - - - - - -Transcriber’s Notes: - -Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_). - -Additional Transcriber’s Notes are at the end. - - * * * * * - -[Illustration] - - - - -Boys of The Central. - - - A HIGH-SCHOOL STORY. - - BY I. T. THURSTON, - - Author of “Ruth Prentice,” “Next-Door Neighbors.” - - BOSTON - The Pilgrim Press - CHICAGO - - * * * * * - -COPYRIGHT, 1896, BY A. I. BRADLEY & CO. - - - - -CONTENTS. - - - CHAPTER PAGE - - I. A WORD AND A BLOW 1 - - II. HAMLIN SPEAKS HIS MIND 10 - - III. SECTION D TAKEN BY SURPRISE 19 - - IV. A BLOW FOR CLARK 33 - - V. HAMLIN RETURNS 45 - - VI. UNPLEASANT FOR CRAWFORD AND HENDERSON 60 - - VII. VERY NEARLY AN ACCIDENT 77 - - VIII. THE COMPETITIVE DRILL 90 - - IX. FREEMAN MAKES A DECISION 107 - - X. A PUBLIC APOLOGY 125 - - XI. NEW PUPILS IN SECTION D 138 - - XII. WHO SHALL BE CAPTAIN OF CO. C? 156 - - XIII. THE ELECTION 169 - - XIV. NEW METHODS IN THE BATTALION 186 - - XV. WHO IS THE THIEF? 197 - - XVI. A SNOWBALL FIGHT 217 - - XVII. HONOR TO WHOM HONOR IS DUE 235 - - XVIII. GLADNESS FOR CLARK 250 - - XIX. COMMENCEMENT 266 - - * * * * * - -BOYS OF THE CENTRAL. - - - - -CHAPTER I. A WORD AND A BLOW. - - -An algebra recitation was in progress in D section. - -Reed was on his feet explaining the given problem with his usual -quickness and accuracy. Suddenly Mr. Horton interrupted him. - -“Very well, Reed, take your seat. Crawford, you may continue the -explanation.” - -Crawford stumbled to his feet with a confused glance at the teacher. - -“I--er--don’t know exactly where Reed left off, sir,” he stammered. - -“If you had been paying attention you would have known. Failure, -Crawford. Freeman, you may continue,” said Mr. Horton. - -Freeman--a slender, pale-faced boy--occupied the seat directly in front -of Crawford’s. He rose promptly and began where Reed had left off, -but in a moment he stopped, the color rose in his face, he hesitated, -stammered and dropped back into his seat, saying, “I can’t do it, sir.” - -Mr. Horton, whose eyes had been on some restless boys in another part -of the room, turned around with a glance of surprise. Freeman was not -an especially quick scholar, and his frequent absences on account of -illness kept him from taking the rank in the class that his steady work -would otherwise have secured for him, but a failure was a rare thing -for him. - -“I think you can do that, Freeman. Try again,” said the teacher. - -The boy rose, and once more attempted to go on with the problem, but as -before, his face flushed and he dropped quickly back into his seat. - -“I am sorry, Freeman, but I must give you a failure,” said Mr. Horton; -but as he spoke, another boy sitting across the aisle from Crawford -rose, and said clearly and distinctly, “Mr. Horton, Freeman can solve -that problem, I think, if he can stand by your desk.” - -At this, low hisses sounded from different parts of the room, but a -glance from Mr. Horton suppressed them, as he said quietly, “Freeman, -step forward to my desk and finish the recitation if you can.” - -With a look of relief, the little fellow stepped forward, and, without -a moment’s hesitation, solved the problem clearly and correctly. - -He cast a grateful glance at the boy who had spoken for him as he -returned to his seat, but he shivered as he saw the ugly, threatening -look in Crawford’s eyes, and caught the words hissed close to his ear, -as Crawford leaned over his desk: “I’ll settle with you for that, and -with that donkey that brayed for you, too.” - -At recess, Mr. Horton kept both Freeman and Clark, the boy who had -spoken for him, and questioned them, but he could get no information -from either. He was certain however, in his own mind, that Crawford was -the one to blame. He believed that Crawford was at the bottom of much -of the trouble and disorder in his class-room, but it was all so slyly -done that it was next to impossible to fix the blame where it belonged. - -“It was real good of you, Stanley, to help me out,” Freeman said -gratefully, as, Mr. Horton having dismissed them, the two went down to -the playground; “but I’m afraid Crawford’ll serve you some mean trick -to pay for it.” - -“He served you a mean enough one, this morning,” answered Clark. -“Sticking pins into you, wasn’t he?” - -“Yes,” replied Freeman; “he had ’em fastened somehow to the toe of his -shoe. They must have been big pins too, for they hurt like fury. Look -here!” He pointed to some dark spots on his black stockings, below his -short trousers. - -“Blood?” said Clark, inquiringly, and as Freeman nodded, he added:-- - -“It’s a shame, Ray. I see him tormenting you in all sorts of ways -whenever Horton isn’t looking. You ought to have your seat changed. Why -don’t you?” - -“Oh no!” said Freeman, quickly. “He’d say I was a coward then, and -couldn’t stand a little fun. No, I’ll stick it out--but,” he added, -half laughing, “I wish he wouldn’t stick so many things into me. I -reckon I know how a pin-cushion feels.” - -Crawford, with half a dozen of his particular cronies, stood on the -playground near the door. They seized upon Clark and Freeman as they -came out. - -“Well, Sissies, did you tell the master all about it?” demanded -Crawford, scornfully. - -“We did not tell him anything,” answered Clark quietly, looking -straight into the other’s angry eyes. - -“It’s a lie. You did, too!” said Crawford, hotly. - -“We didn’t either!” began Freeman, indignantly; but the big fellow -who was holding him gave him a shake and told him to “hush up,” while -Crawford repeated loudly and distinctly, “It’s a lie!” - -A crowd quickly gathered about the group. There was a moment of -silence, while all waited to see what Clark would do. His face was very -white and his hands were clenched, but still looking straight into -Crawford’s angry eyes, he answered steadily, “You can believe me or -not, as you like. I have told you the truth.” - -“You’re a sneak, a coward and a telltale! Take that!” said Crawford, in -reply, and as he spoke he struck Clark across the mouth. - -Clark’s eyes fairly blazed then. He took one step forward, and grasped -Crawford’s wrists with a grip that made him wince and draw back, but -the next instant Clark released him and turned away, saying, “I would -not lower myself enough to fight with you.” - -“Ha, ha! Coward--coward! You’re afraid, and try to sneak out of it that -way,” called Crawford loudly; and more than one voice joined in the -cry, and shouted, “Coward! Coward!” as Clark walked swiftly through the -hall and up the stairs to his seat. Little Freeman followed him, but -as he glanced at his friend’s white, set face, he dared not speak to -him, and slipping into his own seat, he opened a book, and pretended -to be studying. In another moment, the bell summoned the boys from the -playground. Those of section D, as they returned to their seats, cast -curious or scornful glances at Clark, but he never raised his eyes to -look at one of them, and when school was dismissed he was the first -to leave the room, not waiting even for little Freeman, who was his -devoted admirer, and counted it a great honor, as well as pleasure, to -walk home with him. - -Freeman was feeling very badly about the affair. He considered himself -to blame for it all, and he longed to tell Clark how sorry he was, -but he knew instinctively that his friend could not bear to talk of -it then; so he did not attempt to overtake him, but walked slowly -on alone, so deep in thought that he did not notice quick footsteps -behind him, till his cap was suddenly snatched off and flung into a -mud-puddle, while Crawford’s loud, rough voice exclaimed, “Now, little -telltale, you’ve got to take _your_ punishment. I told you I’d pay you -out, and I meant it.” - -“But I didn’t do anything to you,” protested Freeman, shrinking from -the other’s rough grasp. - -“Didn’t do anything to me!” echoed Crawford harshly. “It was all your -fault. That fool of a Clark was standing up for you, wasn’t he?” - -“But--” began Freeman. - -“You hush up! We’ve had chin enough from you,” interrupted Crawford, -and while three or four of his cronies stood by laughing and jeering, -he seized the little fellow, who was five years younger than himself, -and nothing like his size, and rolled him over and over in the puddle, -where he had already thrown his cap. It had rained heavily the night -before, and there was water enough to soak Freeman’s clothing pretty -thoroughly. Not content with this, Crawford rubbed mud over the lad’s -face and hands, and tried to force it into his mouth before he released -him. - -“There!” he exclaimed at last. “Now run and tell Clark all about it.” - -“Telltale! Telltale!” chorused the others, as Freeman, exhausted by his -ineffectual struggles, and dripping wet, picked up his cap and books, -and hurried off. He looked at no one that he met, but all the same he -was keenly conscious of the curious glances at his flushed face and -dripping clothes as he went. - -When he reached home he found no one there but his twin sister, Edith. - -“Why, Ray!” she exclaimed, “what is the matter? How did you get so wet? -But don’t stop to tell me,” she added hastily; “run right up stairs, -and get on dry clothes first, and I’ll have some hot drink ready when -you come down.” - -She knew the danger of a chill for the delicate boy, and had the hot -drink ready, and made him take it before she would let him tell her a -word of what had happened. Indeed, he did not want to tell her at all, -but these two had always shared each other’s joys and sorrows, so Edith -soon knew the whole story, all except Crawford’s name. That Freeman -would not tell for all her urging. She was so indignant, and scolded -so long about it all, that her brother at last half forgot his own -indignation in laughing at hers. - -“I think it’s too shameful for anything, and the boy ought to be -suspended--I don’t care who he is!” she declared, her blue eyes -flashing. “Ray, I think you _ought_ to let Mr. Horton know about it, -just so that this fellow will not dare to treat any other boy as he has -treated you.” - -“No, no, Edith, they sha’n’t have any grounds for calling me telltale,” -Freeman answered, his thin face flushing as he heard again, in -imagination, the taunting cry of “telltale,” that seemed still ringing -in his ears. “Say, Edith,” he went on, “mind you don’t let mother know -anything about this. She’d worry over it, and imagine me suffering -all sorts of persecutions, and it isn’t likely that that fellow will -trouble me any more, now that he’s had his ‘revenge,’ as he calls it.” - -“But, Ray,” said his sister, “we can’t help mother’s knowing. You -can’t wear those clothes again until they’ve been cleaned and pressed. -They’ll have to be sent away for that, and mother must know about it.” - -“Yes, and pay the bill,” groaned the boy. “I tell you, Edith, it’s -awful hard on a big fellow like me to be just a bill of expense to -mother, instead of being at work, helping her, as I feel I ought to be.” - -“But _she_ doesn’t feel that you ought to be,” said Edith. “You know -it almost breaks her heart because she can’t send you to college, and -I don’t think anything would induce her to let you leave school until -you graduate.” - -“I know it,” sighed the boy, “and the worst of it is that I am such a -weakling that I may never amount to anything in the world when I am -through school.” - -“Don’t worry over that, Ray. You are certainly stronger than you were a -year or two ago, and maybe you won’t have any more sick spells to pull -you down. I do hope not, any way,” and Edith laid her hand tenderly on -his shoulder as he spoke. - -He looked up at her gratefully, as he answered, “I wonder what I should -do without you, Edith. You never let me get _quite_ discouraged.” - -“And never mean to,” she answered gaily, though her eyes filled with -tears as she looked at the blue-veined temples, and the dark circles -under the blue eyes so like her own. - - - - -CHAPTER II. HAMLIN SPEAKS HIS MIND. - - -One boy had been absent from section D that day. This was David Hamlin, -a big, handsome fellow, a general favorite, and the acknowledged leader -of the better element in the class. He was at school early the next -morning, and listened with the greatest interest to the story of the -previous day’s happenings, which the boys were eager to tell. - -“Well,” he said, looking from one to another when the story was ended, -“where were all you decent fellows that you didn’t interfere? If I’d -been here, I’d have stood up for Clark. Coward indeed! He showed pluck -enough, I should say, in refusing to fight that bully Crawford.” - -But at this, a murmur of dissent went around the group. It was plain -that for once Hamlin was not to have the popular support even of all -his friends. - -“No, no, Hamlin,” said one, “you can’t make me believe that a fellow -with the right sort of stuff in him would let anybody give him the lie -direct and a blow in the face to boot, and not strike back. That’s not -my idea of courage.” - -“Nor mine. Nor mine,” cried half a dozen voices. - -Hamlin looked from one to another, reading the same opinion in every -face. - -“No,” he said scornfully. “It is quite evident that it is _not_ your -idea of courage. Haven’t you sense enough to see that Clark showed a -courage as much higher and finer than Crawford’s as his was higher than -that of--a mad bull, I was going to say”; he stopped and half laughed, -as he added, “That’s a poor comparison however, for I don’t think that -Crawford’s courage _was_ one whit higher or better than a mad bull’s.” - -Hamlin was standing with his back to the door. A little stir, and a -change in some of the faces turned towards the door, made him glance -around to find Crawford himself standing just behind him with a scowl -on his dark face. - -“So,” he said, “I seem to be the interesting subject under discussion. -Go on, go on. Pray don’t let me interrupt you.” - -“I don’t mean to”; and as he spoke, Hamlin wheeled quickly around so -as to face the other. “I’d just as soon, and in fact a little sooner, -speak my mind to your face. Crawford, if I’ve heard the story straight, -you did some mean, contemptible, cowardly things, yesterday. _I_ think -such doings are a disgrace to our section, and I tell you now once for -all, that if this sort of thing can’t be stopped I shall ask for a -transfer to some other section, and I shall tell Professor Keene just -why I want a transfer, too.” - -There was a moment of silence while Crawford, choking down his rage, -looked from face to face to see on which side were the sympathies of -the boys. Had any other than Hamlin said all this, Crawford would have -either laughed it to scorn or answered by a sneer and a blow, but -Hamlin was too popular and stood too high in the class to be treated in -that way. He belonged, too, to a wealthy and influential family, and -these facts weighed heavily with Crawford; so, though his eyes were -full of sullen anger, he only said gruffly, “Seems to me you’re making -a mountain out of a molehill. I gave that cad of a Clark a slap across -the mouth which he was too cowardly to return. That’s all there is -about it, and I don’t see, for my part, why _you_ are taking it up, and -making such a row over it, Hamlin.” - -“I don’t know Clark very well,” replied Hamlin, “but I’ve never seen -anything sneaky or cowardly about him, and I don’t believe he is -either. I know a fellow always gets the name of a coward if he won’t -pitch in and strike back like a prize fighter when anybody insults him; -but I’m beginning to think that the _honor_ that can only be proven by -making a brute of one’s self, isn’t worth very much anyhow. But that -blow of yours that Clark had the _courage_ not to return, Crawford, -was only one of the things that you were responsible for, yesterday, -if all I’ve heard is true. You all know,” he went on, turning to the -boys, “how often little Freeman is sick, and how much he is absent on -that account. Perhaps some of you don’t know that he has no father, -and that his mother is working a good deal harder than any woman ought -to work, to keep him in school. Freeman himself is very anxious to -get to work and help his mother, and the position he gets after he -graduates will depend largely on his school record; yet you, Crawford, -deliberately tried yesterday, to make him fail, when he knew his lesson -perfectly, and not satisfied with that, you pitched into him after -school and rolled him in mud and water in the street. It was a shame, -Crawford--a little delicate chap like him, not half your size! I can’t -see, for my part, how any decent fellow _could_ have stood by and seen -it done without interfering”; and Hamlin’s eyes blazed with righteous -indignation as he looked around the circle. - -“Oh, come now, Hamlin, you’re putting it on too thick,” said Crawford; -“I”--but whispers of “Here comes Bobby!” cut short the talk, and the -boys slipped into their seats as Mr. Horton entered the class-room. - -“Bobby” was the class name for the teacher of section D. - -Clark did not appear until the last moment--just in time to avoid the -tardy mark. His face was very grave, and he looked neither to right nor -left as he took his seat, so he did not see Hamlin watching eagerly -for a chance to give him a friendly smile, and Hamlin had to content -himself with the thought, “I’ll have a talk with him at recess.” - -But at recess the principal, Prof. Keene, sent for him and kept him so -long in his office that the recess was over before he was at liberty, -and half an hour before school was dismissed Clark, after a word with -Mr. Horton, left the room and did not return. - -So Hamlin, breaking away from half a dozen boys who surrounded him when -school was out, hurried after Freeman who was walking off alone. - -“What’s the matter with Clark? Why did he leave so early?” he asked, as -he overtook the little fellow. - -“I don’t know,” answered Freeman; then he added, speaking earnestly and -quickly, “You don’t believe that it was because he was afraid that he -didn’t fight Crawford, do you, Hamlin?” - -“Of course not,” was the quick reply. “I don’t believe in fighting any -more than Clark does, though I doubt if I should have had the moral -courage to do as he did and risk being called a coward.” - -“I’m to blame for it all. It was his standing up for me in class that -began it,” said Freeman, with a troubled face. - -“Don’t worry over that,” said Hamlin kindly. “I’ll stand by him, and I -know some of the other fellows will too.” - -“If you do, he won’t care much about the rest, I guess,” said Freeman, -who, like most of the younger boys, looked up to David Hamlin as a -model. He turned off presently at his own corner, and Hamlin walked on -alone, saying to himself, “I’ll run around and see Clark after supper.” - -But his kindly purpose was not destined to be carried out. When he -reached home he was met by his little brother with the announcement, -“Papa’s going to London to-morrow, and you’re going with him.” - -It was even so. Unexpected business made it necessary for Mr. Hamlin to -leave at this short notice, and it had been decided that David should -go with him, and so his seat in section D was vacant the next day, and -for many days after. - -Stanley Clark was the first boy in the school-room the next morning, -and he waited impatiently for the teacher’s appearance, as he wanted to -speak to him alone; but Mr. Horton was later than usual, and several -boys were in the room when he came in. Henderson’s seat was on the -front row, and he strained his ears to hear what Clark was saying, -but he only caught Mr. Horton’s reply, “You are sure that there is no -mistake about this, Clark?” and then, “Very well, I will attend to it -later.” - -Clark took his seat, and the morning recitations went on as usual till -just before the closing hour, when Mr. Horton ordered books put away -and the attention of the class given to him. The order was quickly -obeyed and all eyes turned toward him, while a most unusual silence -reigned. - -“It has come to my knowledge,” began Mr. Horton, “that some very -mean and contemptible methods have been employed in this class to -prevent scholars who are really anxious to do well from making perfect -recitations. If anything of this sort is done hereafter, I shall give -the offenders the severest possible punishment. The disorderly element -in this section shall be put down or put out of the school. In the -matter of scholarship I have no fault to find with you as a class, but -you are fast getting the reputation of being the roughest and most -disorderly section in the school. Surely there are some among you who -are, to say the least, too gentlemanly to be willing to have your -section so distinguished, and I call upon all such to see to it, that -you use all your influence in behalf of law and order, and do your -utmost to secure a different reputation for section D.” - -Many and various were the opinions expressed, as, school being -dismissed, the boys talked over the matter so forcibly presented to -them. Crawford’s face was dark with anger as he walked on discussing -with his “crowd” the teacher’s severe remarks. - -“I believe that sneaking Clark’s at the bottom of it,” he was saying -angrily; “he was hobnobbing with Horton before school, and I’ll bet a -cooky he put Bobby up to it.” - -“Of course he did,” added Henderson. “I heard Bobby say, ‘You’re sure -there’s no mistake about this, Clark?’ and then thank him for the -information he had given.” - -“Do you hear that, fellows?” cried Crawford. “That’s the sort of chap -Clark is. Couldn’t lower himself to fight, but he can lower himself to -tattle to Bobby.” - -“But, Crawford, it might have been something else he was talking about. -We don’t _know_ that he was tattling,” said a boy named Graham. - -“Know,” repeated Crawford impatiently. “As if there was any question -about it. I don’t believe there’s another fellow in the room who would -tell tales, and I move that we nip this thing in the bud, and put down -blabbing and tattling once for all.” - -“So say I,” shouted Henderson, while Graham cautiously inquired:-- - -“_How_ do you propose to put them down, Crawford?” - -“Make it so hot for the tattlers that they’ll get good and sick of it,” -replied Crawford savagely. - -“But how--tell us how.” - -Crawford looked from one to another of the group. - -“Henderson, you and Coyle and Green come around to my rooms this -evening, and we’ll fix this thing up,” he said, pointedly ignoring -Graham, and two or three who had kept silence. - -“Wonder what Crawford is up to now,” said one of these boys whom -Crawford had not named, dropping back a step or two. - -“Some scurvy trick, or other,” replied a second. “For my part, I’m sick -of him and his crowd. I believe I’ll side with law and order after -this.” - -“Don’t know but I’d better, too,” replied the first. “I’ve half a mind -to, anyhow.” - -“Do,” said the other quickly. “Let’s start in to-morrow and see how -many will join us.” - -“Pity Hamlin’s away. He’s a power when he takes hold of anything,” put -in Raleigh, the third boy. - -“So he is,” said Graham, “and I wish he was here too. The only trouble -with Hamlin is that he’s so full of fun that he gets to cutting up -before he stops to think--but he never does a mean thing.” - -“No, there’s nothing sneaky about Hamlin,” said Raleigh, as he turned -off towards his home. - - - - -CHAPTER III. SECTION D TAKEN BY SURPRISE. - - -If a bomb had exploded in the room, the pupils in section D could -hardly have been more astounded than they were a few days later, when, -after the opening exercises, Mr. Horton quietly remarked:-- - -“Every boy that owns a key to the algebra we use will please rise in -his seat.” - -There was a moment’s pause, then Freeman and two other boys arose. - -“Freeman,” said the teacher, “how do you use the key?” - -“I do the examples first, and then see if I have the correct answers. -If I have not, I keep trying till I get them,” said Freeman frankly, -but with a very red face. - -“Thank you,” said Mr. Horton. “You may be seated, boys. Now, I want -every other boy in the room who uses a key, whether it belongs to him -or not, to rise.” - -Nearly half the school stood then, and Mr. Horton’s keen eyes noted the -glances cast at some who did not rise, and read their meaning clearly. - -“That will do,” he said. Then he looked about the room slowly and -searchingly. - -“Clark,” he said, “you never use a key?” - -“No, sir,” was the quiet reply. - -“And you, Crawford?” - -“No, sir,” said Crawford promptly. - -The boys did not realize how much the teacher could read in their -faces. He read something in several faces as Crawford gave his positive -denial, and he thought to himself once more, “Crawford will bear -watching.” Then aloud he said:-- - -“I am sorry to find that so many have been using keys; but with those -of you who have frankly and honorably acknowledged it, I have no fault -to find, since I have never forbidden the use of them. I do forbid it -now, however, and I wish every key that any of you have here or at -home, handed to me to-morrow morning. If I find any boy making use of -one hereafter, I shall not let him off easily. Now take up your work.” - -At recess D section gave attention to nothing but the matter of the -keys. Those who had risen at Mr. Horton’s request were inclined to look -with scorn and contempt upon those who had used the keys, but had not -seen fit to acknowledge it. - -“I say, Crawford, you certainly were cheeky! You’ve used my key more -than I have myself, and you had the bluff to deny it,” said Barber. - -Crawford yawned with pretended indifference, then answered coolly:-- - -“’Twas none of Bobby’s business what I _had_ done. He said himself that -he’d never forbidden it.” - -“Humph!” said Barber, and turning, walked off to the other side of the -playground. - -Crawford had the grace to color a little at this, but he turned to -Henderson and shrugged his shoulders as he said, “Huffy--’cause I’ve -borrowed his key. He’ll get over it. But now see here--the thing I want -to know is, who put Bobby up to this dodge?” - -“Of course ’twasn’t any of the fellows that use the keys,” said -Henderson. - -“Right you are!” exclaimed Crawford, emphatically. “It was some -sneakin’ saint who never stains his holy fingers with such polluted -literature as algebra keys, and I don’t know anybody so likely to have -done it as Clark.” - -“Oh no,” cried one, “I don’t believe it was Clark.” - -“You don’t, hey! Well I do, then. It takes a coward to do a thing like -that.” - -“You always blame everything on Clark,” cried Freeman, “and I think -it’s mean of you, Crawford.” - -“_You_ think,” repeated Crawford, scornfully, then turning to the -others, he went on, “Who knows anything about Clark, anyhow? He only -entered the school this year. Does anybody know where he came from?” - -“I believe he only came to the city just before school opened. Isn’t -that so, Freeman?” said one. - -Freeman colored, and looked uncomfortable. - -“Yes,” he said. - -“Where’d he live before?” said Crawford. - -“In--in Albany,” stammered Freeman, flushing uneasily. - -Crawford looked at him sharply, then turned again to the others. - -“I believe it was Clark,” he repeated, “and it just makes one more -thing we’ve got to pay him off for. We’ve grounds enough now, Green, -for doing what we were talking over the other night.” - -Green hesitated, then said slowly, “I think we ought to have some proof -that Clark is to blame for this, first.” - -Crawford’s face darkened. He leaned over and whispered something in -Green’s ear--something unpleasant evidently, for Green shrank, and said -hastily, “Oh, well, if you’re so sure he did it, I’ll back you up, of -course. If he did it, he deserves all he’ll get.” - -“Yes, _if_ he did it. We know well enough he did it,” cried Crawford, -“and if the rest of you will let it pass, _I_ won’t.” - -“What you going to do about it?” asked another. - -“We’ll send Clark to Coventry for one thing. If I see any fellow -chumming with St. Clark after this, I shall know what to think of -him--that’s all.” - -One or two spoke a word in Clark’s behalf, but he had been so little -while among them, and was so grave and reserved that he had made no -friends. Hamlin had been strongly attracted to him, but Hamlin was so -bright and popular that he was always surrounded by a throng of boys, -and had seldom had the opportunity to see much of Clark. Freeman’s -mother and Clark’s mother were cousins, but the boys, having until -recently lived in different cities, had seldom met until Clark entered -the school. - -Now, the majority of the boys believed that Clark had shown the white -feather in refusing to fight Crawford, and cowardice is one of the -hardest things to forget or forgive. - -Hard days followed for Stanley Clark. The belief quickly gained ground -that he had informed Mr. Horton that keys were used in the class, and -this added to the cloud already resting upon him. Soon, not a boy in -the section spoke to him or noticed him except Freeman. Proud and -sensitive, Clark felt this keenly, and withdrew more and more into -himself. He would have remained in the school at recess, but this -was forbidden, so he was obliged to go out. He never stayed in the -playground, however, but spent the twenty minutes walking up and down -the sidewalk in front of the school. At first, Freeman used to join him -there, but after a little Clark sent him away. Freeman was hurt and -grieved at this, never guessing that his cousin was too generous to let -him fall under the shadow that rested on himself. - -So Freeman went more and more with the other boys as the days and weeks -went by. - -One day he was on his way home when Crawford overtook him, and to his -great surprise, instead of passing him with a rough word or a sneer as -usual, fell into step and walked on with him. - -“I say, Freeman,” he began, “I’ve been wanting to say a word to you. I -used you rather roughly a while ago.” - -“’Deed you did,” said Freeman coldly. - -“Yes, I acknowledge it, and I’m sorry for it. A fellow can’t say any -more than that--can he?” - -Freeman looked up in great surprise, half suspecting that Crawford was -trying to make game of him; but the big fellow was looking down at him -in a friendly fashion, and now held out his hand saying, “Shake hands -on it, boy, and let bygones be bygones, won’t you?” - -“Of course, if you really mean it,” said Freeman, hesitatingly giving -his hand. - -“To be sure I mean it, and to prove that I do, I’ll take you for a -drive to-morrow--if you’ll go. I’ve a jolly pair of ponies. What time -can you go?” - -“Why--any time, as to-morrow’s Saturday,” said Freeman, still doubting, -unable to understand this sudden change of manner. - -He thought of it again and again that evening, and finally talked it -over with Edith. - -“It’s the queerest thing,” he said; “I don’t yet believe that he really -meant it. Don’t believe he’ll come for me at all, to-morrow.” - -“I hope he won’t,” said Edith quickly; “I don’t want you to be friends -with such a fellow.” - -“Not much danger of that,” Ray answered, “but it’s better to have him -for a friend than for an enemy, isn’t it?” - -“I doubt that, Ray. You know what mother says, ‘You can’t handle pitch -without getting sticky fingers.’ From what I’ve gathered, Crawford is -pitch of a pretty bad sort.” - -“Well,” said Ray discontentedly, “I don’t see what I can do except go -with him to-morrow. It isn’t likely he’ll ever ask me again, and if he -does I needn’t go; but after I’ve accepted his invitation, he’d be mad -if I didn’t go this time.” - -“Y--es, I suppose so,” said Edith doubtfully; “but I just can’t bear -the thought of your being with such a fellow even for one drive, Ray.” -Crawford appeared promptly the next day at the hour appointed, and -though his talk with Edith had made Freeman uncomfortable, yet he could -not repress a thrill of very real pleasure, as the horses bore the -light carriage so swiftly through the wide, smooth streets. Crawford -exerted himself to be entertaining, and he could be _very_ entertaining -when he chose, and before the drive was over, Freeman wondered how he -could ever have considered his companion ugly and disagreeable. - -“I’ve had a jolly good time, Crawford,” he said heartily, as the -carriage stopped again at his own door. “Thank you ever so much for -taking me along.” - -“Glad you’ve enjoyed it,” replied Crawford. “We’ll repeat it some day -soon.” - -As he drove off, he chuckled and said to himself, “Little fool! ’Twill -be easy enough to get hold of him. And the innocent way the baby told -me about St. Clark. Oh my! If it wasn’t rich!” - -He drove around for Henderson, and told him what he had wormed out -of the unconscious Freeman, and the two put their heads together and -planned that which was to bring shame and deep sorrow upon Clark. - -As to Freeman, he was so loud in his praises of Crawford and his -kindness, that Edith began to wonder if she could have misjudged him, -and to think that it might have been merely thoughtlessness and boyish -roughness after all, instead of meanness and cruelty, as she had -thought, that had made him treat her brother so. - -Freeman looked at Crawford doubtfully when he saw him at school -on Monday. Even yet, he could not feel quite sure that his new -friendliness would be lasting, but Crawford called out a gay greeting -and summoned him to join the group about him, and the others followed -Crawford’s lead, wondering somewhat at this sudden friendliness towards -“little Freeman,” but ready enough to take him in; and he, flattered -by Crawford’s notice, and always too ready to follow, soon began to be -counted in as one of “Crawford’s crowd.” - -One morning a week or two later, Crawford and Henderson were the -first to enter the class-room. After a hasty glance around, Crawford -exclaimed, “You stay here at the door, Henderson, to see that nobody -comes.” - -Whatever Crawford had to do was quickly accomplished, and he and -Henderson were lounging in the hall, when the other boys began to come -in, and all went into D class-room together, where, perched on desks -and backs of chairs, they dropped into lively conversation. - -“Come on up here, Hendy. What are you sitting off there for?” called -Crawford, for Henderson had taken the seat nearest the door, where he -could see any one approaching. - -“I’m waiting for Coyle,” he replied, without turning his head. - -“Oh, Coyle’s always half an hour behind time. He’ll be late at his own -funeral if he don’t look out,” cried Green. - -“Say, Green--got your examples done?” asked Crawford, glancing at the -clock and keeping an eye on Henderson. - -“No, plague it! Bobby gave us a double dose yesterday, an’ it takes -such a time to prove ’em all.” - -“If we only had the keys now, ’twouldn’t take half so long,” grumbled -Barber. - -At this moment Henderson coughed, and Crawford, whose back was towards -the door, called out loudly, “Well, I say it’s no fair to take away -algebra keys and let the Latin class keep their ponies. Clark and some -others wouldn’t get the marks they do if Bobby should make a raid on -their ponies.” - -“Sh-sh-sh” went around the group, and Henderson strolled carelessly -back to his own seat as Mr. Horton entered the room. - -The other boys looked inquiringly at the teacher, wondering how much he -had overheard, but they could gather nothing from his face. They were -not left long in doubt, however, for, as soon as the opening exercises -were over, he said:-- - -“When, a short time ago, I called for all the algebra keys, I supposed -that I had put an end to the use of helps of that sort, but from a -remark that I overheard as I entered the school-room this morning, I am -obliged to believe that I have been mistaken. I will give you the same -opportunity that I gave on the previous occasion, and ask every boy who -has, or who uses, any translation or other such help in preparing his -Latin to rise.” - -As Mr. Horton ceased speaking, one boy rose. There was a ripple of -laughter, for this boy--Vale--was the dullard of the class, but the -teacher’s stern voice quickly checked the merriment. - -“You may be seated, Vale,” he said. “And now I wish all the members of -the Latin class, except Vale, to come forward.” - -His order being obeyed, he left his seat, and, walking down the aisles, -looked into the desks of all except Vale. Four faces were full of -dismay as he passed from desk to desk, but only one was turned toward -him in blank surprise as he returned to his seat with five books in his -hands. - -“Barber, Green, Hopkins, Cox and Clark, remain where you are. The -others may return to their seats,” he said. - -Then he looked at the five boys before him with mingled sorrow and -sternness. - -“Boys,” he said, “I am terribly disappointed in you. It is bad enough -to find that you have been resorting to such methods to avoid work and -secure high marks, but you have added to your guilt by deliberately -lying about it. I had thought better of you than this.” - -As he paused, Clark, whose face had shown strong emotion, stepped -forward and said: “Mr. Horton, did you find one of those books in my -desk?” - -There was a touch of contempt in the teacher’s voice as he replied:-- - -“I did, sir, and I hope you will not lower yourself further by useless -protestations.” - -“Mr. Horton,” said the boy very quietly, “I should be doing wrong if I -did not declare that I have never used any help in preparing my Latin -except the notes in the book itself. I never saw the book you have -there, and do not know how it came in my desk.” - -Somebody hissed then, but Mr. Horton promptly checked the demonstration. - -“You can hardly expect me to believe you, Clark, with the evidence I -have here,” he said, pointing to the fly-leaf of the book, on which -were the letters “S. C.” Part of the leaf was torn out, leaving only -those two letters. - -The look of bewildered surprise in Clark’s eyes turned to one of proud -disdain as he saw those letters, and he did not open his lips again, -not even when Mr. Horton said:-- - -“I shall give every one of you five a failure for each Latin -recitation during the past week, and for the remainder of the month -I wish each of you to write at the top of your Latin exercises these -words.” He wrote rapidly on the blackboard:-- - -“Lying lips are an abomination.” - -The other four went to their seats with red faces and shamed eyes, -but Clark’s face was very white, and his eyes were proudly uplifted, -as if he dared his schoolmates to believe him guilty, in spite of the -evidence against him. - -“He doesn’t act guilty,” thought Mr. Horton uneasily, as he looked at -the boy. “I wonder if it is possible that he is innocent.” - -“St. Clark won’t be in good odor for a while to come,” chuckled -Henderson on the playground at recess, glancing with malicious eyes at -the lonely boy pacing up and down the sidewalk. - -“I don’t believe he used that pony, anyhow,” said Freeman. “He didn’t -need to use it, for he had read Cicero long before he ever came here. -It’s just review to him.” - -“Hush up, you!” exclaimed Henderson hastily. “If it’s review to him, -he’s no business to be marked higher than the rest of us who never took -it before. Hold your tongue, youngster, if you know when you’re well -off.” He whispered the last sentence in Freeman’s ear. - -“Yes, yes, keep quiet, boy,” said Crawford; and in a lower tone he -added, “Don’t you fret. He’ll come out all right enough.” - -But in his heart Crawford was thinking, “He won’t come out all right if -I can prevent it, and I think I can.” - - - - -CHAPTER IV. A BLOW FOR CLARK. - - -“Mr. Horton, can we have the use of this room for an hour or so after -school to-day?” - -It was Gordon who asked the question. - -“We including--?” said Mr. Horton, inquiringly. - -“All the section, I hope,” answered Gordon. “Some of us, Mr. Horton, -have made up our minds that there has got to be a change in D section. -We don’t like the reputation that we are getting.” - -“I am very glad to hear you say so, Gordon,” said Mr. Horton earnestly. -“I feel deeply ashamed of it myself, and have been giving most serious -thought to the matter for some time past. But if you boys will set -yourselves to work in real earnest, you can accomplish far more than is -possible for me.” - -“I don’t know, sir, how much we shall be able to accomplish,” said -Gordon, “but some of us are bound to try. The trouble is, that there -are in our section so many that don’t care anything about their -standing either in their studies or in deportment. All they seem to -think about is having a good time. We’ve been talking the matter over, -Graham, Sherman and I, and we’re afraid that we can’t get a majority -to act with us.” - -“I hope you will find yourselves mistaken about that,” said Mr. Horton, -“and that more than half the class will be ready to join you at once. -Certainly, you can use this room; but, of course, you must be very -quiet and orderly in your discussions.” - -“We’ll do our best, sir,” said Gordon, as he turned away and began to -distribute slips of paper, laying one on each desk. - -Mr. Horton picked one up. It read:-- - - “You are requested to attend a class meeting in this room at 2.15 - this afternoon, for the discussion of matters of great importance to - every member of the class. - - “Fred Gordon. - Alec. Graham. - Ralph Sherman.“ - -These notices awakened the liveliest interest and curiosity, and not -one boy left the room when school was over, while Mr. Horton departed -promptly that there might be no delay in the business of the hour. The -door had barely closed behind him when the room was in an uproar, many -voices calling upon Gordon, Graham and Sherman to know what was up. - -Gordon, having tried in vain to make himself heard amid the din, seized -a ruler and rapped on his desk, and having thus gained attention for a -second, he sprang up on his seat and began rapidly:-- - -“If you’ll just keep quiet a minute or so, I’ll tell you why this -meeting was called. You all know that section D does not bear a very -high reputation, but perhaps you don’t all know what a _very_ bad name -we have gained, not only in the school, but outside of it.” - -“Oh, rats!” called out Henderson; but Green said, “Hush up, Hendy. -Let’s hear what the good little boy’s got to say. We can sit down on -him easy enough after he gets through preaching.” - -Gordon went on, “I heard a gentleman--one of the prominent business men -in town--say the other day, that ‘such a set of young toughs as seemed -to be collected in section D would be a disgrace to any school,’ and -a lady that my mother knows, refused to allow a boy belonging to this -section to be introduced to her daughters. Now _I_ think that we’ve -all reason to be ashamed of our record when people talk that way about -us, and what is more, the school board has taken the matter up, and -is determined to have a change here. So you see we’ve _got_ to behave -ourselves anyhow, and so why not take matters into our own hands and do -it of our own accord without waiting till we’re forced into it?” - -“Oh, shucks! I’d like to see anybody _force me_ to do anything I don’t -want to do,” said Crawford. - -“Or me, either,” said Henderson. - -“Oh, well--if you _want_ to be suspended or dismissed from the school -for good, I’ve no doubt that can soon and easily be brought about,” -said Gordon. - -“They ain’t agoin’ to suspend fifteen or twenty boys, an’ don’t you -believe it,” said Coyle. - -“’Specially when those fifteen or twenty belong to the brightest -section in the school,” added another boy. - -“Small thanks to you for that,” retorted Graham, at which there was a -general laugh, the speaker being by no means a brilliant scholar. - -He joined in the laugh, saying lazily, “Oh well, the rest of you do -poling enough without me.” - -“But we’re losing ground even in scholarship,” put in Sherman, “another -section beat us last quarter, and a girl’s section at that.” - -“Oh well, we don’t grudge the pretty dears a few marks,” supplementing -his remarks with a coarse laugh, and a word or two that made more than -one boy’s cheeks burn. - -“There, fellows!” cried Gordon, turning to a group near him, “_that’s_ -the kind of thing that has brought our section down so low. It isn’t -just fun, or even carelessness and disorder. It is low, filthy talk, -and the oaths that some of us use so constantly, that make everybody so -down on us, and I don’t wonder at it.” - -“Pretty little boy! Does his mammy know he’s out?” said Henderson, -tauntingly. - -“’Course she does. He’s still tied to her apron-string,” put in Coyle. - -“I suppose you think such talk is very smart,” said Gordon, trying hard -to look undisturbed, “but I think we are all old enough to begin to -act like gentlemen, to say the least, and some of us mean to show that -we _are_ gentlemen. We are going to form a law and order society, and -elect a president and secretary, and see what we can do to make our -section one to be proud of.” - -“Suppose one of our crowd should get the most votes for president,” -queried Crawford, “what then?” - -“I’m perfectly willing one of your crowd should be president, provided -he will pledge himself to forward the objects of the society,” said -Gordon, as he pulled a book from his desk, and opening it, added, “A -few of us who feel pretty deeply on this subject have drawn up a rough -pledge which every member joining our association must sign--and keep.” - -“Go ahead, Deacon, read it out,” called Henderson. - -“Yes, stand up like a little man and read right out,” added Crawford; -and Gordon read:-- - -“We, the undersigned deeply regretting that our section has gained -such an undesirable reputation, do pledge ourselves to do all in our -power to maintain order in school hours, and to raise the standard of -scholarship, of conduct and of conversation in section D.” - -To this ten names were affixed--including Gordon, Graham and Sherman. - -“You must think we are all fools if you believe we’re going to tie -ourselves up like that,” shouted Henderson with his coarse laugh as -Gordon finished reading. - -“A fellow wants a little fun even in school,” said another. - -“Might as well join the church, an’ done with it, as to sign that -thing,” said Green. - -“Boys,” cried Gordon, trying to make himself heard above the clamor of -voices, “I know there are some, whose names are not here, who will join -us. Please come on and sign now--all who will--and then we’ll withdraw -to some place where we can talk this thing over quietly.” - -Six other boys signed their names amid taunts and jeers from Crawford -and his cronies. - -“Now there are sixteen of us,” said Gordon, “and as there are forty in -the section, we lack four of half. I don’t believe that all the rest -want to be counted in as opposed to what we all know is right.” - -Clark had listened silently to all that had been said. He was heartily -in sympathy with Gordon, and wanted much to add his name, but he -hesitated, uncertain whether, even in such a case as this, he would -be welcome. But he could not endure to be counted in with such fellows -as Crawford and Henderson, and so he rose and took the pen to sign his -name. - -“Hello!” cried Crawford quickly, “St. Clark among the law-givers, eh!” - -Clark’s face flushed, but he said nothing. - -Then Henderson shouted, “He’s a fine one to be setting up for an -example, he--the son of a thief who’d be behind the bars this moment if -he hadn’t absconded with his pickings.” - -Instantly every voice was hushed and every eye turned on Clark. His -face grew deadly white, and the pen dropped from his fingers. He turned -towards Henderson and tried to speak, but no sound came from his lips, -and in another instant he had turned and rushed from the room. - -“Henderson, is that true?” demanded Gordon sternly, as the door closed -behind Clark. - -For once, Henderson absolutely looked ashamed of himself, and his -manner was much less blustering than usual, as he said sulkily, “Yes, -’tis. His father is that Albany fellow who had to leave the country -because he had used trust-funds.” - -“Well,” exclaimed Gordon, “I don’t care if it is true, it was a -contemptibly mean thing for you to blurt it out like that before the -whole class. How would you like it if it was your father?” - -“My father is a gentleman,” said Henderson, drawing himself up proudly. - -“That’s more than can be said for his son,” muttered Sherman with a -glance of disgust at Henderson’s coarse face; “I shouldn’t think Clark -would ever want to come into this school-room again.” - -“Small loss if he didn’t. We don’t want sons of convicts here,” said a -hot-headed Georgian. - -“Don’t say that, Lee,” said Gordon. “For my part, I’m right down sorry -for Clark. He can’t help what his father has done, and isn’t to blame -for it, and yet he’s got to have it thrown up at him all his life.” - -“Reckon he’s got some of the same blood in his veins. They say if a -fellow will lie he’ll steal too, and Clark came mighty near lying over -that Latin business,” said a boy who had not before spoken. - -“Don’t know about that,” quickly responded a little fellow named Reed. - -Crawford looked up hastily at that, but Reed was not looking at him, -and he said nothing. - -Finally, three more boys signed their names, making nineteen in all, -and then Gordon courteously requested those who were not willing -to sign, to leave the room, which, after some noise, and not a few -disagreeable remarks, they did. Then a vote was taken which resulted in -a large majority for Gordon as president, Graham as vice-president, and -Sherman as secretary. - -“It’s a pity we haven’t two more, then we’d have more than half the -class,” said one, as they left the room. - -“Hamlin will be back next month; he’ll be on our side,” said Graham. - -“Hamlin? Why he’s the biggest monkey in the class,” laughed another. - -“Oh, he’s full of jokes and monkey shines, I know,” returned Graham, -“but there isn’t a mean streak in him, and you never knew him to deny -it if he had cut up any caper.” - -“That’s so. He’s true blue every time” added Gordon. - -“There’s little Freeman--he was absent to-day. Think he’ll sign?” asked -Graham. - -“Doubtful,” said Gordon; “he’s getting pretty thick with Crawford’s -crowd lately--more’s the pity. He used to be rather a nice little chap.” - -“He and Clark are related, aren’t they?” questioned one. - -“I believe somebody said they were,” answered Graham. “I did feel right -down sorry for Clark to-day,” he added. - -“So did I,” said Sherman. “He looked as if he had had an awful blow -when he left the room.” - -“I say--can’t we be a little more decent to him?” suggested Gordon. -“We’ve been sending him to Coventry with a vengeance. I don’t believe -a fellow in the class ever speaks to him now, except Freeman.” - -“I wouldn’t be hired to come to school if I were cold-shouldered in -such a fashion,” said Raleigh. - -“If it wasn’t for that Latin business I’d stand by Clark after this,” -said Graham. - -“I never could get over his taking that blow so meekly from Crawford,” -said another. - -“Meekly!” echoed Gordon, “Were you there when that thing happened?” - -“No, some of the fellows told me about it.” - -“Well, if they told you that Clark took that blow meekly, they -lied--that’s all! I was standing close by, and I saw the whole thing. -When Crawford struck him, Clark’s eyes fairly blazed, and he grabbed -Crawford’s wrists, and I thought he was going to lay him out sure. I -know he could have done it, but he just held himself in, and the next -minute he flung Crawford’s hands away from him and ran up the stairs as -if he did not dare to trust himself within reach of that hound.” - -“Meaning Crawford?” said a listener. - -“Meaning Crawford. He and Henderson are not fit to be among decent -fellows, in my opinion.” - -“That’s an entirely new version of the fracas between Clark and -Henderson,” said the one to whom Gordon had spoken, “and puts another -face on that affair; but how about his informing about the algebra -keys? Henderson says he heard him talking to Bobby about it.” - -“Henderson!” repeated Gordon scornfully. “Don’t quote Henderson to me! -Such a foul-mouthed cad as he is, is a disgrace to any school. I’ll -admit that I’ve never caught him in a lie, but all the same I haven’t -an atom of confidence in him, and I don’t think Clark or anybody else -ought to be condemned on no stronger evidence than his word.” - -“I don’t know but you’re right,” was the reply, “but I doubt if Clark -comes back at all. I wouldn’t if I were in his place.” - -But Clark did go back; to the surprise of many of the boys he was in -his seat as usual the next morning; he might have been the only boy in -the room, however, for all the attention he paid to his classmates. - -Several of them, feeling that he had been hardly used, and not feeling -at all sure that he deserved all the blame that had fallen upon him, -were inclined to make advances, but he met them with a coldness that -repelled the most friendly, and after one or two such rebuffs they left -him again alone. Not one of them could begin to understand the bitter -agony of his proud young soul, and the unspeakable mortification he -suffered continually through the father of whom he had once been so -proud. - -The law and order society met regularly once a week after this, and -its influence soon began to be felt, even though it worked against -heavy odds, for those who had not joined seemed determined to do all -in their power to lessen its influence and to maintain the undesirable -reputation that the section had already acquired. On the other hand, -the members of the new society, realizing the fact that so many -were working against them, were impelled to do their utmost for the -improvement of their class record. The result was that the nineteen -members soon showed a marked improvement in scholarship, while their -orderly and gentlemanly deportment was in striking contrast to the -rough, turbulent behavior of the other half of the class. - - - - -CHAPTER V. HAMLIN RETURNS. - - -“Well, Hamlin, are you holding a reception? I’m sure we are all very -glad to see you back again,” said Mr. Horton, as he entered the -school-room one morning and found Hamlin the center of a merry, noisy -group. - -“It’s no wonder he’s a favorite. That smile of his is enough to win -anybody,” the teacher thought, as from his seat at the desk he glanced -again and again at the constantly increasing group about Hamlin; but at -a stroke of the bell the group dissolved as if by magic, and each boy -dropped into his own seat. - -At recess Hamlin was seized almost bodily and hurried off to the -playground. Clark had obtained permission to stay in that day, and -Mr. Horton chanced to glance towards him just in time to note the -expression on his face as he looked after Hamlin and the eager crowd -that bore him away. As they disappeared Clark sighed, and opening his -book, began to read. - -A hand upon his shoulder made him start and glance up in surprise. Mr. -Horton was standing at his side looking down at him. - -“Clark,” he said, “I have come to the conclusion that I wronged you -when I doubted your explanation about the translation I found in your -desk.” - -“Yes, sir, you did,” said Clark; “I told you the truth.” - -“I believe you did, Clark, and I ask your pardon for doubting you,” -said Mr. Horton, holding out his hand. - -There was a lump in the boy’s throat and his eyes were hot as he took -the offered hand, but he did not speak--he could not at that moment. - -“I know no more about the matter, my boy, than I did that day,” Mr. -Horton went on, “but I have been watching you ever since, and I believe -that you can be trusted.” - -“Thank you, sir,” said Clark, the first smile that his teacher had seen -on his face for many a day flitting across it as he spoke. It was gone -in a moment. It seemed as if his lips had almost forgotten how to smile. - -“Have you any idea how the book got into your desk, Clark?” - -“I have an idea, but it may be a mistaken one, and I would rather say -nothing about it,” Clark replied in a low voice. - -“You have not made many friends in the school, have you?” asked Mr. -Horton after a moment’s silence. - -“No, sir--none.” - -“Why?” - -“I don’t quite know why it was so at first, but now--now I don’t wonder -at it.” Clark spoke the last words so low that his teacher had to bend -his head to catch them. - -“I would like a talk with you, my boy. Can you come to my house this -evening?” he asked presently. - -“I am not at liberty until nine o’clock,” Clark answered. - -“Not any evening?” said Mr. Horton in a tone of surprise. - -“No, sir--except Sunday. I take notes in shorthand every evening from -six to nine.” - -“You don’t have very much time for study, then?” - -“No, not very much; but I don’t have to spend very much time on the -Latin, as I have read Cicero before.” - -“Indeed? Then I see you did not need any notes for it.” - -“No, sir. I used to go to a private classical school, and most of my -time was given to languages and history.” - -“Ah, yes. Well, you have had two study-hours to-day; what lessons have -you now to prepare for to-morrow?” - -“I’ve very little to do--just a bit of work in English literature.” - -“Very well, then, can’t you walk home with me after school?” - -Clark assented, and the teacher returned to his seat as the bell rang -and the boys trooped noisily up the stairs. - -In the long talk that Mr. Horton had with Clark that afternoon, he -learned the bitter secret in regard to his father--now, alas, a secret -no longer--and felt his heart go out to the lad who was bearing so -heavy a burden on his brave young shoulders. - -“You would be sure to hear it after a while, Mr. Horton,” Clark had -said, “and I’d rather tell it to you myself just as it is.” - -“And that is why you and your mother came here to live,” said the -teacher, voice and eyes full of sympathy he knew not how to speak. - -“Yes, sir. An old friend of mother’s got this place for me. I’d learned -stenography just because I liked it, not expecting ever to use it to -earn my living.” - -“And has your mother no means?” questioned Mr. Horton gently. - -“No, sir,” he said. “She gave up every dollar of her own private means, -and if I live, every penny that was lost thro’ my father shall be -repaid, if it takes me a lifetime to do it.” - -“Clark,” said Mr. Horton, “I am proud of you. No danger but you -will succeed, only,” he laid his hand kindly across the lad’s -shoulders--“only you must not allow yourself to grow morbid under it. -Remember you are responsible for no one’s wrong-doing but your own. -Keep that in mind, and don’t let any chance reference or intentional -fling embitter you, or turn you against others. Remember that they can -judge only by what they see, and they see but little of the truth.” - -“It’s done me no end of good to talk with you, Mr. Horton. It’s a great -deal to me to feel that you trust me,” and Clark’s voice would tremble -a little, as he added, “I shan’t feel so alone now. You see I’ve had -no one to talk to--for of course I couldn’t let mother know how things -went at school. She has enough to bear without any worries on my -account.” - -“There goes a young hero, if there ever was one,” the teacher said to -himself as he looked after the tall lad going down the street a little -later. “I must try to find some way to make it pleasanter for him at -school. I’ll talk to Hamlin about it, the first chance I get.” - -It was not long before he made the opportunity, and the few words he -felt at liberty to say awakened in David Hamlin a very strong interest -in his schoolmate. - -Hamlin had already become a member of the law and order society, though -he grumblingly declared that he thought it was a shame to make him -promise to give up all his fun. - -A few days after this, Clark happened to be a little later than usual -in getting off to school, and rushing out of his doorway, ran plump -into a lad who was standing in the vestibule. - -“I beg your pardon,” he said hastily, and would have hurried on, but -the other held out his hand, saying:-- - -“Well, now, if that isn’t a friendly greeting for a fellow that’s been -standing here twenty minutes waiting for you! Do you always come out of -your front door in such a boomerang style as that?” - -“No,” said Clark with a laugh, as he took Hamlin’s offered hand. “I’m -not often so late.” - -The two walked on together, and in spite of himself, Clark’s proud -reserve melted under the sunny friendliness of his companion. Hamlin -would not be held off. He persisted in talking as if Clark was “in the -swim” of school doings, just as he himself was, and Clark did not know -how to undeceive him. - -“I didn’t see you at the L. A. O. meeting yesterday,” he remarked as -they walked on. L. A. O. was short for law and order society. - -“I’m not a member,” said Clark, coldly. - -“What! You, the most orderly fellow in the section, not a member of -that society!” exclaimed Hamlin. “Why not?” - -“They didn’t want me,” said Clark. - -“Didn’t want you? Oh, come, now, you can’t make me believe that. Why, I -thought every fellow in the room was in the L. A. O. or the Antis.” - -“Anti? I hadn’t heard of that. Do you mean that the Crawford crowd has -organized an opposition to the L. A. O.?” asked Clark. - -“Just that; and I heard Henderson boasting that they’d got half the -class on their roll.” - -“They haven’t my name,” said Clark. - -“Of course I knew that,” said Hamlin, “but they’ve got some fellows -that I wouldn’t have believed would join such a gang--little Freeman, -for instance. I always thought he was such a nice little chap, and now -he’s thick as thieves with Crawford.” - -“What!” exclaimed Clark, stopping short in amazement, “Freeman thick -with Crawford! Why, I thought he couldn’t endure the fellow.” - -“That’s what I thought, but Freeman’s ’round with that crowd every -recess, and I saw him out driving with Crawford yesterday.” - -“I hadn’t an idea of it. That must be stopped,” said Clark with a -troubled face. “Crawford’s no kind of a fellow for a little chap like -Ray to be with.” - -“You’re right, there,” responded Hamlin. “I wouldn’t have my little -brother ’round with such a fellow for a good deal.” - -They had reached the school by this time, and Hamlin had only time to -say, “I shall propose your name at the next meeting of the L. A. O. We -need your help against the Antis.” - -The Antis were primed for mischief that day. Before the opening -exercises were over, Mr. Horton knew that there was a hard day before -him. The spirit of rebellion was abroad in the air. His orders were -obeyed, but slowly and reluctantly, as if under protest. There was a -continual shuffling of feet, knocking of books against desks, dropping -of pencils, and a buzzing and murmuring here, there, and everywhere, -impossible to locate, yet plainly distinguishable. The L. A. O.’s were -orderly and attentive, every one, but the others did their utmost to -keep them from making perfect recitations by coughing, laughing, and -interrupting as much as they dared. Finally, Mr. Horton sent Crawford -to the board to work out a problem. Crawford was very quick when he -chose to be. To-day he pretended to be uncertain about his work and put -down the figures very slowly. Mr. Horton had taken his stand in the -back of the room, the better to watch the unruly ones. Unfortunately, -he was very short-sighted, and Crawford took advantage of this fact. He -had considerable artistic ability, and could make a likeness with half -a dozen strokes, and he could use his right and left hands with equal -facility. - -So, as with his left hand he slowly worked out the problem, with his -right he drew sketches of Mr. Horton on the board, carefully keeping -his own broad shoulders between his work and the teacher. In one -sketch, Mr. Horton was represented with a pipe in his mouth, in another -with his hair à la Pompadour, and again he had the tonsure of a monk, -and so on. - -Mr. Horton, standing at the back of the room, tried in vain to discover -what was causing so much merriment. At last, suspecting that Crawford -was at the bottom of it, he suddenly called out, “Stand aside, -Crawford, and let me see your work.” - -Crawford obeyed, but as he did so he swept the eraser across his last -artistic effort. He had to do it so hurriedly, however, that enough -remained to show what had been there, and as the teacher returned to -the platform, he saw how Crawford had been amusing himself and the -class. - -“Crawford,” he said, “you will have a failure for this recitation.” - -“I solved the problem you gave me correctly,” said Crawford. - -“I know you did,” said Mr. Horton. - -“Well then,” persisted Crawford, “I don’t see why I should have a -failure.” - -“If you have anything more to say you can come to me after school,” -said Mr. Horton. - -“I call that right down mean,” said Crawford, in a tone that all about -him could hear, “and I won’t stand much more such treatment.” - -“Crawford, you may go to Professor Keene’s office,” said Mr. Horton, -gravely. - -Muttering something half aloud, Crawford arose and swaggered across -the room, turning at the door to make an elaborate bow, first to Mr. -Horton and then to the class. He did not go to the office, however, but -straight to his rooms, where he ordered his ponies brought around, and -then driving back to the school, sent in a note to Henderson. - -Henderson read it, and then passing it to Coyle, he went to the desk -and said, “Mr. Horton, I’ve just had word that my father has been taken -suddenly ill. Can I be excused?” - -Mr. Horton looked at him sharply, but Henderson’s face was grave and -troubled, and after a moment’s hesitation, he said, “Yes, you may go.” - -He did not see the wink and grimace with which Henderson favored his -classmates as he turned away and left the room. - -Two minutes later, he was seated beside Crawford, and the horses were -bearing them swiftly along, while they chuckled over the neat way in -which they had “done old Bobby.” - -“Now the ringleaders are out of the way, I hope there will be no more -disturbance to-day,” thought the teacher; but his hope was not destined -to be realized. - -As the door closed behind Henderson, somebody snapped a marble up to -the ceiling. As it dropped, it struck Raleigh’s glasses. He started up -with the blood streaming from his face where a sliver of glass had cut -it. - -“Who threw that marble?” said Mr. Horton in a tone that none of them -had ever heard from his lips before. Then, as no one answered, he -stepped quickly to Raleigh’s side. “Did any of the glass go in your -eyes?” he asked anxiously. - -“No, sir, I think not,” answered Raleigh, putting his handkerchief up -to his cheek, which was bleeding quite freely. - -“Come with me to the dressing-room, Raleigh, and Hamlin, you may take -charge of the room until I return,” said Mr. Horton, still in that -stern tone that boded ill for the one who had caused the trouble. - -The room was very quiet while Mr. Horton was absent. When he returned, -having sent Raleigh home, he said slowly, “I call upon the boy who -threw the marble that injured Raleigh to stand.” - -He waited, amid a silence that could almost be felt, but no one moved. - -“I understand, of course, that whoever did it, had no intention of -injuring anyone. It was simply a piece of the thoughtlessness and -lawlessness that prevail in this section, but I intend to find out who -is to blame in this instance. Once more--I ask the boy who threw that -marble to rise.” - -Still no one moved, and the stern look deepened in the teacher’s eyes. - -“I am very sorry that he has not manliness enough to acknowledge -frankly what he has done. There are some boys in the class that I -_know_ are above suspicion. With the exception of these, I shall ask -each one separately. - -“Green, did you throw that marble?” - -“No, sir,” said Green. - -“Do you know who threw it?” - -“I do not.” - -From seat to seat Mr. Horton passed, asking these two questions of each -boy. In every case the answer was the same. Hamlin, Graham, Clark, -Gordon and Raleigh were among the boys of whom the questions were not -asked. - -Mr. Horton returned to his seat, and the boys waited breathlessly for -what should follow. Without another word he dismissed the class, asking -the members of the L. A. O. to remain. He looked surprised as Clark -passed out with the Antis, and said to Graham, “Isn’t Clark a member of -your society?” - -“No, sir,” Graham answered; and Hamlin added quickly, “I want him to -join, and I’m almost sure he wants to. There’s not a fellow in the -class that keeps the rules as he does.” - -“None better, I am sure,” said Mr. Horton; then he added, “I want -to say to you that I have noticed with much pleasure a very decided -improvement in the class since your society was formed. I believe that -every one of you is doing his best in respect to studies, and in trying -to raise the general standard of the class. This has been a very trying -day to me, but if, as I hope, Raleigh’s eyes have escaped injury, this -affair may, in the end, prove a blessing in disguise, for I am sure -that some of the lawless ones have been pretty thoroughly frightened, -and perhaps you can persuade some of them to join with you after this. -I hope so, I am sure. When I discover the boy who threw that marble -to-day, I shall make an example of him. If he had confessed, I would -not have been hard on him, but he has aggravated his fault by lying -about it, and a lie is, to me, next to unpardonable. It is one of -the hardest things for me to overlook. I have hope of a boy if he is -truthful, even though he has a host of other faults. Now, boys, if I -can help you in any way about your association, I shall be most glad -to do so. My hope for section D is in you.” - -“Bobby’s first-class. I like him,” said Hamlin, as the boys walked -homeward together. - -“So he is,” said Gordon, “but I tell you what, boys, the L. A. O.’s -have a big contract on their hands.” - -“To put down the Crawford gang, you mean?” said Hamlin. - -“Yes, I believe they grow worse and worse.” - -“So they do,” assented Graham. “Have you any idea who threw that -marble?” - -“It was somebody down in Freeman’s neighborhood,” said Gordon. - -“Likely as not ’twas Freeman himself. He’s getting to be as bad as any -of ’em,” remarked another. - -“Pity, too--I hate to see a fellow change as he has,” said Hamlin. “Why -not try to get him into the L. A. O.?” - -“Don’t believe you can do it. He’s awfully set up because Crawford -makes so much of him now. I see them out driving together often,” said -Sherman. - -“Queer, too--shouldn’t think a fellow like Crawford would want a little -chap ’round with him so much,” said Gordon. - -“Shouldn’t think Freeman’s folks would like it, if they know of it,” -said another. - -“Well, boys, I turn off here. Don’t forget the meeting of the L. A. O. -to-morrow. Something’s got to be done,” said Gordon. - -“And the question is--what?” added Hamlin. - -And that question was often in the minds of them all through the next -twenty-four hours. - - - - -CHAPTER VI. UNPLEASANT FOR CRAWFORD AND HENDERSON. - - -Crawford’s mother had died before he was five years old. His father -outlived her but a few months, and by the father’s will his lawyer, who -was also an old friend, was appointed guardian to the child and trustee -of the large property to which the boy was heir. - -This lawyer, Mr. Chase, was a scrupulously honorable man, but he was a -very busy one, and, being a bachelor, knew little about the bringing up -of a boy. - -At six, Crawford was sent to boarding-school. His bills were -promptly paid, and, from the time he was ten, he received a liberal -allowance--far too liberal for his own good. His vacations were spent -at school or at some gay summer resort, and he was allowed to do pretty -much as he pleased, provided he did not run in debt. So that it was -not to be wondered at that the boy had grown up wild and selfish and -brutal. He had never had a home since he could remember, and thus far -in life he had found that money would secure about everything that he -wanted. - -Once or twice his guardian had remonstrated with him mildly about his -low standing in his classes, or the reports of idleness and mischievous -behavior in the school-room, but his private opinion was, “Boys will be -boys, and he’ll settle down and be steady enough, after a while.” - -It was at Crawford’s own request that he had been sent to the high -school. The first year he had gotten on fairly well, but this second -year his conduct had been so unsatisfactory, that Mr. Horton and -Professor Keene had both written to Mr. Chase, and that gentleman had -at last come to the conclusion that he must have a serious talk with -his ward. - -So, desirous to have it over as soon as possible, he went to Crawford’s -rooms the next day after the trouble in section D. He found the boy -stretched out in a big easy-chair, a cigarette in his mouth and a novel -in his hand. - -“Faugh!” the lawyer exclaimed in a tone of disgust, as Crawford sprang -up; “do throw away that vile-smelling thing. A good cigar is bad -enough, but how anybody can abide the smell of cigarettes, is more than -I can understand.” - -Crawford tossed the objectionable roll into the grate, as he said, with -a laugh, “Pity you don’t smoke, sir. You don’t know how much you miss.” - -“Pity you _do_, I should say,” replied Mr. Chase, sternly. “You’ll ruin -your health and spoil your brains if you don’t stop it. In short, my -boy, I’ve come to the conclusion that it’s high time for you to turn -over a new leaf. I am not at all pleased with the reports I have from -your teachers.” - -“Oh, you know, then,” exclaimed Crawford, in a tone of relief. - -“Know what? That you’ve been idling away your time and playing silly -tricks here, as you have at the other schools you’ve attended? George, -there must be an end of this. You are not a little boy any longer. Here -you are seventeen--nearly eighteen years old--almost a man. It is time -that you showed some ambition, and set to work to make something of -yourself.” - -Crawford laughed lazily and indifferently, as he asked:-- - -“Did you get a note from Keene, to-day?” - -“No,” said Mr. Chase, briefly. - -“Well, you will to-morrow then, and I’ll tell you beforehand, the -contents of it. Prof. Keene will write to inform you that I am -suspended for two weeks. At the end of that time I may have the -privilege of returning, provided I will make a sufficiently humble -apology, and promise to be a good little boy for the future. Much I’ll -apologize!” he added, with a scornful laugh. He was wholly unprepared -for the way in which his news was received. - -“Suspended!” exclaimed the lawyer, starting up. “This is a pretty -piece of business. Tell me what you have been doing. You needn’t try -to smooth it over. Tell me the whole story, for I shall certainly see -Prof. Keene about it to-day.” - -Considerably taken aback, but still trying to preserve his careless -manner, Crawford told what he had done. - -“Well, sir, all I have to say is, that you richly deserve what you have -got; and now let me tell you that you may as well make up your mind -first as last, to go back at the end of the two weeks, and make the -apology and give the promise that Prof. Keene requires--for that is -what you’ve got to do.” - -“Never! I’ll _never_ do it,” cried Crawford, angrily. - -“You _will_ do it, or I’ll put you where you’ll have to behave yourself -whether you like it or not,” was the stern reply. - -“What do you mean?” questioned the boy. - -“I mean, George, that I am beginning to realize that you’ve had -altogether too much liberty. It is evident that you cannot be trusted -to manage yourself and do as you choose. You do not choose the things -or associates that I approve. I hear of you around with that wild young -Henderson continually, and in places where you have no business to -be; and now you have disgraced yourself and gained a name at school -that you ought to be ashamed of. I’ll give you just one more chance. -If you attend to your studies for the next two weeks and keep up with -your class, and at the end of that time make a suitable apology to -your teachers, and hereafter behave yourself and try to redeem your -character in the school--very well.” - -“And if I refuse to do all this?” questioned Crawford, his face flushed -with anger. - -“If you refuse,” said the lawyer, slowly, “I will put you in a reform -school, if I can’t find any other place where you will be forced to -behave yourself.” - -Crawford fairly choked with rage. - -“I’ll--I’ll run away first,” he sputtered. - -The lawyer laughed. “I’ll risk that,” he said. “A very brief experience -of roughing it, and earning your own living, would bring you to your -senses. No, George, you’ve come to a turning place in your life. Now -make up your mind to face the situation manfully, and make a record -that you and I can both be proud of. I’ll be around again in a day or -two, and I am sure that you will have made up your mind not to be so -foolish as to throw away this chance.” - -Crawford had never been taught to control his temper, and he gave full -vent to his furious anger, after the departure of his guardian. He -fumed and raged like an overgrown child, and vowed that he would never -“knuckle under to Keene and Horton to please old Chase.” He had just -begun to cool off a little when Henderson appeared. His face was as -black as Crawford’s as he flung himself into a chair saying:-- - -“You look about as I feel, Crawford; wonder if you’ve had as pleasant -an interview with your old man as I’ve had with mine.” - -“I’ve had a sweet lecture from old Chase,” replied Crawford, moodily, -“and I’ve been trying ever since he left to decide whether or no I’ll -cut the whole business and clear out somewhere. I’ve more than half a -mind to go out west and go to work.” - -“Oh, no, don’t think of that. You’d be a big fool to clear out when you -can have all the money you want here.” - -Crawford looked up quickly. “And you,” he said, “are you going to go -back and promise to be a good little boy?” - -“Expect I’ve got to,” replied Henderson, moodily. - -“Well, I never would have believed you’d back down so quickly,” said -Crawford, scornfully. - -Henderson’s face flushed angrily. - -“I’ve no choice in the matter,” he said, shortly. “The old man says if -I don’t I can shift for myself hereafter.” - -“Well, that’s my case too. Why not go out west together? We’ve heads -and hands of our own--why shouldn’t we earn our living for three years? -Chase can’t keep me out of my money after I’m twenty-one.” - -“Oh, it’s easy enough to talk about earning a living,” said Henderson, -impatiently, “but I tell you what, Crawford, you’d sing another tune -after you’d tried it a few months. You wouldn’t find it much like -living as you do here, driving out when you choose, and always having -your pockets full of money.” - -“They are anything but full most of the time,” put in Crawford. - -“Yes, but you can get all the credit you want. It would be a very -different thing, I tell you, if you had nothing but what you earned. -Neither you nor I have learned anything by which we could earn a -dollar,” said Henderson, gruffly. - -“But I say, Hendy, it will be mighty tough to have to go back to school -and eat humble pie. Think how the fellows’ll chaff us if we meekly -agree to be good little boys and keep the rules hereafter.” - -“Let ’em chaff,” growled Henderson. “We’ll soon show them that we mean -to play our little games in the future about as we’ve done in the past.” - -“But we’ve got to promise not to do anything of the sort before we can -go back,” objected Crawford. - -“Promise!” echoed Henderson scornfully. “Who cares for a promise? We’ll -get back on our promise and then forget all about it. What cuts me in -this business,” he went on, moodily, “is that I’ve got to drop out of -the company. I was a fool not to think of that before I told that yarn -to Bobby.” - -“I declare, I haven’t once thought of that. You’ll have to resign, of -course,” said Crawford. - -“Of course,” echoed Henderson. “It makes me mad as fury to think that I -was such a fool to get into a scrape like this just now, when it’s so -near the drill. I believe we’d have won the prize sure this year, for -the fellows are so wild to get it away from Company A, that every man -of ’em has worked with a will. I was going to give them extra drills -once or twice a week evenings, for this last month, and now with a new -captain they won’t stand half as good a chance.” - -“I declare that’s too bad, Henderson. Wish now I’d never sent that note -in to you.” - -“You can’t wish it so much as I do,” said Henderson. “But there is -no use crying over spilt milk. Maybe, Company C will win after all. -We must try to think of some way to help their chances. But you see, -Crawford, it’s enough sight worse for me to go back than for you--since -you’ve no rank to lose.” - -Crawford drummed on the table and looked thoughtful. After a moment’s -silence he said, “It _is_ harder for you than for me, Henderson, and I -suppose if you are going back I must keep you company, since I got you -into this fix.” - -“Shake hands on it,” said Henderson quickly, holding out his hand. -“I was awfully afraid you’d refuse, Crawford, and to have gone back -without you would have been altogether too much for me.” - -“We shall have to be mighty careful for a while at any rate. Bobby will -watch us with all the eyes he has,” said Crawford gloomily. - -“Bobby!” said Henderson with a sneer. “I reckon we’re sharp enough to -hoodwink Bobby, and if with the help of Coyle and Green and the rest -of our crowd we don’t make it lively for those precious L. A. O.’s, I -miss my guess, that’s all. But now, see here--the governor says that -if I don’t stand as well in class as I have done, or if I give Bobby -any cause to complain of me hereafter, then that’s the end of it. I can -drop out of high school and go where I like, but never a dollar will he -give me if I starve.” - -“Whew!” whistled Crawford. “He’s in earnest, isn’t he?” - -“I should say so. I never would have believed he’d cut up so rough,” -growled Henderson. - -“My orders are much the same,” said Crawford; “only, as the money -belongs to me after all, Chase can’t carry it with quite such a high -hand, you know. I hate the idea of it all, though. Think of going back -and pegging away like Clark, and Gordon and that lot, and never have -any fun,” grumbled Crawford, gloomily. - -“Oh bosh! You’ve brains enough, Crawford, and after all it’s time you -did brace up and work a little. It’s just laziness that has kept you so -low in class, and if you half try, you can stand as high as Clark or -Gordon. Only think how that would grind them.” - -Crawford laughed. He was secretly pleased at the other’s estimate of -his ability, and the idea of standing as high, or possibly higher than -Clark and Gordon was an alluring one. - -“I’ve half a mind to try it,” he said. “It would be something new under -the sun for me to go digging, wouldn’t it?” - -“Yes,” assented Henderson. “I fancy it would astonish some people; and -see what an advantage it would give you, too. Bobby comes down on you -twice as hard as he does on me, and it’s only because I stand high in -class and you don’t. Now, you just go to work, and Bobby will soon be -so proud of you, and so delighted at the change, that he will wink at -lots of things that now he would not overlook; while Chase will be so -pleased that everything will go smoothly in that quarter.” - -“Oh, but, Hendy,” objected Crawford, “think how slow and stupid it will -be--just deadly dull--all hard work and no fun.” - -“No fun? Don’t you believe that. You and I will be models of good -behavior in the school-room, but all the same if we don’t make life a -burden to Bobby, then I miss my guess.” - -“But how, how?” questioned Crawford eagerly. - -“Why, this way. We’ll plan the mischief, and let the rest of the Antis -execute it, and bear the blame. We’ll see all the fun, and go scot -free.” - -“They won’t agree to that,” said Crawford. - -“You see if they don’t. It will cost something, but if I carry off the -honors of the class, I’m sure my dad will be ready enough to increase -my allowance, and Chase would do the same for you, wouldn’t he?” - -“Probably, but what then?” questioned Crawford. - -“Why--a spread for the Antis now and then, or an excursion down the -bay--we footing the bills--will buy over all our crowd, I reckon. As to -Green and Coyle, they’ve _got_ to do as we say, till they can pay the -money we’ve lent ’em.” - -“Well, that _is_ a scheme,” said Crawford, thoughtfully; “I wonder if -we can carry it out.” - -“Don’t see why not,” replied the other; “and by the way there’s another -thing,--we must start in on it to-morrow.” - -“Studying, you mean?” queried Crawford. - -“We must do that, but that was not what I was thinking of. We must stir -up a rumpus in the class-room to-morrow.” - -“How can we? and why not wait till we go back?” - -“Why, don’t you see that if there is no disorder while we’re away, and -plenty of it after we come back, Bobby’ll lay it all at our door. As to -how--let’s call a meeting of the Antis here this evening. We can plan -enough to make things lively in the school-room for a week to come, and -if we promise the fellows a spread next week, they’ll be ready enough -to carry out our plans.” - -So it was that a message reached every one of the Antis before six -o’clock that evening, and almost every one responded to the call. Some -of them were really bad boys, more were neither good nor bad, but ready -to follow any leader who promised them “fun.” - -The session that day had been the most quiet and orderly one of the -year, and Mr. Horton had thought to himself that he might hope for a -continuance of this state of things for two weeks, at least. He found -out his mistake before an hour of the second day was over. There was no -act of open disorder or disobedience, but the Antis were restless and -noisy, ready to laugh at the slightest excuse, and to keep on laughing -as long as they dared. - -When, in the history recitation, one of them remarked that “Warren -Hastings went to the same school and sat on the same seats as the -pheasants of his native country,” an uproarious burst of laughter -followed, and all through the session similar blunders were made in the -gravest and most innocent manner imaginable, by different boys. When -the hour came for the algebra recitation, an unusual quiet prevailed in -the room, and when Mr. Horton sent Reed to the closet for a piece of -chalk, more than one boy waited breathlessly for what was to follow. - -Reed flung open the door and reached up to the shelf for the chalk-box, -but the next moment it fell from his hands, and with a cry, he sprang -back and slammed the door, but not before a snake had slipped out into -the room. It was a big black fellow, nearly three feet long, and as it -wriggled about under the seats, there was such a commotion in the room, -that for a moment the teacher could not make himself heard; and in that -moment Green flung open the door, and the snake was quickly hustled out -into the hall. A girls’ class-room was directly opposite, and to the -delight of the disorderly element, the girls’ door stood ajar, and the -boys succeeded in driving the snake _accidentally_ through the opening. -Then ensued shrieks and screams as the girls jumped up on desks and -seats, some of them even mounting to the window-sills. - -But in a moment Mr. Horton, understanding what the noise in the girls’ -room meant, appeared there, seized the snake by the tail, and flung it -from the window. - -When order was restored, and the teacher questioned his own class, -every boy denied all knowledge as to how the snake came to be in the -closet, and although Mr. Horton had his own opinion on the subject, he -had no proof, and could do nothing. - -The next day was no better. Never had the class been more trying or -more disorderly than in the two weeks that followed, and never had the -teacher found it so difficult to decide whom to punish. - -The L. A. O.’s were almost in despair. It was in the second week that a -meeting was held, and the matter very earnestly talked over. - -“It does seem a shame that a few mean fellows should be able to upset -everything as they do in this class,” Gordon said indignantly. “I did -hope that it would be different at least while Crawford and Henderson -were away. I thought that they were at the bottom of it all, but that -can’t be, for it has been worse than ever for the last week. Does -anybody know who _is_ the ringleader?” - -“Seems to me the Antis are _all_ ringleaders,” said Raleigh. - -“I’ve found out who put the snake in the closet,” announced Hamlin. - -“Who, who?” shouted a dozen voices eagerly. - -“Green,” replied Hamlin. - -“How’d you find out?” asked Gordon. - -“I was in Smith’s bird-store down the avenue yesterday. I’ve bought -fancy pigeons of him several times, and he’s a friendly sort of chap, -and as I happened to think of that snake, I asked him if he had sold -one within a week or two. He said yes--he sold one to a sandy-haired -fellow about my size--a fellow with an anchor on his left hand. Well, -that fits Green to a T.” - -“So it does. So he was at the bottom of that; and I know it was Coyle -that mixed up all our overshoes yesterday, so it took us an age to sort -’em out. I don’t see the fun in such tricks, for my part,” said Raleigh. - -“Well, say, boys--what are we going to do about it? If every L. A. O. -in the class should get a hundred this quarter, it wouldn’t bring our -class record up to a decent mark, so long as the Antis cut up as they -do.” - -“Does every fellow except us here belong to the Antis?” asked one. - -“Yes, all except Clark,” said Gordon. - -“I say it’s a shame that Clark’s name is not on our roll,” broke in -Hamlin. “_I_ believe he’s a splendid fellow, and I don’t think we do -right to shut him out just because of what his father has done.” - -A silence followed, while the boys looked at one another uneasily. - -“It isn’t all--his father,” remarked one. - -“No--it’s the things that happened the first of the year,” said another. - -“But I, for one, don’t believe that he deserved the blame he got in -either of those cases,” said Hamlin boldly; “and no one can deny that -he’s the best all-around scholar in the class; and as to deportment, no -fellow could do more to help our record than he does.” - -“He’s too much of a prig,” muttered one; while the Georgian, saying -something about “convicts,” turned away and looked out of the window. - -With a disappointed air, Hamlin dropped the so evidently unwelcome -subject of Clark’s admission to the society, and the discussion of what -should be done was resumed. - -“Seems as if we might persuade a few of the Antis to come over to our -side,” said Raleigh. “Some of the smaller fellows--Freeman and Vale, -for instance.” - -“Vale might possibly be talked over, but Freeman seems to be a hopeless -case. I’ve done my best, but he’s too much in with the worst ones. I -don’t think it’s any use to talk to him,” said Gordon. - -“Well, let’s try Vale again. You tackle him, Gordon, and I’ll try -Claflin, and the rest of you see if you can talk over anybody else,” -said Hamlin. - -“I wonder if it would be possible to get Bobby to divide the section, -and mark the L. A. O.’s and the Antis separately,” suggested Gordon -thoughtfully. - -“We might talk to him about it. He’ll do anything he can to help us, I -know,” said Hamlin. - -For an hour the discussion was continued, but when the boys separated -it was with a most uncomfortable sense of the fact that--try as they -might--they never could change the reputation of section D so long as -nearly half of their number were determined to do all in their power to -prevent such a change. - -Mr. Horton willingly agreed to keep the records of the Antis -separately, but he told the boys that that could make no real -difference, since the section must rank according to its marks as a -whole. - - - - -CHAPTER VII. VERY NEARLY AN ACCIDENT. - - -Hamlin’s failure to induce the L. A. O.’s to admit Clark to their -society made him the more determined to show all possible friendliness -himself towards his lonely schoolfellow, and he made it a point to walk -to and from school with him, or to have a chat with him at recess, as -frequently as he could. Clark appreciated the other’s kindness, and -understood perfectly well that it was through no lack of effort on -Hamlin’s part that he--Clark--was not asked to join the L. A. O.’s. - -Several other boys, Gordon and Graham among them, began to follow -Hamlin’s example so far as to nod and say a pleasant word to Clark -now and then, but he felt that they were doing this merely to please -Hamlin, and did not respond very cordially to their advances. - -As to Freeman--Clark’s attempts to draw him away from the Crawford -crowd had signally failed. Freeman seemed to have lost all desire for -his cousin’s companionship, and coldly and even curtly refused all -Clark’s invitations to walk or talk with him. - -Clark had little time and less inclination in these days for visiting, -but he went occasionally to see his aunt and cousins. One afternoon he -found Edith alone, and looking so pale and troubled that he could not -help asking what was the matter. - -The girl’s lip trembled, and her blue eyes filled with tears as she -answered simply, “I’m so worried about Ray, Stanley.” - -“What about him, Edith? Is it anything in which I can help you?” he -asked kindly. - -“Oh, I don’t know. He is so changed lately. He used to be the dearest -boy, and now, since he has been with Crawford and Henderson so much, he -is so different. He doesn’t seem to care for mamma or me, and he goes -out evenings and won’t tell us where he goes, and he seems to have lost -all interest in his school work. His last report was the poorest he has -ever had.” - -“I am so sorry, Edith,” Clark answered, “I’ve tried to get him away -from that set, but he doesn’t care to be with me any more. He as much -as told me to ‘mind my own business’ and let him alone, the last time I -spoke to him.” - -“Yes,” sighed Edith, “that’s the way he answers me. But Stanley, Ray -isn’t really a bad boy, and I’m sure that something is troubling him, -and that is what makes him so cross, lately.” - -“Perhaps it is his low rank in class,” suggested Clark. - -Edith shook her head. “No, it’s something more than that, I’m sure,” -she said. Then she added earnestly, “Don’t give him up, Stanley. He has -always looked up so to you, and I’m sure he does care for you a great -deal more than for those horrid big fellows that he goes with now, -and--and, we _must_ get him away from them somehow.” - -Her voice trembled, and Clark’s face expressed the sympathy he felt. - -“I’ll do all I can, cousin Edith. If only Crawford and Henderson -wouldn’t come back to school, I think there would be much less trouble. -They are the evil influence in the class,” he said, thoughtfully. - -“Yes, and the evil influence that is leading my brother astray,” said -Edith, sadly. - -After this conversation, Clark was constantly on the watch for any -opportunity to help his young cousin, not only for his own sake, but -yet more for that of the sister whose loving heart was so heavily -burdened with anxiety on her brother’s account. Clark had the true -knightly spirit, and counted it the duty of a boy to care for his -mother and sisters, and ward off from them, as far as possible, all -sorrow and trouble. No mother ever had a more tender, thoughtful son -than his mother had in him, and since he had no sister, he felt himself -in duty bound to do for Edith, as far as he could, what her own -brother failed to do; and above all, to bring back that brother to the -path of duty and uprightness from which he had strayed. - -But how to do this was the question--since Freeman avoided him and -responded so coldly to all his advances. Clark pretended not to see -this, and persisted in being friendly, yet he felt more than a little -discouraged, and was often tempted to give it up, and leave the boy to -do as he would. It was only the remembrance of Edith’s sorrowful face -that kept him from doing so. - -Out of school hours, Freeman now spent half his time in Crawford’s -rooms, and during the weeks of Crawford’s and Henderson’s absence, he -spent every recess with Coyle, Green, and others of like character. - -When it was known in school that Crawford and Henderson had been -suspended, there was much wondering and speculation among the L. A. O. -as to whether or no they would return and make the apology, and give -the promise required. After the meeting at Crawford’s rooms, the Antis -knew that the two boys would return, but they took good care not to let -the L. A. O.’s know anything about the matter. - -Every face in the room was full of eager interest and curiosity, as -nine o’clock approached on the morning after the two weeks were ended. - -When, after the opening exercises, Prof. Keene entered the room -followed by Crawford and Henderson, there was a silence that could be -felt. Every eye was fastened on the two boys, who stood with downcast -faces while Prof. Keene said a few earnest words to the class. - -In spite of their bravado, and the hidden purpose that sustained them, -both boys found it more of an ordeal than they had anticipated to stand -there and acknowledge that they had done wrong and were sorry for it, -and to promise that they would endeavor from that time on to keep all -the rules of the school, and give no further cause of complaint. - -Some of the Antis began to clap, as the two slipped into their seats, -but Prof. Keene stopped that instantly, remarking sternly that this was -no occasion for applause. - -During the remainder of the session, Mr. Horton threw more than one -puzzled glance at the two boys. There was something in their faces -that he could not understand, but they certainly gave him no cause for -complaint, for they were models of good behavior. - -The L. A. O.’s cast many curious and wondering glances at them also as -the hours passed, and these two, who had so long been ringleaders in -disorder, sat apparently unconscious of the half-subdued buzzing and -whispering and laughter of their own set, who seemed to be intensely -amused at this new state of things. And when not only Henderson, but -Crawford as well, had perfect recitations in each study, the surprise -of the L. A. O.’s was evident, to the ill-concealed delight of the -Antis. - -After school, Mr. Horton detained the two boys to say a few earnest -words to them, and then to tell them how much pleasure their fine -recitations and orderly deportment had given him. As he begged them to -use their influence, which he knew to be great, on the side of law and -order, Crawford hung his head and a flush of shame dyed his cheeks as -he thought how little he deserved commendation; but Henderson looked -boldly into his teacher’s eyes and coolly promised to do his best. - -“I say, Henderson, you’re a bigger hypocrite than I am,” said Crawford, -as they went down stairs. - -“Oh, pshaw! What’s one lie more or less?” said the other coolly. -“Besides, I’m going to be a model of good behavior now, you know--a -perfect little lamb,” and he laughed at the remembrance of “Bobby’s” -face, and the way they had “taken him in.” - -Never had Mr. Horton been so perplexed and so worried and tormented in -his class-room, as in the weeks that followed the return of Crawford -and Henderson. Having no clue to the real state of the case, he was -completely deceived, and took the greatest satisfaction in the change -in these two, while at the same time he was at his wit’s end to -understand what caused the increasing disorder and disturbance in the -room, and who was at the bottom of it all. - -The L. A. O.’s, after much persuasion, had induced three of the Antis -to change sides, so that now there were twenty-three L. A. O.’s and -thirteen Antis besides Crawford and Henderson. One boy had left the -class, and Clark belonged to neither side, so the L. A. O.’s had a -large majority; but all the same, thirteen bad boys, especially with -two such leaders as Crawford and Henderson, can accomplish a deal of -mischief, and this thirteen certainly did. - -Could Mr. Horton have been an unseen listener at a spread given to -the Antis by Crawford and Henderson at the rooms of the former, he -would have understood the matter, for the boys, as they disposed of -the feast, laughed and rejoiced over the success of their schemes, and -planned yet more and more exasperating trials for their long-suffering -instructor. - -Among those present at Crawford’s “spread” was Charlie Reed. Thus far -Reed had looked upon life as a huge joke, and his one purpose was -to get as much fun as possible out of every hour in the day. He had -refused to join the L. A. O.’s, because he declared that there was “no -fun” in keeping the rules and working for honors. So he was always -ready to carry out any mischievous suggestion of the Antis, and not a -little of the class disorder might justly have been laid at his door. -And after all, he meant no harm. With him it was pure thoughtlessness -and love of mischief. One of his favorite amusements was to adorn the -blackboard, out of school hours, with absurd sketches of the boys or of -the teachers. - -One morning before school he had drawn a sketch of a very dudish young -man and a lady arrayed in bridal costume; and, lest anybody should -fail to recognize the intended likenesses, he had written above this -artistic production the legend, “Bobby leading Miss Carr to the altar.” - -The boys shouted, as Reed finished his sketch, for Miss Carr was the -oldest teacher in the school, certainly twice Mr. Horton’s age, and not -at all prepossessing in appearance. - -Suddenly a boy at the window called out, “Hi, fellows--look over there. -There she comes now, and isn’t she a daisy!” - -The boys rushed to the window. It was a rainy morning, and Miss Carr, -in waterproof and overshoes, was picking her way through the puddles, -and, as it happened, Mr. Horton, who had overtaken her a moment before, -was holding his umbrella over her head as they crossed the street. - -In watching these two, the boys forgot all about the sketch on the -board, even Reed himself never giving it a thought, and there it was -when Clark, a moment later, entered the room, Mr. Horton being only a -few steps behind him. At that instant somebody cried out in smothered -tones, “You’re in for it, Reedy. Look at the board.” - -Reed started up with a cry of dismay, but dropped into his seat again -as he heard Mr. Horton’s voice in the hall. - -Clark glanced at the board, and taking in the situation, instantly -snatched the eraser and rubbed out the drawing as he passed the board. -It was barely done before Mr. Horton entered the room. He looked in -surprise at Clark turning away from the board, but the boy quietly took -his seat, while Reed, with a sigh of relief, settled back in his; and -as it was almost nine o’clock, the teacher asked no questions. - -At recess, Reed joined Clark, who was walking up and down the sidewalk -alone, as usual. - -“It was awfully good of you to rub out my scrawl, Clark,” he said. - -Before Clark had time to reply, Hamlin joined him, and, with a nod, he -turned away from Reed, and the latter, after a moment’s hesitation, -strolled back to the boys in the playground. - -It was that same day that Clark took a roundabout way home for the sake -of the air and exercise. He was walking slowly down a shady, pleasant -street, when he noticed a pretty little three-year-old girl coming down -the steps of a handsome house near the corner. The little thing had -evidently escaped from her nurse, for she cast anxious glances back at -the open door as she trotted across the sidewalk. She was just in the -middle of the street, when a fire-engine came dashing around the corner -at full speed. The child, hearing the gong and seeing the galloping -horses coming straight towards her, stopped short in a bewildered -fashion, too frightened even to cry out. It was impossible for the -driver to stop the horses or turn them aside enough to pass her, but -in that instant of time Clark sprang forward, his rapid rush carrying -both himself and the child just out of the way of the engine. He and -the little girl both rolled in the dirt, but neither was hurt beyond a -bruise or two. - -As he got on his feet and lifted the frightened child, she began to cry -and held out her arms to her mother, who, with a white, shocked face, -came running down the steps. She held the little one close, and for -a moment she could not speak, but then her eyes filled with tears of -gratitude as she turned to Clark and tried to thank him. But, boy-like, -Clark felt shy and embarrassed now, and tried to slip away through the -crowd that had quickly gathered. - -“Do tell me your name,” the mother pleaded earnestly. - -Clark opened his lips to give it, but seeing a reporter whip out his -notebook and pencil, listening eagerly for the answer, and not wanting -to figure as a newspaper hero, he said quickly, “I’m _very_ glad that -the little girl was not hurt,” and lifting his hat, slipped through the -crowd and was gone. - -With a disappointed look, the mother carried her little girl into the -house, while the reporter, casting an injured glance after Clark, -proceeded to gather from the crowd all the particulars of the affair. - -When Clark reached the school-room the next morning, Reed was talking -away excitedly to a group of the boys, who were listening and -questioning him with eager interest. - -“And you didn’t find out who the fellow was?” asked Crawford. - -“No--he wouldn’t tell my mother what his name was, and the reporter -couldn’t find anybody in the crowd that knew him,” said Reed. - -“Lucky for your little sister that he happened to be on hand just that -minute, whoever he was,” said Sherman. - -Reed’s usually bright eyes were suspiciously dim as he answered in a -low tone, “Yes--I can’t bear to think of it.” Then he added, “My father -says he’d give a hundred dollars to know who the boy was.” - -“Queer idea, not to give his name,” remarked Henderson. - -“Well--he was a brave fellow, anyhow,” said Crawford. “Tell you -what--_I_ wouldn’t care to run in front of a fire-engine, going at the -rate they always do go.” - -“Nor I,” said Coyle, “He ran the risk of being awfully hurt, if not -killed.” - -“That’s what _I_ call courage,” remarked Hamlin emphatically, going -over to Clark, who had taken his own seat on the other side of the room. - -“Did you hear what Reed was telling, Clark?” - -“Yes, I saw the account in the paper,” answered Clark quietly, “but -I didn’t know until just now that the little girl was Charlie Reed’s -sister. I didn’t know where he lived.” - -“Yes--it’s his only sister. She’s a beautiful child, and they’re just -devoted to her--the whole family. I never saw Reed so stirred up over -anything before. You know he generally turns everything into a joke, -but he doesn’t feel like joking this morning. Pity they can’t find out -who the fellow is--isn’t it?” - -Clark muttered some unintelligible reply, and Hamlin, surprised and a -little disappointed at the other’s apparent lack of interest, turned -away to his own seat. - -Even to his mother Clark did not mention the affair; and she, as she -read the account in the paper, had no suspicion that her own son was -the modest young hero who had refused to give his name; while Reed -never dreamed that it was his quiet schoolmate that had saved his home -from being a house of mourning. But somehow, he could not forget the -affair, or shake off entirely the impression that it had made on him. -He began to realize that life is not all “fun,” and the coarse jokes -of the Antis began to lose their flavor for him, and finally he amazed -and rejoiced the L. A. O.’s by asking for admission to their number. -The enthusiastic welcome that he received from those whom he knew to -be the “best fellows in the class” was all that was needed to make him -heartily glad of the break that he had made. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII. THE COMPETITIVE DRILL. - - -Henderson had tendered his resignation as captain of Company C the -day after he was suspended. He was surprised that he had received no -notice of the acceptance of the resignation, and had more than once -questioned the officers of his company since his return to school, but -none of them knew anything about the matter; so he was feeling very -uncomfortable about it, when, one morning, he received a summons to -Professor Keene’s office. He answered the summons promptly. Ten minutes -later, he left the office with his face brighter than it had been for -many days. - -“I say,” he said, as he joined Crawford, who was waiting for him, -“would you believe it, Crawford, Keene won’t accept my resignation?” - -“And you’re to remain captain?” said Crawford. - -“Yes, and if Company C doesn’t win the prizes this time, I’ll know the -reason why. There’s Griffin ahead. Come on, I want to speak to him.” - -Griffin was first lieutenant of Company C, and was quite as anxious -for that company to win as was Henderson himself, and so he entered -heartily into the latter’s plans for long and frequent drills during -the next four weeks. - -Eager as the boys themselves were to win the prizes, some of them were -inclined to grumble before the month was over. They didn’t think quite -so much practice was necessary; but though they complained, they had to -submit to the captain’s orders. - -It must be confessed that, as the important day approached, the -recitations did not improve, but the teachers were lenient, and made -all possible allowances. - -This annual drill was always an affair of great interest to all the -pupils of the two high-schools. Even the boys not in the battalion, and -the girls, were quite as much interested as the cadets themselves, and -this year the interest was increased by the offer of a costly and very -beautiful gold medal in addition to the prize banner. The banner had -been held for the last two years by Company B of the Eastern school, -and of course that company and that school were as determined to retain -it, as the companies of the Central were determined to win it. - -There was no finer company in the battalion than Company D, of which -Gordon was captain and Hamlin lieutenant. The boys of this company had -a hearty respect and affection for their officers, both personally -and officially. It was Gordon’s way to do his best whatever the work -in hand might be, and through all the past year he had carried out -that principle in regard to his military duties as well as in his work -in the class-room; and because he was always fair and just as well -as friendly with them, whether in the drill, on the playground, or -wherever they were together, the boys of his company were always ready -to carry out his wishes. This year, they were one and all determined -that their captain should wear the gold medal, and they themselves the -red ribbons of the prize company. Gordon himself wanted it too--of -course he did--but he would have scorned to win by any but fair means, -while Henderson was determined that by fair means or foul, Company C -should stand first. - -The drill was to take place on the baseball grounds. There were in the -two schools seven companies, and each was to drill for thirty or forty -minutes, four companies drilling the first afternoon, and the remaining -three, the second. - -Company C was second on the list of the first day, and Company D was -the last on the next day. - -Henderson kept his company drilling from eight till ten o’clock on the -last night before the drill, and neither he nor any of his men were in -their seats in the school-room, the next morning. In fact, very few of -the cadets in either school put in an appearance that morning, and no -very great interest was manifested in the lessons by any of the pupils, -and the classes were dismissed an hour earlier than usual. - -The weather was all that could be desired, being clear and cool for -a summer day. The gates were not to be opened till four o’clock, but -long before that time a great crowd had assembled, and horns, bells and -bugles kept up an unceasing din, while gay silk banners bearing the -letters of the different companies, and canes and batons wound with -ribbons were waving everywhere. - -Every high school pupil who could be there was there, and all wore -ribbons. The boys wore small strips on which were printed the company -letters, but the girls fairly rioted in ribbons. Some wore them as -hat-bands, some as shoulder-knots with long streamers. Many had batons -wound with two or three colors, with bows and streamers at the end, -while yet others, and these usually very bright or pretty girls, wore -the colors of two or three, or even more companies, in one big cluster. - -As soon as the gates were opened the seats were rapidly filled, and -long before the drill began every one of the six thousand places was -occupied. - -Crawford had hired one of the boxes, and Freeman sat there with him. -Edith was there, too, but she sat with some of her friends on the -other side. Edith was a very pretty girl, and Crawford would gladly -have given her a seat in his box. Indeed, when he saw her, he sent -Freeman to ask her to join them, but she returned them a polite -refusal, and remained where she was, to Crawford’s secret vexation; nor -was this feeling lessened, when, a little later, he saw the cordial -welcome she gave to Clark, and the readiness with which she made room -for him at her side. - -The judges were three army officers, and promptly at the appointed hour -they appeared on the field, and a moment later, Company A marched in -on the opposite side, welcomed by ringing cheers and shouts from their -friends, and ear-splitting horn salutes from their foes--that is, those -whose sympathies were with other companies. - -Quiet fell upon the throng of spectators as the drill began, and all -eyes watched the boys in blue, some in breathless anxiety lest there be -some slip or blunder--some in equally great anxiety lest there should -not be. - -The company did itself credit, and as all went smoothly, its eager -well-wishers began to believe that this time A would surely stand -first, when, almost at the last moment, the captain dropped his sword. -Poor fellow--he felt badly enough about it without the groan that he -could not help hearing, from the grand stand, and though not another -slip occurred, and he marched his men off the field in fine style, he -and they knew well that their chance was gone. - -As they passed off, Company C marched on. Henderson’s dark face was -full of grim determination, yet there was a shadow of anxiety in his -glance as it rested for a second on the last man in the rear rank. That -was Baum. If any one blundered, it was safe to be Baum; but Baum had -done finely for the past month, surely he would do his best to-day. -So ran Henderson’s thoughts, as he led his men forward. No danger of -Henderson making a blunder. He meant to go to West Point yet, for all -his tastes were for a military life, and he had the manual at his -tongue’s end. No danger of his getting rattled. He was sure of himself -and sure of his men--all but Baum. - -And Company C did well. As Henderson’s strong voice rang out, his -orders were obeyed with the promptness and exactness of clockwork. -The judges nodded approval, and made memoranda on their programs, as -order after order was given and obeyed. Henderson’s eyes shone, and his -heart beat high with proud satisfaction, and then--then, at last that -wretched Baum blundered. When the company was ordered to load and fire, -lying down, his discharge was so far behind the others that a shout of -derision broke from some of the rougher boys among the spectators, and -Henderson felt an insane longing to seize Baum’s gun and whack him over -the head with it. - -And Baum, knowing well what was in his captain’s heart, felt _his_ -heart sink into his boots as he wondered if he could possibly fire -at all the second time. How he did it he never knew, but the second -discharge was fine, and the poor fellow drew a breath of relief as he -braced himself to meet the storm that he knew would burst upon his head -the moment the drill was over. And it did. Henderson hardly waited -to get off the field, before he burst into a torrent of angry abuse -and vituperation, so bitter and so profane that it shocked the others -into silence, and no other boy said anything to Baum about what had -happened; and he, dropping into the most unnoticeable place he could -find, pulled his cap over his eyes and brooded over his “hard luck.” - -Henderson, his face still dark with anger, joined Crawford and Freeman, -and sat there glowering at Company E. This being notoriously the worst -drilled of the seven companies, he had no fear of its gaining the -prize, and he gave but little heed to what passed till Company B came -on. Then he roused himself, and hastily scrawling a line on a slip -of paper, told Freeman to “Give it to that cub over yonder,” the cub -referred to being Baum. - -Baum read the message, and his gloomy face lightened a little, as he -nodded to Henderson, and then proceeded to tear the note into tiny -bits, and presently he slipped away. - -Shouts and cheers greeted the appearance of Company B, and banners -bearing that letter were raised and waved from every quarter. Pink was -the company color, and a large and very beautiful banner of pink silk -with B embroidered in the center, was set up in the front row of the -bleachers as the company marched forward. - -Henderson scowled, and whispered something to a little fellow just then -passing his seat with a basket of candies and chewing gum for sale. -A silver dollar slipped into the basket, and a few minutes later the -candy boy delivered a second message to Baum, who had returned to his -seat. - -Now all eyes were watching Company B, which seemed in a fair way to -win fresh laurels, as one manœuvre after another was swiftly and -dexterously executed. There was no blundering Baum to spoil the -shooting, and the captain of Company B, easy and self-possessed, was in -no danger of dropping his sword or committing any other blunder. - -Henderson’s watchful face darkened yet more as the minutes passed, and -he cast uneasy glances toward the quarter where Baum now sat among a -noisy group. - -In one of the manœuvers the company approached quite close to the -place where this group was sitting, and suddenly a score of voices -shouted an order, quite drowning the voice of the captain as he gave an -entirely different one. Only the men nearest to the captain understood -his order. The others, confused by the unexpected call from the seats, -hesitated, wavered, and obeyed the wrong order, and Company B’s chance -for the prize was gone. - -“Good, good!” hissed Henderson in Crawford’s ear. “Baum managed that -beautifully. I can almost forgive him for his blunder now.” - -“Did you tell him to do it?” asked Crawford. - -“’Course I did. Didn’t I tell you I’m bound to have that banner by fair -means or foul?” replied Henderson. “We’re ahead now, spite of Baum’s -blunder,” he added, with his low, cruel laugh. - -“Oh, look, look! Somebody’s pulled down their banner,” cried Freeman. - -Sure enough, as Company B marched out with flushed and frowning faces, -their beautiful new silk banner was suddenly discovered to be missing -from the place where it had been raised. Who did it, or where it was, -only Henderson, Baum and the candy boy knew; but late that night, the -banner, soiled and rumpled, and looking as if it had been trailed in -the dirt, was left on the doorsteps of the captain of Company B. The -person who left it there rang the bell and disappeared before the door -was opened. - -A year before, Freeman would have been quick to condemn such mean and -contemptible doings as these; but now he said nothing, as Henderson -openly rejoiced over the discomfiture of Company B; and Crawford, -though he said little, evidently saw nothing amiss in the methods -employed. - -“Here come the F’s. No danger of their winning,” Freeman said, as the -final drill of the first day began. - -Company F was the last formed of the seven. It had had but little -practice, and nobody expected it to win, and nobody’s expectations were -disappointed. - -There might about as well have been no school the next day, for so -great was the prevailing excitement that it was impossible for the boys -to settle down to work. - -The interest was even greater than on the first day. Before school and -at recess hot discussions were carried on over the first three drills -of the previous day, and much sympathy was expressed for Company B. - -“It was a contemptible piece of business--calling out the wrong order -as those fellows did,” Hamlin said indignantly, “and I, for one, am -heartily ashamed that any of our fellows had a hand in it.” - -“Who says any of our fellows _did_ have a hand in it?” said Coyle, -angrily. - -“I _know_ they did, for I saw some of them yelling,” replied Hamlin, -“and a fellow that sat right by them gave me the names of some of our -fellows who shouted the wrong order.” - -“He might have been in better business,” growled Coyle, to which Hamlin -quickly responded, “_They_ might have been in better business. And then -to pull down B’s flag just then, was too mean for anything.” - -“The B’s are all Easterns. It’s time the Centrals got the prize,” cried -Green. - -“I want the Centrals to win, as much as anybody, I guess,” replied -Hamlin, “but if we can’t win fairly I’d rather lose.” - -“You would--would you?” said Henderson. “Well, I wouldn’t, then. That -banner and medal ought to belong to a Central company. All’s fair in -love and war,” he added, winking at Green. - -“Well, I know that Company D will do its level best this afternoon, and -I don’t believe that anybody wants those prizes any more than we do, -but if we win, we’ll win fair,” answered Hamlin, and Gordon, who had -just joined the group, added quietly, “So we will, Hamlin.” - -“Not much danger of Company D winning,” said Henderson with a sneer. -“The good little boys will get left again, this time.” - -“Perhaps--if yesterday’s doings are repeated,” said Hamlin -significantly, as the bell called them to order. - -Gordon and Hamlin were the only members of Company D at school that -morning, and Mr. Horton dismissed them at one o’clock. - -As they left the building Hamlin said, “Gordon, I believe Henderson -means to play us some mean trick like that they served Company B -yesterday. He’s bound and determined to win the prizes, and I believe -that he’ll stop at nothing to gain his end.” - -“I’m a good deal of your opinion, Hamlin,” Gordon replied. “He’s -perfectly unscrupulous, but I really don’t believe that he could rattle -us as he did them yesterday. You see, we shall be on the lookout for -him, now.” - -“I don’t think myself that that plan would succeed with our men, but -you see he’ll probably hatch up some new scheme that we haven’t thought -of,” said Hamlin. - -“Well, we won’t borrow trouble, Hamlin,” said Gordon. “We’ve only to do -our best, and not worry over what may happen.” - -Again, as on the day before, Crawford and Freeman were in one of the -boxes, and Henderson was with them, and Clark again joined Edith and -her friends, but to-day he was even more grave than usual, and his dark -eyes cast quick, searching glances here, there and everywhere, but -most frequently at the end of the row, where Baum, Green, Coyle and -others of the Antis were gathered. - -“Why Edith, you have come out in company colors too, to-day,” Clark -said suddenly, noticing the pale blue ribbons she wore. - -Edith colored a little. “The girls would make me wear them,” she said. -“They are all interested in Company D. Two of them have brothers in -that company, you know.” - -“Yes, I know,” said Clark, absently. - -Edith, following the direction of his eyes, leaned forward, and looked -intently at the group of boys he was watching. “Do all those boys -belong in your section?” she asked. - -“Most of them do,” Clark answered, “and they are no credit to the -section either--some of them.” - -“I wish Ray would come back here with us,” Edith said, sadly. “He used -to go everywhere with me, but he never goes anywhere with me now.” - -Clark longed to say something to comfort her, but he did not know what -to say, so he was silent. - -Promptly at four o’clock, Company E appeared. In spite of her troubled -thoughts, Edith could not help laughing, as a woman in the front seat, -at sight of her boy in the ranks, cried out, “There he is! There’s -Johnny!” and as a welcoming cheer greeted the approaching company, -Johnny’s mother not only joined heartily in it, but, rising, swung her -umbrella in the air and pounded the rail in front with it, while she -shouted, “Hurrah for Company E!” - -But the crowd was a good-natured one, and those around her only laughed -as they dodged to avoid the blue umbrella that seemed quite likely to -hit somebody over the head, so great was its owner’s excitement. - -Company E drilled well, and the joyful excitement of “Johnny’s” mother -increased as one evolution after another was performed without mishap. -But alas! There are so many chances, and so many possible mistakes! The -captain of Company E was so unfortunate as to lead his men so near the -grand stand in one of the marches, that the commanding officer ordered -them off, and this so confused the men that their firing was by no -means up to the mark. - -Company G, the next in order, had a fiery, nervous little captain, who -was himself the cause of failure, as, in giving an order, he stepped -back too quickly, and ran into one of his men so violently as to throw -him down. The man recovered himself well, without throwing anyone else -out, but Company G’s chance was lost, and that they realized this was -evident from the faces of the boys as they left the field, passing near -the entrance, the last of the seven--Company D. - -That this company had many friends among the spectators was evident -from the noisy welcome that rang out at its approach, and not once -during the two days had such a general silence marked the intense -interest as now. Edith’s friends had eyes and ears for nothing that was -going on around them. They scarcely breathed as Gordon’s clear voice -rang out, and his men, as if animated by a single spirit, obeyed his -orders. - -Gordon’s sister sat next to Edith. Her fair face was flushed with -excitement, and her eyes never for an instant turned away from the -boys in blue, and their young captain. Once, when a gentleman near -exclaimed, “That’s the finest shooting yet,” Bessie Gordon’s hand -clasped Edith’s tightly, and her eyes shone with satisfaction, but she -spoke no word. - -The company had just obeyed the order to lie down and load, when -Stanley Clark, with a smothered exclamation, sprang from his place and -dashed across to the open seats. As Edith looked after him in surprise, -Bessie gripped her hand again, crying out, “Oh Edith, Edith, look!” -and Edith looked just in time to see a giant powder-cracker strike the -ground not two yards in front of the prostrate boys, where it exploded -with a tremendous bang, the sound mingling with the discharge of the -guns. - -Instantly, there was a medley of shouts, cries, cheers and hisses, but -Company D and its captain might have been blind and deaf for all the -attention they paid to the uproar. Not a man had flinched when they saw -that big cracker coming straight towards their faces, and not a gun had -failed to send its volley at the command to “fire!” - -Professor Keene and the other teachers quieted the excited crowds -in the seats as quickly as possible, and without the slightest -interruption the drill proceeded, but when it was over, and Captain -Gordon, having saluted the chairman of the judges, turned to lead his -company off the field, the audience went wild. Cheer upon cheer rang -out. Banners, handkerchiefs, ribbon-decked parasols were waved with -reckless disregard of everybody and everything, while the retiring -company was literally pelted with flowers. - -“It is evident that the audience has decided which is the prize -company,” remarked Professor Keene with a smile, to Bessie Gordon, “and -I quite agree with the general verdict.” - -Bessie’s eyes were full of quiet happiness, now, but her cheeks were -still a little pale from the nervous excitement of seeing that blazing -cracker flying straight towards those faces that she knew would not -move a hair’s breadth to avoid it. - -“Here comes the band,” cried half a dozen voices, as the strains -of martial music drew all eyes again towards the field, where the -regimental drill was now to take place while the judges were making -their decision. - -But nobody paid very much attention to this. All were awaiting -impatiently the announcement of the decision, and when the chairman -of the committee declared Company D to have won the prizes, cheer -after cheer expressed the satisfaction of the audience; and when the -beautiful gold medal was handed to Captain Gordon, his men looked as -proud and happy as if each one of them was to wear it himself. It was -evident that they did not take half as much pride in their own red -ribbons as they did in their captain’s honors. - -“Aren’t you proud of your brother?” said a girl near Bessie; and Bessie -answered frankly, “Indeed I am, Mollie.” - -“You have reason to be, Miss Bessie,” added Professor Keene. “I am -proud to have him in my school. His influence is always on the right -side.” - -Bessie’s eyes shone with delight at this public compliment to her -brother; but Edith turned away with tears in her eyes and an aching -heart, because her only brother could receive no such commendation. - - - - -CHAPTER IX. FREEMAN MAKES A DECISION. - - -The next morning’s mail carried to every member of Company C, and also -to Clark, Freeman and Crawford, a request from Professor Keene to be at -his office that morning at ten o’clock. There was some grumbling, as it -was Saturday, and the summons interfered with various holiday plans; -but more than one face was shadowed with uneasiness and anxiety, and -among this number was that of Captain Henderson. - -“I’m afraid you’re in for it, Hen,” Crawford said to him on the way to -the school. - -“They can’t prove anything against me,” replied Henderson, uneasily; -“not if you and Freeman don’t blab.” - -“I shan’t, of course, and I don’t believe Freeman will. He’s a plucky -little chap.” - -“I’m not so sure of him as you seem to be, Crawford; but if he does let -out anything, I’ll pay him out for it. He may be sure of that,” said -Henderson. - -When they reached the school, they found most of the company already -there, and Clark and Freeman appeared a few minutes later. - -The professor told Clark, Crawford and Freeman to remain in his office, -while he led Henderson and his company to one of the class-rooms. - -Closing the door, he stood for a moment in silence, looking from one -to another of the faces before him, and some of the boys felt plainly -uncomfortable beneath that searching glance. It seemed an endless -time to these before the professor said, “Boys, I was intensely -mortified over some of the occurrences at the drill, yesterday. I can -make allowances for excitement and high spirits and thoughtlessness; -but that any of my boys should have been guilty of such meanness and -rowdyism, such shameless and reckless efforts to prevent others from -winning the prizes, has pained and shamed me more than I have words to -express. - -“In the four years that these competitive drills have been held, -there has never before been anything like the outrageous affair of -yesterday--the throwing of that cracker.” - -He paused for a moment, then went on slowly, “When I think what the -results might have been had that cracker exploded _towards_ the boys, I -feel as if no punishment could be too severe for those who would risk -the destruction of eyesight, or even life itself, to keep others from -winning a well-deserved prize. It was only God’s mercy that prevented -such awful consequences. - -“Think, for one moment, boys, how some of you would be feeling -to-day, if that deed of yesterday had blinded or killed some of your -schoolmates! - -“A thorough investigation has been ordered, and no effort will be -spared to find out and to punish the guilty persons, _unless_ they -confess their guilt. If any boy will confess his share in the matter, -I will do my best to lighten his punishment, but anyone who will not -confess and who shall be proven guilty need look for no mercy.” - -While the professor spoke, some of the boys shifted uneasily from one -foot to the other, and some cast furtive glances at Henderson, who -stood leaning against a desk, with a hard look in his eyes and his lips -close shut. - -Suddenly, Professor Keene turned towards him. “Henderson, what do you -know about this affair?” he asked. - -Henderson looked full into the professor’s searching eyes, and answered -calmly, “Nothing whatever, sir.” - -“You had nothing to do with it in any way?” pursued the professor. - -“No, sir,” said Henderson. - -With a disappointed look and a half sigh, the professor turned from -him. - -“Boys,” he said, “you have heard Henderson’s denial--now I call upon -you. If anyone here knows anything about this matter, I beg him, for -his own sake, to speak now. Do not let any school-boy notion against -telling of another keep anyone silent. This is a very grave affair, and -it is your _duty_ to tell whatever you know about it.” - -As the professor paused, Baum lifted his head and took a step forward, -but the professor did not see him, and a threatening look from -Henderson made him drop his eyes and keep silence. - -“So,” said the professor sadly, “you all deny any knowledge of this -thing? Boys, you don’t know how heartily I wish that I could believe -you, but I am sorry to say that there is evidence against some of you, -and some of you have not given your teachers reason to put implicit -faith in your statements. I sincerely hope, however, that in this case -you have told the truth. You will remain here until I return.” - -He left the room, closing the door after him. - -The boys did not talk much after his departure. Henderson tried to -laugh the matter off, but no one responded to his flippant remarks, -and, after a little, he sauntered to the window and stood there looking -out in silence. - -Meantime, the professor questioned Crawford, but, like the others, he -steadily denied any knowledge in regard to the affair. - -“You may join the others in the class-room,” said the professor, and, -as Crawford left the office, he turned to Freeman. Freeman’s face was -pale and disturbed, and as he stood before the professor his eyes were -downcast, and he looked as if he might himself be the guilty one. - -“Freeman, will you answer truthfully the questions that I am going to -ask you?” said the professor. - -He was feeling greatly disheartened, for he did not believe that the -boys that he had questioned were all of them innocent or ignorant, yet -every one had declared himself so. - -“Yes, sir.” Freeman’s voice was low, and he did not look up as he -answered. - -“Do you know who called out the wrong order to Company B last Thursday?” - -“No, sir.” - -“Do you know who threw the cracker at Company D yesterday?” - -“No, sir.” - -“Have you any knowledge whatever about these doings--who suggested -them, or who had any part in carrying them out?” - -Lower yet dropped the boy’s head, and his voice was almost inaudible, -but again the answer was “No, sir.” - -The professor’s tone changed then. There was a ring of contempt in it -as he said curtly:-- - -“You may go.” And Freeman went. - -Then the professor turned to Clark. - -“Clark,” he said, sadly, “I can forgive anything sooner than a lie. -Will you tell me the truth?” - -“If I can, sir. I will certainly tell you nothing _but_ the truth,” -replied the boy. His eyes met his teacher’s as boldly as Henderson’s -had done, but with a very different expression in their clear depths. - -The professor gave a sigh of relief. He was skilled in reading boys’ -faces, and he felt instinctively that he could trust this boy. - -“Tell me what you know about this miserable business,” he said. - -“I know very little,” replied Clark. “I had been afraid that there -might be trouble because of the strong feeling in regard to the prizes; -and while Company D was drilling, I saw a lot of the rougher fellows -whispering together. Then I saw one of them leave his seat and speak -to a boy--not a high-school boy I am sure, certainly not a Central -boy--and give him something, and then this boy walked to the back of -the stand. He waited a moment, and then I saw him light a match, and -it flashed across my mind what he was going to do. I ran across to try -to stop him, but the stand was so crowded that I couldn’t reach him -in time. He saw me coming, and I think that that made him throw the -cracker before he was quite ready, and maybe that is why he threw it -as he did, so that it did not explode towards the boys.” - -“He was gone, I suppose, before you could get to him?” said the -professor. - -“Yes, he disappeared. I think he dropped from the back of the seats to -the ground.” - -“Should you know him if you should see him again?” - -“I cannot tell, sir,” replied Clark. - -The professor mused for a few minutes, then he asked, “Can you tell -me the name of the boy who talked with this fellow, and gave him -something?” - -Clark hesitated. - -“I know who it was, Professor,” he said at last, “but the boys of -section D have more than once accused me of telling tales, though I -have never once done so. In this case I think that you ought to know -who this boy was; but, sir, won’t you try to find out some other way -first? If you fail to find out by other means, I cannot refuse to tell -you, but please do not ask me now.” - -“Very well, my boy, I will not ask you to-day, but I think likely it -will be necessary for me to ask you again later. I want to thank you, -Clark, for what you have told me. It is a relief to question a boy upon -whose word I can rely. I need not ask you to keep silence as to what -has passed this morning. I know you will do so.” - -He rose, and held out his hand, and Clark grasped it and departed with -a breath of relief that that ordeal was over. - -Crawford, Henderson and Freeman left the school together, but Freeman -turned off at the first cross-street. He was in no mood for Crawford’s -careless gaiety and Henderson’s sneers and flings. He was going along -with his hands in his pockets and his eyes on the ground, when, -turning a corner, he almost ran into his cousin. He would have passed -on without a word, but Clark put his arm affectionately across his -shoulders, and fell into step with him. - -“I was just going around to your house, Ray, to see if you would go -with me for a tramp over the hills,” he said; “I don’t feel like -settling to work to-day, and I don’t believe you do. Come on--won’t -you?” - -“Oh, I don’t know,” said Freeman, wearily. - -“Don’t you feel equal to it?” Clark asked. - -“Yes, I’m well enough; ’tisn’t that,” replied the boy. - -Clark thought that he looked very far from well, but he had his reasons -for urging his request. - -“You go on home, then, and tell Edith, so she won’t be worrying about -you, and I’ll go home and get some luncheon to take along with us, and -then I’ll stop for you. We can take the cars up to the end of the line, -and walk the rest of the way.” - -“Well, I don’t care. Suppose I might as well go as to mope ’round at -home,” said Freeman, and with a cheery “That’s good, I’ll be at your -house within twenty minutes,” Clark hurried away. - -It was cool and restful in the open car, and Clark, seeing that his -cousin was disinclined to talk, left him to his thoughts, with only a -word now and then. Even after they left the car, and struck into the -woods, they spoke but little. - -Clark led the way to a cool, shady spot where he knew there was a -spring of clear, cold water. - -“There!” he said, “sit there and rest, Ray. That big tree trunk makes a -splendid support for a tired back. I brought some lemons and sugar, and -now I’m going to make some lemonade with this spring water. It’s almost -as cold as ice. You can take out the rest of the stuff while I’m gone.” - -But when he returned with his kettle of lemonade, the lunch-basket -stood, unopened, where he had left it, and his cousin sat with his eyes -on the distant hills--his thoughts evidently far away. Clark made no -remark, but set out the luncheon himself. - -“Come now, pitch in, Ray,” he said, “I’m as hungry as a bear, and I -hope you are too. I don’t want to have anything to lug home but the -basket and kettle. Here--try my lemonade,” and he filled a glass, and -passed it to his cousin. - -“I’m not hungry,” objected Freeman, but Clark laughed at him. - -“Well, you ought to be. Take hold and keep me company, else I shall be -ashamed of my healthy appetite.” - -With merry talk and gay jokes he beguiled Freeman out of his despondent -mood, and presently the little fellow found himself eating and -drinking, and felt much the better for it. When the meal was finished, -Clark threw himself down on the grass, and again a silence fell between -the two. Clark was wondering how he could win his cousin’s confidence, -and Freeman had fallen again into troubled thought. - -“Ray, you don’t look happy,” said Clark, suddenly. - -“Happy!” echoed the other, “I’m too miserable to live.” - -“Can’t you tell me all about it, Ray?” said Clark, in a voice so full -of sympathy, that, in spite of himself, Ray’s eyes filled with tears, -but he choked them back. - -“I’ve nothing to tell,” he said, coldly. - -Silence again, and once again Clark broke it. - -“Ray,” he said, “do you remember your father?” - -Freeman looked up in surprise at the question. - -“Yes, I remember him well,” he said. “I was eight, you know, when he -died. Oh, Stanley, I _wish_ my father had lived. I believe I’d be a -better fellow to-day, if he had.” - -“I remember him so well,” said Clark, slowly. “Mother used to tell me -stories about him when he was a boy. He was her twin brother, you -know, and she was as devoted to him as Edith is to you. I used to think -that if I could ever be such a boy as Uncle Raymond was, I should be -about right.” - -Freeman’s eyes were shining now. He had forgotten all about himself, -and was thinking only of the father whose death he had never ceased to -mourn. - -“Yes,” he said eagerly, “almost the first thing I can remember is -walking in the street with him, and feeling so proud because he was so -grand and handsome, and even now, it seems to me that he must have been -nobler and finer than most men. It makes me proud to think I bear his -name.” - -“Raymond,” said Clark, earnestly, “are you bearing it so that he would -be proud of _you_--if he were here now?” - -The boy threw himself down, and burying his face in his hands, broke -into bitter sobs. - -“Oh, no, Stanley, no,” he cried; “I’m ashamed--ashamed, when I think -how I’ve dragged his dear name in the dirt. Oh, what _shall_ I do, what -shall I do!” - -The agony of shame and bitter sorrow in that woeful cry, wrung his -cousin’s heart. He laid his hand lovingly on the bowed head as he -said:-- - -“Turn right about, Ray, and make a new beginning. Determine that from -this time on you will never do or say one thing that you would be -ashamed to have Uncle Raymond know.” - -“Oh, but you don’t know how bad I’ve been. Why, Stanley, I lied to -Prof. Keene this very morning. I _did_ know about that cracker. I -carried the message from Henderson to Baum, myself.” - -“I knew you did, Ray.” - -Freeman sat upright and stared in blank amazement. - -“_How_ did you know it?” he said. - -“Perhaps I ought to say I guessed it, for of course I did not know -_what_ message you carried to Baum, but I saw Henderson speak to you, -and then I saw you go to Baum, and I thought you gave him something. -Afterward, when I saw him hand something to the rascal that fired -that cracker, I guessed at once that Henderson had sent you to do the -abominable errand for him.” - -“Did you tell all this to the professor?” questioned Ray. - -“No, Ray, I gave the professor no names, but I may have to tell him -about Baum. I cannot tell him about you.” - -Freeman’s head went down on his hands again and he groaned out:-- - -“That isn’t all, either, Stanley. It was I that snapped the marble that -broke Raleigh’s glasses, and I lied about that, too.” - -“Did you do that, Ray? I was afraid it was you, but I hoped I was -mistaken. Why didn’t you own up when Mr. Horton gave you the chance? -He wouldn’t have been hard on you. He knew it was an accident,” said -Clark. - -“But it wasn’t, Stanley. At least, I meant the marble to hit Raleigh’s -head, though of course, I didn’t think of his glasses. I’ve had a hand -in all the mischief that has been done in the room these last two -terms, and I’ve lied like a trooper right straight through it all. -Stanley--I don’t believe I can _help_ lying now.” - -“Nonsense, Ray!” Clark spoke sternly, now. “Don’t be so weak as to give -up trying to make a man of yourself. I tell you, Ray, your father’s -son _must_ be a true, honorable man. You have to take his place in the -world--fill his place to your mother and Edith.” - -“Oh I wish I could, Stanley. You don’t know how much I wish it -sometimes. You think I don’t try, but I do. Lots of times I’ve made -up my mind that I would break with Crawford and all that lot, and -then he’d come and coax me to go for a drive or a sail, and I’d -give in and go and do anything they wanted me to, though I knew all -the time I was breaking mother’s heart and Edith’s. I’m just a weak -good-for-nothing--I never shall amount to anything in the world,” he -added, hopelessly. - -“Raymond,” said Clark, solemnly, “I believe that you have come to -a turning-point in your life. You’ve been going down hill--you -acknowledge it. Now, if you will, you can turn right about, and go up. -It will be hard at first, I know, but I’ll stand by you, and Hamlin -will too, I’m sure, and when Gordon and the rest see that you mean to -do the right thing, they’ll back you up too.” - -“Oh, Stanley, I wish I could. I do so wish I could,” cried the boy. -“But you forget about the drill. Prof. Keene will find out that I lied -to him, and he’ll expel me--and mother”--he broke off, and groaned. - -“Ray, if things at school could be made all right for you, would you -really break with Crawford and that crowd, and try to live down this -year’s doings?” - -“Oh, I would, I would so gladly,” cried the boy, “but it can’t be. It -can’t be made right about the drill.” - -“It can in one way, Ray. If you will go to Prof. Keene and tell him -what you have told me, and how sorry you are for it all, I’m sure he -will forgive you.” - -Freeman fairly gasped. “Go to the professor? Oh, I never could in the -world!” he said, “and Henderson--he vowed he’d kill me if I told a -soul, and you must never let him know that I’ve told you, Stanley.” - -“Ray, you _must_ go to the professor. He told me that he was determined -to get to the bottom of the affair, and what he sets out to do, he -does. He suspects Henderson, I am sure, and I believe that he will -ferret out the whole business. Then you would be punished _sure_; -but if you go and confess of your own accord, it will make all the -difference in the world to him; I am certain of it.” - -“But Henderson, Stanley. I’ve no right to tell on him,” said the boy. - -“I think you have, in such a serious business as this. I think he -deserves heavy punishment. But, Ray, you need not mention his name. You -can tell what you did without implicating anyone else. Oh, Ray, do it. -Your father would tell you to do it, if he could speak to you.” - -Freeman turned his face away, and sat silent for many minutes. When he -spoke again, his voice was low and firm. - -“I’ll do it, Stanley,” he said, “but I must do it right away. Will you -come with me?” - -“Gladly,” and without another word, Clark picked up the basket and led -the way homeward. - -An hour later, Professor Keene was informed that two boys wanted to -speak to him, and going down to his library, found Clark and Freeman -awaiting him there. Clark stayed only until Freeman’s confession was -made; then he quietly left the room and waited on the sidewalk for his -cousin. - -It was a long time that he had to wait. Indeed, it was nearly dark -before Freeman joined him, and the two walked on together in a silence -that Clark dared not break and Freeman could not. - -“Not going home, Ray?” Clark said, inquiringly, as his cousin turned -another way. - -“I must see Mr. Horton before I go home,” Freeman answered. “I told the -professor I would.” - -Mr. Horton was quite as much surprised as the principal had been, -when he heard what Freeman had to say to him; but he, too, was very -kind, and most heartily glad to know that this one, at least, of -his troublesome pupils would henceforth cease to be a trial in the -class-room. - -When Freeman left Mr. Horton’s house, he looked worn and weary, yet -there was an expression of relief--of peace even, in his pale face. -He looked as if he had laid down a heavy burden that he had long been -bearing; and this, indeed, was just what he had done. - -“Now I can go home,” he said. “But, oh, Stanley, I can’t be thankful -enough that you persuaded me to own up to it all. You saved me from -being suspended, if not expelled, for Professor Keene and Mr. Horton -had found out all about it.” - -“Is that so?” exclaimed Clark, in surprise. “Why, how had they found it -out so quickly?” - -“Mr. Horton sat where he could see both Henderson and our fellows in -the bleachers.” - -“Queer that the boys didn’t see him,” said Clark, wonderingly. - -“His eyes were troubling him, and he wore dark glasses that day. I -suppose that’s why we didn’t notice him. And, Stanley, he even knew -that I threw the marble that smashed Raleigh’s glasses, and if I hadn’t -acknowledged it to-night, he was going to call me up before the school -next Monday. So you see, Stanley, I owe it all to you that I am to be -let off so easily.” - -“Without punishment, Ray?” questioned Clark. - -Freeman’s sensitive face flushed, even in the darkness, as he answered -in a voice that he vainly tried to steady, “No--I’ve got to make -acknowledgment before the whole school, and apologize to Mr. Horton.” - -Clark flung his arm affectionately across the boy’s shoulders. - -“It will be a tough job for you, Ray, but I’m sure you’ll brace up and -be a man about it; and if you do it in manly fashion, no fellow that -amounts to anything will ever cast it up to you again.” - -Freeman made no reply, and presently, at his own gate, he bade his -cousin “good-night,” adding only, “I’ll never forget this day, Stanley.” - -Before Freeman slept, he had to tell his story once more, to his mother -and Edith; but he knew them too well to shrink from their verdict, -and he knew, too, that they would but too freely forgive and forget -all his wrong-doing in the gladness of the assurance that henceforth -he would do his best to make up to them for all that he had made them -suffer. - - - - -CHAPTER X. A PUBLIC APOLOGY. - - -The interest and excitement over the drill had by no means died out -when the school assembled on Monday morning. Nothing else was discussed -by the pupils who were there early, and all sorts of reports as to the -punishment of those who had been guilty of such flagrant misdeeds were -current. - -Eager eyes watched for the appearance of Henderson and the members of -his company, but when nine o’clock struck, none of them had been seen, -and Freeman’s seat was also vacant. - -Crawford did not appear until the last moment, and then he dropped into -his seat with an evident desire to avoid notice. - -Mr. Horton looked grave and troubled, and his brief morning prayer was -so full of deep feeling that it impressed even the most careless of his -pupils. As soon as the opening exercises were over, he told the class -to form in line and march to the hall, and much more silently than -usual, and in perfect order, the boys passed up to the hall, where, in -a few minutes, the whole school was assembled. - -All the teachers except Professor Keene were on the platform, and every -face was grave and sad. - -Never had those nine hundred boys and girls gathered there on an -occasion like this, and never had such a breathless silence reigned in -any of their gatherings as reigned now during the few moments while -they awaited the appearance of the principal. - -They had not long to wait. He came upon the platform, followed by -Freeman and eight of the members of Company C, but Henderson was not -among them. - -Professor Keene’s words to the school were very brief, but very grave -and earnest. Then he turned to the boys on the platform, and gave them -such a severe reprimand as he had never before given in public to any -of his pupils. - -Turning again to the assembled school, he said: “To perform such a duty -as this, is almost as hard for me as for those whom I am obliged thus -publicly to reprimand, but I am very glad to be able to add that every -one of these schoolmates of yours has made to me private acknowledgment -of his wrong-doing, and has promised henceforth to do his duty in -the school, and to try, by his conduct in the future, to efface from -all our memories the dishonorable doings of last week; and similar -acknowledgment will now be made before us all.” - -As the professor took his seat, Freeman stepped forward. His face was -colorless, and his voice so low and husky that only those near the -platform could hear him at first. Then he caught sight of Clark’s -face, full of loving sympathy and encouragement. He seemed to gather -strength from that look, and drawing himself up, he made a frank, manly -apology to his teachers and to the school, and earnestly declared that -it should be his purpose in the future to do his duty in the school as -faithfully as he possibly could. As he dropped into the nearest chair, -the professor held out his hand, and said in a low tone, “You did well, -Freeman, and I am sure that you will live up to what you have promised.” - -Baum was the next to speak, and perhaps to no boy in the school could -the ordeal have been more trying than to him. He was one of the most -silent of boys, never speaking unless spoken to, and then replying in -the fewest possible words. He never originated any mischief in the -school-room, and would certainly not have done what he did at the -drill, but for his intense and bitter mortification over his blunder, -and Henderson’s angry, scathing censure before the company. Desperate -over all this, he snatched at the opportunity to redeem himself in his -captain’s estimation, without stopping to think about the right and -wrong of the services required of him. - -But in the two days past, he had had time to think the matter over, and -he was sincerely ashamed now of what he had done. As he stood there -facing the school his tongue clove to the roof of his mouth, and his -heart beat so that he could scarcely breathe, while the perspiration -stood in great drops on his forehead. - -“Go on, Baum,” said the professor, in a low tone, and the boy burst -out, “I don’t know how to speak, boys, but if I should talk all day, -I couldn’t begin to tell you how I despise myself for what I did, and -for lying about it afterwards. If I ever cut up so again, hope I may be -shot.” - -Had the boys dared, they would have given a hearty cheer for Baum, but -they knew better than to attempt it; but when, feeling sure that he had -made a fool of himself, he dropped into his seat with flushed face and -trembling hands, he had really risen many degrees in the estimation of -his classmates--though he would not have believed it had any one told -him so. - -The other seven boys made their apologies with more or less sincerity, -and then the classes were sent to their separate rooms. But the intense -feeling of the morning had unfitted them for study or recitation, and -both teachers and scholars were glad when the bell gave the signal for -recess. - -“Say, Gordon, let’s go and speak to Baum. He came out like a man in -the hall this morning,” said Hamlin. “There’s too good stuff in him to -be wasted on that rough crowd he goes with.” - -“That’s what I was thinking this morning,” said Gordon, as he followed -Hamlin. Baum was leaning against the fence watching the various groups. -He looked surprised when the two boys approached him, and when they -stopped and spoke to him, his plain face lighted up with pleasure. To -be thus publicly sought out by the captain and lieutenant of the prize -company was an honor that Baum knew how to appreciate, and from that -hour he ceased to find pleasure in the companionship of the Antis, and -privately resolved that, if possible, his name should be on the list of -L. A. O.’s next quarter. - -“Where’s Freeman?” asked Hamlin, as he and Gordon joined Clark. - -“He’s gone home. Horton told him to. He was not fit to come to school -to-day, anyhow, but he wanted to be in the hall this morning,” answered -Clark. - -“He spoke well there,” said Hamlin, “and it must have been an awful -hard thing for him to do.” - -“So he did,” said Gordon, “and,” he added, “I hope that you and he will -both join the L. A. O.’s next fall. We want your help, Clark.” - -Clark was so taken by surprise, that for a moment he could not speak, -and in that moment Gordon and Hamlin passed on. - -“I’m glad you said that, Gordon,” Hamlin said, as soon as they were -out of hearing; “Clark deserves it, and if the other fellows in the -society will only treat him as they ought, he’ll be glad enough to join -us, I know, and he’ll be a big help, too. There won’t be more than one -meeting of the society this term, will there?” - -“That’s all,” answered Gordon, “and I want to give all the Antis one -more chance to join us. They are subdued now, and some of them, I -think, might join if we ask them now--but if we wait till fall, they -will have gotten over all this, and perhaps, be as bad as ever.” - -“I’ve not much faith in Green’s promises,” said Hamlin. - -“Nor I,” said Gordon. “He looked to me as if he apologized to escape -being expelled, and not because he was really sorry for having had a -hand in this business.” - -“They say Henderson has cleared out. Have you heard anything about it, -Gordon?” - -“I heard so. Somebody said his father was so furious over his disgrace -that he had turned him out of doors.” - -“Well, it’s a bad business,” said Hamlin, “but one thing I’m sure of, -and that is, that there’ll be a heap less trouble in section D next -year if Henderson is not here.” - -“I think so, too, though if Crawford is here there’s sure to be trouble -enough.” - -“Yes, he and Green are a bad team. I hope Freeman will keep away from -them now.” - -“Clark thinks he will,” said Hamlin. - -“I hope he’s right,” replied Gordon; “I believe there’s good stuff in -little Freeman.” - -The school year was nearly ended now, and for the next two weeks -written examinations were held almost every day. - -When the last reports were given out, the L. A. O.’s all stood well, -and some had excellent records. Clark and Gordon each had a hundred for -the quarter, while Henderson and one or two others were well up in the -nineties; but in spite of all this, the class record was a very poor -one. - -At the last meeting of the L. A. O.’s, this was the first subject -discussed. Parliamentary methods had not, as yet, been introduced into -these meetings to any extent, and all the discussions were perfectly -free and informal. - -It was Raleigh who began. “I’m about sick of this old school,” he began -gloomily. “Just see how we’ve worked and dug these last two terms, and, -in spite of it all, section D stands no higher than it did the first -quarter. We’re still at the bottom of the heap, and still known in the -city as the ‘tough section.’ I’ve made up my mind to cut it all next -year and go to a private school. My father says I may.” - -“And my father says I must,” said Bates, who had long since joined the -L. A. O.’s. “After the doings at the drill, he said I shouldn’t come -back here next year.” - -“Oh, come, now, fellows, that’s too mean--to back out that way,” said -Hamlin. “My father told me I could go somewhere else, if I wanted to, -and I said, ‘No, sir-e-e! I’m not going to desert the old Central in -that fashion.’ I’m coming back next year, and I’m going to do my best -to make D the finest section in the school.” - -“Good for you, Hamlin,” said Gordon’s clear, quiet voice. “My father -was a high school-boy, and he says that in his time the school stood -higher than any private school in the city, both as to scholarship and -character. I mean to come back next year, and do all I can to bring the -reputation of the school up to that point again.” - -“But we _can’t_ do it,” grumbled Raleigh. “See how it is now. After all -our hard work, a dozen mean, lazy cubs have spoiled our class record, -and, worse than that, made section D the talk of the town.” - -“I know--it has been mighty rough on us this year,” admitted Gordon; -“but, Raleigh, we won’t have quite so much to fight next year. -Henderson won’t be here, and I hope we can win over most of the Antis, -and break up their society altogether. Freeman, I’m sure, will join us, -and I reckon Baum will, and Ridley. There won’t be so many of the tough -fellows left, and they’ve all had a lesson that I think they’ll not -have forgotten by next fall.” - -“Henderson won’t be back, of course,” said another, “but Crawford will, -and Green and Coyle, I suppose, and they can keep us from making any -decent class record.” - -“Crawford has behaved himself since he came back,” said Hamlin quickly, -“and nobody need say anything against his scholarship now. He came near -a hundred this last report.” - -“He does well enough in class,” admitted Raleigh rather reluctantly, -“but he and Henderson have put the Antis up to all sorts of tricks this -last quarter. They didn’t deserve the marks they got for deportment.” - -“I admit all that, Raleigh,” said Gordon, “but, as I said before, the -Antis have had a pretty severe lesson, and I can’t believe that they’ll -dare to do much to make trouble next year; and they’re most all bright -enough, so, if they _do_ make up their minds to work--I mean, if we -can any way arouse their ambition and awaken a feeling of pride in -the section and the school--we can make a splendid record without any -question.” - -“Ambition!” echoed Raleigh scornfully. “I’d like to see Green or Coyle -show any pride or ambition in the school.” - -“Well, I hope you will see it. Stranger things than that have -happened,” said Gordon, and Hamlin added:-- - -“_I’ve_ too much pride to be willing to give up the fight, and let -half a dozen mean fellows run the section and ruin it. I know that -both Professor Keene and Mr. Horton are heartily on our side, and I’m -pretty sure that if Green or Crawford or any of the rest of that set -should undertake to cut up as they have done this year, they’ll find -themselves bounced without much ceremony, and I do hope that all you -nice fellows will make up your minds to come back and help us make such -a record next year as the Central has never had yet.” - -“We never could beat A section, no matter how hard we might work,” said -one. - -“Pooh! Don’t you believe it,” replied Hamlin. “_I’m_ not going to admit -that a girl’s section can go ahead of us, if we really set out to win.” - -“Well, you see they’ve got first rank, and it’s a sight easier for -them to hold it than for us to win it away from them,” said Reed. -“Possession is nine points of the law, you know.” - -“There spoke our future chief justice,” laughed Hamlin, for Reed’s -predilection for the study of the law was well known. “But the girls -of section A will find themselves ousted from their possession of first -rank in the Central next year, or I miss my guess.” - -When this last meeting of the L. A. O.’s adjourned, Gordon and Hamlin -felt pretty well assured that all the members except Bates would return -in the fall, and they discussed between themselves many and various -plans for the enlargement and improvement of the society the coming -year. - -The graduating class was so large that it was impossible for the -members of it to take part in the commencement exercises. Once or twice -in recent years, one member had been selected to deliver an oration, or -in some other way to represent the class, but it was a difficult matter -to select one from among so many without awakening much hard feeling, -and so now the class took no part in the exercises except to sit on the -platform and receive their diplomas from the hand of some distinguished -man who had been invited to honor the occasion. This distinguished -gentleman, or some other, was also asked to address the graduates, and -such was the program on this year. - -But, as the two schools numbered over twelve hundred, they and the -friends and relatives of the graduates made a very large assemblage, so -that the exercises were always held in one of the great opera houses. - -As our boys in section D were to be themselves among the graduates the -next year, they were all present on this occasion, it being to them in -the nature of a rehearsal. - -The girls in their white dresses and ribbons, with the beautiful -flowers they carried, made a pretty picture on the platform; but -this time, our boys were more interested in the other portion of the -graduating class. They watched the boys as they went forward to receive -their diplomas, and wondered if they themselves would be able to make -as graceful a bow as some did, or if they should be as stiff and -awkward as other poor fellows who became sadly embarrassed when they -found themselves in such a conspicuous position. - -“Now for a good time,” said Hamlin, as he left the opera house when the -exercises were over. “Where are you going to spend the vacation, Clark?” - -“Right here,” said Clark. - -“No!” exclaimed the other. “That’s too bad, Clark. You need a rest, and -it’s awful hot here in summer.” - -“Expect it is,” replied Clark, “but I’ve no choice, Hamlin. Where are -you going?” - -“Up in the mountains. We have a summer cottage in the Catskills. I wish -you’d go up with me for two or three weeks, Clark--can’t you?” - -“No, I can’t possibly, Hamlin, though it’s awfully good of you to ask -me,” Clark replied. “But I hope you’ll have a grand time, and come home -in prime condition for work.” - -“I’ll try to,” laughed the other, “and don’t you forget that we count -on you as an L. A. O. next year,” and with a friendly hand-grasp, he -said, “good-bye,” and ran to overtake Gordon. - -A day or two later, the doors of the Central high school were closed, -and the boys and girls gathered there no more, but some at the -seashore, and some in the mountains, they sought rest and pleasure, -while many others--unable to leave the city, soon found themselves -looking forward to September, when they might take up again the school -duties that, after all, have so much that is bright and pleasant, -mingled with the hard and tiresome round. - - - - -CHAPTER XI. NEW PUPILS IN SECTION D. - - -School reopened the second Monday in September, and long before nine -o’clock the boys and girls began to gather about the steps, waiting for -the janitor to open the doors. - -Hamlin had overtaken Clark and Freeman, and when the three reached the -schoolhouse gate they found a goodly number there before them, and many -voices called out greetings, especially to Hamlin. - -“There’s a newcomer,” Clark said; “up there near the door.” - -“The chap with the rosy locks?” answered Hamlin. “Yes, he’s new, but he -seems to be making himself very much at home. He’s talking away with -the old fellows as if he had known them all his life. There! Jimmy’s -opening the doors. Let’s wait here a bit. I don’t care to hustle -through that crowd.” - -“Evidently, he of the rosy locks doesn’t either,” remarked Clark, -noticing that the red-haired boy had not passed in with the throng, but -remained on the upper step with two or three other boys. - -“Look at him, will you! Well, if he isn’t a cheeky cad!” exclaimed -Hamlin a moment later, as the boy they were watching pulled off his hat -and made a low bow to a group of girls passing to the other door. Among -these girls was Gordon’s sister, and Grace Harlan, a cousin of Hamlin’s. - -“I’d like to punch his head for him. He doesn’t know those girls--not -one of them spoke to him,” Hamlin added. - -“Wonder if he’ll be in our section,” said Clark, as the three boys -passed up the steps. - -“Hope not,” replied Hamlin. “We don’t want any of his sort in section -D.” - -A shout of welcome met them as they entered their own class-room, and -Clark felt happier than he had ever felt before in that school-room as -one and another called out a friendly greeting. Several took pains to -speak to Freeman, whose sensitive face showed his appreciation of the -kindness. - -“Wonder if Green isn’t coming back,” said Gordon, noticing his vacant -seat. - -“No,” volunteered Coyle, “he’s gone to work.” - -Gordon and Hamlin exchanged glances of satisfaction at this -information, and both thought, “One less of the Antis.” - -Green had been one of the most disagreeable boys in the class, and -very few felt sorry that he would come among them no more. Several -other seats were vacant, but only one of the L. A. O.’s had failed to -return. That one was Bates, who had gone to boarding-school. - -Soon after the opening exercises were over, Prof Keene appeared with -four new boys, and Hamlin threw a doleful glance at Clark, for the -first of the new-comers was the red-headed boy whom they had seen on -the steps. The second was a tall, handsome lad of perhaps seventeen, -and the other two were ordinary looking boys of ordinary ability, not -destined to have much influence one way or the other on the standing of -section D. - -Of course the school could not get into smooth running order that first -day, and the recess was prolonged to nearly twice its usual length. -A group of the L. A. O.’s quickly got together in a corner of the -playground, and, as Hamlin, Gordon, Raleigh and Sherman were among -the number, the talk soon drifted to the subjects dear to all their -hearts--the L. A. O. and the standing of D section. - -“Say, fellows,” Hamlin began, “with Green and Henderson gone, seems to -me we might get the few Antis left to join us now. If they’d only do -their best, we could easily put old section D at the top this year.” - -“There’s Crawford left--and Coyle,” remarked one, doubtfully. - -“Coyle’s a bad lot, I know, but he’s only one; and somehow, I’ve a -notion that Crawford has come back with different ideas, this term,” -said Gordon. - -“Why--what makes you think that?” questioned Raleigh. - -“I don’t know really,” answered Gordon, thoughtfully, “only somehow -there’s a different air about him. There he is over there, now.” - -Every eye in the group followed Gordon’s glance to where Crawford stood -leaning against the fence. There was no one near him, and something in -his attitude, and in the expression of his face, convinced more than -one of the boys that Gordon was right, and that Crawford was changed -somehow. - -“Suppose there’d be any use in asking him to join the L. A. O.?” -questioned Sherman, after a moment’s silence. - -“I should say ask him, by all means. He can’t do more than refuse,” -said Gordon; “and we must ask the new fellows, of course. Hamlin, will -you interview Rosy or the black-eyed chap?” - -“Neither. I’ll take the other two fellows,” said Hamlin, promptly. - -“All right, then I’ll see to the black-eyed fellow; and Sherman, you -might interview Rosy. I’m going to speak to Crawford, now.” - -Crawford looked greatly surprised as Gordon approached, and yet more -surprised when the latter made known his errand. He dropped his eyes, -the color mounted in his dark cheeks, and for a moment he was silent. -Then he looked Gordon full in the face and said slowly:-- - -“Do you really want me, Gordon?” - -“I certainly do, or I would not have asked you,” was the quiet reply. - -“And the other fellows?” questioned Crawford. - -“I think we shall all be glad to have you join us, Crawford,” said -Gordon. - -“Gordon--I don’t suppose you know what it is to be ashamed of yourself -through and through. I do--and I don’t enjoy the feeling.” There was -a ring of pain in Crawford’s voice as he spoke, and Gordon could not -question his sincerity. He held out his hand saying, heartily:-- - -“The best of us go wrong so often that we can’t afford to be hard on -anybody who is honestly sorry, Crawford. I want you on our side this -year to help us make the old Central proud of section D.” - -Crawford grasped the offered hand and then turned away without another -word, but Gordon felt that the look on his face was more eloquent than -any words could have been. - -When he went back to the group in the corner and reported his success, -some of the boys looked doubtful. They found it hard yet to believe -that Crawford was in earnest, but at least they were glad to be able to -hope that he would no longer lead the idle and troublesome element into -fresh mischief. - -“If Coyle could only be gotten rid of, now,” remarked Raleigh, “we -might hope to make a fine record this year, so far as deportment goes. -It remains to be seen what kind of students these new fellows are.” - -“That black-eyed chap looks as if he had brains,” remarked Reed. - -“Looks to me as if he thought he had the monopoly of brains,” put in -Hamlin. - -“He does have rather a high and mighty air,” said Sherman. “May be only -shyness, though. Some fellows put on airs like that when their hearts -are in their boots.” - -“_He_ isn’t troubled with shyness--anything but,” retorted Hamlin. - -“Neither is Rosy, for that matter,” remarked Clark laughingly. - -“You’re right there, Clark,” said Hamlin; “but there goes the bell. -Say, Gordon,” he added, as they moved towards the door, “can’t we have -a meeting of the L. A. O. to-morrow, to let these new fellows get an -idea of what we want to do this year?” - -“All right,” responded Gordon, “we’ll say after school to-morrow, then.” - -When, the next day, Gordon called the meeting to order, his face beamed -with satisfaction as he looked around and saw that almost the entire -section was present. The only exceptions were Coyle, Barber, one of his -special friends, and the black-eyed boy whom Gordon was to have invited -to join them. - -This was the first of these meetings at which Clark, Freeman or -Crawford had been present, but certainly no one in the room was more -interested than these three, who for such different reasons had -hitherto been absent. - -Gordon was usually very quiet and rather reserved, but he was very fond -of the Central high school, as his father had been before him, and he -had come back full of the desire that it should stand as high, if not -higher, this year, than in the old days when his father was so proud of -its reputation. So, to-day, he was so eager and so full of enthusiastic -plans for raising the standard of the class, and gaining for it first -rank in the school, that before long the other members of the L. A. O. -caught something of his spirit, and all sorts of plans and propositions -were made. It was unanimously resolved that every member should do his -very best in class, and that not even the drill or ball games should be -allowed to interfere with the great object. - -Three of the new boys were present at this meeting, but only Dixon, or -“Rosy,” as he was already dubbed in the class, made any remarks. He was -on his feet half a dozen times, asking questions, making suggestions, -or offering amendments. - -When the meeting was over, and all but Gordon and Hamlin had left -the room, the latter threw himself into a seat exclaiming, “Well, I -reckon we’ll get enough of that Rosy before the year is ended! He’s of a -retiring disposition, isn’t he?” - -Gordon laughed. “He won’t have so many questions to ask next time,” he -said. - -“Won’t? Don’t you believe it. He’ll _always_ have a raft of ’em to reel -off. He _may_ be a very nice chap, but deliver me from having anything -to do with any more of the sort. But how about his royal highness with -the black eyes? Wouldn’t he condescend to accept the invitation?” - -“No,” said Gordon quietly, though his face flushed at the question. - -“Oh, come, Gordon, you might as well out with it. Your face gives you -away. What did he say?” - -“Well,” said Gordon with a half laugh, “he drew himself up and looked -at me as if I were a toad or a snake, and remarked that he had come -here to study--not to fool away his time in clubs or any such nonsense, -and that he would thank me to leave him alone.” - -“Whew!” whistled Hamlin, “he’ll be pretty popular here, won’t he?” Then -he added, indignantly, “Well, if he _isn’t_ a cool customer! I reckon -he’ll _be_ let alone emphatically, hereafter.” - -“Yes,” said Gordon, “but there’s one good thing. If he’s a fine -scholar, and I fancy that he is, he’ll help the section that way, in -spite of himself; and certainly, that sort of a fellow won’t be cutting -up or getting others into mischief, so he won’t work _against_ the L. -A. O.” - -“That’s so,” answered Hamlin; “but what a chump he is to take such a -stand as that, and lose all the good times he might have here.” - -“Yes,” assented Gordon, “but see here, Hamlin, let’s not tell the other -fellows anything about this. It would turn them all against him, and I -don’t think he’s likely to make many friends anyhow.” - -“Evidently he does not care to make any,” said Hamlin. - -“It seems not, but you know if the fellows get set against him, some -of them will do their best to make it hot for him. You and I don’t -want to have any hand in that sort of thing, so we’ll keep mum about -this--shan’t we?” - -“Oh, I suppose so,” grumbled Hamlin. “I feel as if I’d like to kick him -myself, and I reckon most of the boys would feel the same way. We’ll -let his royal highness severely alone, since that’s his pleasure. By -the way, what _is_ his name, anyhow?” - -“Somebody said it was Everett St. John. Perhaps it’s on the strength of -his aristocratic name that he puts on so many airs,” replied Gordon. - -On the outer steps a group of boys stood talking and laughing--among -them, Rosy. He stepped forward, and slipped his arm familiarly through -Hamlin’s, as the latter came down the stairs with Gordon. - -“I say, Hamlin,” he began, not in the least disconcerted at Hamlin’s -straightening out his arm like a poker, “I wish you’d introduce me to -Grace Harlan. She’s a cousin of yours, isn’t she?” - -“_Miss_ Harlan is my cousin,” answered Hamlin coldly, “but I never -introduce boys to her except at her own request.” - -“Ho, ho, Rosy--got squelched that time,” snickered Coyle, as Hamlin and -Gordon passed on. - -“Oh, that’s nothing. I’ll get somebody else to introduce me. _Miss_ -Harlan is the prettiest girl I’ve seen in an age,” responded Rosy -serenely, while Hamlin was growling in Gordon’s ear, “Introduce him to -Grace, indeed! I think I see myself doing it.” - -Being a little late next morning, Hamlin took a short cut to school, -passing through a side street where he seldom went. He was going along -at a rapid pace when he saw Dixon come out of a door half-way down the -block. When Hamlin reached the place he glanced up at the still open -door. It was a low saloon. - -“Dear me,” he thought, “I wish that fellow had never come near the -Central. It was bad enough before, but now that I know that he goes -into such holes as that--what am I to do about it? He’ll probably get -other fellows in there, too. Wonder if I ought to tell Bobby.” - -But to “tell on a fellow,” even in a case like this, was very repugnant -to Hamlin. - -“I can’t do it yet a while,” he decided, “but I’ll keep a sharp eye on -him, and if I ever see him in such a place again, I’ll warn him that -I’ll report him unless he stops it.” - -Dixon was standing by the school gate, and greeted Hamlin with the -utmost cordiality, seeming not to notice the coldness with which the -other responded. It was impossible to freeze Dixon--he simply would not -be frozen. - -On this morning the regular recitations were to begin, and Gordon, -Clark and Hamlin were eager to hear the new boys recite, that they -might judge whether they would be helps or hindrances in that which -our boys were so anxious to accomplish this year--to make D the banner -section of the school. - -They knew that two other sections, at least, were as eager and as -determined as they to hold the first place, and one or two poor -scholars might bring the record down in spite of all that could be done -by others in the class. So eyes and ears were alert that morning in -section D. - -The first recitation was that of the Latin class. Clark had easily -held first rank in this, though Hamlin, Gordon and Sherman were all -excellent scholars. The lesson this morning was from Virgil, and -according to the usual custom, the class was seated, each boy standing -only during his own recitation. - -“Reed, you may begin,” Mr. Horton said, “and when you have read five -lines, the next may continue.” - -One after another, the boys rendered the lines, and, though some had -blundered, nobody had failed when it came to Clark. Clark never had -been known to fail in Latin translation. The others attended to his -recitation only because it was sure to be better than their own; but -to-day they wanted him to get through so that they might listen to -Everett St. John, who was the next in order. - -The lesson was from Virgil, and Clark’s lines ended with the words of -Æneas, which he translated thus:-- - -“By its own fortune, a tempest drove us, carried over different waters, -to the Libyan shores--if by chance, the name of Troy has come through -your ears. I am the pious Æneas, known by fame above the air, who carry -with me in my ship the Penates torn from the enemy. I seek Italy, my -country, and a race from greatest Jove.” - -As Clark took his seat, St. John rose and said coolly:-- - -“Those last lines were very roughly rendered, Mr. Horton. It is much -better this way:-- - -“A tempest, by its own chance, drove us, borne from ancient Troy (if, -perchance, the name of Troy has reached your ears), over various -waters, to the African shores. I am the pious Æneas, known by fame -above the sky, who bear with me, in my fleet, the Penates snatched from -the foe. I seek Italy, my fatherland, and an ancestry that sprang from -sovereign Jove.” - -Then, without noticing in the least the astonished and indignant -glances of the boys, who resented the criticism on Clark, not so much -because it was Clark, but because it was the finest Latin scholar in -the class, St. John proceeded with his own five lines, translating not -only very correctly, but into choice and elegant English. - -Mr. Horton’s face expressed his satisfaction at such an acquisition to -the classical department. He even forgot the rudeness shown to Clark, -who had come to be one of his favorite pupils, so greatly did he enjoy -the thought of teaching such a scholar, and he turned with a sigh to -the next boy, whose lame, halting sentences formed so great a contrast -to St. John’s. - -Nobody except the one reciting paid much attention then, until Dixon -arose. It was impossible to ignore Dixon anywhere. Already he had -succeeded in making both friends and enemies, and now the eyes of all -the class were fixed on him. - -“Good!” thought Gordon, as Dixon read smoothly on. “He won’t pull us -down, and if St. John’s as good in other things as he is in Latin, -he’ll help us up in spite of himself. Guess he’ll go ahead of Clark. -I’m sorry for Clark, though.” - -And much the same thoughts were in the minds of many of the boys when -the recitation was over. Slowly, but surely, the feeling that had been -so strong against Clark was dying out. Some few of the boys still stood -aloof from him, however, and recalled, at intervals, the charges made -against him early in the previous year. But Hamlin’s strong friendship -for him, and his own quiet, steady doing of his duty, and holding -himself apart, yet without any show of enmity or ill-feeling, had had -their effect upon his schoolmates, and most of them were ready now to -be friends with him; while all, whether friends or not, were proud of -his scholarship, and had come to look upon him as the leader of the -class in that line. So they were inclined to resent St. John’s arrogant -assumption of superiority, and to wish that Clark could “dig in and get -ahead of him,” as Reed expressed it. - -In mathematics it was much the same, though here Hamlin and Gordon -stood almost as high as Clark; would have stood quite as high, if they -had had Clark’s power of concentration and application. - -“I’ve _had_ to learn how to study,” he had said once to Hamlin. “If you -and Gordon had been obliged to do it, as I have, I shouldn’t be a bit -ahead of you.” - -With Everett St. John, it was not necessity, but the instinct of a -born student that gave him the power to grasp and master whatever he -studied. In the geometry class, his clear, concise demonstrations -awakened at once the despair and the admiration of most of the class, -while they aroused in our three boys an eager determination to work as -they never had worked before over those lines and angles. - -Gordon drew a long breath, as he joined Clark and Hamlin at recess. - -“Well, one thing is certain, and that is that St. John is bound to help -our record, if he keeps on as he has begun,” he said. - -“Yes, and carry off all the prizes, too,” grumbled Hamlin. - -“That’s so,” said Freeman, who was standing by. He spoke sadly, for -his only chance of a college education lay in his gaining one of the -scholarships offered as prizes to the senior class. - -“Well,” laughed Hamlin, “he may win all the scholarships, but he -certainly can go to but one college, so somebody else is bound to have -a chance.” - -“That reminds me,” said Clark, “I heard last evening that two new -scholarships had been offered.” - -“Where?” asked half a dozen voices. - -“One to Lehigh, and one to Jamestown College, I believe.” - -“Good!” said Hamlin. “That makes six scholarships, and if his royal -highness--Mr. Everett St. John--_should_ come out No. 1, as likely as -not he would not go to any college that offers us a scholarship. He’s -so high and mighty that he’d probably go only to the toniest and most -expensive college in the country.” - -“Rosy came out pretty well, too,” said Reed. - -“Yes, better than I thought he would,” said Gordon. “Anyway, I’m glad -that neither of ’em is likely to pull us down. I believe old section D -has a fair chance to come out No. 1 this year.” - -“Certainly looks like it,” responded Hamlin, “and nobody has worked -harder to bring it about than you have, Gordon.” - -“I’m so glad that Raleigh concluded to come back this year,” was all -Gordon answered. - -For several weeks things went smoothly in section D. Mr. Horton was -delighted, for a more orderly class-room could not be desired. Once in -a while, Coyle and Barber would try to start some mischief, but they -were in far too great a minority for anything of that sort to prosper. -By the first of November, they and St. John were the only members of -the class who were not also members of the L. A. O.; and to be a member -of the L. A. O. this year meant to be not only pledged to use all one’s -influence for good order in the class-room and gentlemanly deportment -in all places and at all times, but it also meant now to be fully -determined that no effort should be spared on the part of each member -to place section D at the head of the old Central. - -In short, Gordon and Hamlin had succeeded in imparting their -enthusiasm, in greater or less degree, to every boy in the class with -the exception of the three mentioned; and this enthusiasm received -fresh impetus at the weekly meetings of the L. A. O. - -Besides, the duller boys of the class were continually watched and -helped by the class leaders, and helped in such friendly fashion, and -so thoroughly, that their pride was not hurt, and a healthy ambition to -help themselves was being awakened in them. - -Decidedly the most unpopular boy in the class was Everett St. John, but -this fact troubled him not at all. So long as his schoolmates let him -alone, he cared not the least what they thought of him, and they _did_ -let him severely alone, for, after a week or two no one ever spoke -to him. Those who had ventured to do so had been met so coldly, not -to say rudely, that they had no desire to repeat the experience. But -however much they might dislike him, they could not fail to appreciate -and admire his ability. Never before had section D had such fine -recitations as St. John’s in Latin and English literature. - -The inevitable result was that those who had stood highest in the class -heretofore were stimulated to fresh effort, and soon found themselves -doing much better work than they had supposed themselves capable of -doing--to Mr. Horton’s great satisfaction. - -Nor was the spirit of ambition limited to section D. It spread to -other sections, and other teachers began to be encouraged by increased -application, and consequently, better recitations in their classes. - -It was a singular fact, that this most unusual improvement in the -spirit of the school should have been so largely due to a new scholar -who cared nothing whatever about the school, and was solely interested -in himself and his own work; but so it was. - - - - -CHAPTER XII. WHO SHALL BE CAPTAIN OF COMPANY C? - - -In October, there came a sudden stir of interest and excitement of a -different sort, namely, the appointment of Henderson’s successor in the -battalion. - -Gordon was now major, and Hamlin had taken his place as captain of -Company C. - -The appointments had heretofore been made by Prof. Keene, and the -liveliest interest was awakened when he announced that, this time, the -captain was to be elected by vote of the officers of the battalion and -all the members of Company C. - -No one was eligible for the captaincy except those members of the -senior class whose average during the previous years had been ninety -or more, and of these there were but eight, and of these, two--one of -whom was Clark--had not been in the battalion at all, and so of course -could not be candidates. The names of the remaining six were put on the -bulletin board, and Prof. Keene announced that the vote would be taken -after school on Friday of that week. - -Graham and Raleigh stood highest on the list, each having averaged -ninety-four for the previous years. Then came Griffin, the first -lieutenant of Company C, with an average of ninety-two; then Fry, Cole -and Edson, with averages of ninety-one and ninety. The last three -belonged to another section. - -Prof. Keene had supposed that the choice would lie between Graham and -Raleigh, and as he was perfectly willing that either should hold the -position, he had decided that the one that the boys preferred should -be captain. He had not imagined that any one of the other four would -be considered at all, and was wholly unprepared for the strong feeling -and sharp rivalry that was soon developed. Neither was he fully aware -of the character of some of the boys in Company C. There were a few -fine fellows in the company, but there were more who were idle and -indifferent to everything but “fun,” and a few who were really bad, and -who would not hesitate to sacrifice the best interests of the school -to carry out their own schemes. Some of these last had been friends of -Henderson, and these had by no means forgotten the occurrences at the -competitive drill. They resented Henderson’s enforced departure, and -the disgrace that had fallen upon the company rankled in their minds. -To these, the idea of having Graham or Raleigh for a captain was most -distasteful. - -Coyle was second lieutenant of Company C, and he and Barber, who -belonged to another company, quickly made up their minds that, if -possible, these two should be defeated on Friday. - -Monday was “drill day,” and when the drill was over, Coyle privately -asked all of Company C except the first lieutenant, who was a -particular friend of Graham’s, to stop and talk the matter over. The -discussion was held with closed doors, and a lively one it was. - -Coyle was the first speaker. - -“I say, fellows,” he began, eagerly, “we’ve got a chance now to choose -our captain, and I move that we boom Griffin. I, for one, don’t want -any such prig as Graham or Raleigh put over us. Griffin here is worth a -dozen such chaps.” - -All eyes were turned on Griffin as Coyle sat down, and somebody called, -“Speech, speech.” - -“I’m not much of a speechifier,” said Griffin, rising, “but I -appreciate the honor you have done me, and if I’m elected, I’ll do my -best to help you win the red ribbons next June.” - -Then Barber sprang up. - -“Griffin hasn’t got quite such high marks as those other fellows,” he -said, “but he’s no end better up in tactics, and I’d rather have him -for captain if he wasn’t.” - -Coyle started vigorous applause at this, but now another spoke up. - -“I haven’t a thing to say against Griffin,” he began. “He’s well up in -the drill, and understands the duties of a captain; but the same is -true of Graham, and I’m sure that most of the officers will vote for -him. I don’t believe we could elect Griffin.” - -“Oh, shucks! We can elect him if we all hang together,” cried Coyle, -springing to his feet again. “Now see here--there are twenty-two -officers, and in Company C there are forty men. Now if the company will -go solid for Griffin, even without a vote from a single officer, we -shall elect him by a big majority.” - -Carr, a boy with a quiet, resolute face, now rose and said quietly, -“I shall vote for Graham, because I believe that he can do more for -Company C than any other on the list.” - -Barber hissed then; whereupon another boy sprang up and cried, “I move -that any fellow that hisses be put out. If we can’t discuss this matter -like gentlemen, we’d better adjourn right now. Every fellow here has -a right to his own opinion, I take it--and I’ve just as much right to -vote for Graham as Barber has to vote for Griffin, and I intend to do -it.” - -Barber, seeing that the tide of feeling was with the last speaker, -jumped up, and, with a good-natured laugh, exclaimed, “Don’t lay that -little hiss up against me, boys. It was only a whistle that slipped up -on my front teeth.” - -The laugh that followed scored one for Barber and the candidate that he -favored. - -But Coyle’s quick eyes had been watching the faces of the boys, and now -he sprang up again. - -“It’s getting late,” he said, “and I move that we adjourn, and meet -again Wednesday after drill. That will give us all time to think the -matter over, and make up our minds whom we’ll vote for. But see here,” -as a general movement expressed the approval of the motion to adjourn, -“don’t forget that Griffin stands A No. 1 in tactics, and we all want -to win the gold medal and red ribbons next June.” - -“Three cheers for Coyle and Griffin,” shouted somebody, and in two -minutes the room was empty; but as the boys hurried homeward, the talk -was all about the election. - -Coyle and Barber were the last to leave the room. - -“I’d like to punch the heads of some of those fellows,” growled Coyle. -“If the company would only go solid for Griffin, it wouldn’t matter how -the officers voted.” - -“No, we’d have nearly two-thirds majority,” answered Barber, “and I’d -give something to see Graham and Raleigh defeated. I believe I care -more for that than to put Griffin in. They’re all so mighty high and -tony in section D this year, a fellow can’t have a bit of fun. Might as -well be in a reform school, and done with it.” - -“Right you are,” responded Coyle. “Gordon and Hamlin have managed -somehow to get hold of about all the section except you and me, and -they’ve set ’em all to digging. Not much like last year, is it? Who’d -ever have believed that Crawford would go over to the L. A. O.! He’s as -meek as Moses now-a-days.” - -“So he is,” echoed Barber, “an’ if we have Graham or Raleigh for -captain, the drill will be as bad as the school-room. They’ll make the -fellows toe the mark and be down on ’em like sixty for the least thing -wrong.” - -“We _just won’t have_ Graham or Raleigh,” cried Coyle, positively. “You -and I must see the fellows we’re sure of before to-morrow night, and -find some way of putting Griffin in.” - -“I don’t see how we’re going to do it, if some of the company vote for -Graham, and you see they will, from what they said to-day,” replied -Barber. - -“I see that they mean to now,” said Coyle, “but it does not follow that -they will be of the same mind next Friday. It’s our business to make -’em change their minds. Now go home and think hard, Barber, and I’ll -set my wits to work, and see if we can’t fix up some plan that will win -the day for ‘we, us and Company’ C,” said Coyle, as he stopped at his -own home. - -Usually Coyle was asleep two minutes after his head touched his -pillow, but that night he lay awake more than an hour or two, his -thoughts busy with plots and plans to accomplish his purpose. - -He was at Barber’s door soon after eight o’clock next morning, and -that young gentleman, swallowing the last of his breakfast with most -unhealthy rapidity, joined him in response to his impatient whistle. - -“I’ve thought of a way to spike Graham’s guns,” Coyle began, and while -his companion listened with eager interest, he proceeded to unfold his -scheme. - -“That’s fine,” Barber exclaimed, slapping Coyle on the shoulder, as -the latter ceased speaking. “I’m sure our crowd will catch on to that -little game, and I believe we can rope in most of the Grahamites -without much trouble.” - -Coyle looked pleased at the other’s hearty approval. - -“You and I must let the fellows we’re sure of into our scheme, and -then we’ll tell the doubtful ones enough to secure their votes, and no -more,” he said. - -Before school, at recess, and after school that day, Coyle and Barber -were busy boys. Barber gathered in a corner of the playground, at -recess, all the members of Company C whom he knew to be strongly in -favor of Griffin, and to them unfolded Coyle’s plan. - -Meantime, Coyle joined another group of the members of Company C. After -listening for a few minutes, to what one and another had to say, he -remarked casually, “I’ve been thinking it over, and I’d about made up -my mind to let Griffin go, and vote for Graham. He’s a prime fellow if -he is a little too stiff--but something I heard this morning made me -rather inclined to stick to Griffin.” - -“What was it you heard?” questioned several of the group. - -“Why, that Gordon and Hamlin are working for all they are worth, to get -self-government into the battalion.” - -“Self-government? What do you mean by that?” queried one, while all -listened for the reply. - -“Don’t you know how they manage in some of the military schools? The -boys elect a judge and jury from their own number, and if any boy -does anything contrary to rules, they try him and pronounce sentence -themselves, subject of course to the principal’s approval.” - -“Well, what’s the matter with that? We’d have it all in our own hands, -and we could make our punishments as light as we pleased,” laughed one. - -“Not much--if Graham or Raleigh was captain, and Gordon judge, as he -would be. Those fellows are both right under Gordon’s thumb, and he -thinks it’s a sin to smile in school hours. He’s crazy on the subject -of the reputation of the Central, and he’s got every fellow in our -section, except Barber and me--and his royal highness, St. John--to -work for honors. You can see how it will be if his candidate, Graham, -is elected--no more jolly times for Company C. All but three or four -of the officers are ready to back Gordon and Hamlin, whatever they -propose, and if they put their self-government scheme through, we -fellows in Company C, that like a bit of fun now and then, won’t have -any show at all. Cigarette smoking will be a capital crime, and if a -fellow happens to say ‘by ginger’ he’ll be in disgrace for a month. -_We’ll_ get no favors--you’ll see. It will be the fellows that dig into -Latin and geometry day and night, that will be favored, and those of us -that like to see a little of life and have a good time now and then, -will get sat upon every time.” - -“But are you sure that Graham favors this self-government scheme, -Coyle?” questioned one. - -“Heard Graham himself say to Hamlin that if he was elected, that’s the -thing he’d work for--another form of the L. A. O. they’re so proud of -in our section,” replied Coyle. - -“If that’s so, I’m inclined not to vote for Graham. How about Raleigh? -Is he of the same mind?” questioned another. - -“Like as two peas in a pod,” replied Coyle, promptly. - -“Well, then, I’ll vote for Griffin. He’s as good in the drill as either -of the others, and who cares for two or three credits less in his -average?” said a third. - -“_That_ for his average,” cried another, snapping his fingers. “This -is our last year in the old battalion, and I’d rather Company C would -carry off the prizes in the next annual drill than to come out number -one in the school myself.” - -“Well,” said Coyle, “You know Griffin can’t be beat as a drill-master, -and he’s a jolly good fellow besides, and not the one to be always -snooping around to see if a man happens to have a cigarette or a pack -of cards in his pocket. We don’t want a straight-laced parson like -Graham put over Company C. Why not all vote for Griffin and done with -it? I think it would be fine, anyhow, to carry the election against -Gordon’s candidate. Gordon thinks he’s a bigger man than Professor -Keene himself, and it would take him down a peg or two to see Griffin -put in place of his shadow, Alec Graham.” - -“’Twould be a good joke on Gordon, wouldn’t it!” remarked one. - -“Make him open his eyes a little.” - -“And show him that somebody else in the school besides himself has a -little influence,” added Coyle, cunningly fanning the flame that he saw -he had kindled. - -Before the bell rang, all in the group had agreed to vote for Griffin. -This made thirty so pledged, besides Griffin himself, Coyle and Barber, -and one of the other captains, thirty-four in all, which would give -Griffin the majority. Coyle and Barber were outwardly quiet, but -inwardly jubilant. - -The next morning, Coyle went to school with a new suggestion, over -which he and Barber chuckled delightedly before they talked it over -with the Griffin faction. - -After drill that day, a meeting was held to talk over the election, the -officers being anxious to get an idea of what the boys of Company C -meant to do. Their surprise was unbounded when Coyle announced that he -could speak for thirty-three who would vote for Graham. - -“For _Graham_,” repeated Hamlin, incredulously, “Why, that’s fine. -Looks as if Graham would have a unanimous vote.” - -“No, sir, I’m going to vote for Raleigh,” cried one, and three or four -others shouted, “So am I.” - -But at this Raleigh, who was the only one of the candidates present, -sprang to his feet. - -“I’m awfully obliged to you,” he cried, “but I came in just on purpose -to say that I’d rather remain lieutenant of Company D; honest, I would. -I fit in there pretty well, I believe, and I’m not sure that I’d make -a good captain; and anyhow, I’ve made up my mind to have my name -withdrawn, and I do hope that those of you who would have voted for me, -will vote for Graham as I’m going to do. I’d be just _pleased_ to have -a unanimous vote for him.” - -“Three cheers for Lieutenant Raleigh,” shouted one of his friends, as -Raleigh, very red in the face, dropped into his seat. - -Then Gordon arose. “You see how it is,” he said; “Raleigh absolutely -refuses to be a candidate for promotion, and the matter seems to rest -between Graham and Griffin; or at least, I supposed it did, until Coyle -made his statement just now. I think with Raleigh, that it would be -fine to have a unanimous vote for Graham. He would be sure then that he -would have the support of Company C, and I know how much it means to a -captain to feel that his men are all friendly, and ready to back him up -in whatever he plans for the good of his company.” - -Here Coyle winked at Barber, and scowls and grins were noticeable among -Griffin’s friends. Hamlin’s quick eyes noted this little by-play, and -a vague feeling of distrust and uncertainty began to trouble him. -He sprang up and said, “You all know, I am sure, that it is because -the school has taken a higher stand this year, that Professor Keene -decided to let us choose the captain of Company C, and he’s sure to be -satisfied if we elect Graham, for you all know that we haven’t a finer -all-around fellow in the school. For myself, I’ve only one objection -to him as captain of Company C, and that is, that I’m awfully afraid -that, under his training, you will be so perfect in drill that you’ll -get the red ribbons away from Company D next June.” - -“You bet we mean to,” shouted a coarse voice from Company C, as Hamlin -sat down, and there was something in the rude tone that stirred the -anger of more than one of Graham’s friends. - -When the meeting was over, Hamlin said to Gordon, “Do you suppose Coyle -meant what he said, or is there some trick under it?” - -“Why, how could there be any trick? He said positively that -thirty-three of them were pledged to vote for Graham, and none of the -rest denied it.” - -“I know he did,” said Hamlin doubtfully, “but I was watching the -faces of those fellows while you were speaking, and I believe there’s -something underhanded going on. I don’t trust Coyle. He’s tricky.” - -“I know he is,” responded Gordon, “and he’d as soon lie as tell the -truth any time; but if he’d been lying to-day, some of those fellows -would have contradicted him, I’m sure.” - -“Well, I hope it’s all right, but somehow I don’t feel sure of it,” was -Hamlin’s response. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII. THE ELECTION. - - -The next day, Thursday, when Hamlin reached the school-room, he found -there a group of boys eagerly discussing the election and the sudden -and unaccountable change in the sentiments of Company C. - -“I can’t see through it,” Raleigh was saying as Hamlin entered. -“Yesterday morning one of the boys told me that thirty-three of the -company were pledged to vote for Griffin, and in the meeting after -drill you know that Coyle declared that thirty-three were pledged to -vote for Graham. There’s something snaky about it all, I believe.” - -“So do I,” declared Hamlin. “Coyle’s up to mischief. You know he hates -all of us who have tried to put down disorder in the class, and I don’t -believe he means to vote for Graham any more than he means to vote for -his royal highness, St. John.” - -“So I say,” cried Reed. “Coyle’s awful slippery, and he’ll stop at -nothing when he’s made up his mind to put a scheme through.” - -Freeman, though not in the battalion, was as deeply interested as those -who were, in the matter under discussion. As he listened to the talk, -he was idly turning the leaves of a copy of the school catalogue which -was lying on his desk. - -Suddenly he sprang up and held the book open before Hamlin’s eyes, -while he pointed excitedly to a name in the list of senior pupils. -Hamlin looked at it in a perplexed way for an instant, then he cried -out, “I say, fellows,” but stopping suddenly, he looked keenly around -the room, and then ran and shut the door into the hall. - -“Well, what’s the matter with Hamlin? Evidently he’s _not_ all right,” -cried one wonderingly, as Hamlin began:-- - -“There’s not one of Coyle’s crowd here, so I’ll tell you what’s the -matter with Hamlin. I believe we’ve got hold of Coyle’s scheme, thanks -to Freeman. Look here!” - -He held up the catalogue and pointed to one of the names. It was Thomas -Graham Griffin. - -“Don’t you see?” he went on. “Coyle and his crowd are going to vote -for Graham, as he said, but it’s Graham Griffin, not Alec Graham. He -counted on our not remembering that Griffin’s middle name is Graham.” - -“That’s it, sure as sneezing!” exclaimed Reed, “and Coyle said it to -keep us from trying to get votes for Graham. Well, I call that a right -down mean trick.” - -“Here comes Gordon,” cried Freeman, as the door opened, and at once -Gordon was surrounded by the excited group, all trying to tell him the -story at once. He listened with a troubled face. - -“Oh, it’s too bad,” he said, when the clamor subsided a little. “If -this is so, Graham won’t be elected at all, and Griffin is no kind of a -fellow to be captain of Company C.” - -But now the boys came trooping in, as it was approaching nine o’clock, -and with a hasty word of caution to let no hint get to Coyle of their -understanding of the real state of things, Gordon took his seat. - -It was not easy for him and some others, however, to give their usual -attention to their studies, and they were glad when recess set them -free to think and speak of all that was in their thoughts. - -Gordon asked permission for a few of the boys to remain in the -school-room during the intermission, and then the situation was -earnestly discussed. The list of members of Company C was carefully -scanned. Some, they knew, would vote for Griffin; some, they were sure, -would not. But there were twenty doubtful ones. - -“We must manage to see every one of these twenty,” Gordon said. “Some -of them, probably, are pledged to Griffin, but some, I’m sure, would -rather have Graham over them.” - -“Unless Coyle has managed somehow to set them against Graham,” -interposed Hamlin. - -“How _could_ he set them against Graham?” said Gordon. - -“I don’t know how, but he’s capable of lying to any extent to do it. We -all know that,” answered Hamlin. - -“That’s so,” cried several voices. - -“Why can’t we go to some of the nice fellows in the company and ask -them point-blank about it?” suggested Clark. - -“Yes, why not? Seems to me that’s the thing to do,” said Reed. - -“Who’s the best one to do it, then?” questioned Gordon. “If Coyle has -told ’em a lot of stuff to set ’em against Graham, likely he’s said as -much about Hamlin and me, and all the rest of us.” - -“Yes, but all the same, some in Company C are real good fellows, and -if they found that Coyle had been lying to them about Graham, they -wouldn’t stand by him or his candidate,” said Hamlin. - -“I should think four or five of us could do the business. Each one of -the four, say, might see five of the twenty fellows between now and -school time to-morrow and try to get to the bottom of this, and at the -same time try to get as many as possible of the twenty to vote for -Graham,” said Sherman. - -“It’s the best thing we can do,” said Gordon, “though, if they’ve -promised Griffin their votes--” he added doubtfully. - -“If they’ve promised because of false statements made to them, they -have surely a right to change their votes,” said Clark. - -“That’s so,” said Raleigh; “but see here, can’t we keep this thing -quiet, so that if we do succeed in making enough fellows change their -votes to elect Graham, that Coyle and his crowd shall not suspect it?” - -“It _would_ be fine if we could keep them in the dark and turn the -tables on them to-morrow at the election,” laughed Hamlin. - -“Wouldn’t it, though!” chuckled Reed. “Let’s try for it, do!” - -“I’ll be only too thankful if we can put Graham in, anyhow,” said -Gordon in a troubled voice. “Griffin’s influence is bad--a good deal -worse than Professor Keene suspects, or he’d never in the world allow -him to be a candidate.” - -“If that is so, Professor Keene ought to know it,” said Clark. - -“Nobody in this crowd goes in for telling tales,” cried Lee, with a -look at Clark that pointed the remark. - -Clark colored and turned away, but instantly Hamlin’s arm was thrown -across his shoulders, and Hamlin’s clear voice rang out indignantly:-- - -“For shame, Lee,” he cried. “We all know that Clark does not deserve -that. I’d like to know if you consider it more honorable to keep still -and let a bad fellow lead a dozen others into evil ways, than to warn -the professor and so save them. For my part, I’d rather be called a -telltale than to feel that I’d had a hand in any boy’s downfall.” - -Lee’s face darkened, and he muttered something, under his breath, about -“cowards and cheats.” - -It was Gordon who broke the silence that followed. - -“_I_ can bear witness that Clark was anything but cowardly in that -affair last year,” he said; “and since I’ve become better acquainted -with him, I’ve been convinced that there was some underhanded work -about that pony business. I mean that somebody else, and not Clark, was -the one to blame.” - -“And I know who it was,” added Reed. - -At this, all eyes were turned on him, and half a dozen voices cried -out:-- - -“Who, who?” - -For a moment Reed hesitated, then he said, “Henderson had a hand in it.” - -“Well, who else? Why don’t you out with it?” questioned Hamlin, eagerly. - -“Bet a cooky ’twas Crawford,” cried Raleigh. “It was, it was!” he -added, as Reed colored, and remained silent. - -“Oh, I’m sorry,” said Gordon. “It’s too bad to have anything more come -out against Crawford, now when he’s trying to live down last year’s -record.” - -“That’s so,” said Reed, earnestly, “and I’m sorry I spoke, but I’ve -felt for a long time that it wasn’t fair to Clark to keep still about -that. Say boys, if I tell you the whole story, will you all promise not -to repeat a word of it to anyone?” - -“Yes, yes,” cried every boy except Clark and Gordon. The latter, less -excitable and more thoughtful than most of the others, said:-- - -“Hold on--I don’t promise till I’ve thought it all out. If we’ve been -wronging Clark, we owe it to him to let the truth be known.” - -But now Clark spoke. “Boys,” he said, “you have been wronging me, for I -never saw that pony until Mr. Horton held it up before me; but if all -of you here believe me, I’m perfectly willing to let the matter rest. -Crawford is having a hard enough time as it is, this year. If he had a -hand in this thing, I’m only too glad to forget it all, if the rest of -you will do the same.” - -“Three cheers for Clark!” cried Reed, but Clark interposed quickly:-- - -“No, no, don’t! We’ll have a crowd in here to know what it’s all about.” - -Gordon walked over to Clark and held out his hand as he said:-- - -“I, for one, have perfect confidence in Clark’s honor, and I _know_ -he’s no coward.” - -Clark’s eyes were not so clear as usual as he wrung the offered hand, -but he knew that from that hour no shadow would rest on his name in the -minds of those present. No shadow? Ah yes--even in that the happiest -hour of his school life, the shadow of his father’s sin fell upon -him--and the light faded from his eyes and his lips took their old sad -curve, as he turned to Reed, and said:-- - -“Reed, you _know_ that someone put that pony in my desk without my -knowledge?” - -“I do,” said Reed, promptly; “I heard the whole thing planned.” - -“Well then, for my sake, I beg that you will never tell anyone anything -more about it. And boys, once more for my sake, don’t let what Reed has -said make any difference in your treatment of anyone in the school. -Will you all promise?” - -Very reluctantly was the promise given, but it was given. - -After school it was decided that Gordon, Hamlin and Reed should see -that day as many as possible of the twenty boys referred to, in Company -C. Then the three were to meet at Hamlin’s house to compare notes and -see if there was any chance of Graham’s election. If not, they must -decide whether or not they should refer the matter to Prof. Keene. - -At ten o’clock that night, Hamlin was walking impatiently back and -forth in the library, listening for quick footsteps or a whistle -outside. He heard the steps at last, and had the door open before the -whistle had fairly sounded, and in another moment he had pushed Gordon -and Reed into a couple of easy-chairs, and was saying, eagerly:-- - -“Well, what luck did you have? I’m dying to know, as the girls say.” - -“Prime luck,” cried Reed, while Gordon added, “We’ll put Graham in, -unless I’m much mistaken.” - -“But what did you find out?” questioned Hamlin, impatiently. - -“I saw six of the best fellows in Company C. Two of them were going to -vote for Graham, anyhow. The other four were determined _not_ to vote -for him,” said Gordon. - -“Because Coyle had told them that Graham wanted to get the captaincy in -order to work up a new scheme that they called self-government?” broke -in Hamlin, rapidly. - -“Yes, that was it,” assented Gordon. “If they did but know it, that -self-government scheme is just about the best thing that I’ve heard of -for boys; but they’ve gotten the idea that it means all work and no -play--no freedom or good times of any sort--and when Coyle stuffed ’em -up with the idea that we, you and Graham, and I, had got a goody-goody -sort of plan all fixed and ready to spring on them as soon as Graham -was elected, they all kicked, of course, and agreed to vote for -Griffin--those that didn’t favor Raleigh.” - -“Yes, that’s what I found out, too,” said Hamlin, “and that cad of a -Coyle had actually told them that he heard Graham and me talking the -thing over, and, true as you live, I hadn’t heard a word of it until -to-day.” - -“Well, Gordon talked some of them over,” put in Reed. - -“And Reed talked more of them over,” added Gordon. “He got all the four -he interviewed to promise to vote for Graham, while I only secured -three votes.” - -“And I, two. That’s nine out of their thirty-three,” said Hamlin, -exultantly. “So we’ll put Graham in, won’t we!” - -“Don’t be too sure. There’s many a slip, you know,” quoted Gordon; “but -I hope the election will go all right now.” - -“And won’t Coyle and Barber be mad,” laughed Reed. “I want to sit where -I can see ’em when the vote is announced.” - -“If the fellows only keep their word, and don’t let on that they’ve -changed their minds, it will be a big surprise for Coyle. He’ll be -caught in his own trap, for the boys will vote for Graham as he said, -only it will be the other Graham,” said Gordon, rising. “I’ve got to -study till midnight to make up for the time I’ve spent electioneering,” -he added, “but I won’t grudge it if we put in our candidate. I -shouldn’t wonder if, before we get through with this business, Coyle -should find himself doubly caught in his own trap.” - -He would not stop to explain his words, but hurried off with Reed, -leaving Hamlin, also, to “burn the midnight oil,” lest he be found -wanting in the class next day. - -Lessons suffered the next day, always excepting St. John’s. He, -serenely unmoved by the excitement about him, rendered his Virgil as -smoothly and poetically as ever, while Hamlin and Gordon listened -ruefully, and even Clark felt less ready than usual to take his turn. -But Mr. Horton, whose keen eyes and quick ears kept him better informed -than the boys realized, was very lenient that day. He could not help -enjoying such recitations as St. John’s, but he realized that character -and influence were of far more importance than mere scholarship, and he -knew which boys he had to thank for the change in section D. - -When school was dismissed that afternoon, there was a rush for the -hall. Only those belonging to the battalion were allowed to enter -there, but so great was the interest in the election, that very few of -the boys who were not in the battalion went home. They hung about the -corridors and class-rooms, waiting to know the result. - -In the hall, an intense interest was manifested as the boys assembled -there. Coyle and Barber looked exultant, but Griffin was nervous and -uneasy, and many of Graham’s friends were nervous and uneasy too. Even -Gordon, Hamlin and Reed, who had most reason to be confident, were not -yet assured of success. They knew not what unexpected turn affairs -might take at the last moment. - -Slips of paper and pencils were distributed, and as soon as all were -ready, the slips were collected, and Gordon appointed Hamlin and two -other captains as tellers. The slips were divided into three piles, and -each pile was counted by one captain, and then passed over to a second -to be recounted. - -Nobody talked while the tellers worked, and when one of them stepped -forward and handed Gordon a slip of paper, many eyes watched Gordon’s -face, seeking to read there the result. But Gordon’s face told no -tales. There was an intense silence as he rose with the paper in his -hand. - -“It gives me pleasure to announce that, by a majority of ten votes, you -have elected Captain Alec Graham,” he said slowly. - -Coyle sprang to his feet, with flushed face and angry eyes. - -“It’s no such thing!” he shouted; “I charge fraud.” - -“_You_ are hardly the one to make such a charge,” said Gordon, quietly; -then he added, “Will all those who voted for Captain Graham, please -stand and be counted?” - -At once forty-one boys rose. - -“Will Lieutenant Gray please call the names of those standing, and all -who choose can count as the names are called,” said Gordon. - -Not even Coyle could deny that forty-one boys acknowledged that they -had voted for Graham. He dropped into his seat looking furiously angry; -nor was this feeling lessened when Gordon quietly remarked:-- - -“It is singular that you should be so surprised at this result when, -a few days ago, you yourself announced, right here in this room, that -thirty-three of Company C were pledged to vote for Graham.” - -Coyle cast a vindictive glance at nine of those thirty-three who had -stood to be counted a moment before, but his reply was muttered too -indistinctly for any but Barber to hear. - -The moment the doors were thrown open, the room was filled with a crowd -of eager boys, and the cheers that greeted the new captain were as gall -and wormwood to Coyle. He had burst into a flood of angry blame against -the nine whose change of vote had carried the election so differently -from what he had planned and expected. - -“But, Coyle,” one of these said, as soon as he could make himself -heard, “we promised to vote for Graham, and we did.” - -“Much you did!” shouted Coyle; “I call it right down sneaky to go back -on your word like that.” - -“And what do you call it to lie about a fellow as you did about -Graham?” asked another. “Hamlin says there wasn’t a word of truth in -it.” - -“Oh, Hamlin!” retorted Coyle scornfully. “You fellows’ll get enough of -Hamlin, and of your precious new captain. _Won’t_ he make you toe the -mark, though--and _I hope he will_!” he added, viciously grinding his -teeth as he thought how the tables had been turned on him. - -But how completely his boomerang had rebounded, he did not know until -two months later. - -From the very beginning, Graham won favor with the majority of his -company, but the minority that had wanted Griffin for captain did all -in their power to make it hard and unpleasant for Graham. In this they -were ably seconded, or, more truly, led, by Griffin, who was lieutenant -of the company. He tried in every way to set the men against Graham, -and instigated them to all sorts of trying, vexatious blunders and -disobediences, hoping thus to force Graham to resign. But they did not -know their man. All this fretted and rasped Graham, but never for a -moment inclined him to resign. Instead, the more the boys rebelled -against his authority, the more determined he became to compel their -obedience. - -From Company C, the spirit of insubordination began to spread until -it could no longer be ignored, and at last Professor Keene called a -special meeting of the officers to consider what should be done. - -During the summer vacation, Gordon had visited a cousin of his who -attended a military school where the self-government plan had been for -some time in force, with great success. Gordon had been several times -on the point of speaking to Professor Keene about this method, but the -remembrance of Coyle’s story, and the effect it had had upon Company C, -had restrained him. - -But at this meeting the professor himself introduced the subject, -saying that he had been talking with the principal of one of the large -military schools where this plan was employed, and had been so much -interested in what this gentleman had told him, that he was strongly -inclined to try the method in the battalion. - -“One thing is certain,” he said, “and that is, that unless there is -a great improvement in the order and discipline of the companies, -something must be done speedily, even if that something is the -disbanding of the battalion. To disband it would be a disgrace to the -school, and especially to those in the battalion, many of whom, I -know, have done all in their power for order and discipline. It is -a shame for a few, comparatively, to work so much harm to all; but -you can see for yourselves that the present state of things cannot -continue.” - -“Professor,” said the captain of Company A, “I’ve heard something about -that self-government plan, and I’d like to know more. Can’t you tell us -all about it?” - -“I could,” answered the professor, “but I prefer to let you know about -it from someone better informed. Suppose I send a committee, composed -of officers of the battalion, to the school I have mentioned. There you -can see and hear for yourselves.” - -Here Gordon stepped forward and said a few words in a tone too low to -reach any but the professor’s ears. The professor nodded, and Gordon -returned to his seat. - -Then the professor dismissed the boys, saying that he would appoint the -committee the next day. - -“I’d like to be on that committee,” said Graham. “I never heard of that -self-government plan until the day before I was elected. The talk about -it then set me to inquiring about it, and I’ve heard a good deal of it -lately.” - -He spoke clearly and distinctly, so that Coyle, Griffin, and several of -the men of Company C, who stood near, could not help hearing him. One -of the latter looked at Coyle significantly, and whispered, “Regular -boomerang--that scheme of yours, Coyle.” - -Coyle scowled, and muttered angrily, “You hush up, Black, if you know -when you’re well off!” - - - - -CHAPTER XIV. NEW METHODS IN THE BATTALION. - - -Professor Keene had no need to ask for attention when, the next day, -he was ready to announce the names of the committee. There was great -surprise and some disappointment among the officers when it was found -that only two of them were of the number, the other two being privates -of Company C. These last were Knox, one of the most troublesome fellows -in the battalion, and Carr, one of the most faithful and reliable. - -Knox, after the first shock of surprise, was immensely elated at having -been selected. He would not have been quite so jubilant over it if he -had been present at a conference between the professor, Gordon and -Graham the night before. - -Gordon’s whispered words to the professor had been a request for a -talk with him before the names of the committee should be announced, -a request which was readily granted. The hour that the two lads -spent at the professor’s house that evening had given him a clearer -understanding than he had had before of the state of affairs in -Company C, and indeed in the whole battalion. He saw that these -two boys had given very serious thought to the situation, and he -appreciated the wisdom of Gordon’s suggestion that Knox, who, though -one of the most troublesome in the company, was really one of the most -soldierly boys, and one who, if his enthusiasm could once be aroused, -might do perhaps more than any other to raise the standard of feeling -and purpose in the battalion, should be one of the visiting committee. -Carr was appointed partly to make it pleasanter for Knox than it would -have been had the other three been officers. - -Graham had wanted very much to be on the committee, as, owing to the -trouble he had had with his company, he was extremely anxious to see -for himself if the new method was one likely to work well in the -high-school battalion; but he saw that it might not be best for three -out of a committee of four to be taken from Company C. So Hamlin and -one other captain were appointed. - -There was a good deal of grumbling over the proposed innovation, and -many of the boys declared that they would not stay on if any such -scheme was carried out; but all the same, the four members of the -committee were regarded with not a little envy and scarcely a boy but -wished that he had been lucky enough to be selected, especially as the -fortunate four were to be excused from recitations and given perfect -marks for the time of their absence. Coyle and Griffin, even, would -have liked to visit that school, even though they scoffed at the idea -of the plan proposed. - -Before the departure of the committee, Professor Keene wrote a long -letter to his friend, the principal, explaining to him the reason -for the sending of this committee, and for the selection of Knox -as a member of it, and asking him to give the boys every possible -opportunity to learn all about the working of the system under -consideration. Also he begged the principal to make the visit of the -boys as enjoyable as might be, and proposed that, a week or two later, -a similar committee from the military school be sent down to return -the visit. “And be sure and put on that committee some of your most -enthusiastic boys, who will talk the thing up, and make our boys wild -to try it,” the professor had added. - -A royal good time indeed those four boys had during the two days they -spent at the Institute. - -The principal was one who knew how to get hold of boys and win their -affection as well as secure their obedience. Understanding thoroughly -the situation of affairs at the high school, he told his boys just -enough to interest them, and incline them to further Professor Keene’s -plans. The boys needed only a hint. In the first place, they were -exceedingly proud of their school and their military discipline, and, -in the second, they were always ready to respond to any appeal from -their principal. - -So they gave our committee of four a cordial, boyish reception that -swept away in a moment every shadow of stiffness or shyness. They -treated them like comrades and old friends, and took them into -class-room and drill, gave them a dinner, and, in short, filled every -hour of the two days with something that would please and interest -their guests. Of course, they interlarded all this with information -about their method of government and its eminently satisfactory -results, until even Knox, who had intended to have a good time on the -trip and laugh the new plan to scorn when he returned to the Central, -became so interested that he found himself asking eager questions, and -admitting to himself that perhaps it wouldn’t be a bad thing to try at -the Central, after all. - -When, on the last day of the visit, the principal told the assembled -school of Professor Keene’s invitation, and asked those who would like -to accept it, and visit the Central school, to rise, instantly every -boy in the room was on his feet. - -The principal smiled as he turned to Gordon, and said, “You have taken -the citadel by storm, you see. I think you will have to select your -committee for yourselves.” - -“Very well, sir,” was Gordon’s quick response, “we shall be satisfied -if the committee includes all the gentlemen that are now standing.” - -A cheer broke from the students at this reply, but at a sign from the -principal every boy took his seat, and in an instant the most perfect -order prevailed. - -But nearly the whole school accompanied the high-school boys to the -station that night, and the cheers that followed them as the train -moved off could have been heard for a mile around. - -The visitors supposed that was the end of it, but when they reached the -next station, there were a hundred or more students drawn up in line -on the platform. In perfect order they stood till the train started -on, when again the night resounded with the Central high-school cry, -followed by that of the Institute. That _was_ the end, for there was no -such short cut to the next station as there had been to this. - -Was it any wonder that our committee returned overflowing with -enthusiasm for the methods that turned out such boys as these? Even -Knox gave up all thought of carping criticism and opposition, and -instead, gave his comrades such a glowing description of the drill he -had witnessed and the splendid results of the self-government plan, -as shown at the Institute, that they looked at him in amazement and -thought there “must be something in it to convert Knox so completely,” -and they began to look forward with eager curiosity and interest to the -coming of “those Institute chaps.” - -So full of interest and enthusiasm was the committee of four, that -Professor Keene decided to have them give their report before the -entire school. At first the boys objected strongly to this. They did -not so much mind speaking before all the boys, but the girls too--that -was another thing! - -But after all, it was not so bad, for their interest soon made them -forget the gentler portion of their audience, and when they had each -spoken of the points that had most impressed them, and told of the -cordial hospitality they had enjoyed--they could not help speaking of -that--the professor said that the committee would answer any questions -that might occur to any one. - -A storm of eager questions followed, and not all of them were asked by -the boys. - -Many of the pupils saw at once the advantages of the method proposed, -and many were eager to have it adopted, at least in the battalion, but -some still fought against it, and none more bitterly than Coyle and -Griffin. - -A week or two later, a delegation came from the Institute, and the four -members of the committee had an opportunity to return the hospitality -that had been shown them; an opportunity which they were not slow -to improve. Either there was an exceptionally fine class of boys at -the Institute, or else the principal had shown great wisdom in his -selection, for they made friends of everybody, from Professor Keene -down to the roughest and rudest boys in Company C. Even Coyle and -Griffin were forced to acknowledge that they were “good fellows enough.” - -But amid all the good times crowded into these two days, the boys did -not forget the purpose of their coming. They were always ready to talk -self-government to anyone who was interested, but they did it so wisely -that nobody was bored or offended, while most were so convinced of -the advantages of the system that, to the great satisfaction of the -Institute boys, the battalion voted by a large majority to try the plan -for the remainder of the year. - -Of course, the entire battalion escorted their guests to the depot -when the visit was ended, and though they could not be in waiting at -a station further on, they did the best they could. They engaged a -brass-band to meet the committee at the station nearest the Institute, -and give the boys a welcome home with all the martial music that they -could render. - -It is needless to say that the most friendly relations continued -between the two schools from this time on, each manifesting a strong -interest in the doings of the other. - -At the Central, after a spirited meeting, an election was held, -resulting in the appointment of Gordon as judge, with a jury of twelve -boys, two from each company. - -Singularly enough, the first offender brought before this court -was Coyle himself, and his disgust at this was in no wise lessened -by the knowledge that he himself had actually been the one largely -instrumental in bringing this new court of justice into being, in the -Central. - -Coyle had deteriorated steadily as the weeks passed. He was a thorn -in the flesh to Gordon, Hamlin and Clark, for his frequent failures -in class brought down the record, in spite of the good work of the -majority. Coyle rejoiced that this was so. In no other way could he -have so effectually annoyed and tormented these three, whom he hated -more and more as he saw how their influence was growing in the school. -They had even succeeded in arousing a feeble ambition in Barber, and -consequently, Barber was “no fun at all,” these days. He insisted on -pegging away at his lessons, and wouldn’t, half the time, help Coyle -“make things a bit lively in class.” In short, Coyle considered himself -decidedly aggrieved because the boys of section D were working for -honors, or for solid acquirements, this year, instead of wasting their -time in foolish tricks, or idling the hours away without accomplishing -anything. True, there were still in Company C a few jolly chaps who -went in for good times, but most of the fellows had taken up with that -fol-de-rol about self-government, and wouldn’t so much as wink or -“crack a smile” in drill, nor answer back, no matter what ridiculous -order an officer might give them. All this was contrary to Coyle’s -ideas, and he came to the conclusion at last that he would let them -all see that he, for one, had a little spirit and independence, and -didn’t choose to be ordered about by any of them. Wasn’t he battalion -quartermaster, ranking as high as any of the captains? Long he pondered -and planned, but he could not hit upon any way of asserting his -independence and humiliating his brother officers at the same time. - -He not only neglected his studies and fell steadily behind the class, -but he attended so poorly to his duties as quartermaster that Gordon -was finally obliged to speak to him on the subject, and though he took -pains to speak privately, and in the most courteous way possible, Coyle -was very angry, and answered so insolently that Gordon had hard work to -control his temper. - -A few days after this, the quartermaster’s accounts were sent to Gordon -for approval, and finding several errors in them, he sent them back -for correction. Without stopping to look over the accounts, Coyle went -directly to Gordon and angrily accused him of picking flaws in the -accounts on purpose to bring him--Coyle--into disgrace. - -“The accounts are right to a penny, and you know it,” he shouted -furiously. “You’ve been trying to find something against me all this -year, and now you’ve hatched this up. If there is any error in the -books you’ve changed the figures yourself, that’s all.” - -Gordon turned fairly white in the strong effort he made to control -himself, while Hamlin started to his feet with an indignant -exclamation, and another officer who was standing by clenched his fists -and took a step forward, looking as if he longed to knock the impudent -fellow down. - -There was a moment of silence, then Gordon turned to his adjutant, and -said very quietly, “You will consider Mr. Coyle under arrest.” - -“I’d like to see you try to arrest me,” blustered Coyle, who had lost -all control of himself by this time. As he spoke, Prof. Keene entered -the room. - -“What is that, Coyle?” he said, sharply, “please repeat what you said.” - -Coyle shrank a little before the professor’s stern eyes, but he -repeated still angrily, “I said that I’d like to see Gordon arrest me. -He’s finding fault with me about--” - -“Silence, sir,” interrupted the professor; “if _Major_ Gordon has -ordered you under arrest, he must have had good reasons for so doing, -and your case will be tried by court-martial.” And without another -word, the professor left the room. - -So it came about that Coyle was the first offender tried and sentenced -under the new rules. Prof. Keene was not present during the trial, but -a full account of the proceedings, in shorthand, was submitted to him, -and he fully approved the sentence, which was that Coyle be degraded -to the ranks or permitted to resign, whichever he chose. He chose the -latter, and did not appear again in the school, which was altogether -the most satisfactory ending to the matter, since, with such a boy, -there was no hope of any real reform. - -This affair of Coyle’s had a good effect upon the worst element in -the battalion. The boys saw that the majority were determined to put -down disorder and insubordination, and that Prof. Keene was ready to -second their efforts at reform. They did not want to be suspended from -the battalion or the school, or told that their permanent absence was -desired--and so they concluded that it would be wisest for them to obey -orders and do their best, instead of worst, in drill and class-room, -and the result was soon seen in better recitations, and much more -orderly class-rooms, and a steady improvement in the drill. - - - - -CHAPTER XV. WHO IS THE THIEF? - - -“You fellows in the battalion have all the good times. I just wish I’d -entered the high school first year, then I’d have been an officer by -this time,” said Dixon to Reed, one day, with an admiring glance at the -other’s neat uniform and shoulder straps. - -“Oh, yes,” said Reed, “it’s _such_ fun to drill three times a week, -especially when the thermometer climbs up among the eighties--say about -next May. We generally have a hot wave along that time.” - -“It’s no fun to carry those heavy muskets,” put in Freeman. “I joined -the cadets first year, but the guns were too heavy for me, and I had to -quit.” - -“Oh, well, you’re a little chap,” and Dixon glanced half-contemptuously -at the slender lad. Freeman’s cheeks flushed at the look. - -“Well, I never fainted, anyhow,” he said; “and some fellows a good deal -bigger than I fainted more than once that year.” - -“That was when we had heavy guns. We use lighter ones, now,” said Reed. - -“I’d like to wear that uniform,” went on Dixon; “I notice how the girls -watch you fellows; girls like a uniform, you know.” - -A shout of laughter greeted this remark, and one boy said:-- - -“Too bad you can’t wear a uniform, Rosy. You might try to get on the -police force next year. Maybe the girls would watch _you_, then.” - -Rosy joined in the laugh that greeted this suggestion. He was never -backward about acknowledging to an interest in the girls, and was -forever begging some boy to introduce him to one or another girl of his -acquaintance. Sometimes his interest in the feminine portion of the -school got him into trouble, as was the case a little later on this -same day. - -When school was dismissed, the boys formed in line, and were expected -to go through the corridors, and down the stairs in this order. - -But there are always disorderly boys, and noisy ones too, and very -often Professor Keene would be on the stairs, or in one or other of the -corridors, to take note of any such; and not seldom would he send a boy -back to his class-room, there to wait until all the others had passed -out. - -On this occasion, as the boys were standing in line in the upper hall, -waiting for the signal to move on, “Rosy” noticed that the door of one -of the girls’ rooms, near which he stood, was ajar. He glanced quickly -to right and left. The professor was nowhere in sight, so he leaned -over and softly pushed the door open a little farther so that he could -look in. As he did so, a hand dropped heavily on his shoulder, and the -professor’s voice sounded in his ears. - -“Dixon,” he said, “I see you are anxious to make the acquaintance of -Miss Bent and her class. Step right in, and I will introduce you”; and -with his hand still on the boy’s shoulder, he threw open the door, and -led him to the platform. - -“Miss Bent,” he said, “this young gentleman was so very eager to meet -you and the young ladies of your class, that I took the liberty of -bringing him in. Allow me to introduce Mr. Dixon.” - -For once, Dixon was too confused to be equal to the occasion. His face -was as red as his hair, and the bow with which he acknowledged the -introduction was not a model of ease and grace. No wonder--when forty -girls sat there enjoying his discomfiture, and laughing at the haste -with which he departed. - -Shouts of “Here comes Rosy!” “Did you have introductions enough, Rosy?” -“Say, which was the prettiest girl?” “Why didn’t you stay longer?” -greeted him, as he reached the playground, where most of his own -classmates were waiting for him; but, by this time, he had recovered -his self-possession, and only laughed good-naturedly at the sallies of -the boys. - -When he entered the school-room next morning, two or three voices -called out, “Wrong room, Rosy. The girls’ room is on the other side.” - -Dixon grinned, as he perched on the top of his desk, and looked about, -saying:-- - -“Some of you chaps must have gotten up before breakfast this morning. -Never saw so many here at half past eight, before.” - -“Written exam. to-day, sonny,” said Barber. - -“Looks as if ’twas house-cleaning, to-day,” replied Dixon, glancing at -the pile of books and papers Barber was hauling out of his desk. - -“Does look rather that way,” said Barber. Then he glanced about the -room, and added:-- - -“Say, if any of you fellows have jagged my notebook, give it back, will -you. It’s a new one, and I know I left it here last night.” - -“You’re dreaming, Barber,” somebody remarked. “Nobody’s been near your -desk.” - -“But somebody has, though,” persisted Barber; “an’ ’tisn’t the first -time, either. My knife vanished last week--the third one I’ve lost this -quarter.” - -“Better have your mother sew up the holes in your pockets,” suggested -Raleigh. - -“Or you might fasten a string to your knife and tie it into your -pocket,” added another. - -“I tell you, the things are taken out of my desk,” insisted Barber, -“and somebody does it after school. I like fun as well as anybody, but -I’m sick of this kind, and I think it’s time now for whoever did it to -hand over my notebook.” - -“Is it so, for a fact, Barber?” said Hamlin, walking over to the -other’s seat. “Have you been losing things out of your desk--honest -Injun?” - -“I have so,” replied Barber. - -“And I, too. I left a gold pen in my desk last week, and the next -morning it was gone,” said Lee. - -Upon inquiry, it proved that nearly all the boys present had lost -something from their desks within a few weeks, and several had lost -small change or car-tickets from the pockets of overcoats left in the -dressing-room during school hours. - -“We must tell Mr. Horton,” said Hamlin. “It won’t do to have this sort -of thing going on.” - -“Oh, I say!” broke out Dixon, “you don’t really believe that anybody’s -been thieving here, do you? I’m always thinking I’ve lost something, -and finding it a week or two later, where I’d poked it away, an’ -forgotten all about it.” - -Barber shook his head. - -“I poked my new notebook into my desk yesterday just before I went -home,” he said, positively. “I can’t be mistaken about that.” - -“Crawford, you look melancholy. Have you lost something, too?” called -out Dixon. - -“No,” said Crawford, shortly. - -“Not even your temper,” suggested Dixon, who seemed to be in a -tormenting mood that morning. - -Crawford was standing with his hands in his pockets, and looking -moodily out of the window. He made no reply to Dixon’s last remark. - -“Clark seems to be the only one who has lost nothing,” remarked Lee, -with a significant emphasis that implied more than the words themselves. - -Clark looked up inquiringly, while Hamlin exclaimed quickly:-- - -“What do you mean by that, Lee?” - -“Oh, nothing,” said Lee, carelessly, “only some things that happened -last term have never been really cleared up.” - -Before the words were fairly out of Lee’s mouth, Crawford had wheeled -around and caught him by the shoulder. Lee never flinched, and, for an -instant the two boys stood gazing angrily into each other’s eyes. - -Hamlin, too, had started towards Lee, but stopped as he caught sight of -Crawford’s white, set face. - -“Well, what are _you_ going to do about it?” demanded Lee coolly of -Crawford. - -“I am going to knock you down if you accuse Stanley Clark of doing -anything mean or underhanded since he’s been in this school,” said -Crawford, while Clark looked from one to the other in blank amazement, -and the rest of the boys gathered about the two. - -“So?” said Lee, tauntingly. “Perhaps, then, _you_ know more than the -rest of us about some of these underhanded performances.” - -The perspiration gathered on Crawford’s forehead in big drops, and the -hand that still clutched Lee’s shoulder, trembled perceptibly, but he -faced the wondering group, and said slowly, and distinctly:-- - -“I _do_ know something about at least one underhanded performance that -concerns Clark. I’ve been longing to make a clean breast of it for -weeks, and now I’m going to do it. _I_ put that pony in Clark’s desk -last year. The letters S. C. were the initials of--someone else, and -Clark told the truth when he said that he had never seen the book until -Mr. Horton held it up before him. I hated Clark last year, and I wanted -to do anything I could to injure him. Clark,” he left Lee and turned -towards the other, “Clark, it isn’t much to say I’m sorry--but that’s -all I can say.” - -Clark instantly held out his hand, and said cordially:-- - -“It is all forgotten from this moment, Crawford,” and then, catching -sight of Mr. Horton, who had entered the room while Crawford was -speaking, Clark added quickly, “It can end right here, can’t it, sir?” - -But Crawford spoke before the teacher could reply. - -“No,” he said, “I want all the class to know the truth. Then perhaps I -can respect myself a little more.” - -“Very well, Crawford,” said Mr. Horton, “it shall be as you wish. -I think you are right, and one who can so frankly and manfully -acknowledge his fault, cannot fail to win back the respect of his -classmates.” - -Crawford dropped into his seat with a flush of pleasure at these words, -and the boys separated, but more than one glanced coldly at Lee, and -Hamlin could not refrain from saying, as he passed Lee’s seat:-- - -“I hope you are satisfied now, and will stop hounding Clark for the -future.” - -Lee made no reply, but he thought to himself, “Clark didn’t cheat that -time, it seems, but he’s the son of a defaulter; and no _Southern_ boy -would take a blow as he did last year.” - -Mr. Horton was much disturbed when he learned of the petty stealings -that had been going on in the school. Soon, not from section D alone, -but from all over the school came complaints of losses of greater or -less value. The teachers were very much troubled over the matter. -They could not bear to suspect any pupil in the school, but no one -else had access to class-rooms and dressing-rooms except the janitor, -and he had been in charge of the building for years, and nothing of -this kind had ever before occurred. A strict watch was kept over the -dressing-rooms through the day, and no scholars were allowed to enter -the class-rooms until the teachers came in the morning, or to remain -after the departure of the teachers in the afternoon. In spite of these -rules however, the losses continued. - -One wet day, Raleigh, who lived a long way from the school, was obliged -to walk home because the car-tickets he had carelessly left in his -overcoat pocket, were missing. The next morning, he appeared wearing an -old shabby overcoat in place of the new one he had had the day before. - -“What’s the matter, Raleigh? Has your new coat been jagged?” questioned -Barber, overtaking him near the school gate. - -“No,” said Raleigh, “but if you’ll keep mum, I’ll tell you why I wore -this.” - -“Mum’s the word,” said Barber, promptly, and Raleigh went on:-- - -“My car-tickets vanished yesterday. Served me right, I suppose, for -being such a ninny as to leave them in my overcoat pocket; but it made -me mad to have to foot it all the way home in the wet, so I planned a -little scheme to put a mark on the stealer. My sister has some shoe -blacking that stains like fury--worse than any ink I ever got hold -of--and I’ve soaked a sponge with it, and put it in my side pocket, -here. See?” - -“Well,” said Barber, “how’s that going to mark the thief?” - -“Why, I’ve put half a dollar--a counterfeit one, you understand, that -somebody shoved off on my mother--I’ve put it into that same pocket, -and if anybody puts a hand in to haul out that half-dollar, he’ll get a -mark on his fingers that he can’t scrub off in one day, now I tell you.” - -“Well, that _is_ a scheme,” laughed Barber, “but you ought to let one -fellow in every room into it, for you and I can’t examine all the paws -in the school, ourselves.” - -“That’s so; I never thought of that,” said Raleigh. - -So the two decided upon one boy in each room who should be the one to -keep an eye on the hands in his class-room in case that fifty cents -should be missing later in the day. - -Mr. Horton having given Raleigh permission for himself and Barber to -remain in the room that morning, during recess, as soon as the other -boys had gone down to the playground, the amateur detectives began -operations. They borrowed from the dressing-room a mirror which they -hung on the wall in such a way that it reflected the hall and the door -of the dressing-room to them, while they, having set open the door of -the class-room, were out of sight behind it. - -Five minutes of the recess had slipped away--ten, and not a person had -passed through the hall. - -“I don’t believe,” began Barber in a whisper, but at that instant -Raleigh gave him a poke, and pointed to the mirror. Through the hall a -boy was passing quickly, glancing furtively about him as he went. - -While they looked, he slipped noiselessly into the dressing-room and -softly closed the door behind him. - -Raleigh and Barber looked at each other with astonished faces. - -“I can’t believe it,” whispered Barber, and:-- - -“I never would have believed it,” said Raleigh, in the same breath. - -Then he added:-- - -“His going in there is no proof, though it’s against the rules now.” - -In silence then the two sat, their eyes fixed on the telltale mirror. - -“There goes the bell,” whispered Barber. “He’s probably going to wait -there and drop in at the end of the line. We must get out of this -corner before the boys come up.” - -“Let’s go out and wait near the stairs; then we can see him when he -comes out, without his suspecting.” - -This they did, and without seeming to look, saw Dixon suddenly and -silently fling open the door of the dressing-room as the last boy -passed by, and follow quickly to the class-room. - -Then Raleigh hurried into the dressing-room, slipping an old glove on -to his right hand as he went. He rejoined Barber in a moment, saying:-- - -“It’s gone.” - -“The half-dollar?” questioned Barber. - -Raleigh nodded, and the two went into the class-room. Each cast a quick -glance at Dixon as they passed his seat, and both saw that he was -rubbing his right hand with his handkerchief. - -As they took their seats, Barber glanced at Raleigh with a quick -gesture towards St. John. He, too, was rubbing his handkerchief over -his right hand, and eyeing with a disgusted expression some black -stains that showed conspicuously on his slender white fingers. - -Presently, Raleigh went to the desk, and told Mr. Horton, in a tone too -low for any other ears, the result of their watch. - -Mr. Horton was greatly disturbed. - -“There _must_ be some mistake,” he said. “I cannot believe it of either -of them.” - -Then placing Gordon in charge of the room, he went to confer with -Professor Keene. The result was that when the class was dismissed, St. -John, Dixon, Raleigh and Barber were told to remain. - -Then Mr. Horton took St. John into the dressing-room alone. The boy -followed him with evident bewilderment, and when the teacher said:-- - -“St. John, will you tell me how you got those stains on your hand?” he -looked as if he thought himself the victim of some practical joke, and -drawing himself up, answered haughtily and coldly, “That is my affair, -sir.” - -“Ordinarily, it would be your affair, St. John,” answered Mr. Horton -patiently, “but, unfortunately, to-day I must insist upon an answer to -my question.” - -The boy bit his lip and hesitated, evidently half inclined to refuse to -answer, but there was something in Mr. Horton’s face that puzzled and -rather awed him, and after a moment’s silence he said sulkily:-- - -“The janitor did not fill my inkstand, and I had to go down to that -beastly old cellar and fill it myself, and I got the ink on my hand. -I never went to a school before where I had to do servant’s work,” he -added with his haughtiest air. - -“Did anyone see you filling your inkstand?” asked the teacher. - -“The janitor was muddling around there,” answered the boy. “I told him -it was his business to do it for me, and he had the impudence to tell -me that it was as much my business as his.” - -Mr. Horton half smiled, understanding that St. John’s overbearing -manner would not be likely to incline the somewhat crusty old janitor -to save him any trouble; but remembering the serious question at issue, -his face grew grave again. - -“Have you been in the dressing-room to-day?” he asked. - -“No, sir,” said the boy. - -“Very well; you may go,” and, as St. John went down the stairs, Mr. -Horton returned to the school-room, where he found the three boys -sitting in a sort of embarrassed silence. - -“Dixon,” he said at once, “I see you have stained your hand. How did -you do it?” - -Dixon glanced at his fingers, and the color suddenly flamed in his -freckled cheeks. - -“I--I--hit it against something black,” he stammered. - -“Evidently,” said Mr. Horton. “Dixon, were you in the dressing-room at -recess?” - -The boy hesitated, glanced half appealingly at the teacher, and then at -the boys. - -“Would you rather see me alone?” asked Mr. Horton, and as the boy -nodded, he signed to Raleigh and Barber to leave the room. Then he -said:-- - -“Dixon, it will be best for you to tell me the whole truth frankly; -best for your own sake, I mean.” - -“Oh, I’m not thinking about myself, you know,” said Dixon. “It’s--” -then he stopped. - -“Well?” said Mr. Horton, inquiringly. - -“Oh, dear!” said Dixon desperately, “I _don’t_ know what to do,” and -putting his head down on his desk, he actually sobbed. - -The teacher’s hand was laid kindly on the rough, red hair, as he said:-- - -“A fault confessed is half forgiven, Dixon, and though this is more -than a fault, for it is a most grave and serious matter, yet a frank -and full acknowledgment will incline us to deal as leniently as -possible with you.” - -Dixon raised his head. There was a bewildered expression in his blue -eyes which changed to one of indignant astonishment as the meaning of -his teacher’s words dawned upon him. He started up, dashing the tears -from his freckled cheeks as he exclaimed:-- - -“You don’t mean that you suspect _me_ of stealing!” - -“Well, really,” said Mr. Horton, actually moving back a step before the -indignant flash of those blue eyes. “Well, really, I begin to think I -do not, though I must confess that I did a few moments ago. Tell me all -about it, Dixon. Evidently you know something about the matter.” - -“Oh, yes; I wish I didn’t,” and again the freckled face was hidden by -the stained fingers. After a moment’s silence, he went on:-- - -“Mr. Horton, if I can promise you _sure_ that nothing else will be -taken, won’t that do?” he asked imploringly. - -“I’m afraid that won’t do, Dixon. I see that you are trying to shield -the guilty person, but it is not fair to those who have been robbed, -nor do I believe that it would be best for the one who deserves -punishment to go scot free. It would encourage him to repeat the crime. -Yes,” as Dixon started at the word, “it _is_ a crime, and one that will -put the guilty person behind the prison bars, if continued.” - -“Oh, Mr. Horton, you won’t put him in prison, will you? Promise me you -won’t, or I’ll _never_ tell. I’ll go to prison for it myself first,” he -cried excitedly. - -“Easy, easy, my boy,” and Mr. Horton laid his hand on the boy’s -shoulder. “If you do not tell what you know, we shall surely find out -for ourselves who is the guilty person, and then it may be too late for -any word of yours to be of any benefit to him. Be persuaded, Dixon, and -tell me all you know about the matter, now.” - -“Well--I will,” said the boy, after a moment’s thought; “only, Mr. -Horton, I shall depend on you to save him from prison, if you anyway -can. You see he’s a little fellow, only thirteen, and it will break his -mother’s heart if he’s sent to prison. His mother is an old friend of -my mother’s, and when I came in to the city to go to school, last year, -I went to her house to board. She’s a widow, and keeps a boarding-house -’way up town. Well, sir, the very day after I went there, I was taken -sick with typhoid fever, and my mother was sick at home, so she -couldn’t come to me, and Mrs. Gray took care of me just as if I had -been her own boy. She sat up nights with me, and oh, I can’t tell -you how good she was through all those weeks. The doctor told mother -afterwards that I owed my life to Mrs. Gray’s care and nursing, so you -see, I can’t help thinking a lot of her, and I’ve tried my best to -keep Willie straight; but lately, he’s got to going with one or two -bad fellows in the school, and I think, Mr. Horton, that they make a -cat’s-paw of him, and make him do things that he’d never think of doing -himself, for he _isn’t_ a bad boy really--Willie isn’t--and he’s all -his mother has left.” - -Again the rough red head went down on the desk, and the boy’s low sobs -proved the depth of his sympathy for the widowed mother. - -Mr. Horton’s own eyes were dim as he looked down at the lad. - -“You haven’t told me how you came to be in the dressing-room at -recess,” he said gently, after a little silence. - -“Why, I hunted all over the playground for Willie, and when I found -he wasn’t there, I felt somehow that I _must_ find him, and be sure -he wasn’t doing anything wrong. You see, I only found out about this -a few days ago, and he had promised me solemnly that he’d never take -another thing that did not belong to him. You know there’s another -dressing-room adjoining ours, and the windows of the two are only a -foot apart. As I came through the hall, I saw Willie slip into that -other room, and I got to the door just in time to see him climb up on -the window sill. I didn’t dare speak, for fear he’d fall, but I waited -till he’d climbed from one window to the other, and slipped down into -our dressing-room, and then went in, and shut the door after me. Willie -had his hand in the pocket of an old overcoat, one I never saw before. -I snatched his hand as he drew it out, and it was all wet with what -looked like ink, and that’s the way mine got daubed.” - -“And Willie kept the half-dollar he found in the overcoat?” said Mr. -Horton. - -“Oh, no, I made him give it up, and I put it back in the pocket.” - -“And then?” questioned the teacher. - -“Then he cried, and said that those fellows had threatened to tell -Professor Keene that he was a thief, unless he’d keep on taking things. -He hasn’t kept a single thing himself, Mr. Horton. They lent him some -money a while ago, and because he couldn’t pay it back, they kept at -him, telling him that he could easily pick up loose change enough in -the dressing-rooms to pay the debt, and after he had taken one piece of -money, then you see, they held that over him to make him keep on.” - -“And these boys; who are they?” said Mr. Horton sternly. - -Again Dixon hesitated, but in his heart he knew that such boys were -too dangerous to be suffered to remain in the school to lead weak boys -astray, and so he gave the names. - -When at last Raleigh and Barber were called in, they were glad enough -to learn that their classmate was not the thief; and Dixon, his mind -relieved by having passed the responsibility over to Mr. Horton, could -even laugh at his stained fingers, while he appreciated Raleigh’s -ingenious plan. - -“Funny what became of that coin, though,” the latter said, as he took -his old coat from the nail where it hung. - -“I rather think there’s a hole in this pocket, Raleigh,” said Mr. -Horton, feeling at the bottom of the coat “See here!” and he held up -the side where the coin could be plainly felt between the outside and -the lining. - -Dixon told the two boys enough of Willie Gray’s story to explain his -own connection with the affair, and awaken their sympathy for the -widowed mother. - -There were no more losses that year, in the Central school. - -Willie Gray’s interview with Professor Keene, and his suspension from -the school for a month proved a lesson that he did not care to have -repeated, but his severest punishment was in seeing his mother’s -bitter shame and sorrow when she heard the story. He wore very shabby -clothes the rest of that year, and so did his mother, but by the end of -the school year every scholar’s loss had been made good, and from that -time on no more scrupulously honest boy than Willie Gray could have -been found in all that city. - -As to Dixon, Raleigh and Barber conceived a new respect and regard -for him after this affair, and even his openly expressed liking and -admiration for “the girls,” awakened amusement instead of scorn. - -“For you see, boys,” Dixon said one day confidentially to the two, “You -see, boys, I’ve got a lot of sisters at home--half a dozen of ’em--and -a right pretty lot they are too. You wouldn’t think they were any -relation to a freckled carrot-head like me. But, bless you--they have -never found out how homely I am, and, as I’m the only brother they’ve -got, I’ve been kind of spoiled, I reckon. Anyhow, you wouldn’t believe -how I miss those girls, and I like _all_ girls for their sakes, don’t -you see?” - -St. John never found out that a suspicion had rested upon him. Indeed, -it is doubtful if he knew that there had been any losses, since, as it -happened, nothing had been taken from his desk; and Hamlin never again -saw Dixon hanging about a saloon, since he no longer had to look for -Willie Gray in such places. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI. A SNOWBALL FIGHT. - - -Just after New-Year came a very heavy snowstorm. It lasted two days, -and when the boys went to school on the third morning, they had to wade -through drifts in some places as high as their shoulders. Even on a -level the snow was up to the knees of the smaller boys. - -It was a huge frolic to most of them, and the best part of it was when -they found that, owing to some trouble with the furnace, there would be -no school in the boys’ department that day. - -“Hurrah for a holiday!” shouted half a dozen voices, as the boys -tumbled pellmell down the stairs, not considering it necessary, under -the circumstances, to keep in line as usual. - -“Won’t the girls envy us, though,” chuckled Dixon, lifting his cap with -great politeness as he saw two or three girls looking out of one of -their windows. “I’ve half a mind to go and smash _their_ furnace, so -they can get out too.” - -“I would,” said Hamlin, dryly. He had long since arrived at the -conclusion that “Rosy” had “plenty of good points,” but even yet -Dixon’s frequent references to “the girls” were apt to vex him, and he -had never been willing to introduce his red-haired schoolmate to his -cousin Grace or any other of his girl friends. - -“Say, fellows, why can’t we build a fort and have a snowball fight -instead of going home,” cried Reed. “The snow’s in prime condition. -Just see what balls it makes,” he added, catching up a handful of snow -and hastily fashioning it into a ball which he flung at Hamlin, who -dodged just in time to avoid it, and it landed full in Dixon’s mouth, -as he opened it to speak. He spluttered and gasped for a moment, but as -soon as he could get his breath, he dashed at Reed and rolled him in -the snow, rubbing a handful of it into his mouth. - -“Ouch! ouch!” yelled Reed; “help, help, boys!” whereupon two or three -ran to his rescue, and the next moment, Dixon was treated to a dose of -his own medicine. He took it very good-naturedly; he always did take -everything good-naturedly. Even the boys that disliked him could not -deny that. - -“Say we _do_ have a snowball fight. We may not have another chance this -year,” said Sherman. - -“Professor would order us off. The girls couldn’t recite if we were -yelling outside here,” suggested Graham. - -“That’s a fact! I forgot about the girls,” murmured Rosy, at which -somebody remarked:-- - -“First time in your life you ever forgot ’em, ain’t it, Rosy?” and -there was a general laugh at Dixon’s expense. - -“Well, let’s go out on the vacant lots, then. No hospital or old -ladies’ home around there, is there?” said Barber. - -“Never heard of any. Come on, then,” cried Hamlin, leading the way. -Presently he turned, and inquired:-- - -“What’ll we do for shovels and brooms? We can’t build a fort without -’em.” - -“So we can’t,” said Reed, ruefully. “I forgot all about them.” - -“Let’s borrow some,” suggested Graham. - -“Where?” said Lee, with the touch of scorn in his voice that always -irritated the boys. - -“Right here on this block,” retorted Graham promptly. - -“As if the people in these houses would lend us their snow shovels,” -said Lee. - -“If I get the shovels, will you agree to pay your share of the price?” -asked Graham. - -“Of course; don’t I always pay my share of anything that’s going,” said -Lee, haughtily. - -“All right,” said Graham as, with a grin at Hamlin, he ran up the steps -of the nearest house and rang the bell. - -“Want your walk cleared?” he inquired of the servant girl who opened -the door. - -“How much do you charge?” said the girl; “And where’s your shovel?” - -“Where’s yours? Have you one?” replied Graham. - -“Ye--yes,” said the girl, doubtfully. - -“Well, tell your mistress that we’ll clear the steps and walk in fine -style, if she’ll lend us her shovel for an hour afterward.” - -“Get along with ye,” said the girl, “we’d never set eyes on the shovel -again!” - -At this, the crowd of boys on the sidewalk set up a shout of laughter, -but Graham persisted:-- - -“Ask the lady to come to the door a minute, please do! We’ll clear the -walk; honor bright, we will.” - -As Graham spoke, the mistress appeared in the hall, and inquired of the -girl what the boys wanted. Graham’s face lighted up as he caught sight -of her, and he stepped forward, with his cap in his hand, saying:-- - -“I didn’t know that you lived here, Mrs. Hayes, but we boys want some -shovels and brooms to make a snow fort on the vacant lots over yonder. -We’ll clear off all the steps on this block, and the sidewalk too, if -we can have the use of half a dozen shovels for an hour, to build our -fort.” - -“You can have ours, and welcome,” said Mrs. Hayes, “and I’ll give you -a note to the other people on the block. Of course you won’t forget -to bring back the shovels,” she added smiling. “You see I have several -brothers, and have known _them_ to forget such things, now and then.” - -“We’ll return them, sure, before we begin our snowball fight,” Graham -answered; and soon, thanks to Mrs. Hayes’ note, half a dozen shovels -had been handed out to the boys, who took turns at using them, and so -quickly had the walks beautifully cleaned. Lee did his share under -protest, but he did it, and some of the boys would have done twice -as much themselves for the fun of seeing the Southern lad obliged to -handle the shovel. - -Then the boys trooped over to the vacant lots, and set to work to build -their fort. The many hands made short work of it, even though the -fort they fashioned was of goodly dimensions; and as soon as it was -finished, Graham and another lad carried back the borrowed shovels. -Then the two came racing back, to take part in the choice of leaders -for the two parties. - -A dozen names were proposed by different boys, but finally, Hamlin and -Griffin were selected. They at once proceeded to choose their followers -by first one, and then another, calling out a name. - -In Hamlin’s party were Clark, Gordon, Freeman, Graham, Raleigh, Sherman -and Reed, while Griffin’s included his own friends, with Lee, Dixon, -and a few others. In all, there were sixty boys. The leaders tossed up -a penny for choice of position, and it fell to Griffin and his party to -hold the fort. - -Then he and his men were allowed ten minutes to make and carry into -the fort as many snowballs as they could, for ammunition. Meantime, -Hamlin’s party was similarly employed, while he was discussing with one -or two of them the best plan of attack. It was decided to first make a -rush all together, and try to scale the walls all along the line. This -was done, but the attempt was a failure. The walls were too high to be -readily scaled, and such a storm of snowballs was showered down upon -the attacking party, that Hamlin was forced to call off his men, amid -exultant shouts from those in the fort. - -Then Hamlin divided his men into two parties, ordering one, under -Clark’s leadership, to attack one end of the fort, while he himself led -the other half against the other end, thus obliging Griffin to divide -his force to repel the attack. - -The two parties advanced all together against the fort until they -were quite near, then suddenly dividing, half turned to the left and -the other half to the right. Griffin hastily sent half of his men to -repel Clark’s party, while he, with the rest, beat back Hamlin and his -followers. Again and again the boys outside would succeed in climbing -almost to the top of the wall of snow, only to be met by a shower of -balls that filled eyes, ears and mouths, while strong hands pushed -and shoved them down the slippery walls, shouts and yells of derision -following them as they descended. - -At last, Hamlin again called off his men to rest and gather a new stock -of ammunition. - -“’Tisn’t much use, though, for us to snowball them,” grumbled Reed, -trying to get some of the snow out of his neck. “They can throw right -into our faces when we’re climbing their walls, but we can’t hang on -to those slippery snow banks, and throw up into their faces. They can -dodge and we can’t.” - -“Dodge! I should say we couldn’t,” echoed Freeman. “Much as ever I -could hang on at all while Lee was dashing snow into my face for all he -was worth.” - -“We’ll never take that fort by direct attack,” said Hamlin. “We’ve got -to use stratagem.” - -“Any sort of gem you say, so long as it’s a taking sort,” responded -Reed. - -“We might tunnel under, and so let them down unexpectedly,” suggested -Clark. - -“But they’d see us doing it,” objected Graham. - -“Mustn’t let them,” answered Clark. - -“What’s your idea, Clark? How would you do it?” asked Hamlin. - -“I’d make another attack at two points, so as to divide their force, -and make such a desperate fight that Griffin would need every man -he has, at those two points. Then, while the fight was going on, -one fellow might drop down at the bottom of the fort, and keeping -below those who were climbing the walls, so that those above in the -fort couldn’t see him, he might dig under the bottom of the wall. It -wouldn’t take many minutes for him to dig out a hole that he could -crawl into. Then he could loosen the snow above him, so that a little -extra stamping or pushing would break the wall through and let some of -those fellows down where we could capture them. And then we could pile -up through the opening, and so into the fort.” - -“What do you say, Gordon? Think we could do it?” cried Hamlin eagerly. - -“Looks as if we might, if we can find the right chap for that burrowing -trick.” - -“If we only had a big mole here, now,” remarked Reed. - -“I’ll be the mole, if nobody else cares to try it,” said Clark. - -“I don’t believe that plan will hold water,” remarked one boy, -scornfully. - -“It’s snow we want it to hold, not water,” was Reed’s quick response. - -“We’ll give it a trial anyway,” said Hamlin. “Now then--are you all -ready? Well then, we’ll go for those walls again. Forward, march!” - -On went the attacking party at a full speed, while those in the fort -braced themselves to repel the charge. Fast and furious flew the balls, -and in the cloud of snow, and amid the shouting, squirming, struggling -crowd trying to climb the walls, it was easy for Clark to drop -unnoticed at the bottom, where he had taken care to kick out an opening -as he approached the wall. Now, using his hands in decidedly mole-like -fashion, he began to burrow under, throwing the snow out behind him as -he dug. - -Meantime, above and around him, the struggle went on, and so many hard -knocks were given and received, that some of the boys began to get -angry. The fun was changing to earnest. - -Finally, Hamlin again called off his men, and as they gathered about -him, out of earshot of those in the fort, he said to Clark:-- - -“Couldn’t carry out your plan--eh, Clark? I was afraid it wouldn’t -work.” - -“But it did work,” said Clark, quietly. - -“Do you mean that you succeeded in undermining the wall?” cried Hamlin, -eagerly. - -“Yes,” said Clark, “and it would only take a little more digging to -make it mighty unsafe for those fellows to dance any more jigs up -there.” - -“But I don’t see any opening,” said Hamlin. - -“No--I kicked some snow into the opening so they wouldn’t discover it -if any of ’em should come outside the fort.” - -“Good for you, Clark,” cried Reed joyfully. “I tell you what, Hamlin, -I began to think I was getting tired of plain fighting up there. Some -of those chaps don’t fight fair. They whack altogether too hard about a -fellow’s head.” - -“That’s so,” assented several. - -“Yes, I think myself they pommeled us too severely this last time,” -said Hamlin; “but if Clark’s plan is a success, we’ll snake ’em out of -their snug quarters before long. How do you think we’d better go at it, -Clark?” - -“I should think it would be best to make an attack at each end as we -did last time, and while you keep them busy so, I’ll go through my -tunnel again and pull down a little more snow under the middle. Then -I’ll back out and give a signal to let you know I’m ready, and then -both parties might drop down and make a dash for the walls in the -middle. Of course Griffin and his men will rush there, and the sudden -rush and weight will break through what’s left of the wall and down -they’ll tumble, and up we’ll scramble and swarm over the walls before -they can pick themselves up.” - -“Tiptop plan,” said Gordon, and Hamlin added:-- - -“Yes, and we’ll carry it out, too. Now, boys, remember--pitch in and -carry the walls if you can, but keep your ears open for a whistle from -Clark, and when you hear it, follow me to the center.” - -Derisive hoots and yells from Griffin and his men greeted the approach -of Hamlin and his party, but the latter went steadily on in silence. -Not a shout or a cry answered the taunts of the defenders, and again -the struggle was renewed, the boys scrambling up the walls, fighting -their way inch by inch, only to be thrust and pushed back as they -neared the top. Two did succeed in scrambling over the wall, but a -dozen strong arms seized them, and promptly rolled them over the -slippery barrier to the ground below. - -In the midst of the struggle, a clear whistle sounded, and at the -signal, Hamlin’s voice rang out calling his followers to retreat. -They slipped down the walls and joined their leader, but instead of -retreating as before, they instantly made a dash for the walls in the -center. - -Griffin shouted to his men, and all but two rushed to the threatened -spot to repel the enemy. As they did so, the walls gave way, and more -than half of the defenders rolled through the breach to the ground, -while yells and shouts of a different sort announced their surprise and -disgust at their unexpected descent. - -The few who had not gone down in the slump, fought bravely, but they -were quickly overpowered by numbers, as over the walls scrambled Hamlin -and his men. It was their turn now to shout exultantly, as they seized -and made prisoner every boy that they could catch. Griffin’s men -looked rueful enough as they found themselves so cleverly trapped, and -some were not only rueful, but bitterly angry. - -“Where’s Griffin,” cried Hamlin. - -“There he is. Catch him--catch him!” shouted Lee, pointing to a white -figure just crawling out from under the mass of fallen snow. - -“Surrender! Surrender!” shouted a score of voices, as the boys -surrounded Griffin. - -“Oh, well, of course we must surrender, since you’ve got possession -of the fort; but you had to take it by trickery--not in fair fight,” -Griffin said, sullenly. - -“All’s fair in love and war,” quoted Graham, gaily. “It was a perfectly -fair stratagem, and certainly a successful one, I think.” - -“Who cares what _you_ think! Take that for a last shot!” and Griffin, -losing all control of his hot temper at these words from Graham, whom -he had never forgiven for winning the election, suddenly raised his arm -and flung a snowball he was holding in his hand--straight at Graham’s -face. - -Clark was standing near Griffin, and as his quick eye saw the look -on the latter’s face and the sudden movement, he sprang forward, and -struck up Griffin’s arm, and the ball, instead of knocking Graham over, -went crashing through a big window in a fine house across the street. - -A change came over every face, as the rattle of the falling glass was -heard. - -“You’re in for it, now, Grif,” said one. - -“’Twasn’t my fault. ’Twas Clark’s. What did you knock my arm up for?” -he added, turning angrily on Clark, and looking more than half inclined -to strike him. - -Clark did not flinch, as he answered gravely:-- - -“That ball might have hurt Graham pretty badly, Griffin.” - -“Hurt him! I should say so!” cried Hamlin. “A ball that would break a -window at this distance would have killed a fellow, sure. You must have -thrown it with tremendous force, Griffin.” - -Griffin dropped his eyes and said, sulkily:-- - -“Well, what’s to be done about it? I’ve no money to pay for plate-glass -windows, and anyway, I think Clark’s the one to foot the bill--unless -we bluff it out. Here comes the man, now.” - -The gentleman who was coming quickly towards the group might have been -excused for feeling that the limit of patience was reached in his case, -since this was the third time that season that his windows had been -broken by boys playing on the vacant lots. He was plainly very angry, -as he began abruptly:-- - -“Which of you broke my window?” - -For a second, nobody answered, and the man was about to express his -opinion pretty freely, when Clark stepped forward. - -“I am partly responsible for it, sir,” he said. - -“Oh, you are--are you? Well, are you going to pay for it?” - -“It shall certainly be paid for,” Clark replied, “but I can’t pay for -it to-day.” - -“Oh, yes, I understand that,” said the man. “You can’t pay it to-day, -and if I let you off, you _never_ will pay it. I’ll see your father -about it. Where is he?” - -Clark’s face grew suddenly white, and his clear eyes fell, while many -of those rough boys felt a most unusual thrill of pity and sympathy for -him. But he recovered himself quickly, and answered in a low voice:-- - -“I have no father to pay my bills, sir, but if you will not take my -word for it, I will give you a note to the firm I work for, and they -will see that you are paid.” - -By this time the man’s anger had begun to cool off a little. He was a -shrewd reader of faces, and Clark’s straightforward glance and manly -air began to make an impression on him. - -“What’s your name?” he asked gruffly. - -“Stanley Clark.” - -“Well, Mr. Stanley Clark, I suppose I’m a fool, but I’m going to trust -you. How long do you expect me to wait for my money?” - -“How much will the glass cost?” inquired Clark. - -“Five dollars; the glass and the putting in. It’s a big window, you -see.” - -“Yes, I see,” said Clark. “Well, sir, you shall have the money before -the first of February. Will that do?” - -“That will do,” and without another word the man turned away, saying to -himself, “I may be mistaken, but I believe that young chap is honest. -Anyhow, if he doesn’t keep his word, I’ll see the principal of the high -school. They were high school boys, and I could pick that one out among -a thousand.” - -As the man departed, all eyes were turned on Griffin, and Hamlin voiced -the feeling of many when he said:-- - -“I call that right down mean and sneaky, Griffin. It is really you who -ought to pay that bill.” - -“Here’s the man coming back again,” said Reed. And sure enough, the man -was returning, looking at something he held in his hand, as he came. - -Facing Clark, he demanded:-- - -“Did you throw that snowball?” - -“No, sir,” said Clark, “but if it hadn’t been for me, it would probably -not have gone through your window.” - -“Ah!” said the man, “I’m glad _you_ didn’t throw it, and if it was -aimed at any boy’s head, that boy owes you a debt of thanks, at least. -See here; this was inside the ball. I was so mad before that I forgot -to show it to you,” and he held out a rough, jagged piece of brick. -“That would have knocked the breath out of a boy, if it had hit him -full in the face”; and leaving the brick in Clark’s hand, the man again -departed. - -There was more than scorn and contempt now in the eyes that turned -towards Griffin, who, for the life of him, could not help cowering -under the fire of indignant glances and the words that followed. - -“You’d better blame Clark for knocking up your arm,” said Hamlin, -and the man crossing the street smiled grimly as the clear, ringing -voice reached even his ears. “You might have slept behind prison bars -to-night, if it had not been for Clark’s quick eye and hand.” - -“I wouldn’t have believed there was a fellow in the Central mean enough -to do a thing like that,” added Gordon. - -“Well, see here now, fellows.” It was Graham who said this. “Are we -going to let Clark pay that debt for Griffin? I can’t, for one,” and -the look he gave Clark said what his tongue could not say before all -those listening ears. - -“No! No!” shouted a score of voices. - -“I _can’t_ pay it, ’n that’s all there is about it,” said Griffin, his -hands in his pockets and his eyes on the ground. - -There was a moment of silence. Many of the boys knew that Griffin -belonged to a family that had no money to spare. - -“Well,” said Graham, “if Griffin really can’t pay it, _I’m_ the one to -do it, and I will, though I can’t do it just now. Christmas cleared me -out entirely.” - -“And me, too, of course,” said Hamlin; “that and the school dues that I -paid yesterday.” - -“See here, boys, neither Clark nor Graham ought to foot that bill, and -I reckon we’re all pretty short just now. Say we all chip in and earn -it to-day,” was Reed’s suggestion. - -“Earn it, how?” cried several voices. - -“Shoveling snow,” was the prompt reply. “This snow is so heavy that -the fellows that usually go around to clear walks can’t begin to -cover the ground that they generally do. You see they haven’t cleared -anywhere about here yet. What’s the matter with our borrowing shovels -again over yonder, or anywhere we can get ’em, and each of us clearing -one sidewalk. At ten cents each, we’d raise six dollars that way in a -jiffy.” - -“Three cheers for Reed. His head’s level!” called out one; and in two -minutes not a boy was to be seen on the vacant lots; not one except -Griffin. He stood there biting his nails, and scraping a hole in the -snow with the toe of his shoe. When the boys passed the lots with their -borrowed shovels, Griffin was gone. - -Late that afternoon, somebody left at Hamlin’s door twenty-five cents -done up in a bit of paper, on which was scrawled the one word, “glass.” - -“Griffin left that, I’m sure,” Hamlin said as he read the word. “I’m -glad he had grace enough to do that much.” - -He did not know that the boy had earned that quarter clearing off snow -with a shovel that he had manufactured himself out of a broom-handle -and a piece of a soap-box. Even Griffin was not all bad. - -A much astonished gentleman was the one who was called to his door that -evening to meet a delegation of high-school boys, one of whom handed -him a five-dollar bill to pay for his broken window. - - - - -CHAPTER XVII. HONOR TO WHOM HONOR IS DUE. - - -One morning, St. John, on his way to the class-room, stopped before a -bulletin-board on which had been written the names of the institutions -offering scholarships to the pupils of the high school. - -He had overheard an occasional word about these scholarships, but -really knew very little about them. So he stood there reading the list. - -Then up the stairs behind him came half a dozen boys of section D. As -they caught sight of St. John, they, too, stopped to see what he was -reading. St. John, who seemed never to want any boy within a yard of -him, turned to go, but, with a mischievous glance at the other, Reed -stood still, and the others pressed closely together, penning St. -John in to the little space between them and the board. Seeing their -purpose, St. John’s face took on its haughtiest expression, and leaning -against the board, he waited in angry silence for them to move aside -and let him pass. But they, enjoying his discomfiture, stood laughing -and chaffing one another, but never saying a word to him. - -More and more boys joined the group, and, each one taking in the -situation, stood there as if he had no intention of going farther that -day. - -Finally Dixon called out:-- - -“Say, boys, who’s going to take these prizes?” glancing at the board. - -“Gordon--Clark--Hamlin--Raleigh,” shouted the crowd. - -“Yes,” said Reed, thoughtfully, “they’re the only ones that have the -ghost of a chance.” - -“But they can’t take ’em all,” somebody suggested. - -“Well, the girls have a go at two of them. Aren’t you going to give the -girls a chance?” said Dixon. - -“We didn’t say that those fellows would accept the scholarships--but -they’ll _win_ ’em sure.” This from Barber. - -“Yes,” said Reed, with one eye on St. John’s angry face, “they’ll win -’em sure, and they ought to. They’ve worked hard enough for them, and -they deserve all they’ll win. The rest of us must play second fiddle -this year. Not but what second fiddle is pretty fair, when it puts a -chap up in the nineties.” - -“Here comes Bobby!” - -The word ran through the crowd, and the group dissolved like magic, -leaving St. John free to enter the class-room. - -Of course he knew that the boys had only been trying to tease him, for -his high rank in the class could not be denied; but all the same it -made him furiously angry to be ranked with the “second fiddles,” and -counted out entirely in the prize competition. - -All but one of the six scholarships were to be given to the pupils -having highest averages in all or in certain studies, during the three -years’ course; but one, and that the highest prize--or the one so -considered in the school--was offered to the boy who should rank first -in the classical course during the senior year, and should also write -the best Latin essay. If, as had sometimes happened, two or three boys -should stand equally high on the year’s average, then the quality of -their essays would decide to whom the prize should go. But if one boy -should stand first in the class, and another not ranking as high should -hand in a better essay--for any boy who chose was free to compete--then -the prize would not be given at all that year. - -“I’ll win that scholarship if it kills me to do it, just to make that -crowd mad. It _would_ make them mad enough to see their precious four -worsted in the fight. And they _shall_ see it, sure as fate!” - -So ran St. John’s thoughts during that morning’s exercises. From that -day, this one thought and purpose ruled him. He had never cared for -athletic sports, and riding and driving were all the exercise he ever -took, but now, the time spent in going to and from school was all that -he was out of doors; and almost every moment of his waking time was -given to study. Long after midnight he worked, going over and over what -he already knew, lest possibly, some point might have been forgotten or -slighted. - -The other four boys were working hard too, but they were so accustomed -to out-of-door sports and exercise, that it never occurred to them that -they could give them up. So they kept their brains and bodies in good -working order, while St. John grew, week by week, more worn and weary. - -“His royal highness looks rather seedy--eh,” Reed said one day to -Clark, and the latter answered:-- - -“I think he’s working too hard.” - -St. John’s ears, sharpened by his nervous anxiety, caught both question -and answer, and resented anyone’s thinking that he needed to work -harder than any of the others. Up to this time he had been coldly -indifferent to his classmates, but now he began to hate them all. -He told himself that they were all banded against him, and that not -one of them wanted him to win. And this was true. He had made not -the slightest effort to gain their friendship, while the others were -all prime favorites. Even Clark was happily conscious that the boys -were friendly to him now; all except St. John and Lee. Lee’s Southern -prejudice had not yet died away, and in his heart he still regarded -Clark as a coward. - -The competition for the prize scholarships was not confined to section -D. There were two girls’ sections, and one other boys’ section in the -senior year, and in each of these there were scholars who were quite as -eager to win the prizes as were the boys in section D. - -And in section D also there were other competitors besides the five who -stood highest in the class. These were what Reed had called the “second -fiddles,” and their chance lay in the fact that neither St. John, -Gordon, nor Hamlin would accept the scholarships, should they win them, -as all three of them were planning to enter some of the larger and more -prominent colleges. They wanted the honor of winning the prizes, but -it was generally understood that the prizes themselves would go to the -next lower in class, while the whole class to a boy, always excepting -St. John, was now determined that D should be the banner section this -year. None were more eager for this last than Crawford and Freeman. -Both of them were trying to live down the previous year’s record. They -could hope to win no prizes, but they could do their share towards -raising the general record, and this they were trying to do. - -As the sunny May days slipped away and examination time approached, the -strain of the competition began to tell upon many of the pupils. Four -in section D stood so nearly together that Mr. Horton himself could not -see that one had any better chance than the others. - -“I never had four such students in one class,” he said to Professor -Keene one day. “So far as perfect recitations go, there is nothing to -choose between them. When St. John first entered, he was away ahead in -Latin, but the other three have been steadily overtaking him, and now -it all rests on the examinations.” - -“And the Latin essay,” added the professor. - -“Yes. That, of course, decides one prize.” - -“St. John going to win there?” questioned the professor. - -Mr. Horton shook his head doubtfully:-- - -“I’m afraid the lad is not well,” he said. “I notice that he doesn’t -think as quickly as he did, and one of the others may write a better -essay. His will be couched in elegant Latin, but the matter of it may -not be equal to some one of the others. There’s no telling; anyhow, it -is going to be a very close contest, and I shall be glad when it is -over.” - -“Yes, so shall I,” responded the professor. “There’s always more or -less ill-feeling, and too great strain in these prize competitions.” - -A carriage stood before the schoolhouse gate when school was dismissed -that day. A lady and little girl sat within it, watching the throng of -boys passing down the steps. - -“There’s Charlie, Mamma! Charlie! Charlie!” called the child’s clear -voice, as Reed, with Hamlin and Clark, came down the steps. - -Reed hurried to the carriage, but his mother was looking not at him, -but at one of the other two. - -“Who is that boy, Charlie--the one that you were talking to?” she cried -breathlessly. - -Reed paused, with his hand on the carriage door. - -“That’s Clark--Stanley Clark. You’ve heard me speak of him times -enough,” he answered, wonderingly. - -“Oh, Charlie, that is the boy that saved Nellie’s life. Don’t let him -get away. Bring him here quick. I _must_ speak to him.” - -With a mixture of delight and amazement on his face, Reed raced after -the two boys, and seizing Clark by the arm, cried:-- - -“Come, Clark, my mother wants to see you. You _must_ come,” he added -imperatively, as Clark held back, unwillingly. “I’ll tell you what it’s -all about to-morrow, Hamlin”; and he began to pull Clark toward the -carriage. - -Clark knew why he was wanted, for he had recognized the two, but he -would far rather have risked his life again than to have been marched -up to that carriage. But there was no help for it, so he submitted with -the best grace possible. - -Mrs. Reed seized both his hands, and her eyes were dim as she said:-- - -“To think that it was you who saved my little girl, and all this time -we have never suspected it! You _must_ have seen our advertisements?” - -“Oh, yes,” said Clark, looking mightily uncomfortable, “but I didn’t -want any more thanks, you know. Any fellow would have done what I -did on the impulse of the moment. If I’d stopped to think, I should -probably have stood still.” - -“Not a bit of it,” said Mrs. Reed promptly. “A boy who acted on such an -impulse as you did, _couldn’t_ be a coward. It is not in him. But step -in; we’ll take you home. I must know where you live, for I want to call -on your mother. I know she was proud of her boy that night.” - -Clark laughed a little. “No,” he said, “she never knew anything about -it, except what she read in the paper.” - -“Well, she _will_ know about it to-morrow,” said the little lady -decidedly. - -When the carriage stopped at Clark’s door, she again took the lad’s -hand. - -“Think what a shadow would be upon our home to-day, but for you,” she -said, with a glance at her little daughter. “It is a debt that we can -never repay, but, at least, let us have the pleasure of seeing you and -your mother sometimes, at our home. I have often asked Charlie why you -never came to our house, as so many of the other boys do; I know the -reason, now.” - -Mrs. Clark wondered a little when her son told her that Charlie Reed’s -mother would call upon her the next day. She was not at all pleased, -since she was living in the utmost seclusion, feeling almost as keenly -as did her son the cloud of disgrace that rested upon them. But when -she learned from Mrs. Reed what Stanley had done, when she saw the -tears of deep feeling in the eyes of her visitor, and felt the warm -pressure of her hands, how could she help being proud and happy? - -Clark would have liked to stay away from school that next day, but it -would never do to bring down his record by an absent mark. He went as -late as he dared, however, but the instant he entered the room he saw -that the boys were waiting for him, and in spite of the fact that Mr. -Horton was already at his desk, a shout broke from the whole class at -sight of the schoolmate, whom they were now as eager to honor as a year -ago they had been to hurt and annoy. - -“Three cheers for Clark!” shouted the irrepressible Reed, actually -jumping up on his seat in his excitement, and the cheers were given -with a will, while Clark, blushing and confused, bowed his thanks and -dropped hastily into his seat. - -“Well,” remarked Mr. Horton, looking slowly about the room, “may I ask -what this means? What have you been doing, Clark, to awaken all this -enthusiasm?” - -“Nothing at all, sir. It’s just the boys,” stammered Clark. - -“Yes,” said Mr. Horton dryly, “I’m quite aware that it was just the -boys.” But now Reed, trying to keep his enthusiasm within bounds, told -the story in a few graphic words. - -Mr. Horton listened with as great an interest as even Reed could -desire, and when the story was ended, said only:-- - -“Boys, you are perfectly excusable for this once; only remember that -this is not a precedent,” but the look he gave the quiet lad whom he -had learned to love, assured the boys that their teacher was in fullest -sympathy with them. - -From this time, Clark’s popularity in the school was very great. Even -hot-headed Lee blotted from his memory that unreturned blow, the year -before, and not even in the depths of his own heart did he ever again -call Stanley Clark “coward.” - -Before that day was over, section D had another sensation. - -As usual near the close of the year, the rules were relaxed, especially -in the senior class, and often some of the boys would remain in the -room during part of the recess, talking over their work and surmising -about the questions likely to be asked in the examinations. Half a -dozen or more were busily talking about the dreaded Latin essays, when -Reed came rushing upstairs, exclaiming:-- - -“I say, you fellows, you missed a picnic, staying in to-day. Didn’t you -hear us all yelling outside?” - -“Why, yes, we heard you, but it’s nothing unusual for you little chaps -to be noisy,” said Hamlin, loftily. Then he added, “but if you’re -very anxious to tell us what it was about, this time, we can listen, -I suppose,” and with an air of patient endurance, he dropped into his -seat. - -Reed picked up a book and flung it at him, but he was too full of his -story to pursue the mock quarrel, especially as two or three voices -called out:-- - -“Go on, Reedy--tell us what ’twas all about.” - -“Why, we were all out there on the sidewalk--a whole crowd of us,” -said Reed, “when a fellow came along driving a heavy cart with the -worst-looking old rackabones of a horse you ever laid eyes on. The -creature didn’t look as if it had had a good meal in six months, and it -was so weak that it could hardly crawl. Just before it got opposite -our gate, the horse stopped, and the big brute that was driving began -to lash it unmercifully--to get past us, I expect. - -“Some of us yelled at him to ‘hold up,’ but, bless you, before the -words were fairly out of our mouths, Crawford had dashed out and was -pitching into that driver, and giving him as pretty a pommeling as -you’d want to see; put him right down there in the street and licked -him well. Then he yanked him up, and ordered him to take the horse out -of the shafts. The fellow refused at first, and threatened to ‘have -the law’ on Crawford; but that didn’t scare Crawford a bit, and then -the rascal began to whine and swear by turns; and finally asked how he -could get his cart home without the horse. - -“‘I’ll fix that,’ said Crawford, ‘but that horse is going to have a -rest for one week, and all he wants to eat, and he’s going to have ’em -in the stable where my horses are kept.’ - -“‘An’ phwat will I be doin’ ahl that week, with niver a hoss to me -cart?’ said the man. - -“‘I’ll hire a horse for you to use that week,’ said Crawford. - -“The man looked at him. - -“‘An’ phwat if I say No?’ said he, looking as if he would like to give -Crawford a black eye, if he dared. - -“‘Then I’ll go this moment, and enter a complaint against you. Any -officer of the Humane Society would order that poor brute killed rather -than see him driven as he is now, to say nothing of seeing him beaten -as shamefully as you beat him just now,’ said Crawford. - -“The man looked around at us all. Of course, we’d crowded ’round to see -the thing out--and then he began slowly to unfasten the poor old nag. -It was so weak that I thought it would have to be propped up against a -fence or something, but it did manage to stand. - -“‘Now phwere’ll I take him?’ said the man, and I know he added some hot -words under his breath. - -“‘You’ll come along with me,’ said Crawford. ‘I’m not going to trust -that horse out of my sight’; and I just wish you’d seen ’em going up -the street together, almost holding up that poor old skeleton between -’em, with a crowd of street boys who had gathered, tagging on behind, -hooting and yelling.” - -[Illustration] - -As Reed stopped to take breath, Gordon exclaimed:-- - -“Well, I’d never have believed that of Crawford. I didn’t think he was -that sort at all.” - -“Oh, he loves horses,” broke in Freeman. “You ought to see him pet -those ponies of his. I heard him say once, that his ponies were all the -_folks_ he had, for his nearest relative is a cousin that he hasn’t -seen in ten years.” - -A sudden silence followed Freeman’s words, and more than one boy’s -thoughts flew to his own home and those who loved him there, and a new -feeling of sympathy for Crawford was awakened. - -“Section D should be proud of Crawford, to-day,” said Clark. “Let’s -show him that we are.” - -“So we will,” said one and another. - -“But won’t Mr. Horton mark him off for breaking bounds?” said Dixon, as -the bell sounded. - -“Not he; trust Bobby to do the fair thing when he hears the story,” -said Graham, and Reed added:-- - -“Bobby’s all right. Crawford asked me to tell him, and he said it would -be all right.” - -But for Mr. Horton’s warning in regard to a precedent, Crawford would -have received almost as enthusiastic a greeting when he returned -half an hour later as had been given to Clark that morning; but, as -it was, he slipped quietly into his seat, and the boys only showed -their appreciation of the stand he had taken, by surrounding him after -school, and asking all sorts of questions about the affair. From this -time however, Crawford was “counted in” to whatever was going on, as he -never had been before. - -In the midst of the strain of approaching examinations, and essays to -be prepared, came the annual drill, and though our senior boys had -felt, a few weeks before, as if they could hardly spare the time for -the extra drilling, yet, after all, Company D _did_ want to keep those -red ribbons one more year, and every other company wanted just as much -to capture them and that beautiful gold medal; and so, when the great -day came, lessons took a second place for once, and the boys in blue -came to the front. - -This time, there was no disorder, and no unfair dealing. The judges -gave high praise to the battalion as a body, and Company D retained -the red ribbons. It was the last company on the list, and when, with -the little silken badges fluttering in the breeze, it marched off the -field, all the other companies united in a cordial cheer for Company -D; which unexpected demonstration from the disappointed competitors so -pleased Captain Hamlin that, the next day, every boy in the battalion -received an invitation to a steamboat trip down the bay, with a shore -dinner--all at the expense of Company D, though Hamlin himself paid the -bill. And if he thereby deprived himself of a special pleasure trip -that his father had promised him, the boys never knew it, and Hamlin -was content. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII. GLADNESS FOR CLARK. - - -“Who enters here, leaves hope behind.” - -This legend, in huge, shaded letters, adorned the blackboard one -morning, when a written examination in geometry was to take the place -of the usual recitations. - -Mr. Horton glanced at Dixon with a smile as he read the sentence, for -Dixon was apt to get badly tangled up over those perplexing lines and -angles, and was always in the depths of melancholy when an examination -in geometry was impending. - -Just then Dixon was saying:-- - -“Wish I could borrow your head this morning, Clark. You wouldn’t mind -lending it, would you?” - -Clark, buried in the depths of a big lexicon, answered in an -absent-minded way:-- - -“Certainly not. Help yourself.” - -The shout of laughter from the boys who had heard both question and -answer brought Clark back to his surroundings, and he joined in the -laugh against himself, while Dixon grumbled:-- - -“Only wish I could hold him to his word.” - -When inkwells had been filled, pens and paper distributed, and the boys -were taking last, lingering peeps at the knottiest theorems before -their geometries should be collected, as was the custom, they were -taken entirely by surprise, for, instead of telling two boys to bring -the books to the desk, the teacher said:-- - -“Boys, we are going to carry the self-government principles into the -examinations this year. If you will all promise to be perfectly fair -and honorable in this examination, your books may remain on your desks, -and I shall leave the room without a monitor until the examination is -over. As many as would like me to do this will please rise.” - -It seemed to Mr. Horton that every boy in the room was on his feet the -next instant. In reality, several rose slowly, and only because they -were not willing to say that they preferred not to be so trusted. - -Mr. Horton looked much pleased, as he bade the boys be seated. - -“I am _very_ glad to have such an unanimous response,” he said, “and -I shall leave you without the slightest doubt. I know that my boys -can be trusted this year, and it is a pleasure to me to show you how -thoroughly I do trust you. Now, has any one any question to ask about -the examination before I leave the room?” - -After answering a few questions, Mr. Horton went out, and the boys -settled down to work. To many of them, it seemed strange to be left so. -These were the boys who had been used to whisper, and take sly peeps at -bits of paper which they had tucked into various pockets. More than one -had such aids to memory about him at that very moment, but they were -ashamed, now, to use them. - -As the boys looked over the list of questions, many a sigh or frown -showed that that list contained precisely the questions that one or -another had hoped would not be there. - -But most of the boys settled down at once to steady work, and for a -while nothing was heard but the scratching of pens and the rattling of -paper, or the uneasy movements of some lad who was trying in vain to -recall a forgotten theorem. - -As Gordon laid aside a written sheet, he happened to glance towards a -seat occupied by Blake--one of the boys who had entered that year, and -he saw Blake softly lift the lid of his desk, and peep at something on -the inside. - -Leaving his seat, Gordon marched directly to Blake’s, and, without a -word, suddenly lifted the lid of his desk, in spite of the other’s -efforts to prevent it On the inside of the lid was pinned a brief -explanation of several of the toughest problems in the geometry. - -With a look of scorn in his blue eyes, Gordon snatched the paper and -tore it into bits; then, still without a word, he returned to his seat. -As he did so, several boys, whose quick eyes had taken note of the -whole performance, clapped their approval, and at this, Blake, who had -started up angrily, dropped back into his seat, and went on with his -work in sulky silence. - -One or two other boys attempted to cheat that day, but their attempts -were put down by the rest as promptly as Blake’s had been. - -Blake tried to slip out of the room unnoticed after the examination was -over, but Gordon had kept an eye on him, and speedily overtook him in -the hall. - -“Blake,” he said, “I’m sure you are glad, now, that you did your work -honestly. You wouldn’t have liked Mr. Horton to know that you went back -on your word.” - -“He wouldn’t have known it, if you’d minded your own business,” growled -Blake, “and I should have had a hundred on the examination, and now I -shan’t get above eighty, thanks to your meddling.” - -“I’m sorry for that, Blake, but I’d rather have an honest eighty than a -dishonest hundred, and I’m sure Mr. Horton would say so, too.” - -“Oh, you’re too high-toned in this school,” said Blake. “I never was in -a school before where we didn’t cheat in examinations. The teachers -wink at it. They know we do it.” - -“Well, I don’t believe in it,” said Gordon. “I mean to be honest after -I leave school, and I don’t see why I shouldn’t be honest in school, -too. I couldn’t respect myself, if I did mean, underhanded things.” - -“Respect your grandmother!” muttered Blake, walking off at such a pace -that Gordon did not attempt to keep up with him, but turned back to -wait for Hamlin, who came down the stairs a moment later. - -Hamlin was looking very happy. - -“Such a relief to get that exam. over,” he said, as he joined Gordon; -“and I knew every problem like a book. Wasn’t it fine, though, to have -Bobby put the class on honor so!” - -“Yes,” said Gordon, “though two or three didn’t live up to it.” - -“Oh, of course not. There are always a few sneaks in every crowd, but -on the whole they did splendidly, I think. But what’s the matter with -St. John?” - -“Matter? What do you mean?” asked Gordon. - -“Why, he’s still pegging away up there, and usually he’s one of the -first to finish up,” replied Hamlin. - -“Haven’t you noticed how much slower he’s been lately than he was the -first of the year? I think the fellow’s worked out,” said Gordon. “Too -bad, too, for it will spoil his whole year’s record, if he doesn’t get -through these exams. in good shape.” - -“Oh, he’ll get through all right enough,” said Hamlin, carelessly. - -“Who else was up there when you left?” asked Gordon. - -“Only Dixon, Freeman, Lee and Clark. Clark had handed in his paper and -was waiting for Freeman. Here they come now.” And the two boys stopped -and waited for the other two. - -“Bobby certainly is working the self-government plan for all it is -worth to-day,” said Freeman, as he and Clark joined the others. - -“Anything new?” asked Hamlin. - -“He’s left those three, St. John, Lee and Dixon, up there in the room -to finish, and told ’em to put their papers in the lower drawer in his -desk when they get through; and the last one is to lock the drawer and -give him the key in the morning.” - -“He certainly is putting them on honor,” said Gordon; “but I guess it’s -safe enough with those three fellows.” - -The three boys left in the class-room worked on in silence for half -an hour. Then Lee had finished his work, and putting his paper in the -drawer, he departed, followed a few minutes later by Dixon. Both boys -cast wondering glances at St. John, who was usually among the first to -pass in his papers, but he paid no attention to them, not seeming even -to notice when they left the room. - -He had finished all but one of the problems given. That one he had -tried in vain to solve. His tired brain would not recall the theorem -required. As Dixon left the room, St. John dropped his head on his desk -with a weary sigh, but in a moment he started up again, and bent over -the question-paper. - -“Why _can’t_ I think of it?” he said half aloud. “Of course I know it. -I’ve solved that problem no end of times.” - -His eye fell on his geometry. He stretched his hand towards it, then -drew it back, a hot flush burning on his cheek. - -“On honor!” he murmured, and pushing the book aside, he tried again -to think out the solution required, but in vain. For half an hour he -sat there fighting against the temptation that assailed him. Once he -folded his unfinished paper, and started to put it in the drawer; -then, remembering how Gordon, Clark and Hamlin had gone off an hour -before--with every question correctly answered, he was sure--he dropped -back into his seat with a groan. - -“I _can’t_ let them get ahead of me, so,” he thought. “I’m really a -better scholar than anyone of the lot. It’s just that my head is so -dead tired! I really do know every page of that geometry, if I only -could think of it--if _only_ I could.” - -But he could not, try as he would. Then the janitor looked in at the -door, and St. John knew that he wanted to clean the room. He began -wearily to put away his papers. Suddenly he reached forward, snatched -his geometry, and hurriedly turning the leaves, looked at the theorem -that he had been trying to recall. Then, flinging the book aside, he -hastily wrote out the explanation on his examination paper, folded it, -and flung it carelessly into the drawer, and, forgetting entirely that -he was to lock the drawer and keep the key until morning, he picked up -his cap and left the room. His paper was all right, he was sure, but -already he felt that he had paid too high a price for it. - -The examinations that followed were conducted on the same principle as -this first one, and Mr. Horton was so well satisfied with the result -that he determined that he would never go back to the old watching -method again. The Latin examination was held the next week, and, so far -as was known, not one boy attempted underhanded methods. - -St. John was so thoroughly at home in Latin, that he was among the -first to complete his work, and he left the room with a sigh of relief -that one more task was over, for he had reached that stage of mental -and physical exhaustion when the smallest task seems a load too heavy -to be borne, and he was gathering all his energies to finish the Latin -essay that was to decide who should hold first rank in the class. - -For weeks he had been working at that essay, writing and rewriting; one -day pleased with his work, the next so dissatisfied that he would throw -it aside and begin anew. But now, the time was short, and in a few days -the essay must be handed in to the judges. - -Gordon, Hamlin and Clark were also more than a little concerned about -their essays. - -“It isn’t the putting it into Latin; it’s getting the ideas in English -that sticks me,” Hamlin said to Clark one day. “I’ve been cudgeling my -brains, and it does seem as if I haven’t an idea worth writing down, on -any subject whatever.” - -“Queer, how a fellow’s ideas do vanish the minute he tries to write ’em -out on paper,” said Clark. “I couldn’t get to sleep the other night -for thinking about that essay, and while I lay awake, I thought of a -subject, and one idea after another came to me, till I jumped out of -bed and went to scribbling. Then I went back to bed and to sleep, and -in the morning, when I read over my bright ideas, they seemed just -about as near nothing as anything I ever read. So I flung the whole -thing into the waste-basket, and began over again.” - -“I’ve begun about a dozen times, and all my efforts, thus far, seem to -me to be fit for the same receptacle,” laughed Gordon; “but there’s -so little time left, that all I can do is to pick out the best of the -lot--if there is any best--and make a smooth copy of it, and let it go -at that.” - -“Oh, yes, that’ll do for you to say,” grumbled Hamlin; “but all the -same you’ll hand in an essay all trimmed up and polished off in tip-top -style. That’s what you’ll both do. I know you two chaps; seen you -before.” - -Any boy in the Latin class was free to hand in an essay in competition -for the prize scholarship; but it was well enough understood who were -the six sure to stand at the head of the class, and there was small -likelihood that any other boy could produce a better essay than any -one of these six could write. Nevertheless, a few made the attempt, -and nine essays were given to the judges. The decision was not to be -made known, however, until Commencement day; so, when their papers had -been handed in, the boys tried to forget all about the matter until the -decision should be announced. - -The day before Commencement was always one of intense interest, because -then the results of all the examinations were announced, and not till -then could the scholars know their marks on the whole year’s work, and -for those who had been in the school through the entire three years, -their standing for the whole period. Those who hoped to win one of the -scholarships were especially anxious to know their standing, to see -what their chances might be. - -Rules were relaxed on this day. There were no more recitations. The -work of the senior year was ended, and this last day was really more in -the nature of a final friendly meeting as a class, than anything else. - -When Mr. Horton, who had been down to Prof. Keene’s office, returned to -his class-room with a paper in his hand, the merry chatter ceased, and -the boys dropped into their seats, prepared to give him their undivided -attention. - -He began by telling them that never since he had been teaching had -he had a class that had done, on the whole, so satisfactory work as -this class had done during the past year. He spoke of the marked -improvement, both in scholarship and moral character of the class as -a whole, and told them that their influence had not been confined to -their own section, but had extended to the whole school, so that Prof. -Keene declared that the school stood much higher in reputation than it -had done a year ago. “And he attributes this,” said Mr. Horton, “to the -influence of the Law and Order Society of section D.” - -A round of applause greeted this, but it was quickly hushed, as the -teacher went on:-- - -“It gives me much pleasure to say, as it will give you to hear, that -section D is the banner section of the Central, this year.” - -The applause that followed this announcement was so enthusiastic and -prolonged that it reached the ears of Prof. Keene, in his office, but -he only smiled as he listened. - -But Mr. Horton raised his hand, and silence instantly succeeded, for -the boys were longing to know what was written on that paper which he -held, and now he unfolded it, and read the result of the examinations. - - Number 1. Stanley Clark. - Number 2. Hugh Gordon, and Everett St. John. - Number 3. David Hamlin. - Number 4. Alec Graham, and so on. - -Each name was greeted with a round of cheers, and as soon as the -list was ended, the boys crowded around the prize-winners with -congratulations. Only St. John sat apart, and spoke to nobody. To -stand second was nothing to him. If he could not stand first, he said -to himself that he might as well be at the bottom of the list; and -besides, deep in his heart, he knew that he had not gained honestly -even the second rank. So he answered coldly, even rudely, the -congratulations of Clark and Hamlin, and intimated so plainly that he -wanted to be let alone, that no one else ventured to approach him. - -In the midst of the hubbub of talk, Mr. Horton called Reed to the desk. - -“You are wanted in the professor’s office,” he said. - -Wondering “what was up,” Reed hurried down to the office. When, half -an hour later, he returned, his face was fairly radiant. A tall, -fine-looking gentleman followed him, and the whisper went around that -that was Charlie Reed’s father. - -Reed did not go to his own seat, but slipped into one beside Clark, -and, as he did so, he seized Clark’s hand and wrung it till the latter -fairly winced, as he whispered:-- - -“Whatever is the matter, Reed?” - -But Reed, with that same happy smile, answered only:-- - -“Father’s going to make a speech. You just listen.” - -At this moment Mr. Reed, who had been talking to Mr. Horton, rose and -faced the boys. - -“I have a story to tell,” he began; “a story in which, I am sure, you -will all be interested, as it deeply concerns one of your number. It is -a true story--true in every detail. - -“In a neighboring city there lived, not long ago, a man who stood very -high in the community. He was wealthy, he held positions of trust--of -honor, and no man in the land seemed less likely to fall than he; -yet he _did_ fall. Not satisfied with the wealth and station he had -gained, he wanted to double his millions. He speculated--risked all -that he had, and lost. Then he used the trust-funds in his hands, and -again he lost. - -“Then, with wealth gone, with honor gone, he would have taken his own -life, but for one thing. His wife was very, very ill, and she had no -one in the world but him, for they had no children. - -“While he sat in his office, trying to decide whether he could leave -his dying wife alone in the world, and commit this last great crime, -there came to him one who was associated with him in business, one -to whom he had years before given a helping hand. This man had never -forgotten the help he had received, and the other knew that he could -count upon help and sympathy from him in this hour of his shame and -trouble. - -“He told his friend the whole story, and asked of him what I believe no -man has a right to ask of another. It could be made to appear to the -world as if this other were the one who had betrayed his trust, and the -guilty man proposed to let the world believe this. He asked his friend -to bear in his stead the shame and dishonor that rightfully belonged to -himself. - -“‘It is only for a few days,’ he pleaded. ‘You know how _very_ ill my -poor wife is. The doctors say it is a question of but a few hours now. -It is only for her sake--that she may die in peace--and, as soon as -she is gone, the world shall know the whole story, and your name shall -be fully cleared.’ - -“That was an awful sacrifice to ask of an upright, honorable man. - -“At first the man refused utterly, but the other reminded him of past -kindness received not only from himself, but from the wife whose life -was so near its end--and at last he yielded. He agreed to bear the -blame and the shame for the little time she had to live, only making -the condition that his own wife should know the truth. - -“Think, boys, what it was to that man to have the papers full of the -story, to see friends pass him coldly by--even when he believed that in -a few days all would be made right again! - -“But, contrary to all expectations, the apparently dying woman rallied, -and slowly, very slowly, began to recover. - -“Then, what was to be done? The guilty man selfishly refused to own the -truth, and clear the name of his friend, and that friend was obliged to -leave the country, or go to prison and serve a sentence for a crime he -had never committed. - -“He went to another land, and there devoted his time and strength -to winning back enough to repay all that had been lost through his -partner’s sin. - -“A few days ago, the invalid wife died--died in blissful ignorance of -the sad truth. When she was gone, all interest in life for her husband -was ended. He felt that he could no longer bear the burden of his own -guilt, and the knowledge of what another was suffering through him. He -told the whole story, gave up every dollar he had left, and only asked -that the name of the noble man who had suffered shame for his sake be -cleared at once. - -“The papers, to-night, will tell the story to all the world, and from -this day forth no shadow will ever rest on the name of Stanley W. -Clark.” - -There was a moment of intense silence as Mr. Reed ceased speaking. Then -came a perfect burst of cheers. - -Clark’s face was buried in his hands, and when he lifted it to see Mr. -Reed standing beside him, the glad tears were rolling down his cheeks, -and more than one boy found his own eyes dim. - -As for Charlie Reed--he declared that he was “’most too happy to live.” - -All through the year Clark had been winning his way into the hearts of -his schoolmates, and now they went wild over him, and shook his hands -till his arms were lame, and showed so much sympathy and gladness for -him, that, at last, he broke down entirely, and cried like a baby for -pure joy. - -From that day no shadow rested on his strong young face, and never -again did he need to shrink from others, or dread a reference to the -father who was, more than ever, his ideal. - - - - -CHAPTER XIX. COMMENCEMENT. - - -The next day was Commencement. - -A brief, informal session was held in the morning, but it was a -session from which none wished to be absent, for then the names of the -prize-winners were to be announced. - -There were many anxious hearts, and a few hopeful ones, for though the -rank-list read the day before told each boy his standing in class, it -did not settle the matter of the prize scholarships. - -It is safe to say that only one boy grudged Stanley Clark the first -rank that he had so fairly won by his steady, thorough work. That boy -was Everett St. John. He would not have been present at all, that -morning, but for the Latin essays. He had still a lingering hope that -his might be adjudged the best. - -But now Mr. Horton was writing on the blackboard, and every boy gazed -eagerly forward to read what was written. In his clear hand, they read -the names of the six colleges offering the scholarships. Then, with the -chalk in his fingers, he faced the school. - -“You all heard the rank-list read yesterday,” he said, “so you know -that Clark, St. John and Gordon would have the first claim on the -second, third and fourth of these scholarships, but as these three are -to enter other colleges, these scholarships go to the next in rank, -Graham, Griffin and Bent; the two last named being members, as you -know, of section A. - -“The last two scholarships on the list have, I am happy to say, been -won by girls. And now there remains but one--the first--which will be -awarded to the boy whose Latin thesis has been considered by the judges -to be the best. That thesis I hold in my hand, but I do not know what -name it bears, as it was handed to me in this sealed envelope.” - -Every eye watched as he tore open the envelope and read the name of -Stanley Clark, and hearty cheers expressed the satisfaction of his -classmates at the result. - -As soon as he could secure silence, Mr. Horton went on:-- - -“The judges desire me to say that they have awarded the prize to -Stanley Clark because of the high character of his essay, and they also -wish me to state that, in elegance of style and choice of words, the -essay submitted by Everett St. John is decidedly superior.” - -It was Clark who led applause for St. John, but the latter only scowled -in response to it. His pride and ambition were too bitterly hurt to -appreciate any expression of kindly feeling. - -“There is one more prize to be given this year,” Mr. Horton went on, -taking a small case from his desk. “It is a gold medal which has never -been given before, but the donor has made it a perpetual gift from this -time. It is to be given to the boy in the senior class who has made -the greatest advance in moral character during the year. Of course, -we can only judge from what we see, and therefore this is the most -difficult prize to award; so you, to whom the decision is left, must -think carefully before you decide. This is to be awarded by vote of the -class. I should have added that, by express desire of the gentleman who -gives this prize, it is to be, this year, awarded to some member of -section D. After this year, it is not to be so limited.” - -The boys looked wonderingly at one another. They did not quite like the -responsibility laid upon them. - -“May I speak to some of the boys, sir?” Clark asked, and as Mr. Horton -gave assent, he quickly turned to Hamlin, and whispered:-- - -“I think Crawford ought to have it, don’t you?” - -“Yes,” said Hamlin, promptly. “I had thought of Freeman, but though -he has improved immensely this year, he hasn’t made such a jump as -Crawford, because he never got so far down.” - -“And I’m sure it will help Crawford to know how we feel about it,” -suggested Clark. - -From one to another the suggestion passed, and, when Mr. Horton called -for the decision, it was almost an unanimous one for Crawford. He was -taken utterly by surprise. Not one thought of the possibility of its -being awarded to him had entered his mind, and he was prepared to vote -most heartily for Freeman; but he was honestly pleased to know that his -efforts to “do the square thing,” as he would have expressed it, had -been appreciated, and that shining gold medal was a constant incentive -to fresh effort thereafter. It was many a year before he discovered -that it was his stern guardian, Mr. Chase, who had given this prize, -earnestly hoping that Crawford would be the winner. - -The Commencement exercises were held in the evening in one of the -largest opera-houses. - -Never had the decorations on such an occasion been so beautiful as -this year, for never before had so many outside friends lent a helping -hand. There was Gordon’s father, so proud that the old high school was -regaining its old reputation, and so proud and happy because of the -share his boy had had in bringing this about; and there was Reed’s -father, who was but too happy to spend some of his abundant means to -make the occasion a memorable one, not only for his own boy’s sake, -but also for the sake of Stanley Clark, whom he had taken right into -his big heart. And, by the way, he had carried matters with a high -hand, and when he made arrangements for his boy at Yale, he had made -arrangements for Stanley Clark to go with him, and no refusals would he -listen to for a moment. Clark had been obliged to give in, and accept -the generous provision, though he did it with a mental vow that he -would pay it all back one of these days. - -Then there was Mr. Chase, who was so relieved and delighted at the -improvement in his ward, that he, too, insisted on “lending a hand” at -these Commencement arrangements. And so it happened that no graduating -class had ever had such beautiful decorations, such perfect stacks of -flowers, or such fine music as graced this occasion. - -And it was Clark who, much against his will, delivered the oration for -the class. He did his best to get out of it, declaring that it should -be given by Gordon, or Hamlin or St. John; but it was Clark himself -that his classmates now delighted to honor, and it seemed as if they -could not do enough to make up to him for what was past. - -His story had spread through the school, and he was the unanimous -choice of the senior class, so there was no escape for him, and he was -obliged to be the orator of the evening. - -He performed his duty well, as was testified by the applause that -followed, and so many floral tributes were sent to the stage, that Reed -laughingly told him that he’d have to hire an express wagon to “tote -’em home.” - -But the boy’s glad eyes sought out the spot where his mother sat with a -tall man beside her, a man whose strong, noble face bore the marks of -the sufferings of the past years. - -When it was whispered about that Clark’s father was there, every boy -was wild to see him, and not one who looked into his face that night -but felt that he was a father to be proud of. - -The exercises were over at last. The address to the graduating class -had been made by an eminent lawyer. The diplomas had been received with -more or less grace and ease, or more or less shyness and awkwardness. - -“Rosy” had distinguished himself by darting out of the line, as -the boys passed forward to receive their diplomas, and picking up -Grace Harlan’s handkerchief, which he presented to her with his most -fascinating smile. - -Then the benediction closed the exercises, and in a burst of martial -music from the orchestra, the crowd began to disperse. - -But the boys of section D lingered still. They realized now that they -could never be all together again, and Mr. Horton, as he clasped one -after another by the hand, found it harder to say “Good-bye” to this -than to any class he had ever before taught. - -“I am afraid I shall dread to go back next year,” he said, holding -Hamlin’s hand, while he laid his arm affectionately across Clark’s -shoulders. “You boys are going into new scenes, and you will soon -forget the old high school, but I shall be there with all new faces. -Boys--you don’t know how I am going to miss you.” - -They crowded about him then, realizing, as they had not done before, -how real and true was his interest in them--his friendship for -them--realizing, too, that the great days of our lives, though full of -sunshine, have yet their shadows. - -But they were boys, strong, healthy, happy boys, and life was all -before them, with ever new heights to reach, new prizes to win, and no -shadow could rest long on their young hearts on that glad day. - -In the years that followed they made no mean record in college and in -the world, and often Mr. Horton would read with a happy smile of what -one and another of his boys--the boys of section D--had accomplished -out in the great world. - - * * * * * - -Transcriber’s Notes: - -Illustrations have been moved to paragraph breaks near where they are -mentioned. - -Punctuation has been made consistent. - -Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in -the original publication, except that obvious typographical errors have -been corrected. - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of the Central, by I. T. Thurston - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE CENTRAL *** - -***** This file should be named 63156-0.txt or 63156-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/1/5/63156/ - -Produced by Demian Katz, Craig Kirkwood, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net -(Images courtesy of the Digital Library@Villanova University -(http://digital.library.villanova.edu/)) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/63156-0.zip b/old/63156-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b2078c4..0000000 --- a/old/63156-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63156-h.zip b/old/63156-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6e35599..0000000 --- a/old/63156-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63156-h/63156-h.htm b/old/63156-h/63156-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index fb798e1..0000000 --- a/old/63156-h/63156-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9963 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Boys of the Central, by I. T. Thurston. - </title> - <style type="text/css"> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - - h1,h2 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .49em; -} - -.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} -.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} - -/*Modified horizontal rules to fix ePub display issue*/ -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -/*End modified horizontal rule CSS*/ - -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} - -/*Table of Contents format*/ -table.toc { max-width: 30em;} -td.tocchapter{ text-align: right; vertical-align: top; padding-right: 1em;} -td.toctitle { text-align: left; vertical-align: top; text-indent: -1.3em; padding-left: 1.3em;} -td.tocpage { text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom; padding-left: 1em;} - -.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; -} /* page numbers */ - -.blockquot { - margin-left: 5%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -/*Indent-padding*/ -.il1{padding-left:1em} -.ir1{text-align:right; padding-right:1em} - -.displayinline{display:inline-block; line-height:1} - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -/* Images */ -img {max-width: 100%; height:auto; } - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; - max-width: 90%; -} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:smaller; - padding:0.5em; - margin-bottom:5em; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; } - -/*CSS to set font sizes*/ -/*font sizes for non-header font changes*/ -.xxlargefont{font-size: xx-large} -.xlargefont{font-size: x-large} -.largefont{font-size: large} -.smallfont{font-size: small} -.cheaderfont{font-size:medium} -.italicfont{font-style:italic} - -/*CSS to force a page break in ePub*/ -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} - -.nobreak{ - page-break-before: avoid; - padding-top: 0; -} - - </style> - </head> -<body> - - -<pre> - -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of the Central, by I. T. Thurston - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Boys of the Central - A High-School Story - -Author: I. T. Thurston - -Release Date: September 8, 2020 [EBook #63156] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE CENTRAL *** - - - - -Produced by Demian Katz, Craig Kirkwood, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net -(Images courtesy of the Digital Library@Villanova University -(http://digital.library.villanova.edu/)) - - - - - - -</pre> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<img id="coverpage" src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Cover." /> -</div> - -<div style="padding-top:2em"> -<div class="figcenter"> -<img src="images/i002.jpg" alt="Frontispiece." /> -</div></div> - - - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h1 class="nobreak">Boys of The Central.</h1> - - -<p class="center p2 xlargefont">A HIGH-SCHOOL STORY.</p> - -<p class="center p4">BY<br /> -<span class="largefont">I. T. THURSTON,</span></p> - -<p class="center">Author of “Ruth Prentice,” “Next-Door Neighbors.”</p> - -<p class="center p4">BOSTON<br /> -<span class="xlargefont italicfont">The Pilgrim Press</span><br /> -CHICAGO</p> -</div> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="center nobreak"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1896,<br /> -By A. I. Bradley & Co.</span> -</p> -</div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak">CONTENTS.</h2> -</div> - - -<div class="center"> -<table class="toc" border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> -<tr><td class="tocchapter"><span class="smallfont">CHAPTER</span></td><td></td><td class="tocpage"><span class="smallfont">PAGE</span></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">I.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">A Word and a Blow</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">II.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Hamlin Speaks His Mind</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_10">10</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">III.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Section D Taken by Surprise</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_19">19</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">IV.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">A Blow for Clark</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_33">33</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">V.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Hamlin Returns</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">VI.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Unpleasant for Crawford and Henderson</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">VII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Very Nearly an Accident</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">VIII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">The Competitive Drill</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">IX.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Freeman Makes a Decision</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">X.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">A Public Apology</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_125">125</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XI.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">New Pupils in Section D</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_138">138</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Who Shall be Captain of Co. C?</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_156">156</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XIII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">The Election</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_169">169</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XIV.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">New Methods in the Battalion</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_186">186</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XV.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Who is the Thief?</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_197">197</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XVI.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">A Snowball Fight</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_217">217</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XVII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Honor to whom Honor is due</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_235">235</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XVIII.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Gladness for Clark</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_250">250</a></td></tr> -<tr><td class="tocchapter">XIX.</td><td class="toctitle"><span class="smcap">Commencement</span></td><td class="tocpage"><a href="#Page_266">266</a></td></tr> -</table></div> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_1" class="pagenum">[1]</span></p> - -<p class="center xxlargefont nobreak" style="margin-bottom:1em">BOYS OF THE CENTRAL.</p> - - - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER I.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">A WORD AND A BLOW.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>An algebra recitation was in progress in D section.</p> - -<p>Reed was on his feet explaining the given problem -with his usual quickness and accuracy. Suddenly -Mr. Horton interrupted him.</p> - -<p>“Very well, Reed, take your seat. Crawford, you -may continue the explanation.”</p> - -<p>Crawford stumbled to his feet with a confused -glance at the teacher.</p> - -<p>“I—er—don’t know exactly where Reed left off, -sir,” he stammered.</p> - -<p>“If you had been paying attention you would -have known. Failure, Crawford. Freeman, you may -continue,” said Mr. Horton.</p> - -<p>Freeman—a slender, pale-faced boy—occupied -the seat directly in front of Crawford’s. He rose -promptly and began where Reed had left off, but in -a moment he stopped, the color rose in his face, he -hesitated, stammered and dropped back into his -seat, saying, “I can’t do it, sir.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[2]</span></p> - -<p>Mr. Horton, whose eyes had been on some restless -boys in another part of the room, turned around -with a glance of surprise. Freeman was not an especially -quick scholar, and his frequent absences on -account of illness kept him from taking the rank in -the class that his steady work would otherwise have -secured for him, but a failure was a rare thing for -him.</p> - -<p>“I think you can do that, Freeman. Try again,” -said the teacher.</p> - -<p>The boy rose, and once more attempted to go on -with the problem, but as before, his face flushed and -he dropped quickly back into his seat.</p> - -<p>“I am sorry, Freeman, but I must give you a failure,” -said Mr. Horton; but as he spoke, another boy -sitting across the aisle from Crawford rose, and said -clearly and distinctly, “Mr. Horton, Freeman can -solve that problem, I think, if he can stand by your -desk.”</p> - -<p>At this, low hisses sounded from different parts of -the room, but a glance from Mr. Horton suppressed -them, as he said quietly, “Freeman, step forward to -my desk and finish the recitation if you can.”</p> - -<p>With a look of relief, the little fellow stepped forward, -and, without a moment’s hesitation, solved the -problem clearly and correctly.</p> - -<p>He cast a grateful glance at the boy who had -spoken for him as he returned to his seat, but he<span class="pagenum">[3]</span> -shivered as he saw the ugly, threatening look in -Crawford’s eyes, and caught the words hissed close -to his ear, as Crawford leaned over his desk: “I’ll -settle with you for that, and with that donkey that -brayed for you, too.”</p> - -<p>At recess, Mr. Horton kept both Freeman and -Clark, the boy who had spoken for him, and questioned -them, but he could get no information from -either. He was certain however, in his own mind, -that Crawford was the one to blame. He believed -that Crawford was at the bottom of much of the -trouble and disorder in his class-room, but it was all -so slyly done that it was next to impossible to fix -the blame where it belonged.</p> - -<p>“It was real good of you, Stanley, to help me out,” -Freeman said gratefully, as, Mr. Horton having dismissed -them, the two went down to the playground; -“but I’m afraid Crawford’ll serve you some mean -trick to pay for it.”</p> - -<p>“He served you a mean enough one, this morning,” -answered Clark. “Sticking pins into you, wasn’t -he?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Freeman; “he had ’em fastened -somehow to the toe of his shoe. They must have -been big pins too, for they hurt like fury. Look -here!” He pointed to some dark spots on his black -stockings, below his short trousers.</p> - -<p>“Blood?” said Clark, inquiringly, and as Freeman -nodded, he added:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[4]</span></p> - -<p>“It’s a shame, Ray. I see him tormenting you in -all sorts of ways whenever Horton isn’t looking. -You ought to have your seat changed. Why don’t -you?”</p> - -<p>“Oh no!” said Freeman, quickly. “He’d say I -was a coward then, and couldn’t stand a little fun. -No, I’ll stick it out—but,” he added, half laughing, -“I wish he wouldn’t stick so many things into me. -I reckon I know how a pin-cushion feels.”</p> - -<p>Crawford, with half a dozen of his particular -cronies, stood on the playground near the door. -They seized upon Clark and Freeman as they came -out.</p> - -<p>“Well, Sissies, did you tell the master all about -it?” demanded Crawford, scornfully.</p> - -<p>“We did not tell him anything,” answered Clark -quietly, looking straight into the other’s angry eyes.</p> - -<p>“It’s a lie. You did, too!” said Crawford, hotly.</p> - -<p>“We didn’t either!” began Freeman, indignantly; -but the big fellow who was holding him gave him -a shake and told him to “hush up,” while Crawford -repeated loudly and distinctly, “It’s a lie!”</p> - -<p>A crowd quickly gathered about the group. -There was a moment of silence, while all waited to -see what Clark would do. His face was very white -and his hands were clenched, but still looking -straight into Crawford’s angry eyes, he answered -steadily, “You can believe me or not, as you like. -I have told you the truth.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[5]</span></p> - -<p>“You’re a sneak, a coward and a telltale! Take -that!” said Crawford, in reply, and as he spoke he -struck Clark across the mouth.</p> - -<p>Clark’s eyes fairly blazed then. He took one step -forward, and grasped Crawford’s wrists with a grip -that made him wince and draw back, but the next -instant Clark released him and turned away, saying, -“I would not lower myself enough to fight with you.”</p> - -<p>“Ha, ha! Coward—coward! You’re afraid, and -try to sneak out of it that way,” called Crawford -loudly; and more than one voice joined in the cry, -and shouted, “Coward! Coward!” as Clark walked -swiftly through the hall and up the stairs to his -seat. Little Freeman followed him, but as he -glanced at his friend’s white, set face, he dared not -speak to him, and slipping into his own seat, he -opened a book, and pretended to be studying. In -another moment, the bell summoned the boys from -the playground. Those of section D, as they returned -to their seats, cast curious or scornful glances -at Clark, but he never raised his eyes to look at one -of them, and when school was dismissed he was the -first to leave the room, not waiting even for little -Freeman, who was his devoted admirer, and counted -it a great honor, as well as pleasure, to walk home -with him.</p> - -<p>Freeman was feeling very badly about the affair. -He considered himself to blame for it all, and he<span class="pagenum">[6]</span> -longed to tell Clark how sorry he was, but he knew -instinctively that his friend could not bear to talk -of it then; so he did not attempt to overtake him, -but walked slowly on alone, so deep in thought that -he did not notice quick footsteps behind him, till -his cap was suddenly snatched off and flung into a -mud-puddle, while Crawford’s loud, rough voice -exclaimed, “Now, little telltale, you’ve got to take -<em>your</em> punishment. I told you I’d pay you out, and -I meant it.”</p> - -<p>“But I didn’t do anything to you,” protested -Freeman, shrinking from the other’s rough grasp.</p> - -<p>“Didn’t do anything to me!” echoed Crawford -harshly. “It was all your fault. That fool of a -Clark was standing up for you, wasn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“But—” began Freeman.</p> - -<p>“You hush up! We’ve had chin enough from -you,” interrupted Crawford, and while three or four -of his cronies stood by laughing and jeering, he -seized the little fellow, who was five years younger -than himself, and nothing like his size, and rolled -him over and over in the puddle, where he had -already thrown his cap. It had rained heavily the -night before, and there was water enough to soak -Freeman’s clothing pretty thoroughly. Not content -with this, Crawford rubbed mud over the lad’s face -and hands, and tried to force it into his mouth -before he released him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[7]</span></p> - -<p>“There!” he exclaimed at last. “Now run and -tell Clark all about it.”</p> - -<p>“Telltale! Telltale!” chorused the others, as Freeman, -exhausted by his ineffectual struggles, and -dripping wet, picked up his cap and books, and -hurried off. He looked at no one that he met, but -all the same he was keenly conscious of the curious -glances at his flushed face and dripping clothes as -he went.</p> - -<p>When he reached home he found no one there but -his twin sister, Edith.</p> - -<p>“Why, Ray!” she exclaimed, “what is the matter? -How did you get so wet? But don’t stop to tell -me,” she added hastily; “run right up stairs, and -get on dry clothes first, and I’ll have some hot drink -ready when you come down.”</p> - -<p>She knew the danger of a chill for the delicate -boy, and had the hot drink ready, and made him -take it before she would let him tell her a word of -what had happened. Indeed, he did not want to -tell her at all, but these two had always shared each -other’s joys and sorrows, so Edith soon knew the -whole story, all except Crawford’s name. That -Freeman would not tell for all her urging. She was -so indignant, and scolded so long about it all, that -her brother at last half forgot his own indignation in -laughing at hers.</p> - -<p>“I think it’s too shameful for anything, and the<span class="pagenum">[8]</span> -boy ought to be suspended—I don’t care who he is!” -she declared, her blue eyes flashing. “Ray, I think -you <em>ought</em> to let Mr. Horton know about it, just so -that this fellow will not dare to treat any other boy -as he has treated you.”</p> - -<p>“No, no, Edith, they sha’n’t have any grounds for -calling me telltale,” Freeman answered, his thin face -flushing as he heard again, in imagination, the taunting -cry of “telltale,” that seemed still ringing in his -ears. “Say, Edith,” he went on, “mind you don’t -let mother know anything about this. She’d worry -over it, and imagine me suffering all sorts of persecutions, -and it isn’t likely that that fellow will -trouble me any more, now that he’s had his ‘revenge,’ -as he calls it.”</p> - -<p>“But, Ray,” said his sister, “we can’t help mother’s -knowing. You can’t wear those clothes again until -they’ve been cleaned and pressed. They’ll have to -be sent away for that, and mother must know about -it.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, and pay the bill,” groaned the boy. “I tell -you, Edith, it’s awful hard on a big fellow like me -to be just a bill of expense to mother, instead of -being at work, helping her, as I feel I ought to -be.”</p> - -<p>“But <em>she</em> doesn’t feel that you ought to be,” said -Edith. “You know it almost breaks her heart because -she can’t send you to college, and I don’t think<span class="pagenum">[9]</span> -anything would induce her to let you leave school -until you graduate.”</p> - -<p>“I know it,” sighed the boy, “and the worst of it -is that I am such a weakling that I may never -amount to anything in the world when I am through -school.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry over that, Ray. You are certainly -stronger than you were a year or two ago, and maybe -you won’t have any more sick spells to pull you -down. I do hope not, any way,” and Edith laid her -hand tenderly on his shoulder as he spoke.</p> - -<p>He looked up at her gratefully, as he answered, -“I wonder what I should do without you, Edith. -You never let me get <em>quite</em> discouraged.”</p> - -<p>“And never mean to,” she answered gaily, though -her eyes filled with tears as she looked at the blue-veined -temples, and the dark circles under the blue -eyes so like her own.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_10" class="pagenum">[10]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER II.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">HAMLIN SPEAKS HIS MIND.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>One boy had been absent from section D that day. -This was David Hamlin, a big, handsome fellow, a -general favorite, and the acknowledged leader of the -better element in the class. He was at school early -the next morning, and listened with the greatest interest -to the story of the previous day’s happenings, -which the boys were eager to tell.</p> - -<p>“Well,” he said, looking from one to another when -the story was ended, “where were all you decent fellows -that you didn’t interfere? If I’d been here, I’d -have stood up for Clark. Coward indeed! He showed -pluck enough, I should say, in refusing to fight that -bully Crawford.”</p> - -<p>But at this, a murmur of dissent went around the -group. It was plain that for once Hamlin was not -to have the popular support even of all his friends.</p> - -<p>“No, no, Hamlin,” said one, “you can’t make me -believe that a fellow with the right sort of stuff in -him would let anybody give him the lie direct and a -blow in the face to boot, and not strike back. That’s -not my idea of courage.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[11]</span></p> - -<p>“Nor mine. Nor mine,” cried half a dozen voices.</p> - -<p>Hamlin looked from one to another, reading the -same opinion in every face.</p> - -<p>“No,” he said scornfully. “It is quite evident -that it is <em>not</em> your idea of courage. Haven’t you -sense enough to see that Clark showed a courage as -much higher and finer than Crawford’s as his was -higher than that of—a mad bull, I was going to -say”; he stopped and half laughed, as he added, -“That’s a poor comparison however, for I don’t think -that Crawford’s courage <em>was</em> one whit higher or better -than a mad bull’s.”</p> - -<p>Hamlin was standing with his back to the door. -A little stir, and a change in some of the faces -turned towards the door, made him glance around -to find Crawford himself standing just behind him -with a scowl on his dark face.</p> - -<p>“So,” he said, “I seem to be the interesting subject -under discussion. Go on, go on. Pray don’t let -me interrupt you.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t mean to”; and as he spoke, Hamlin -wheeled quickly around so as to face the other. -“I’d just as soon, and in fact a little sooner, speak -my mind to your face. Crawford, if I’ve heard the -story straight, you did some mean, contemptible, cowardly -things, yesterday. <em>I</em> think such doings are a -disgrace to our section, and I tell you now once for -all, that if this sort of thing can’t be stopped I shall<span class="pagenum">[12]</span> -ask for a transfer to some other section, and I shall -tell Professor Keene just why I want a transfer, too.”</p> - -<p>There was a moment of silence while Crawford, -choking down his rage, looked from face to face to -see on which side were the sympathies of the boys. -Had any other than Hamlin said all this, Crawford -would have either laughed it to scorn or answered -by a sneer and a blow, but Hamlin was too popular -and stood too high in the class to be treated in that -way. He belonged, too, to a wealthy and influential -family, and these facts weighed heavily with Crawford; -so, though his eyes were full of sullen anger, -he only said gruffly, “Seems to me you’re making a -mountain out of a molehill. I gave that cad of a -Clark a slap across the mouth which he was too cowardly -to return. That’s all there is about it, and I -don’t see, for my part, why <em>you</em> are taking it up, and -making such a row over it, Hamlin.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know Clark very well,” replied Hamlin, -“but I’ve never seen anything sneaky or cowardly -about him, and I don’t believe he is either. I know -a fellow always gets the name of a coward if he -won’t pitch in and strike back like a prize fighter -when anybody insults him; but I’m beginning to -think that the <em>honor</em> that can only be proven by -making a brute of one’s self, isn’t worth very much -anyhow. But that blow of yours that Clark had the -<em>courage</em> not to return, Crawford, was only one of the<span class="pagenum">[13]</span> -things that you were responsible for, yesterday, if all -I’ve heard is true. You all know,” he went on, turning -to the boys, “how often little Freeman is sick, -and how much he is absent on that account. Perhaps -some of you don’t know that he has no father, -and that his mother is working a good deal harder -than any woman ought to work, to keep him in -school. Freeman himself is very anxious to get to -work and help his mother, and the position he gets -after he graduates will depend largely on his school -record; yet you, Crawford, deliberately tried yesterday, -to make him fail, when he knew his lesson perfectly, -and not satisfied with that, you pitched into -him after school and rolled him in mud and water -in the street. It was a shame, Crawford—a little -delicate chap like him, not half your size! I can’t -see, for my part, how any decent fellow <em>could</em> have -stood by and seen it done without interfering”; and -Hamlin’s eyes blazed with righteous indignation as -he looked around the circle.</p> - -<p>“Oh, come now, Hamlin, you’re putting it on too -thick,” said Crawford; “I”—but whispers of “Here -comes Bobby!” cut short the talk, and the boys -slipped into their seats as Mr. Horton entered the -class-room.</p> - -<p>“Bobby” was the class name for the teacher of -section D.</p> - -<p>Clark did not appear until the last moment—just<span class="pagenum">[14]</span> -in time to avoid the tardy mark. His face was very -grave, and he looked neither to right nor left as he -took his seat, so he did not see Hamlin watching -eagerly for a chance to give him a friendly smile, and -Hamlin had to content himself with the thought, -“I’ll have a talk with him at recess.”</p> - -<p>But at recess the principal, Prof. Keene, sent for -him and kept him so long in his office that the recess -was over before he was at liberty, and half an -hour before school was dismissed Clark, after a word -with Mr. Horton, left the room and did not return.</p> - -<p>So Hamlin, breaking away from half a dozen boys -who surrounded him when school was out, hurried -after Freeman who was walking off alone.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter with Clark? Why did he leave -so early?” he asked, as he overtook the little fellow.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” answered Freeman; then he added, -speaking earnestly and quickly, “You don’t believe -that it was because he was afraid that he didn’t fight -Crawford, do you, Hamlin?”</p> - -<p>“Of course not,” was the quick reply. “I don’t -believe in fighting any more than Clark does, though -I doubt if I should have had the moral courage to -do as he did and risk being called a coward.”</p> - -<p>“I’m to blame for it all. It was his standing up -for me in class that began it,” said Freeman, with a -troubled face.</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry over that,” said Hamlin kindly.<span class="pagenum">[15]</span> -“I’ll stand by him, and I know some of the other -fellows will too.”</p> - -<p>“If you do, he won’t care much about the rest, I -guess,” said Freeman, who, like most of the younger -boys, looked up to David Hamlin as a model. He -turned off presently at his own corner, and Hamlin -walked on alone, saying to himself, “I’ll run around -and see Clark after supper.”</p> - -<p>But his kindly purpose was not destined to be -carried out. When he reached home he was met -by his little brother with the announcement, -“Papa’s going to London to-morrow, and you’re -going with him.”</p> - -<p>It was even so. Unexpected business made it -necessary for Mr. Hamlin to leave at this short -notice, and it had been decided that David should -go with him, and so his seat in section D was -vacant the next day, and for many days after.</p> - -<p>Stanley Clark was the first boy in the school-room -the next morning, and he waited impatiently -for the teacher’s appearance, as he wanted to speak -to him alone; but Mr. Horton was later than usual, -and several boys were in the room when he came in. -Henderson’s seat was on the front row, and he -strained his ears to hear what Clark was saying, but -he only caught Mr. Horton’s reply, “You are sure -that there is no mistake about this, Clark?” and -then, “Very well, I will attend to it later.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[16]</span></p> - -<p>Clark took his seat, and the morning recitations -went on as usual till just before the closing hour, -when Mr. Horton ordered books put away and the -attention of the class given to him. The order was -quickly obeyed and all eyes turned toward him, -while a most unusual silence reigned.</p> - -<p>“It has come to my knowledge,” began Mr. -Horton, “that some very mean and contemptible -methods have been employed in this class to prevent -scholars who are really anxious to do well -from making perfect recitations. If anything of -this sort is done hereafter, I shall give the offenders -the severest possible punishment. The disorderly -element in this section shall be put down or put out -of the school. In the matter of scholarship I have -no fault to find with you as a class, but you are fast -getting the reputation of being the roughest and -most disorderly section in the school. Surely there -are some among you who are, to say the least, too -gentlemanly to be willing to have your section so -distinguished, and I call upon all such to see to it, -that you use all your influence in behalf of law and -order, and do your utmost to secure a different -reputation for section D.”</p> - -<p>Many and various were the opinions expressed, -as, school being dismissed, the boys talked over the -matter so forcibly presented to them. Crawford’s -face was dark with anger as he walked on discussing<span class="pagenum">[17]</span> -with his “crowd” the teacher’s severe -remarks.</p> - -<p>“I believe that sneaking Clark’s at the bottom of -it,” he was saying angrily; “he was hobnobbing -with Horton before school, and I’ll bet a cooky he -put Bobby up to it.”</p> - -<p>“Of course he did,” added Henderson. “I heard -Bobby say, ‘You’re sure there’s no mistake about -this, Clark?’ and then thank him for the information -he had given.”</p> - -<p>“Do you hear that, fellows?” cried Crawford. -“That’s the sort of chap Clark is. Couldn’t lower -himself to fight, but he can lower himself to tattle -to Bobby.”</p> - -<p>“But, Crawford, it might have been something -else he was talking about. We don’t <em>know</em> that he -was tattling,” said a boy named Graham.</p> - -<p>“Know,” repeated Crawford impatiently. “As if -there was any question about it. I don’t believe -there’s another fellow in the room who would tell -tales, and I move that we nip this thing in the bud, -and put down blabbing and tattling once for all.”</p> - -<p>“So say I,” shouted Henderson, while Graham -cautiously inquired:—</p> - -<p>“<em>How</em> do you propose to put them down, Crawford?”</p> - -<p>“Make it so hot for the tattlers that they’ll get -good and sick of it,” replied Crawford savagely.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[18]</span></p> - -<p>“But how—tell us how.”</p> - -<p>Crawford looked from one to another of the -group.</p> - -<p>“Henderson, you and Coyle and Green come -around to my rooms this evening, and we’ll fix this -thing up,” he said, pointedly ignoring Graham, and -two or three who had kept silence.</p> - -<p>“Wonder what Crawford is up to now,” said one -of these boys whom Crawford had not named, dropping -back a step or two.</p> - -<p>“Some scurvy trick, or other,” replied a second. -“For my part, I’m sick of him and his crowd. I -believe I’ll side with law and order after this.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t know but I’d better, too,” replied the first. -“I’ve half a mind to, anyhow.”</p> - -<p>“Do,” said the other quickly. “Let’s start in -to-morrow and see how many will join us.”</p> - -<p>“Pity Hamlin’s away. He’s a power when he -takes hold of anything,” put in Raleigh, the third -boy.</p> - -<p>“So he is,” said Graham, “and I wish he was -here too. The only trouble with Hamlin is that he’s -so full of fun that he gets to cutting up before -he stops to think—but he never does a mean -thing.”</p> - -<p>“No, there’s nothing sneaky about Hamlin,” said -Raleigh, as he turned off towards his home.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_19" class="pagenum">[19]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER III.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">SECTION D TAKEN BY SURPRISE.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>If a bomb had exploded in the room, the pupils -in section D could hardly have been more astounded -than they were a few days later, when, after the -opening exercises, Mr. Horton quietly remarked:—</p> - -<p>“Every boy that owns a key to the algebra we -use will please rise in his seat.”</p> - -<p>There was a moment’s pause, then Freeman and -two other boys arose.</p> - -<p>“Freeman,” said the teacher, “how do you use -the key?”</p> - -<p>“I do the examples first, and then see if I have -the correct answers. If I have not, I keep trying -till I get them,” said Freeman frankly, but with a -very red face.</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” said Mr. Horton. “You may be -seated, boys. Now, I want every other boy in the -room who uses a key, whether it belongs to him or -not, to rise.”</p> - -<p>Nearly half the school stood then, and Mr. Horton’s -keen eyes noted the glances cast at some who -did not rise, and read their meaning clearly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[20]</span></p> - -<p>“That will do,” he said. Then he looked about -the room slowly and searchingly.</p> - -<p>“Clark,” he said, “you never use a key?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” was the quiet reply.</p> - -<p>“And you, Crawford?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” said Crawford promptly.</p> - -<p>The boys did not realize how much the teacher -could read in their faces. He read something in -several faces as Crawford gave his positive denial, -and he thought to himself once more, “Crawford -will bear watching.” Then aloud he said:—</p> - -<p>“I am sorry to find that so many have been using -keys; but with those of you who have frankly and -honorably acknowledged it, I have no fault to find, -since I have never forbidden the use of them. I do -forbid it now, however, and I wish every key that -any of you have here or at home, handed to me to-morrow -morning. If I find any boy making use of -one hereafter, I shall not let him off easily. Now -take up your work.”</p> - -<p>At recess D section gave attention to nothing but -the matter of the keys. Those who had risen at -Mr. Horton’s request were inclined to look with -scorn and contempt upon those who had used the -keys, but had not seen fit to acknowledge it.</p> - -<p>“I say, Crawford, you certainly were cheeky! -You’ve used my key more than I have myself, and -you had the bluff to deny it,” said Barber.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[21]</span></p> - -<p>Crawford yawned with pretended indifference, -then answered coolly:—</p> - -<p>“’Twas none of Bobby’s business what I <em>had</em> done. -He said himself that he’d never forbidden it.”</p> - -<p>“Humph!” said Barber, and turning, walked off -to the other side of the playground.</p> - -<p>Crawford had the grace to color a little at this, -but he turned to Henderson and shrugged his -shoulders as he said, “Huffy—’cause I’ve borrowed -his key. He’ll get over it. But now see here—the -thing I want to know is, who put Bobby up to -this dodge?”</p> - -<p>“Of course ’twasn’t any of the fellows that use -the keys,” said Henderson.</p> - -<p>“Right you are!” exclaimed Crawford, emphatically. -“It was some sneakin’ saint who never -stains his holy fingers with such polluted literature -as algebra keys, and I don’t know anybody so likely -to have done it as Clark.”</p> - -<p>“Oh no,” cried one, “I don’t believe it was -Clark.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t, hey! Well I do, then. It takes a -coward to do a thing like that.”</p> - -<p>“You always blame everything on Clark,” cried -Freeman, “and I think it’s mean of you, Crawford.”</p> - -<p>“<em>You</em> think,” repeated Crawford, scornfully, then -turning to the others, he went on, “Who knows -anything about Clark, anyhow? He only entered<span class="pagenum">[22]</span> -the school this year. Does anybody know where -he came from?”</p> - -<p>“I believe he only came to the city just before -school opened. Isn’t that so, Freeman?” said one.</p> - -<p>Freeman colored, and looked uncomfortable.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Where’d he live before?” said Crawford.</p> - -<p>“In—in Albany,” stammered Freeman, flushing -uneasily.</p> - -<p>Crawford looked at him sharply, then turned again -to the others.</p> - -<p>“I believe it was Clark,” he repeated, “and it just -makes one more thing we’ve got to pay him off for. -We’ve grounds enough now, Green, for doing what -we were talking over the other night.”</p> - -<p>Green hesitated, then said slowly, “I think we -ought to have some proof that Clark is to blame for -this, first.”</p> - -<p>Crawford’s face darkened. He leaned over and -whispered something in Green’s ear—something -unpleasant evidently, for Green shrank, and said -hastily, “Oh, well, if you’re so sure he did it, I’ll -back you up, of course. If he did it, he deserves all -he’ll get.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, <em>if</em> he did it. We know well enough he did -it,” cried Crawford, “and if the rest of you will let -it pass, <em>I</em> won’t.”</p> - -<p>“What you going to do about it?” asked another.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[23]</span></p> - -<p>“We’ll send Clark to Coventry for one thing. If -I see any fellow chumming with St. Clark after this, -I shall know what to think of him—that’s all.”</p> - -<p>One or two spoke a word in Clark’s behalf, but -he had been so little while among them, and was so -grave and reserved that he had made no friends. -Hamlin had been strongly attracted to him, but -Hamlin was so bright and popular that he was -always surrounded by a throng of boys, and had -seldom had the opportunity to see much of Clark. -Freeman’s mother and Clark’s mother were cousins, -but the boys, having until recently lived in different -cities, had seldom met until Clark entered the -school.</p> - -<p>Now, the majority of the boys believed that Clark -had shown the white feather in refusing to fight -Crawford, and cowardice is one of the hardest things -to forget or forgive.</p> - -<p>Hard days followed for Stanley Clark. The belief -quickly gained ground that he had informed Mr. -Horton that keys were used in the class, and this -added to the cloud already resting upon him. Soon, -not a boy in the section spoke to him or noticed him -except Freeman. Proud and sensitive, Clark felt -this keenly, and withdrew more and more into himself. -He would have remained in the school at -recess, but this was forbidden, so he was obliged to -go out. He never stayed in the playground, however,<span class="pagenum">[24]</span> -but spent the twenty minutes walking up and -down the sidewalk in front of the school. At first, -Freeman used to join him there, but after a little -Clark sent him away. Freeman was hurt and -grieved at this, never guessing that his cousin was -too generous to let him fall under the shadow that -rested on himself.</p> - -<p>So Freeman went more and more with the other -boys as the days and weeks went by.</p> - -<p>One day he was on his way home when Crawford -overtook him, and to his great surprise, instead of -passing him with a rough word or a sneer as usual, -fell into step and walked on with him.</p> - -<p>“I say, Freeman,” he began, “I’ve been wanting to -say a word to you. I used you rather roughly a -while ago.”</p> - -<p>“’Deed you did,” said Freeman coldly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I acknowledge it, and I’m sorry for it. A -fellow can’t say any more than that—can he?”</p> - -<p>Freeman looked up in great surprise, half suspecting -that Crawford was trying to make game of him; -but the big fellow was looking down at him in a -friendly fashion, and now held out his hand saying, -“Shake hands on it, boy, and let bygones be bygones, -won’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Of course, if you really mean it,” said Freeman, -hesitatingly giving his hand.</p> - -<p>“To be sure I mean it, and to prove that I do, I’ll<span class="pagenum">[25]</span> -take you for a drive to-morrow—if you’ll go. I’ve -a jolly pair of ponies. What time can you go?”</p> - -<p>“Why—any time, as to-morrow’s Saturday,” said -Freeman, still doubting, unable to understand this -sudden change of manner.</p> - -<p>He thought of it again and again that evening, -and finally talked it over with Edith.</p> - -<p>“It’s the queerest thing,” he said; “I don’t yet believe -that he really meant it. Don’t believe he’ll -come for me at all, to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“I hope he won’t,” said Edith quickly; “I don’t -want you to be friends with such a fellow.”</p> - -<p>“Not much danger of that,” Ray answered, “but -it’s better to have him for a friend than for an -enemy, isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“I doubt that, Ray. You know what mother -says, ‘You can’t handle pitch without getting sticky -fingers.’ From what I’ve gathered, Crawford is -pitch of a pretty bad sort.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Ray discontentedly, “I don’t see -what I can do except go with him to-morrow. It -isn’t likely he’ll ever ask me again, and if he does -I needn’t go; but after I’ve accepted his invitation, -he’d be mad if I didn’t go this time.”</p> - -<p>“Y—es, I suppose so,” said Edith doubtfully; -“but I just can’t bear the thought of your being -with such a fellow even for one drive, Ray.” -Crawford appeared promptly the next day at the<span class="pagenum">[26]</span> -hour appointed, and though his talk with Edith had -made Freeman uncomfortable, yet he could not -repress a thrill of very real pleasure, as the horses -bore the light carriage so swiftly through the wide, -smooth streets. Crawford exerted himself to be -entertaining, and he could be <em>very</em> entertaining when -he chose, and before the drive was over, Freeman -wondered how he could ever have considered his -companion ugly and disagreeable.</p> - -<p>“I’ve had a jolly good time, Crawford,” he said -heartily, as the carriage stopped again at his own -door. “Thank you ever so much for taking me -along.”</p> - -<p>“Glad you’ve enjoyed it,” replied Crawford. -“We’ll repeat it some day soon.”</p> - -<p>As he drove off, he chuckled and said to himself, -“Little fool! ’Twill be easy enough to get hold of -him. And the innocent way the baby told me about -St. Clark. Oh my! If it wasn’t rich!”</p> - -<p>He drove around for Henderson, and told him -what he had wormed out of the unconscious Freeman, -and the two put their heads together and -planned that which was to bring shame and deep -sorrow upon Clark.</p> - -<p>As to Freeman, he was so loud in his praises -of Crawford and his kindness, that Edith began -to wonder if she could have misjudged him, and to -think that it might have been merely thoughtlessness<span class="pagenum">[27]</span> -and boyish roughness after all, instead of -meanness and cruelty, as she had thought, that had -made him treat her brother so.</p> - -<p>Freeman looked at Crawford doubtfully when he -saw him at school on Monday. Even yet, he could -not feel quite sure that his new friendliness would -be lasting, but Crawford called out a gay greeting -and summoned him to join the group about him, -and the others followed Crawford’s lead, wondering -somewhat at this sudden friendliness towards “little -Freeman,” but ready enough to take him in; and he, -flattered by Crawford’s notice, and always too ready -to follow, soon began to be counted in as one of -“Crawford’s crowd.”</p> - -<p>One morning a week or two later, Crawford and -Henderson were the first to enter the class-room. -After a hasty glance around, Crawford exclaimed, -“You stay here at the door, Henderson, to see that -nobody comes.”</p> - -<p>Whatever Crawford had to do was quickly -accomplished, and he and Henderson were lounging -in the hall, when the other boys began to come in, -and all went into D class-room together, where, -perched on desks and backs of chairs, they dropped -into lively conversation.</p> - -<p>“Come on up here, Hendy. What are you sitting -off there for?” called Crawford, for Henderson had -taken the seat nearest the door, where he could see -any one approaching.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[28]</span></p> - -<p>“I’m waiting for Coyle,” he replied, without turning -his head.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Coyle’s always half an hour behind time. -He’ll be late at his own funeral if he don’t look -out,” cried Green.</p> - -<p>“Say, Green—got your examples done?” asked -Crawford, glancing at the clock and keeping an eye -on Henderson.</p> - -<p>“No, plague it! Bobby gave us a double dose -yesterday, an’ it takes such a time to prove ’em all.”</p> - -<p>“If we only had the keys now, ’twouldn’t take -half so long,” grumbled Barber.</p> - -<p>At this moment Henderson coughed, and Crawford, -whose back was towards the door, called out -loudly, “Well, I say it’s no fair to take away algebra -keys and let the Latin class keep their ponies. -Clark and some others wouldn’t get the marks they -do if Bobby should make a raid on their ponies.”</p> - -<p>“Sh-sh-sh” went around the group, and Henderson -strolled carelessly back to his own seat as Mr. -Horton entered the room.</p> - -<p>The other boys looked inquiringly at the teacher, -wondering how much he had overheard, but they -could gather nothing from his face. They were not -left long in doubt, however, for, as soon as the -opening exercises were over, he said:—</p> - -<p>“When, a short time ago, I called for all the -algebra keys, I supposed that I had put an end<span class="pagenum">[29]</span> -to the use of helps of that sort, but from a remark -that I overheard as I entered the school-room this -morning, I am obliged to believe that I have been -mistaken. I will give you the same opportunity -that I gave on the previous occasion, and ask every -boy who has, or who uses, any translation or other -such help in preparing his Latin to rise.”</p> - -<p>As Mr. Horton ceased speaking, one boy rose. -There was a ripple of laughter, for this boy—Vale—was -the dullard of the class, but the teacher’s stern -voice quickly checked the merriment.</p> - -<p>“You may be seated, Vale,” he said. “And now -I wish all the members of the Latin class, except -Vale, to come forward.”</p> - -<p>His order being obeyed, he left his seat, and, -walking down the aisles, looked into the desks -of all except Vale. Four faces were full of dismay -as he passed from desk to desk, but only one was -turned toward him in blank surprise as he returned -to his seat with five books in his hands.</p> - -<p>“Barber, Green, Hopkins, Cox and Clark, remain -where you are. The others may return to their -seats,” he said.</p> - -<p>Then he looked at the five boys before him with -mingled sorrow and sternness.</p> - -<p>“Boys,” he said, “I am terribly disappointed -in you. It is bad enough to find that you have -been resorting to such methods to avoid work and<span class="pagenum">[30]</span> -secure high marks, but you have added to your -guilt by deliberately lying about it. I had thought -better of you than this.”</p> - -<p>As he paused, Clark, whose face had shown strong -emotion, stepped forward and said: “Mr. Horton, -did you find one of those books in my desk?”</p> - -<p>There was a touch of contempt in the teacher’s -voice as he replied:—</p> - -<p>“I did, sir, and I hope you will not lower yourself -further by useless protestations.”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Horton,” said the boy very quietly, “I -should be doing wrong if I did not declare that -I have never used any help in preparing my Latin -except the notes in the book itself. I never saw the -book you have there, and do not know how it came -in my desk.”</p> - -<p>Somebody hissed then, but Mr. Horton promptly -checked the demonstration.</p> - -<p>“You can hardly expect me to believe you, Clark, -with the evidence I have here,” he said, pointing to -the fly-leaf of the book, on which were the letters -“S. C.” Part of the leaf was torn out, leaving only -those two letters.</p> - -<p>The look of bewildered surprise in Clark’s eyes -turned to one of proud disdain as he saw those -letters, and he did not open his lips again, not even -when Mr. Horton said:—</p> - -<p>“I shall give every one of you five a failure for<span class="pagenum">[31]</span> -each Latin recitation during the past week, and for -the remainder of the month I wish each of you to -write at the top of your Latin exercises these -words.” He wrote rapidly on the blackboard:—</p> - -<p>“Lying lips are an abomination.”</p> - -<p>The other four went to their seats with red faces -and shamed eyes, but Clark’s face was very white, -and his eyes were proudly uplifted, as if he dared -his schoolmates to believe him guilty, in spite of the -evidence against him.</p> - -<p>“He doesn’t act guilty,” thought Mr. Horton -uneasily, as he looked at the boy. “I wonder if it -is possible that he is innocent.”</p> - -<p>“St. Clark won’t be in good odor for a while to -come,” chuckled Henderson on the playground at -recess, glancing with malicious eyes at the lonely -boy pacing up and down the sidewalk.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe he used that pony, anyhow,” said -Freeman. “He didn’t need to use it, for he had -read Cicero long before he ever came here. It’s just -review to him.”</p> - -<p>“Hush up, you!” exclaimed Henderson hastily. -“If it’s review to him, he’s no business to be -marked higher than the rest of us who never took -it before. Hold your tongue, youngster, if you -know when you’re well off.” He whispered the last -sentence in Freeman’s ear.</p> - -<p>“Yes, yes, keep quiet, boy,” said Crawford; and<span class="pagenum">[32]</span> -in a lower tone he added, “Don’t you fret. He’ll -come out all right enough.”</p> - -<p>But in his heart Crawford was thinking, “He -won’t come out all right if I can prevent it, and -I think I can.”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_33" class="pagenum">[33]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IV.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">A BLOW FOR CLARK.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Mr. Horton, can we have the use of this room -for an hour or so after school to-day?”</p> - -<p>It was Gordon who asked the question.</p> - -<p>“We including—?” said Mr. Horton, inquiringly.</p> - -<p>“All the section, I hope,” answered Gordon. -“Some of us, Mr. Horton, have made up our minds -that there has got to be a change in D section. We -don’t like the reputation that we are getting.”</p> - -<p>“I am very glad to hear you say so, Gordon,” said -Mr. Horton earnestly. “I feel deeply ashamed of it -myself, and have been giving most serious thought -to the matter for some time past. But if you boys -will set yourselves to work in real earnest, you can -accomplish far more than is possible for me.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, sir, how much we shall be able to -accomplish,” said Gordon, “but some of us are bound -to try. The trouble is, that there are in our section -so many that don’t care anything about their standing -either in their studies or in deportment. All -they seem to think about is having a good time. -We’ve been talking the matter over, Graham, Sherman<span class="pagenum">[34]</span> -and I, and we’re afraid that we can’t get a majority -to act with us.”</p> - -<p>“I hope you will find yourselves mistaken about -that,” said Mr. Horton, “and that more than half -the class will be ready to join you at once. Certainly, -you can use this room; but, of course, you -must be very quiet and orderly in your discussions.” - -“We’ll do our best, sir,” said Gordon, as he turned -away and began to distribute slips of paper, laying -one on each desk.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton picked one up. It read:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>“You are requested to attend a class meeting in -this room at 2.15 this afternoon, for the discussion -of matters of great importance to every member of -the class.</p> - -<div class="ir1" style="margin-top:-1em"><p class="displayinline">“Fred Gordon.<br /> -Alec. Graham.<br /> -Ralph Sherman.“</p></div></div> - -<p>These notices awakened the liveliest interest and -curiosity, and not one boy left the room when school -was over, while Mr. Horton departed promptly that -there might be no delay in the business of the hour. -The door had barely closed behind him when the -room was in an uproar, many voices calling upon -Gordon, Graham and Sherman to know what was -up.</p> - -<p>Gordon, having tried in vain to make himself -heard amid the din, seized a ruler and rapped on his<span class="pagenum">[35]</span> -desk, and having thus gained attention for a second, -he sprang up on his seat and began rapidly:—</p> - -<p>“If you’ll just keep quiet a minute or so, I’ll tell -you why this meeting was called. You all know -that section D does not bear a very high reputation, -but perhaps you don’t all know what a <em>very</em> bad -name we have gained, not only in the school, but -outside of it.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, rats!” called out Henderson; but Green said, -“Hush up, Hendy. Let’s hear what the good little -boy’s got to say. We can sit down on him easy -enough after he gets through preaching.”</p> - -<p>Gordon went on, “I heard a gentleman—one of -the prominent business men in town—say the other -day, that ‘such a set of young toughs as seemed to -be collected in section D would be a disgrace to any -school,’ and a lady that my mother knows, refused to -allow a boy belonging to this section to be introduced -to her daughters. Now <em>I</em> think that we’ve all reason -to be ashamed of our record when people talk that -way about us, and what is more, the school board -has taken the matter up, and is determined to have -a change here. So you see we’ve <em>got</em> to behave ourselves -anyhow, and so why not take matters into our -own hands and do it of our own accord without waiting -till we’re forced into it?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, shucks! I’d like to see anybody <em>force me</em> to -do anything I don’t want to do,” said Crawford.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[36]</span></p> - -<p>“Or me, either,” said Henderson.</p> - -<p>“Oh, well—if you <em>want</em> to be suspended or dismissed -from the school for good, I’ve no doubt that -can soon and easily be brought about,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“They ain’t agoin’ to suspend fifteen or twenty -boys, an’ don’t you believe it,” said Coyle.</p> - -<p>“’Specially when those fifteen or twenty belong to -the brightest section in the school,” added another -boy.</p> - -<p>“Small thanks to you for that,” retorted Graham, -at which there was a general laugh, the speaker being -by no means a brilliant scholar.</p> - -<p>He joined in the laugh, saying lazily, “Oh well, -the rest of you do poling enough without me.”</p> - -<p>“But we’re losing ground even in scholarship,” put -in Sherman, “another section beat us last quarter, -and a girl’s section at that.”</p> - -<p>“Oh well, we don’t grudge the pretty dears a few -marks,” supplementing his remarks with a coarse -laugh, and a word or two that made more than one -boy’s cheeks burn.</p> - -<p>“There, fellows!” cried Gordon, turning to a group -near him, “<em>that’s</em> the kind of thing that has brought -our section down so low. It isn’t just fun, or even -carelessness and disorder. It is low, filthy talk, and -the oaths that some of us use so constantly, that -make everybody so down on us, and I don’t wonder -at it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[37]</span></p> - -<p>“Pretty little boy! Does his mammy know he’s -out?” said Henderson, tauntingly.</p> - -<p>“’Course she does. He’s still tied to her apron-string,” -put in Coyle.</p> - -<p>“I suppose you think such talk is very smart,” -said Gordon, trying hard to look undisturbed, -“but I think we are all old enough to begin to act -like gentlemen, to say the least, and some of us -mean to show that we <em>are</em> gentlemen. We are going -to form a law and order society, and elect a president -and secretary, and see what we can do to make our -section one to be proud of.”</p> - -<p>“Suppose one of our crowd should get the most -votes for president,” queried Crawford, “what then?”</p> - -<p>“I’m perfectly willing one of your crowd should -be president, provided he will pledge himself to forward -the objects of the society,” said Gordon, as he -pulled a book from his desk, and opening it, added, -“A few of us who feel pretty deeply on this subject -have drawn up a rough pledge which every member -joining our association must sign—and keep.”</p> - -<p>“Go ahead, Deacon, read it out,” called Henderson.</p> - -<p>“Yes, stand up like a little man and read right -out,” added Crawford; and Gordon read:—</p> - -<p>“We, the undersigned deeply regretting that our -section has gained such an undesirable reputation, -do pledge ourselves to do all in our power to maintain<span class="pagenum">[38]</span> -order in school hours, and to raise the standard of -scholarship, of conduct and of conversation in section -D.”</p> - -<p>To this ten names were affixed—including Gordon, -Graham and Sherman.</p> - -<p>“You must think we are all fools if you believe -we’re going to tie ourselves up like that,” shouted -Henderson with his coarse laugh as Gordon finished -reading.</p> - -<p>“A fellow wants a little fun even in school,” said -another.</p> - -<p>“Might as well join the church, an’ done with it, -as to sign that thing,” said Green.</p> - -<p>“Boys,” cried Gordon, trying to make himself -heard above the clamor of voices, “I know there are -some, whose names are not here, who will join us. -Please come on and sign now—all who will—and -then we’ll withdraw to some place where we can -talk this thing over quietly.”</p> - -<p>Six other boys signed their names amid taunts -and jeers from Crawford and his cronies.</p> - -<p>“Now there are sixteen of us,” said Gordon, “and -as there are forty in the section, we lack four of -half. I don’t believe that all the rest want to be -counted in as opposed to what we all know is right.”</p> - -<p>Clark had listened silently to all that had been -said. He was heartily in sympathy with Gordon, -and wanted much to add his name, but he hesitated,<span class="pagenum">[39]</span> -uncertain whether, even in such a case as this, he -would be welcome. But he could not endure to be -counted in with such fellows as Crawford and -Henderson, and so he rose and took the pen to sign -his name.</p> - -<p>“Hello!” cried Crawford quickly, “St. Clark -among the law-givers, eh!”</p> - -<p>Clark’s face flushed, but he said nothing.</p> - -<p>Then Henderson shouted, “He’s a fine one to be -setting up for an example, he—the son of a thief -who’d be behind the bars this moment if he hadn’t -absconded with his pickings.”</p> - -<p>Instantly every voice was hushed and every eye -turned on Clark. His face grew deadly white, and -the pen dropped from his fingers. He turned -towards Henderson and tried to speak, but no sound -came from his lips, and in another instant he had -turned and rushed from the room.</p> - -<p>“Henderson, is that true?” demanded Gordon -sternly, as the door closed behind Clark.</p> - -<p>For once, Henderson absolutely looked ashamed -of himself, and his manner was much less blustering -than usual, as he said sulkily, “Yes, ’tis. His -father is that Albany fellow who had to leave the -country because he had used trust-funds.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” exclaimed Gordon, “I don’t care if it is -true, it was a contemptibly mean thing for you to -blurt it out like that before the whole class. How -would you like it if it was your father?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[40]</span></p> - -<p>“My father is a gentleman,” said Henderson, -drawing himself up proudly.</p> - -<p>“That’s more than can be said for his son,” muttered -Sherman with a glance of disgust at Henderson’s -coarse face; “I shouldn’t think Clark would -ever want to come into this school-room again.”</p> - -<p>“Small loss if he didn’t. We don’t want sons of -convicts here,” said a hot-headed Georgian.</p> - -<p>“Don’t say that, Lee,” said Gordon. “For my -part, I’m right down sorry for Clark. He can’t -help what his father has done, and isn’t to blame -for it, and yet he’s got to have it thrown up at him -all his life.”</p> - -<p>“Reckon he’s got some of the same blood in his -veins. They say if a fellow will lie he’ll steal too, -and Clark came mighty near lying over that Latin -business,” said a boy who had not before spoken.</p> - -<p>“Don’t know about that,” quickly responded a -little fellow named Reed.</p> - -<p>Crawford looked up hastily at that, but Reed was -not looking at him, and he said nothing.</p> - -<p>Finally, three more boys signed their names, making -nineteen in all, and then Gordon courteously requested -those who were not willing to sign, to leave -the room, which, after some noise, and not a few -disagreeable remarks, they did. Then a vote was -taken which resulted in a large majority for Gordon -as president, Graham as vice-president, and Sherman -as secretary.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[41]</span></p> - -<p>“It’s a pity we haven’t two more, then we’d have -more than half the class,” said one, as they left the -room.</p> - -<p>“Hamlin will be back next month; he’ll be on -our side,” said Graham.</p> - -<p>“Hamlin? Why he’s the biggest monkey in the -class,” laughed another.</p> - -<p>“Oh, he’s full of jokes and monkey shines, I -know,” returned Graham, “but there isn’t a mean -streak in him, and you never knew him to deny it -if he had cut up any caper.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so. He’s true blue every time” added -Gordon.</p> - -<p>“There’s little Freeman—he was absent to-day. -Think he’ll sign?” asked Graham.</p> - -<p>“Doubtful,” said Gordon; “he’s getting pretty -thick with Crawford’s crowd lately—more’s the -pity. He used to be rather a nice little chap.”</p> - -<p>“He and Clark are related, aren’t they?” questioned -one.</p> - -<p>“I believe somebody said they were,” answered -Graham. “I did feel right down sorry for Clark to-day,” -he added.</p> - -<p>“So did I,” said Sherman. “He looked as if he -had had an awful blow when he left the room.”</p> - -<p>“I say—can’t we be a little more decent to -him?” suggested Gordon. “We’ve been sending him -to Coventry with a vengeance. I don’t believe a<span class="pagenum">[42]</span> -fellow in the class ever speaks to him now, except -Freeman.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t be hired to come to school if I were -cold-shouldered in such a fashion,” said Raleigh.</p> - -<p>“If it wasn’t for that Latin business I’d stand by -Clark after this,” said Graham.</p> - -<p>“I never could get over his taking that blow so -meekly from Crawford,” said another.</p> - -<p>“Meekly!” echoed Gordon, “Were you there when -that thing happened?”</p> - -<p>“No, some of the fellows told me about it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, if they told you that Clark took that blow -meekly, they lied—that’s all! I was standing close -by, and I saw the whole thing. When Crawford -struck him, Clark’s eyes fairly blazed, and he grabbed -Crawford’s wrists, and I thought he was going to lay -him out sure. I know he could have done it, but he -just held himself in, and the next minute he flung -Crawford’s hands away from him and ran up the -stairs as if he did not dare to trust himself within -reach of that hound.”</p> - -<p>“Meaning Crawford?” said a listener.</p> - -<p>“Meaning Crawford. He and Henderson are not -fit to be among decent fellows, in my opinion.”</p> - -<p>“That’s an entirely new version of the fracas between -Clark and Henderson,” said the one to whom -Gordon had spoken, “and puts another face on that -affair; but how about his informing about the<span class="pagenum">[43]</span> -algebra keys? Henderson says he heard him talking -to Bobby about it.”</p> - -<p>“Henderson!” repeated Gordon scornfully. “Don’t -quote Henderson to me! Such a foul-mouthed cad -as he is, is a disgrace to any school. I’ll admit that -I’ve never caught him in a lie, but all the same I -haven’t an atom of confidence in him, and I don’t -think Clark or anybody else ought to be condemned -on no stronger evidence than his word.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know but you’re right,” was the reply, -“but I doubt if Clark comes back at all. I wouldn’t -if I were in his place.”</p> - -<p>But Clark did go back; to the surprise of many of -the boys he was in his seat as usual the next morning; -he might have been the only boy in the room, -however, for all the attention he paid to his classmates.</p> - -<p>Several of them, feeling that he had been hardly -used, and not feeling at all sure that he deserved all -the blame that had fallen upon him, were inclined -to make advances, but he met them with a coldness -that repelled the most friendly, and after one or two -such rebuffs they left him again alone. Not one of -them could begin to understand the bitter agony of -his proud young soul, and the unspeakable mortification -he suffered continually through the father of -whom he had once been so proud.</p> - -<p>The law and order society met regularly once a<span class="pagenum">[44]</span> -week after this, and its influence soon began to be -felt, even though it worked against heavy odds, for -those who had not joined seemed determined to do -all in their power to lessen its influence and to -maintain the undesirable reputation that the section -had already acquired. On the other hand, the -members of the new society, realizing the fact that -so many were working against them, were impelled -to do their utmost for the improvement of their -class record. The result was that the nineteen -members soon showed a marked improvement in -scholarship, while their orderly and gentlemanly -deportment was in striking contrast to the rough, -turbulent behavior of the other half of the class.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_45" class="pagenum">[45]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER V.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">HAMLIN RETURNS.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Well, Hamlin, are you holding a reception? I’m -sure we are all very glad to see you back again,” said -Mr. Horton, as he entered the school-room one morning -and found Hamlin the center of a merry, noisy -group.</p> - -<p>“It’s no wonder he’s a favorite. That smile of his -is enough to win anybody,” the teacher thought, as -from his seat at the desk he glanced again and again -at the constantly increasing group about Hamlin; -but at a stroke of the bell the group dissolved as if -by magic, and each boy dropped into his own seat.</p> - -<p>At recess Hamlin was seized almost bodily and -hurried off to the playground. Clark had obtained -permission to stay in that day, and Mr. Horton -chanced to glance towards him just in time to note -the expression on his face as he looked after Hamlin -and the eager crowd that bore him away. As they -disappeared Clark sighed, and opening his book, began -to read.</p> - -<p>A hand upon his shoulder made him start and<span class="pagenum">[46]</span> -glance up in surprise. Mr. Horton was standing at -his side looking down at him.</p> - -<p>“Clark,” he said, “I have come to the conclusion -that I wronged you when I doubted your explanation -about the translation I found in your desk.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir, you did,” said Clark; “I told you the -truth.”</p> - -<p>“I believe you did, Clark, and I ask your pardon -for doubting you,” said Mr. Horton, holding out his -hand.</p> - -<p>There was a lump in the boy’s throat and his eyes -were hot as he took the offered hand, but he did not -speak—he could not at that moment.</p> - -<p>“I know no more about the matter, my boy, than -I did that day,” Mr. Horton went on, “but I have -been watching you ever since, and I believe that you -can be trusted.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you, sir,” said Clark, the first smile that -his teacher had seen on his face for many a day -flitting across it as he spoke. It was gone in a -moment. It seemed as if his lips had almost forgotten -how to smile.</p> - -<p>“Have you any idea how the book got into your -desk, Clark?”</p> - -<p>“I have an idea, but it may be a mistaken one, -and I would rather say nothing about it,” Clark -replied in a low voice.</p> - -<p>“You have not made many friends in the school,<span class="pagenum">[47]</span> -have you?” asked Mr. Horton after a moment’s -silence.</p> - -<p>“No, sir—none.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t quite know why it was so at first, but -now—now I don’t wonder at it.” Clark spoke the -last words so low that his teacher had to bend -his head to catch them.</p> - -<p>“I would like a talk with you, my boy. Can you -come to my house this evening?” he asked presently.</p> - -<p>“I am not at liberty until nine o’clock,” Clark -answered.</p> - -<p>“Not any evening?” said Mr. Horton in a tone of -surprise.</p> - -<p>“No, sir—except Sunday. I take notes in shorthand -every evening from six to nine.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t have very much time for study, -then?”</p> - -<p>“No, not very much; but I don’t have to spend -very much time on the Latin, as I have read Cicero -before.”</p> - -<p>“Indeed? Then I see you did not need any -notes for it.”</p> - -<p>“No, sir. I used to go to a private classical -school, and most of my time was given to languages -and history.”</p> - -<p>“Ah, yes. Well, you have had two study-hours<span class="pagenum">[48]</span> -to-day; what lessons have you now to prepare for -to-morrow?”</p> - -<p>“I’ve very little to do—just a bit of work in -English literature.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, then, can’t you walk home with me -after school?”</p> - -<p>Clark assented, and the teacher returned to his -seat as the bell rang and the boys trooped noisily -up the stairs.</p> - -<p>In the long talk that Mr. Horton had with Clark -that afternoon, he learned the bitter secret in regard -to his father—now, alas, a secret no longer—and -felt his heart go out to the lad who was bearing so -heavy a burden on his brave young shoulders.</p> - -<p>“You would be sure to hear it after a while, Mr. -Horton,” Clark had said, “and I’d rather tell it to -you myself just as it is.”</p> - -<p>“And that is why you and your mother came -here to live,” said the teacher, voice and eyes full of -sympathy he knew not how to speak.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir. An old friend of mother’s got this -place for me. I’d learned stenography just because -I liked it, not expecting ever to use it to earn my -living.”</p> - -<p>“And has your mother no means?” questioned -Mr. Horton gently.</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” he said. “She gave up every dollar of -her own private means, and if I live, every penny<span class="pagenum">[49]</span> -that was lost thro’ my father shall be repaid, if -it takes me a lifetime to do it.”</p> - -<p>“Clark,” said Mr. Horton, “I am proud of you. -No danger but you will succeed, only,” he laid his -hand kindly across the lad’s shoulders—“only you -must not allow yourself to grow morbid under it. -Remember you are responsible for no one’s wrong-doing -but your own. Keep that in mind, and don’t -let any chance reference or intentional fling embitter -you, or turn you against others. Remember that -they can judge only by what they see, and they see -but little of the truth.”</p> - -<p>“It’s done me no end of good to talk with you, -Mr. Horton. It’s a great deal to me to feel that -you trust me,” and Clark’s voice would tremble -a little, as he added, “I shan’t feel so alone now. -You see I’ve had no one to talk to—for of course I -couldn’t let mother know how things went at -school. She has enough to bear without any -worries on my account.”</p> - -<p>“There goes a young hero, if there ever was one,” -the teacher said to himself as he looked after the -tall lad going down the street a little later. “I -must try to find some way to make it pleasanter for -him at school. I’ll talk to Hamlin about it, the -first chance I get.”</p> - -<p>It was not long before he made the opportunity, -and the few words he felt at liberty to say awakened<span class="pagenum">[50]</span> -in David Hamlin a very strong interest in his -schoolmate.</p> - -<p>Hamlin had already become a member of the law -and order society, though he grumblingly declared -that he thought it was a shame to make him promise -to give up all his fun.</p> - -<p>A few days after this, Clark happened to be -a little later than usual in getting off to school, and -rushing out of his doorway, ran plump into a lad -who was standing in the vestibule.</p> - -<p>“I beg your pardon,” he said hastily, and would -have hurried on, but the other held out his hand, -saying:—</p> - -<p>“Well, now, if that isn’t a friendly greeting for a -fellow that’s been standing here twenty minutes -waiting for you! Do you always come out of your -front door in such a boomerang style as that?”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Clark with a laugh, as he took Hamlin’s -offered hand. “I’m not often so late.”</p> - -<p>The two walked on together, and in spite of -himself, Clark’s proud reserve melted under the -sunny friendliness of his companion. Hamlin -would not be held off. He persisted in talking as if -Clark was “in the swim” of school doings, just as -he himself was, and Clark did not know how to -undeceive him.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t see you at the L. A. O. meeting yesterday,” -he remarked as they walked on. L. A. O. was -short for law and order society.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[51]</span></p> - -<p>“I’m not a member,” said Clark, coldly.</p> - -<p>“What! You, the most orderly fellow in the -section, not a member of that society!” exclaimed -Hamlin. “Why not?”</p> - -<p>“They didn’t want me,” said Clark.</p> - -<p>“Didn’t want you? Oh, come, now, you can’t -make me believe that. Why, I thought every -fellow in the room was in the L. A. O. or the -Antis.”</p> - -<p>“Anti? I hadn’t heard of that. Do you mean -that the Crawford crowd has organized an opposition -to the L. A. O.?” asked Clark.</p> - -<p>“Just that; and I heard Henderson boasting that -they’d got half the class on their roll.”</p> - -<p>“They haven’t my name,” said Clark.</p> - -<p>“Of course I knew that,” said Hamlin, “but -they’ve got some fellows that I wouldn’t have -believed would join such a gang—little Freeman, -for instance. I always thought he was such a nice -little chap, and now he’s thick as thieves with -Crawford.”</p> - -<p>“What!” exclaimed Clark, stopping short in -amazement, “Freeman thick with Crawford! Why, -I thought he couldn’t endure the fellow.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what I thought, but Freeman’s ’round -with that crowd every recess, and I saw him out -driving with Crawford yesterday.”</p> - -<p>“I hadn’t an idea of it. That must be stopped,”<span class="pagenum">[52]</span> -said Clark with a troubled face. “Crawford’s no -kind of a fellow for a little chap like Ray to be -with.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right, there,” responded Hamlin. “I -wouldn’t have my little brother ’round with such a -fellow for a good deal.”</p> - -<p>They had reached the school by this time, and -Hamlin had only time to say, “I shall propose your -name at the next meeting of the L. A. O. We need -your help against the Antis.”</p> - -<p>The Antis were primed for mischief that day. -Before the opening exercises were over, Mr. Horton -knew that there was a hard day before him. The -spirit of rebellion was abroad in the air. His orders -were obeyed, but slowly and reluctantly, as if under -protest. There was a continual shuffling of feet, -knocking of books against desks, dropping of pencils, -and a buzzing and murmuring here, there, and -everywhere, impossible to locate, yet plainly distinguishable. -The L. A. O.’s were orderly and attentive, -every one, but the others did their utmost to keep -them from making perfect recitations by coughing, -laughing, and interrupting as much as they dared. -Finally, Mr. Horton sent Crawford to the board to -work out a problem. Crawford was very quick when -he chose to be. To-day he pretended to be uncertain -about his work and put down the figures very slowly. -Mr. Horton had taken his stand in the back of the<span class="pagenum">[53]</span> -room, the better to watch the unruly ones. Unfortunately, -he was very short-sighted, and Crawford -took advantage of this fact. He had considerable -artistic ability, and could make a likeness with half -a dozen strokes, and he could use his right and left -hands with equal facility.</p> - -<p>So, as with his left hand he slowly worked out -the problem, with his right he drew sketches of Mr. -Horton on the board, carefully keeping his own broad -shoulders between his work and the teacher. In one -sketch, Mr. Horton was represented with a pipe in -his mouth, in another with his hair à la Pompadour, -and again he had the tonsure of a monk, and so on.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton, standing at the back of the room, -tried in vain to discover what was causing so much -merriment. At last, suspecting that Crawford was -at the bottom of it, he suddenly called out, “Stand -aside, Crawford, and let me see your work.”</p> - -<p>Crawford obeyed, but as he did so he swept the -eraser across his last artistic effort. He had to do -it so hurriedly, however, that enough remained to -show what had been there, and as the teacher returned -to the platform, he saw how Crawford had -been amusing himself and the class.</p> - -<p>“Crawford,” he said, “you will have a failure for -this recitation.”</p> - -<p>“I solved the problem you gave me correctly,” -said Crawford.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[54]</span></p> - -<p>“I know you did,” said Mr. Horton.</p> - -<p>“Well then,” persisted Crawford, “I don’t see why -I should have a failure.”</p> - -<p>“If you have anything more to say you can come -to me after school,” said Mr. Horton.</p> - -<p>“I call that right down mean,” said Crawford, in -a tone that all about him could hear, “and I won’t -stand much more such treatment.”</p> - -<p>“Crawford, you may go to Professor Keene’s office,” -said Mr. Horton, gravely.</p> - -<p>Muttering something half aloud, Crawford arose -and swaggered across the room, turning at the door -to make an elaborate bow, first to Mr. Horton and -then to the class. He did not go to the office, however, -but straight to his rooms, where he ordered his -ponies brought around, and then driving back to the -school, sent in a note to Henderson.</p> - -<p>Henderson read it, and then passing it to Coyle, -he went to the desk and said, “Mr. Horton, I’ve just -had word that my father has been taken suddenly -ill. Can I be excused?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton looked at him sharply, but Henderson’s -face was grave and troubled, and after a moment’s -hesitation, he said, “Yes, you may go.”</p> - -<p>He did not see the wink and grimace with which -Henderson favored his classmates as he turned away -and left the room.</p> - -<p>Two minutes later, he was seated beside Crawford,<span class="pagenum">[55]</span> -and the horses were bearing them swiftly along, while -they chuckled over the neat way in which they had -“done old Bobby.”</p> - -<p>“Now the ringleaders are out of the way, I hope -there will be no more disturbance to-day,” thought -the teacher; but his hope was not destined to be -realized.</p> - -<p>As the door closed behind Henderson, somebody -snapped a marble up to the ceiling. As it dropped, -it struck Raleigh’s glasses. He started up with the -blood streaming from his face where a sliver of glass -had cut it.</p> - -<p>“Who threw that marble?” said Mr. Horton in a -tone that none of them had ever heard from his lips -before. Then, as no one answered, he stepped quickly -to Raleigh’s side. “Did any of the glass go in your -eyes?” he asked anxiously.</p> - -<p>“No, sir, I think not,” answered Raleigh, putting -his handkerchief up to his cheek, which was bleeding -quite freely.</p> - -<p>“Come with me to the dressing-room, Raleigh, and -Hamlin, you may take charge of the room until I return,” -said Mr. Horton, still in that stern tone that -boded ill for the one who had caused the trouble.</p> - -<p>The room was very quiet while Mr. Horton was -absent. When he returned, having sent Raleigh -home, he said slowly, “I call upon the boy who -threw the marble that injured Raleigh to stand.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[56]</span></p> - -<p>He waited, amid a silence that could almost be -felt, but no one moved.</p> - -<p>“I understand, of course, that whoever did it, had -no intention of injuring anyone. It was simply a -piece of the thoughtlessness and lawlessness that -prevail in this section, but I intend to find out who -is to blame in this instance. Once more—I ask the -boy who threw that marble to rise.”</p> - -<p>Still no one moved, and the stern look deepened -in the teacher’s eyes.</p> - -<p>“I am very sorry that he has not manliness enough -to acknowledge frankly what he has done. There -are some boys in the class that I <em>know</em> are above -suspicion. With the exception of these, I shall ask -each one separately.</p> - -<p>“Green, did you throw that marble?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” said Green.</p> - -<p>“Do you know who threw it?”</p> - -<p>“I do not.”</p> - -<p>From seat to seat Mr. Horton passed, asking -these two questions of each boy. In every case the -answer was the same. Hamlin, Graham, Clark, -Gordon and Raleigh were among the boys of whom -the questions were not asked.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton returned to his seat, and the boys -waited breathlessly for what should follow. Without -another word he dismissed the class, asking the -members of the L. A. O. to remain. He looked surprised<span class="pagenum">[57]</span> -as Clark passed out with the Antis, and said -to Graham, “Isn’t Clark a member of your society?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” Graham answered; and Hamlin added -quickly, “I want him to join, and I’m almost sure -he wants to. There’s not a fellow in the class that -keeps the rules as he does.”</p> - -<p>“None better, I am sure,” said Mr. Horton; then -he added, “I want to say to you that I have noticed -with much pleasure a very decided improvement in -the class since your society was formed. I believe -that every one of you is doing his best in respect to -studies, and in trying to raise the general standard -of the class. This has been a very trying day to -me, but if, as I hope, Raleigh’s eyes have escaped -injury, this affair may, in the end, prove a blessing in -disguise, for I am sure that some of the lawless ones -have been pretty thoroughly frightened, and perhaps -you can persuade some of them to join with you -after this. I hope so, I am sure. When I discover -the boy who threw that marble to-day, I shall make -an example of him. If he had confessed, I would -not have been hard on him, but he has aggravated -his fault by lying about it, and a lie is, to me, next -to unpardonable. It is one of the hardest things for -me to overlook. I have hope of a boy if he is truthful, -even though he has a host of other faults. Now, -boys, if I can help you in any way about your association,<span class="pagenum">[58]</span> -I shall be most glad to do so. My hope for -section D is in you.”</p> - -<p>“Bobby’s first-class. I like him,” said Hamlin, as -the boys walked homeward together.</p> - -<p>“So he is,” said Gordon, “but I tell you what, -boys, the L. A. O.’s have a big contract on their -hands.”</p> - -<p>“To put down the Crawford gang, you mean?” -said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I believe they grow worse and worse.”</p> - -<p>“So they do,” assented Graham. “Have you any -idea who threw that marble?”</p> - -<p>“It was somebody down in Freeman’s neighborhood,” -said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Likely as not ’twas Freeman himself. He’s getting -to be as bad as any of ’em,” remarked another.</p> - -<p>“Pity, too—I hate to see a fellow change as he -has,” said Hamlin. “Why not try to get him into -the L. A. O.?”</p> - -<p>“Don’t believe you can do it. He’s awfully set -up because Crawford makes so much of him now. I -see them out driving together often,” said Sherman.</p> - -<p>“Queer, too—shouldn’t think a fellow like Crawford -would want a little chap ’round with him so -much,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Shouldn’t think Freeman’s folks would like it, -if they know of it,” said another.</p> - -<p>“Well, boys, I turn off here. Don’t forget the<span class="pagenum">[59]</span> -meeting of the L. A. O. to-morrow. Something’s got -to be done,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“And the question is—what?” added Hamlin.</p> - -<p>And that question was often in the minds of -them all through the next twenty-four hours.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_60" class="pagenum">[60]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VI.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">UNPLEASANT FOR CRAWFORD AND HENDERSON.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Crawford’s mother had died before he was five -years old. His father outlived her but a few -months, and by the father’s will his lawyer, who -was also an old friend, was appointed guardian to -the child and trustee of the large property to which -the boy was heir.</p> - -<p>This lawyer, Mr. Chase, was a scrupulously honorable -man, but he was a very busy one, and, being -a bachelor, knew little about the bringing up of a -boy.</p> - -<p>At six, Crawford was sent to boarding-school. -His bills were promptly paid, and, from the time he -was ten, he received a liberal allowance—far too -liberal for his own good. His vacations were spent -at school or at some gay summer resort, and he was -allowed to do pretty much as he pleased, provided -he did not run in debt. So that it was not to be -wondered at that the boy had grown up wild and -selfish and brutal. He had never had a home since -he could remember, and thus far in life he had<span class="pagenum">[61]</span> -found that money would secure about everything -that he wanted.</p> - -<p>Once or twice his guardian had remonstrated -with him mildly about his low standing in his -classes, or the reports of idleness and mischievous -behavior in the school-room, but his private opinion -was, “Boys will be boys, and he’ll settle down and -be steady enough, after a while.”</p> - -<p>It was at Crawford’s own request that he had -been sent to the high school. The first year he had -gotten on fairly well, but this second year his conduct -had been so unsatisfactory, that Mr. Horton -and Professor Keene had both written to Mr. Chase, -and that gentleman had at last come to the conclusion -that he must have a serious talk with his ward.</p> - -<p>So, desirous to have it over as soon as possible, -he went to Crawford’s rooms the next day after the -trouble in section D. He found the boy stretched -out in a big easy-chair, a cigarette in his mouth and -a novel in his hand.</p> - -<p>“Faugh!” the lawyer exclaimed in a tone of disgust, -as Crawford sprang up; “do throw away that -vile-smelling thing. A good cigar is bad enough, -but how anybody can abide the smell of cigarettes, -is more than I can understand.”</p> - -<p>Crawford tossed the objectionable roll into the -grate, as he said, with a laugh, “Pity you don’t -smoke, sir. You don’t know how much you miss.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[62]</span></p> - -<p>“Pity you <em>do</em>, I should say,” replied Mr. Chase, -sternly. “You’ll ruin your health and spoil your -brains if you don’t stop it. In short, my boy, I’ve -come to the conclusion that it’s high time for you to -turn over a new leaf. I am not at all pleased with -the reports I have from your teachers.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, you know, then,” exclaimed Crawford, in a -tone of relief.</p> - -<p>“Know what? That you’ve been idling away your -time and playing silly tricks here, as you have at the -other schools you’ve attended? George, there must -be an end of this. You are not a little boy any -longer. Here you are seventeen—nearly eighteen -years old—almost a man. It is time that you -showed some ambition, and set to work to make -something of yourself.”</p> - -<p>Crawford laughed lazily and indifferently, as he -asked:—</p> - -<p>“Did you get a note from Keene, to-day?”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Mr. Chase, briefly.</p> - -<p>“Well, you will to-morrow then, and I’ll tell you -beforehand, the contents of it. Prof. Keene will -write to inform you that I am suspended for two -weeks. At the end of that time I may have the -privilege of returning, provided I will make a sufficiently -humble apology, and promise to be a good -little boy for the future. Much I’ll apologize!” he -added, with a scornful laugh.<span class="pagenum">[63]</span> -He was wholly unprepared for the way in which -his news was received.</p> - -<p>“Suspended!” exclaimed the lawyer, starting up. -“This is a pretty piece of business. Tell me what -you have been doing. You needn’t try to smooth it -over. Tell me the whole story, for I shall certainly -see Prof. Keene about it to-day.”</p> - -<p>Considerably taken aback, but still trying to preserve -his careless manner, Crawford told what he -had done.</p> - -<p>“Well, sir, all I have to say is, that you richly -deserve what you have got; and now let me tell you -that you may as well make up your mind first as -last, to go back at the end of the two weeks, and -make the apology and give the promise that Prof. -Keene requires—for that is what you’ve got to do.”</p> - -<p>“Never! I’ll <em>never</em> do it,” cried Crawford, angrily.</p> - -<p>“You <em>will</em> do it, or I’ll put you where you’ll have -to behave yourself whether you like it or not,” was -the stern reply.</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” questioned the boy.</p> - -<p>“I mean, George, that I am beginning to realize -that you’ve had altogether too much liberty. It is -evident that you cannot be trusted to manage yourself -and do as you choose. You do not choose the -things or associates that I approve. I hear of you -around with that wild young Henderson continually, -and in places where you have no business to be; and<span class="pagenum">[64]</span> -now you have disgraced yourself and gained a name -at school that you ought to be ashamed of. I’ll give -you just one more chance. If you attend to your -studies for the next two weeks and keep up with -your class, and at the end of that time make a suitable -apology to your teachers, and hereafter behave -yourself and try to redeem your character in the -school—very well.”</p> - -<p>“And if I refuse to do all this?” questioned -Crawford, his face flushed with anger.</p> - -<p>“If you refuse,” said the lawyer, slowly, “I will -put you in a reform school, if I can’t find any other -place where you will be forced to behave yourself.”</p> - -<p>Crawford fairly choked with rage.</p> - -<p>“I’ll—I’ll run away first,” he sputtered.</p> - -<p>The lawyer laughed. “I’ll risk that,” he said. “A -very brief experience of roughing it, and earning -your own living, would bring you to your senses. -No, George, you’ve come to a turning place in your -life. Now make up your mind to face the situation -manfully, and make a record that you and I can both -be proud of. I’ll be around again in a day or two, -and I am sure that you will have made up your -mind not to be so foolish as to throw away this -chance.”</p> - -<p>Crawford had never been taught to control his -temper, and he gave full vent to his furious anger, -after the departure of his guardian. He fumed and<span class="pagenum">[65]</span> -raged like an overgrown child, and vowed that he -would never “knuckle under to Keene and Horton -to please old Chase.” He had just begun to cool off a -little when Henderson appeared. His face was as -black as Crawford’s as he flung himself into a chair -saying:—</p> - -<p>“You look about as I feel, Crawford; wonder if -you’ve had as pleasant an interview with your old -man as I’ve had with mine.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve had a sweet lecture from old Chase,” replied -Crawford, moodily, “and I’ve been trying ever since -he left to decide whether or no I’ll cut the whole -business and clear out somewhere. I’ve more than -half a mind to go out west and go to work.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, don’t think of that. You’d be a big fool -to clear out when you can have all the money you -want here.”</p> - -<p>Crawford looked up quickly. “And you,” he -said, “are you going to go back and promise to be a -good little boy?”</p> - -<p>“Expect I’ve got to,” replied Henderson, moodily.</p> - -<p>“Well, I never would have believed you’d back -down so quickly,” said Crawford, scornfully.</p> - -<p>Henderson’s face flushed angrily.</p> - -<p>“I’ve no choice in the matter,” he said, shortly. -“The old man says if I don’t I can shift for myself -hereafter.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that’s my case too. Why not go out west<span class="pagenum">[66]</span> -together? We’ve heads and hands of our own—why -shouldn’t we earn our living for three years? Chase -can’t keep me out of my money after I’m twenty-one.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s easy enough to talk about earning a living,” -said Henderson, impatiently, “but I tell you -what, Crawford, you’d sing another tune after you’d -tried it a few months. You wouldn’t find it much -like living as you do here, driving out when you -choose, and always having your pockets full of -money.”</p> - -<p>“They are anything but full most of the time,” -put in Crawford.</p> - -<p>“Yes, but you can get all the credit you want. It -would be a very different thing, I tell you, if you -had nothing but what you earned. Neither you nor -I have learned anything by which we could earn a -dollar,” said Henderson, gruffly.</p> - -<p>“But I say, Hendy, it will be mighty tough to -have to go back to school and eat humble pie. Think -how the fellows’ll chaff us if we meekly agree to be -good little boys and keep the rules hereafter.”</p> - -<p>“Let ’em chaff,” growled Henderson. “We’ll -soon show them that we mean to play our little -games in the future about as we’ve done in the -past.”</p> - -<p>“But we’ve got to promise not to do anything of -the sort before we can go back,” objected Crawford.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[67]</span></p> - -<p>“Promise!” echoed Henderson scornfully. “Who -cares for a promise? We’ll get back on our promise -and then forget all about it. What cuts me -in this business,” he went on, moodily, “is that -I’ve got to drop out of the company. I was a fool -not to think of that before I told that yarn to -Bobby.”</p> - -<p>“I declare, I haven’t once thought of that. You’ll -have to resign, of course,” said Crawford.</p> - -<p>“Of course,” echoed Henderson. “It makes me -mad as fury to think that I was such a fool to get -into a scrape like this just now, when it’s so near -the drill. I believe we’d have won the prize sure -this year, for the fellows are so wild to get it away -from Company A, that every man of ’em has worked -with a will. I was going to give them extra drills -once or twice a week evenings, for this last month, -and now with a new captain they won’t stand half -as good a chance.”</p> - -<p>“I declare that’s too bad, Henderson. Wish now -I’d never sent that note in to you.”</p> - -<p>“You can’t wish it so much as I do,” said Henderson. -“But there is no use crying over spilt -milk. Maybe, Company C will win after all. We -must try to think of some way to help their chances. -But you see, Crawford, it’s enough sight worse -for me to go back than for you—since you’ve no -rank to lose.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[68]</span></p> - -<p>Crawford drummed on the table and looked -thoughtful. After a moment’s silence he said, “It -<em>is</em> harder for you than for me, Henderson, and I -suppose if you are going back I must keep you -company, since I got you into this fix.”</p> - -<p>“Shake hands on it,” said Henderson quickly, -holding out his hand. “I was awfully afraid you’d -refuse, Crawford, and to have gone back without -you would have been altogether too much for me.”</p> - -<p>“We shall have to be mighty careful for a while -at any rate. Bobby will watch us with all the eyes -he has,” said Crawford gloomily.</p> - -<p>“Bobby!” said Henderson with a sneer. “I -reckon we’re sharp enough to hoodwink Bobby, and -if with the help of Coyle and Green and the rest of -our crowd we don’t make it lively for those precious -L. A. O.’s, I miss my guess, that’s all. But now, see -here—the governor says that if I don’t stand as -well in class as I have done, or if I give Bobby -any cause to complain of me hereafter, then that’s -the end of it. I can drop out of high school and go -where I like, but never a dollar will he give me if I -starve.”</p> - -<p>“Whew!” whistled Crawford. “He’s in earnest, -isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“I should say so. I never would have believed -he’d cut up so rough,” growled Henderson.</p> - -<p>“My orders are much the same,” said Crawford;<span class="pagenum">[69]</span> -“only, as the money belongs to me after all, Chase -can’t carry it with quite such a high hand, you -know. I hate the idea of it all, though. Think of -going back and pegging away like Clark, and Gordon -and that lot, and never have any fun,” grumbled -Crawford, gloomily.</p> - -<p>“Oh bosh! You’ve brains enough, Crawford, and -after all it’s time you did brace up and work a little. -It’s just laziness that has kept you so low in class, -and if you half try, you can stand as high as Clark -or Gordon. Only think how that would grind them.”</p> - -<p>Crawford laughed. He was secretly pleased at -the other’s estimate of his ability, and the idea of -standing as high, or possibly higher than Clark and -Gordon was an alluring one.</p> - -<p>“I’ve half a mind to try it,” he said. “It would -be something new under the sun for me to go digging, -wouldn’t it?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” assented Henderson. “I fancy it would -astonish some people; and see what an advantage it -would give you, too. Bobby comes down on you -twice as hard as he does on me, and it’s only because -I stand high in class and you don’t. Now, you just -go to work, and Bobby will soon be so proud of you, -and so delighted at the change, that he will wink at -lots of things that now he would not overlook; -while Chase will be so pleased that everything will -go smoothly in that quarter.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[70]</span></p> - -<p>“Oh, but, Hendy,” objected Crawford, “think -how slow and stupid it will be—just deadly dull—all -hard work and no fun.”</p> - -<p>“No fun? Don’t you believe that. You and I -will be models of good behavior in the school-room, -but all the same if we don’t make life a burden to -Bobby, then I miss my guess.”</p> - -<p>“But how, how?” questioned Crawford eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Why, this way. We’ll plan the mischief, and -let the rest of the Antis execute it, and bear the -blame. We’ll see all the fun, and go scot free.”</p> - -<p>“They won’t agree to that,” said Crawford.</p> - -<p>“You see if they don’t. It will cost something, -but if I carry off the honors of the class, I’m sure -my dad will be ready enough to increase my allowance, -and Chase would do the same for you, -wouldn’t he?”</p> - -<p>“Probably, but what then?” questioned Crawford.</p> - -<p>“Why—a spread for the Antis now and then, or -an excursion down the bay—we footing the bills—will -buy over all our crowd, I reckon. As to Green -and Coyle, they’ve <em>got</em> to do as we say, till they -can pay the money we’ve lent ’em.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that <em>is</em> a scheme,” said Crawford, thoughtfully; -“I wonder if we can carry it out.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t see why not,” replied the other; “and by -the way there’s another thing,—we must start in -on it to-morrow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[71]</span></p> - -<p>“Studying, you mean?” queried Crawford.</p> - -<p>“We must do that, but that was not what I was -thinking of. We must stir up a rumpus in the -class-room to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“How can we? and why not wait till we go -back?”</p> - -<p>“Why, don’t you see that if there is no disorder -while we’re away, and plenty of it after we come -back, Bobby’ll lay it all at our door. As to how—let’s -call a meeting of the Antis here this evening. -We can plan enough to make things lively in the -school-room for a week to come, and if we promise -the fellows a spread next week, they’ll be ready -enough to carry out our plans.”</p> - -<p>So it was that a message reached every one of the -Antis before six o’clock that evening, and almost -every one responded to the call. Some of them -were really bad boys, more were neither good nor -bad, but ready to follow any leader who promised -them “fun.”</p> - -<p>The session that day had been the most quiet and -orderly one of the year, and Mr. Horton had -thought to himself that he might hope for a continuance -of this state of things for two weeks, at least. -He found out his mistake before an hour of the second -day was over. There was no act of open disorder -or disobedience, but the Antis were restless -and noisy, ready to laugh at the slightest excuse, -and to keep on laughing as long as they dared.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[72]</span></p> - -<p>When, in the history recitation, one of them remarked -that “Warren Hastings went to the same -school and sat on the same seats as the pheasants -of his native country,” an uproarious burst of laughter -followed, and all through the session similar -blunders were made in the gravest and most innocent -manner imaginable, by different boys. When -the hour came for the algebra recitation, an unusual -quiet prevailed in the room, and when Mr. Horton -sent Reed to the closet for a piece of chalk, more than -one boy waited breathlessly for what was to follow.</p> - -<p>Reed flung open the door and reached up to the -shelf for the chalk-box, but the next moment it fell -from his hands, and with a cry, he sprang back and -slammed the door, but not before a snake had -slipped out into the room. It was a big black fellow, -nearly three feet long, and as it wriggled about -under the seats, there was such a commotion in the -room, that for a moment the teacher could not -make himself heard; and in that moment Green -flung open the door, and the snake was quickly -hustled out into the hall. A girls’ class-room was -directly opposite, and to the delight of the disorderly -element, the girls’ door stood ajar, and the boys succeeded -in driving the snake <em>accidentally</em> through -the opening. Then ensued shrieks and screams as -the girls jumped up on desks and seats, some of -them even mounting to the window-sills.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[73]</span></p> - -<p>But in a moment Mr. Horton, understanding -what the noise in the girls’ room meant, appeared -there, seized the snake by the tail, and flung it from -the window.</p> - -<p>When order was restored, and the teacher questioned -his own class, every boy denied all knowledge -as to how the snake came to be in the closet, -and although Mr. Horton had his own opinion on -the subject, he had no proof, and could do nothing.</p> - -<p>The next day was no better. Never had the class -been more trying or more disorderly than in the -two weeks that followed, and never had the teacher -found it so difficult to decide whom to punish.</p> - -<p>The L. A. O.’s were almost in despair. It was in -the second week that a meeting was held, and the -matter very earnestly talked over.</p> - -<p>“It does seem a shame that a few mean fellows -should be able to upset everything as they do in -this class,” Gordon said indignantly. “I did hope -that it would be different at least while Crawford -and Henderson were away. I thought that they -were at the bottom of it all, but that can’t be, for it -has been worse than ever for the last week. Does -anybody know who <em>is</em> the ringleader?”</p> - -<p>“Seems to me the Antis are <em>all</em> ringleaders,” said -Raleigh.</p> - -<p>“I’ve found out who put the snake in the closet,” -announced Hamlin.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[74]</span></p> - -<p>“Who, who?” shouted a dozen voices eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Green,” replied Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“How’d you find out?” asked Gordon.</p> - -<p>“I was in Smith’s bird-store down the avenue -yesterday. I’ve bought fancy pigeons of him several -times, and he’s a friendly sort of chap, and as I -happened to think of that snake, I asked him if he -had sold one within a week or two. He said yes—he -sold one to a sandy-haired fellow about my size—a -fellow with an anchor on his left hand. Well, -that fits Green to a T.”</p> - -<p>“So it does. So he was at the bottom of that; -and I know it was Coyle that mixed up all our -overshoes yesterday, so it took us an age to sort ’em -out. I don’t see the fun in such tricks, for my -part,” said Raleigh.</p> - -<p>“Well, say, boys—what are we going to do -about it? If every L. A. O. in the class should get -a hundred this quarter, it wouldn’t bring our class -record up to a decent mark, so long as the Antis cut -up as they do.”</p> - -<p>“Does every fellow except us here belong to the -Antis?” asked one.</p> - -<p>“Yes, all except Clark,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“I say it’s a shame that Clark’s name is not on -our roll,” broke in Hamlin. “<em>I</em> believe he’s a splendid -fellow, and I don’t think we do right to shut him -out just because of what his father has done.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[75]</span></p> - -<p>A silence followed, while the boys looked at one -another uneasily.</p> - -<p>“It isn’t all—his father,” remarked one.</p> - -<p>“No—it’s the things that happened the first of -the year,” said another.</p> - -<p>“But I, for one, don’t believe that he deserved -the blame he got in either of those cases,” said -Hamlin boldly; “and no one can deny that he’s the -best all-around scholar in the class; and as to -deportment, no fellow could do more to help our -record than he does.”</p> - -<p>“He’s too much of a prig,” muttered one; while -the Georgian, saying something about “convicts,” -turned away and looked out of the window.</p> - -<p>With a disappointed air, Hamlin dropped the -so evidently unwelcome subject of Clark’s admission -to the society, and the discussion of what should be -done was resumed.</p> - -<p>“Seems as if we might persuade a few of the -Antis to come over to our side,” said Raleigh. -“Some of the smaller fellows—Freeman and Vale, -for instance.”</p> - -<p>“Vale might possibly be talked over, but Freeman -seems to be a hopeless case. I’ve done my best, but -he’s too much in with the worst ones. I don’t -think it’s any use to talk to him,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s try Vale again. You tackle him, -Gordon, and I’ll try Claflin, and the rest of you see -if you can talk over anybody else,” said Hamlin.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[76]</span></p> - -<p>“I wonder if it would be possible to get Bobby to -divide the section, and mark the L. A. O.’s and the -Antis separately,” suggested Gordon thoughtfully.</p> - -<p>“We might talk to him about it. He’ll do anything -he can to help us, I know,” said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>For an hour the discussion was continued, but -when the boys separated it was with a most uncomfortable -sense of the fact that—try as they -might—they never could change the reputation of -section D so long as nearly half of their number -were determined to do all in their power to prevent -such a change.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton willingly agreed to keep the records -of the Antis separately, but he told the boys that -that could make no real difference, since the section -must rank according to its marks as a whole.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_77" class="pagenum">[77]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">VERY NEARLY AN ACCIDENT.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Hamlin’s failure to induce the L. A. O.’s to admit -Clark to their society made him the more determined -to show all possible friendliness himself -towards his lonely schoolfellow, and he made it a -point to walk to and from school with him, or to -have a chat with him at recess, as frequently as he -could. Clark appreciated the other’s kindness, and -understood perfectly well that it was through no -lack of effort on Hamlin’s part that he—Clark—was -not asked to join the L. A. O.’s.</p> - -<p>Several other boys, Gordon and Graham among -them, began to follow Hamlin’s example so far as -to nod and say a pleasant word to Clark now and -then, but he felt that they were doing this merely -to please Hamlin, and did not respond very cordially -to their advances.</p> - -<p>As to Freeman—Clark’s attempts to draw him -away from the Crawford crowd had signally failed. -Freeman seemed to have lost all desire for his -cousin’s companionship, and coldly and even curtly<span class="pagenum">[78]</span> -refused all Clark’s invitations to walk or talk with -him.</p> - -<p>Clark had little time and less inclination in these -days for visiting, but he went occasionally to see his -aunt and cousins. One afternoon he found Edith -alone, and looking so pale and troubled that he -could not help asking what was the matter.</p> - -<p>The girl’s lip trembled, and her blue eyes filled -with tears as she answered simply, “I’m so worried -about Ray, Stanley.”</p> - -<p>“What about him, Edith? Is it anything in -which I can help you?” he asked kindly.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I don’t know. He is so changed lately. He -used to be the dearest boy, and now, since he has -been with Crawford and Henderson so much, he is -so different. He doesn’t seem to care for mamma or -me, and he goes out evenings and won’t tell us -where he goes, and he seems to have lost all interest -in his school work. His last report was the poorest -he has ever had.”</p> - -<p>“I am so sorry, Edith,” Clark answered, “I’ve tried -to get him away from that set, but he doesn’t care to -be with me any more. He as much as told me to -‘mind my own business’ and let him alone, the last -time I spoke to him.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” sighed Edith, “that’s the way he answers -me. But Stanley, Ray isn’t really a bad boy, and -I’m sure that something is troubling him, and that -is what makes him so cross, lately.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[79]</span></p> - -<p>“Perhaps it is his low rank in class,” suggested -Clark.</p> - -<p>Edith shook her head. “No, it’s something more -than that, I’m sure,” she said. Then she added earnestly, -“Don’t give him up, Stanley. He has always -looked up so to you, and I’m sure he does care for -you a great deal more than for those horrid big fellows -that he goes with now, and—and, we <em>must</em> get -him away from them somehow.”</p> - -<p>Her voice trembled, and Clark’s face expressed the -sympathy he felt.</p> - -<p>“I’ll do all I can, cousin Edith. If only Crawford -and Henderson wouldn’t come back to school, I think -there would be much less trouble. They are the evil -influence in the class,” he said, thoughtfully.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and the evil influence that is leading my -brother astray,” said Edith, sadly.</p> - -<p>After this conversation, Clark was constantly on -the watch for any opportunity to help his young -cousin, not only for his own sake, but yet more for -that of the sister whose loving heart was so heavily -burdened with anxiety on her brother’s account. -Clark had the true knightly spirit, and counted it -the duty of a boy to care for his mother and sisters, -and ward off from them, as far as possible, all sorrow -and trouble. No mother ever had a more tender, -thoughtful son than his mother had in him, and -since he had no sister, he felt himself in duty bound<span class="pagenum">[80]</span> -to do for Edith, as far as he could, what her own -brother failed to do; and above all, to bring back -that brother to the path of duty and uprightness -from which he had strayed.</p> - -<p>But how to do this was the question—since Freeman -avoided him and responded so coldly to all his -advances. Clark pretended not to see this, and persisted -in being friendly, yet he felt more than a little -discouraged, and was often tempted to give it up, and -leave the boy to do as he would. It was only the -remembrance of Edith’s sorrowful face that kept -him from doing so.</p> - -<p>Out of school hours, Freeman now spent half his -time in Crawford’s rooms, and during the weeks of -Crawford’s and Henderson’s absence, he spent every -recess with Coyle, Green, and others of like character.</p> - -<p>When it was known in school that Crawford and -Henderson had been suspended, there was much -wondering and speculation among the L. A. O. as to -whether or no they would return and make the apology, -and give the promise required. After the meeting -at Crawford’s rooms, the Antis knew that the -two boys would return, but they took good care not -to let the L. A. O.’s know anything about the matter.</p> - -<p>Every face in the room was full of eager interest -and curiosity, as nine o’clock approached on the -morning after the two weeks were ended.</p> - -<p>When, after the opening exercises, Prof. Keene<span class="pagenum">[81]</span> -entered the room followed by Crawford and Henderson, -there was a silence that could be felt. Every -eye was fastened on the two boys, who stood with -downcast faces while Prof. Keene said a few earnest -words to the class.</p> - -<p>In spite of their bravado, and the hidden purpose -that sustained them, both boys found it more of an -ordeal than they had anticipated to stand there and -acknowledge that they had done wrong and were -sorry for it, and to promise that they would endeavor -from that time on to keep all the rules of -the school, and give no further cause of complaint.</p> - -<p>Some of the Antis began to clap, as the two slipped -into their seats, but Prof. Keene stopped that instantly, -remarking sternly that this was no occasion -for applause.</p> - -<p>During the remainder of the session, Mr. Horton -threw more than one puzzled glance at the two boys. -There was something in their faces that he could not -understand, but they certainly gave him no cause for -complaint, for they were models of good behavior.</p> - -<p>The L. A. O.’s cast many curious and wondering -glances at them also as the hours passed, and these -two, who had so long been ringleaders in disorder, -sat apparently unconscious of the half-subdued buzzing -and whispering and laughter of their own set, -who seemed to be intensely amused at this new -state of things. And when not only Henderson, but<span class="pagenum">[82]</span> -Crawford as well, had perfect recitations in each -study, the surprise of the L. A. O.’s was evident, to -the ill-concealed delight of the Antis.</p> - -<p>After school, Mr. Horton detained the two boys -to say a few earnest words to them, and then to tell -them how much pleasure their fine recitations and -orderly deportment had given him. As he begged -them to use their influence, which he knew to be -great, on the side of law and order, Crawford hung -his head and a flush of shame dyed his cheeks as -he thought how little he deserved commendation; -but Henderson looked boldly into his teacher’s eyes -and coolly promised to do his best.</p> - -<p>“I say, Henderson, you’re a bigger hypocrite than -I am,” said Crawford, as they went down stairs.</p> - -<p>“Oh, pshaw! What’s one lie more or less?” said -the other coolly. “Besides, I’m going to be a model -of good behavior now, you know—a perfect little -lamb,” and he laughed at the remembrance of -“Bobby’s” face, and the way they had “taken him -in.”</p> - -<p>Never had Mr. Horton been so perplexed and -so worried and tormented in his class-room, as in -the weeks that followed the return of Crawford and -Henderson. Having no clue to the real state of the -case, he was completely deceived, and took the -greatest satisfaction in the change in these two, -while at the same time he was at his wit’s end to<span class="pagenum">[83]</span> -understand what caused the increasing disorder and -disturbance in the room, and who was at the bottom -of it all.</p> - -<p>The L. A. O.’s, after much persuasion, had induced -three of the Antis to change sides, so that now there -were twenty-three L. A. O.’s and thirteen Antis besides -Crawford and Henderson. One boy had left -the class, and Clark belonged to neither side, so the -L. A. O.’s had a large majority; but all the same, -thirteen bad boys, especially with two such leaders -as Crawford and Henderson, can accomplish a deal -of mischief, and this thirteen certainly did.</p> - -<p>Could Mr. Horton have been an unseen listener at -a spread given to the Antis by Crawford and Henderson -at the rooms of the former, he would have -understood the matter, for the boys, as they disposed -of the feast, laughed and rejoiced over the -success of their schemes, and planned yet more and -more exasperating trials for their long-suffering -instructor.</p> - -<p>Among those present at Crawford’s “spread” was -Charlie Reed. Thus far Reed had looked upon life -as a huge joke, and his one purpose was to get as -much fun as possible out of every hour in the day. -He had refused to join the L. A. O.’s, because he -declared that there was “no fun” in keeping the -rules and working for honors. So he was always -ready to carry out any mischievous suggestion of<span class="pagenum">[84]</span> -the Antis, and not a little of the class disorder might -justly have been laid at his door. And after all, he -meant no harm. With him it was pure thoughtlessness -and love of mischief. One of his favorite -amusements was to adorn the blackboard, out of -school hours, with absurd sketches of the boys or of -the teachers.</p> - -<p>One morning before school he had drawn a sketch -of a very dudish young man and a lady arrayed in -bridal costume; and, lest anybody should fail to -recognize the intended likenesses, he had written -above this artistic production the legend, “Bobby -leading Miss Carr to the altar.”</p> - -<p>The boys shouted, as Reed finished his sketch, for -Miss Carr was the oldest teacher in the school, certainly -twice Mr. Horton’s age, and not at all prepossessing -in appearance.</p> - -<p>Suddenly a boy at the window called out, “Hi, -fellows—look over there. There she comes now, -and isn’t she a daisy!”</p> - -<p>The boys rushed to the window. It was a rainy -morning, and Miss Carr, in waterproof and overshoes, -was picking her way through the puddles, -and, as it happened, Mr. Horton, who had overtaken -her a moment before, was holding his umbrella over -her head as they crossed the street.</p> - -<p>In watching these two, the boys forgot all about -the sketch on the board, even Reed himself never<span class="pagenum">[85]</span> -giving it a thought, and there it was when Clark, a -moment later, entered the room, Mr. Horton being -only a few steps behind him. At that instant -somebody cried out in smothered tones, “You’re in -for it, Reedy. Look at the board.”</p> - -<p>Reed started up with a cry of dismay, but dropped -into his seat again as he heard Mr. Horton’s voice -in the hall.</p> - -<p>Clark glanced at the board, and taking in the -situation, instantly snatched the eraser and rubbed -out the drawing as he passed the board. It was -barely done before Mr. Horton entered the room. -He looked in surprise at Clark turning away from -the board, but the boy quietly took his seat, while -Reed, with a sigh of relief, settled back in his; and -as it was almost nine o’clock, the teacher asked no -questions.</p> - -<p>At recess, Reed joined Clark, who was walking up -and down the sidewalk alone, as usual.</p> - -<p>“It was awfully good of you to rub out my -scrawl, Clark,” he said.</p> - -<p>Before Clark had time to reply, Hamlin joined -him, and, with a nod, he turned away from Reed, -and the latter, after a moment’s hesitation, strolled -back to the boys in the playground.</p> - -<p>It was that same day that Clark took a roundabout -way home for the sake of the air and -exercise. He was walking slowly down a shady,<span class="pagenum">[86]</span> -pleasant street, when he noticed a pretty little -three-year-old girl coming down the steps of a -handsome house near the corner. The little thing -had evidently escaped from her nurse, for she cast -anxious glances back at the open door as she trotted -across the sidewalk. She was just in the middle of -the street, when a fire-engine came dashing around -the corner at full speed. The child, hearing the -gong and seeing the galloping horses coming straight -towards her, stopped short in a bewildered fashion, -too frightened even to cry out. It was impossible -for the driver to stop the horses or turn them aside -enough to pass her, but in that instant of time -Clark sprang forward, his rapid rush carrying both -himself and the child just out of the way of the -engine. He and the little girl both rolled in the -dirt, but neither was hurt beyond a bruise or two.</p> - -<p>As he got on his feet and lifted the frightened -child, she began to cry and held out her arms to her -mother, who, with a white, shocked face, came running -down the steps. She held the little one close, -and for a moment she could not speak, but then her -eyes filled with tears of gratitude as she turned to -Clark and tried to thank him. But, boy-like, Clark -felt shy and embarrassed now, and tried to slip -away through the crowd that had quickly gathered.</p> - -<p>“Do tell me your name,” the mother pleaded -earnestly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[87]</span></p> - -<p>Clark opened his lips to give it, but seeing a -reporter whip out his notebook and pencil, listening -eagerly for the answer, and not wanting to figure as -a newspaper hero, he said quickly, “I’m <em>very</em> glad -that the little girl was not hurt,” and lifting his hat, -slipped through the crowd and was gone.</p> - -<p>With a disappointed look, the mother carried her -little girl into the house, while the reporter, casting -an injured glance after Clark, proceeded to gather -from the crowd all the particulars of the affair.</p> - -<p>When Clark reached the school-room the next -morning, Reed was talking away excitedly to a -group of the boys, who were listening and questioning -him with eager interest.</p> - -<p>“And you didn’t find out who the fellow was?” -asked Crawford.</p> - -<p>“No—he wouldn’t tell my mother what his -name was, and the reporter couldn’t find anybody in -the crowd that knew him,” said Reed.</p> - -<p>“Lucky for your little sister that he happened to -be on hand just that minute, whoever he was,” said -Sherman.</p> - -<p>Reed’s usually bright eyes were suspiciously dim -as he answered in a low tone, “Yes—I can’t bear to -think of it.” Then he added, “My father says he’d -give a hundred dollars to know who the boy was.”</p> - -<p>“Queer idea, not to give his name,” remarked -Henderson.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[88]</span></p> - -<p>“Well—he was a brave fellow, anyhow,” said -Crawford. “Tell you what—<em>I</em> wouldn’t care to -run in front of a fire-engine, going at the rate they -always do go.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” said Coyle, “He ran the risk of being -awfully hurt, if not killed.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what <em>I</em> call courage,” remarked Hamlin -emphatically, going over to Clark, who had taken -his own seat on the other side of the room.</p> - -<p>“Did you hear what Reed was telling, Clark?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I saw the account in the paper,” answered -Clark quietly, “but I didn’t know until just now -that the little girl was Charlie Reed’s sister. I -didn’t know where he lived.”</p> - -<p>“Yes—it’s his only sister. She’s a beautiful -child, and they’re just devoted to her—the whole -family. I never saw Reed so stirred up over anything -before. You know he generally turns everything -into a joke, but he doesn’t feel like joking this -morning. Pity they can’t find out who the fellow -is—isn’t it?”</p> - -<p>Clark muttered some unintelligible reply, and -Hamlin, surprised and a little disappointed at the -other’s apparent lack of interest, turned away to his -own seat.</p> - -<p>Even to his mother Clark did not mention the -affair; and she, as she read the account in the paper, -had no suspicion that her own son was the modest<span class="pagenum">[89]</span> -young hero who had refused to give his name; while -Reed never dreamed that it was his quiet schoolmate -that had saved his home from being a house of -mourning. But somehow, he could not forget the -affair, or shake off entirely the impression that it -had made on him. He began to realize that life is -not all “fun,” and the coarse jokes of the Antis began -to lose their flavor for him, and finally he -amazed and rejoiced the L. A. O.’s by asking for admission -to their number. The enthusiastic welcome -that he received from those whom he knew to be -the “best fellows in the class” was all that was -needed to make him heartily glad of the break that -he had made.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_90" class="pagenum">[90]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER VIII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">THE COMPETITIVE DRILL.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Henderson had tendered his resignation as captain -of Company C the day after he was suspended. -He was surprised that he had received no notice of -the acceptance of the resignation, and had more than -once questioned the officers of his company since -his return to school, but none of them knew anything -about the matter; so he was feeling very uncomfortable -about it, when, one morning, he received -a summons to Professor Keene’s office. He answered -the summons promptly. Ten minutes later, -he left the office with his face brighter than it had -been for many days.</p> - -<p>“I say,” he said, as he joined Crawford, who was -waiting for him, “would you believe it, Crawford, -Keene won’t accept my resignation?”</p> - -<p>“And you’re to remain captain?” said Crawford.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and if Company C doesn’t win the prizes -this time, I’ll know the reason why. There’s Griffin -ahead. Come on, I want to speak to him.”</p> - -<p>Griffin was first lieutenant of Company C, and -was quite as anxious for that company to win as<span class="pagenum">[91]</span> -was Henderson himself, and so he entered heartily -into the latter’s plans for long and frequent drills -during the next four weeks.</p> - -<p>Eager as the boys themselves were to win the -prizes, some of them were inclined to grumble before -the month was over. They didn’t think quite so -much practice was necessary; but though they -complained, they had to submit to the captain’s -orders.</p> - -<p>It must be confessed that, as the important day -approached, the recitations did not improve, but the -teachers were lenient, and made all possible allowances.</p> - -<p>This annual drill was always an affair of great -interest to all the pupils of the two high-schools. -Even the boys not in the battalion, and the girls, -were quite as much interested as the cadets themselves, -and this year the interest was increased by -the offer of a costly and very beautiful gold medal -in addition to the prize banner. The banner had -been held for the last two years by Company B of -the Eastern school, and of course that company and -that school were as determined to retain it, as the -companies of the Central were determined to win it.</p> - -<p>There was no finer company in the battalion than -Company D, of which Gordon was captain and Hamlin -lieutenant. The boys of this company had a -hearty respect and affection for their officers, both<span class="pagenum">[92]</span> -personally and officially. It was Gordon’s way to -do his best whatever the work in hand might be, -and through all the past year he had carried out -that principle in regard to his military duties as -well as in his work in the class-room; and because -he was always fair and just as well as friendly with -them, whether in the drill, on the playground, or -wherever they were together, the boys of his company -were always ready to carry out his wishes. -This year, they were one and all determined that -their captain should wear the gold medal, and they -themselves the red ribbons of the prize company. -Gordon himself wanted it too—of course he did—but -he would have scorned to win by any but fair -means, while Henderson was determined that by -fair means or foul, Company C should stand first.</p> - -<p>The drill was to take place on the baseball -grounds. There were in the two schools seven -companies, and each was to drill for thirty or forty -minutes, four companies drilling the first afternoon, -and the remaining three, the second.</p> - -<p>Company C was second on the list of the first -day, and Company D was the last on the next -day.</p> - -<p>Henderson kept his company drilling from eight -till ten o’clock on the last night before the drill, and -neither he nor any of his men were in their seats -in the school-room, the next morning. In fact, very<span class="pagenum">[93]</span> -few of the cadets in either school put in an appearance -that morning, and no very great interest was -manifested in the lessons by any of the pupils, and -the classes were dismissed an hour earlier than -usual.</p> - -<p>The weather was all that could be desired, being -clear and cool for a summer day. The gates were -not to be opened till four o’clock, but long before -that time a great crowd had assembled, and horns, -bells and bugles kept up an unceasing din, while -gay silk banners bearing the letters of the different -companies, and canes and batons wound with ribbons -were waving everywhere.</p> - -<p>Every high school pupil who could be there was -there, and all wore ribbons. The boys wore small -strips on which were printed the company letters, -but the girls fairly rioted in ribbons. Some wore -them as hat-bands, some as shoulder-knots with -long streamers. Many had batons wound with two -or three colors, with bows and streamers at the end, -while yet others, and these usually very bright or -pretty girls, wore the colors of two or three, or even -more companies, in one big cluster.</p> - -<p>As soon as the gates were opened the seats were -rapidly filled, and long before the drill began every -one of the six thousand places was occupied.</p> - -<p>Crawford had hired one of the boxes, and Freeman -sat there with him. Edith was there, too, but<span class="pagenum">[94]</span> -she sat with some of her friends on the other side. -Edith was a very pretty girl, and Crawford would -gladly have given her a seat in his box. Indeed, -when he saw her, he sent Freeman to ask her to -join them, but she returned them a polite refusal, -and remained where she was, to Crawford’s secret -vexation; nor was this feeling lessened, when, a -little later, he saw the cordial welcome she gave to -Clark, and the readiness with which she made room -for him at her side.</p> - -<p>The judges were three army officers, and promptly -at the appointed hour they appeared on the field, and -a moment later, Company A marched in on the opposite -side, welcomed by ringing cheers and shouts -from their friends, and ear-splitting horn salutes -from their foes—that is, those whose sympathies -were with other companies.</p> - -<p>Quiet fell upon the throng of spectators as the -drill began, and all eyes watched the boys in blue, -some in breathless anxiety lest there be some slip -or blunder—some in equally great anxiety lest -there should not be.</p> - -<p>The company did itself credit, and as all went -smoothly, its eager well-wishers began to believe -that this time A would surely stand first, when, almost -at the last moment, the captain dropped his -sword. Poor fellow—he felt badly enough about -it without the groan that he could not help hearing,<span class="pagenum">[95]</span> -from the grand stand, and though not another slip -occurred, and he marched his men off the field in -fine style, he and they knew well that their chance -was gone.</p> - -<p>As they passed off, Company C marched on. Henderson’s -dark face was full of grim determination, -yet there was a shadow of anxiety in his glance as -it rested for a second on the last man in the rear -rank. That was Baum. If any one blundered, it -was safe to be Baum; but Baum had done finely for -the past month, surely he would do his best to-day. -So ran Henderson’s thoughts, as he led his men forward. -No danger of Henderson making a blunder. -He meant to go to West Point yet, for all his tastes -were for a military life, and he had the manual at -his tongue’s end. No danger of his getting rattled. -He was sure of himself and sure of his men—all -but Baum.</p> - -<p>And Company C did well. As Henderson’s strong -voice rang out, his orders were obeyed with the -promptness and exactness of clockwork. The -judges nodded approval, and made memoranda on -their programs, as order after order was given and -obeyed. Henderson’s eyes shone, and his heart -beat high with proud satisfaction, and then—then, -at last that wretched Baum blundered. When the -company was ordered to load and fire, lying down, -his discharge was so far behind the others that a<span class="pagenum">[96]</span> -shout of derision broke from some of the rougher -boys among the spectators, and Henderson felt an -insane longing to seize Baum’s gun and whack him -over the head with it.</p> - -<p>And Baum, knowing well what was in his captain’s -heart, felt <em>his</em> heart sink into his boots as he -wondered if he could possibly fire at all the second -time. How he did it he never knew, but the second -discharge was fine, and the poor fellow drew a breath -of relief as he braced himself to meet the storm that -he knew would burst upon his head the moment the -drill was over. And it did. Henderson hardly -waited to get off the field, before he burst into a -torrent of angry abuse and vituperation, so bitter and -so profane that it shocked the others into silence, and -no other boy said anything to Baum about what had -happened; and he, dropping into the most unnoticeable -place he could find, pulled his cap over his eyes -and brooded over his “hard luck.”</p> - -<p>Henderson, his face still dark with anger, joined -Crawford and Freeman, and sat there glowering at -Company E. This being notoriously the worst -drilled of the seven companies, he had no fear of -its gaining the prize, and he gave but little heed to -what passed till Company B came on. Then he -roused himself, and hastily scrawling a line on a -slip of paper, told Freeman to “Give it to that cub -over yonder,” the cub referred to being Baum.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[97]</span></p> - -<p>Baum read the message, and his gloomy face -lightened a little, as he nodded to Henderson, and -then proceeded to tear the note into tiny bits, and -presently he slipped away.</p> - -<p>Shouts and cheers greeted the appearance of Company -B, and banners bearing that letter were raised -and waved from every quarter. Pink was the company -color, and a large and very beautiful banner of -pink silk with B embroidered in the center, was set -up in the front row of the bleachers as the company -marched forward.</p> - -<p>Henderson scowled, and whispered something to a -little fellow just then passing his seat with a basket -of candies and chewing gum for sale. A silver dollar -slipped into the basket, and a few minutes later -the candy boy delivered a second message to Baum, -who had returned to his seat.</p> - -<p>Now all eyes were watching Company B, which -seemed in a fair way to win fresh laurels, as one -manœuvre after another was swiftly and dexterously -executed. There was no blundering Baum to spoil -the shooting, and the captain of Company B, easy -and self-possessed, was in no danger of dropping his -sword or committing any other blunder.</p> - -<p>Henderson’s watchful face darkened yet more as -the minutes passed, and he cast uneasy glances -toward the quarter where Baum now sat among a -noisy group.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[98]</span></p> - -<p>In one of the manœuvers the company approached -quite close to the place where this group was sitting, -and suddenly a score of voices shouted an -order, quite drowning the voice of the captain as he -gave an entirely different one. Only the men nearest -to the captain understood his order. The others, -confused by the unexpected call from the seats, -hesitated, wavered, and obeyed the wrong order, and -Company B’s chance for the prize was gone.</p> - -<p>“Good, good!” hissed Henderson in Crawford’s -ear. “Baum managed that beautifully. I can -almost forgive him for his blunder now.”</p> - -<p>“Did you tell him to do it?” asked Crawford.</p> - -<p>“’Course I did. Didn’t I tell you I’m bound to -have that banner by fair means or foul?” replied -Henderson. “We’re ahead now, spite of Baum’s -blunder,” he added, with his low, cruel laugh.</p> - -<p>“Oh, look, look! Somebody’s pulled down their -banner,” cried Freeman.</p> - -<p>Sure enough, as Company B marched out with -flushed and frowning faces, their beautiful new silk -banner was suddenly discovered to be missing from -the place where it had been raised. Who did it, or -where it was, only Henderson, Baum and the candy -boy knew; but late that night, the banner, soiled -and rumpled, and looking as if it had been trailed -in the dirt, was left on the doorsteps of the captain -of Company B. The person who left it there rang<span class="pagenum">[99]</span> -the bell and disappeared before the door was -opened.</p> - -<p>A year before, Freeman would have been quick -to condemn such mean and contemptible doings as -these; but now he said nothing, as Henderson -openly rejoiced over the discomfiture of Company -B; and Crawford, though he said little, evidently -saw nothing amiss in the methods employed.</p> - -<p>“Here come the F’s. No danger of their winning,” -Freeman said, as the final drill of the first -day began.</p> - -<p>Company F was the last formed of the seven. It -had had but little practice, and nobody expected it -to win, and nobody’s expectations were disappointed.</p> - -<p>There might about as well have been no school -the next day, for so great was the prevailing excitement -that it was impossible for the boys to settle -down to work.</p> - -<p>The interest was even greater than on the first -day. Before school and at recess hot discussions -were carried on over the first three drills of the -previous day, and much sympathy was expressed -for Company B.</p> - -<p>“It was a contemptible piece of business—calling -out the wrong order as those fellows did,” Hamlin -said indignantly, “and I, for one, am heartily -ashamed that any of our fellows had a hand in it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[100]</span></p> - -<p>“Who says any of our fellows <em>did</em> have a hand -in it?” said Coyle, angrily.</p> - -<p>“I <em>know</em> they did, for I saw some of them yelling,” -replied Hamlin, “and a fellow that sat right by -them gave me the names of some of our fellows -who shouted the wrong order.”</p> - -<p>“He might have been in better business,” growled -Coyle, to which Hamlin quickly responded, “<em>They</em> -might have been in better business. And then to -pull down B’s flag just then, was too mean for anything.”</p> - -<p>“The B’s are all Easterns. It’s time the Centrals -got the prize,” cried Green.</p> - -<p>“I want the Centrals to win, as much as anybody, -I guess,” replied Hamlin, “but if we can’t win fairly -I’d rather lose.”</p> - -<p>“You would—would you?” said Henderson. -“Well, I wouldn’t, then. That banner and medal -ought to belong to a Central company. All’s fair -in love and war,” he added, winking at Green.</p> - -<p>“Well, I know that Company D will do its level -best this afternoon, and I don’t believe that anybody -wants those prizes any more than we do, but -if we win, we’ll win fair,” answered Hamlin, and -Gordon, who had just joined the group, added -quietly, “So we will, Hamlin.”</p> - -<p>“Not much danger of Company D winning,” said -Henderson with a sneer. “The good little boys will -get left again, this time.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[101]</span></p> - -<p>“Perhaps—if yesterday’s doings are repeated,” -said Hamlin significantly, as the bell called them to -order.</p> - -<p>Gordon and Hamlin were the only members of -Company D at school that morning, and Mr. Horton -dismissed them at one o’clock.</p> - -<p>As they left the building Hamlin said, “Gordon, -I believe Henderson means to play us some mean -trick like that they served Company B yesterday. -He’s bound and determined to win the prizes, and I -believe that he’ll stop at nothing to gain his end.”</p> - -<p>“I’m a good deal of your opinion, Hamlin,” Gordon -replied. “He’s perfectly unscrupulous, but I -really don’t believe that he could rattle us as he did -them yesterday. You see, we shall be on the lookout -for him, now.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think myself that that plan would succeed -with our men, but you see he’ll probably hatch -up some new scheme that we haven’t thought of,” -said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Well, we won’t borrow trouble, Hamlin,” said -Gordon. “We’ve only to do our best, and not worry -over what may happen.”</p> - -<p>Again, as on the day before, Crawford and Freeman -were in one of the boxes, and Henderson was -with them, and Clark again joined Edith and her -friends, but to-day he was even more grave than -usual, and his dark eyes cast quick, searching glances<span class="pagenum">[102]</span> -here, there and everywhere, but most frequently -at the end of the row, where Baum, Green, Coyle -and others of the Antis were gathered.</p> - -<p>“Why Edith, you have come out in company colors -too, to-day,” Clark said suddenly, noticing the -pale blue ribbons she wore.</p> - -<p>Edith colored a little. “The girls would make -me wear them,” she said. “They are all interested -in Company D. Two of them have brothers in that -company, you know.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I know,” said Clark, absently.</p> - -<p>Edith, following the direction of his eyes, leaned -forward, and looked intently at the group of boys -he was watching. “Do all those boys belong in -your section?” she asked.</p> - -<p>“Most of them do,” Clark answered, “and they -are no credit to the section either—some of them.”</p> - -<p>“I wish Ray would come back here with us,” -Edith said, sadly. “He used to go everywhere with -me, but he never goes anywhere with me now.”</p> - -<p>Clark longed to say something to comfort her, -but he did not know what to say, so he was silent.</p> - -<p>Promptly at four o’clock, Company E appeared. -In spite of her troubled thoughts, Edith could not -help laughing, as a woman in the front seat, at -sight of her boy in the ranks, cried out, “There he -is! There’s Johnny!” and as a welcoming cheer -greeted the approaching company, Johnny’s mother<span class="pagenum">[103]</span> -not only joined heartily in it, but, rising, swung her -umbrella in the air and pounded the rail in front -with it, while she shouted, “Hurrah for Company -E!”</p> - -<p>But the crowd was a good-natured one, and those -around her only laughed as they dodged to avoid -the blue umbrella that seemed quite likely to hit -somebody over the head, so great was its owner’s -excitement.</p> - -<p>Company E drilled well, and the joyful excitement -of “Johnny’s” mother increased as one evolution -after another was performed without mishap. But -alas! There are so many chances, and so many possible -mistakes! The captain of Company E was so -unfortunate as to lead his men so near the grand -stand in one of the marches, that the commanding -officer ordered them off, and this so confused the -men that their firing was by no means up to the -mark.</p> - -<p>Company G, the next in order, had a fiery, nervous -little captain, who was himself the cause of -failure, as, in giving an order, he stepped back too -quickly, and ran into one of his men so violently -as to throw him down. The man recovered himself -well, without throwing anyone else out, but Company -G’s chance was lost, and that they realized -this was evident from the faces of the boys as they -left the field, passing near the entrance, the last of -the seven—Company D.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[104]</span></p> - -<p>That this company had many friends among the -spectators was evident from the noisy welcome that -rang out at its approach, and not once during the -two days had such a general silence marked the intense -interest as now. Edith’s friends had eyes and -ears for nothing that was going on around them. -They scarcely breathed as Gordon’s clear voice rang -out, and his men, as if animated by a single spirit, -obeyed his orders.</p> - -<p>Gordon’s sister sat next to Edith. Her fair face -was flushed with excitement, and her eyes never for -an instant turned away from the boys in blue, and -their young captain. Once, when a gentleman near -exclaimed, “That’s the finest shooting yet,” Bessie -Gordon’s hand clasped Edith’s tightly, and her eyes -shone with satisfaction, but she spoke no word.</p> - -<p>The company had just obeyed the order to lie -down and load, when Stanley Clark, with a smothered -exclamation, sprang from his place and dashed -across to the open seats. As Edith looked after him -in surprise, Bessie gripped her hand again, crying -out, “Oh Edith, Edith, look!” and Edith looked -just in time to see a giant powder-cracker strike the -ground not two yards in front of the prostrate boys, -where it exploded with a tremendous bang, the -sound mingling with the discharge of the guns.</p> - -<p>Instantly, there was a medley of shouts, cries, -cheers and hisses, but Company D and its captain<span class="pagenum">[105]</span> -might have been blind and deaf for all the attention -they paid to the uproar. Not a man had flinched -when they saw that big cracker coming straight -towards their faces, and not a gun had failed to -send its volley at the command to “fire!”</p> - -<p>Professor Keene and the other teachers quieted -the excited crowds in the seats as quickly as possible, -and without the slightest interruption the -drill proceeded, but when it was over, and Captain -Gordon, having saluted the chairman of the judges, -turned to lead his company off the field, the audience -went wild. Cheer upon cheer rang out. Banners, -handkerchiefs, ribbon-decked parasols were waved -with reckless disregard of everybody and everything, -while the retiring company was literally pelted -with flowers.</p> - -<p>“It is evident that the audience has decided -which is the prize company,” remarked Professor -Keene with a smile, to Bessie Gordon, “and I quite -agree with the general verdict.”</p> - -<p>Bessie’s eyes were full of quiet happiness, now, -but her cheeks were still a little pale from the nervous -excitement of seeing that blazing cracker flying -straight towards those faces that she knew would -not move a hair’s breadth to avoid it.</p> - -<p>“Here comes the band,” cried half a dozen voices, -as the strains of martial music drew all eyes again -towards the field, where the regimental drill was<span class="pagenum">[106]</span> -now to take place while the judges were making -their decision.</p> - -<p>But nobody paid very much attention to this. -All were awaiting impatiently the announcement -of the decision, and when the chairman of the committee -declared Company D to have won the prizes, -cheer after cheer expressed the satisfaction of the -audience; and when the beautiful gold medal was -handed to Captain Gordon, his men looked as proud -and happy as if each one of them was to wear it -himself. It was evident that they did not take -half as much pride in their own red ribbons as they -did in their captain’s honors.</p> - -<p>“Aren’t you proud of your brother?” said a girl -near Bessie; and Bessie answered frankly, “Indeed -I am, Mollie.”</p> - -<p>“You have reason to be, Miss Bessie,” added Professor -Keene. “I am proud to have him in my -school. His influence is always on the right side.”</p> - -<p>Bessie’s eyes shone with delight at this public -compliment to her brother; but Edith turned away -with tears in her eyes and an aching heart, because -her only brother could receive no such commendation.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_107" class="pagenum">[107]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER IX.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">FREEMAN MAKES A DECISION.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The next morning’s mail carried to every member -of Company C, and also to Clark, Freeman and -Crawford, a request from Professor Keene to be at -his office that morning at ten o’clock. There was -some grumbling, as it was Saturday, and the summons -interfered with various holiday plans; but -more than one face was shadowed with uneasiness -and anxiety, and among this number was that of -Captain Henderson.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid you’re in for it, Hen,” Crawford said -to him on the way to the school.</p> - -<p>“They can’t prove anything against me,” replied -Henderson, uneasily; “not if you and Freeman -don’t blab.”</p> - -<p>“I shan’t, of course, and I don’t believe Freeman -will. He’s a plucky little chap.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not so sure of him as you seem to be, -Crawford; but if he does let out anything, I’ll pay -him out for it. He may be sure of that,” said Henderson.</p> - -<p>When they reached the school, they found most<span class="pagenum">[108]</span> -of the company already there, and Clark and -Freeman appeared a few minutes later.</p> - -<p>The professor told Clark, Crawford and Freeman -to remain in his office, while he led Henderson and -his company to one of the class-rooms.</p> - -<p>Closing the door, he stood for a moment in -silence, looking from one to another of the faces -before him, and some of the boys felt plainly uncomfortable -beneath that searching glance. It -seemed an endless time to these before the professor -said, “Boys, I was intensely mortified over some -of the occurrences at the drill, yesterday. I can -make allowances for excitement and high spirits -and thoughtlessness; but that any of my boys should -have been guilty of such meanness and rowdyism, -such shameless and reckless efforts to prevent -others from winning the prizes, has pained and -shamed me more than I have words to express.</p> - -<p>“In the four years that these competitive drills -have been held, there has never before been anything -like the outrageous affair of yesterday—the -throwing of that cracker.”</p> - -<p>He paused for a moment, then went on slowly, -“When I think what the results might have been -had that cracker exploded <em>towards</em> the boys, I feel -as if no punishment could be too severe for those -who would risk the destruction of eyesight, or even -life itself, to keep others from winning a well-deserved<span class="pagenum">[109]</span> -prize. It was only God’s mercy that -prevented such awful consequences.</p> - -<p>“Think, for one moment, boys, how some of you -would be feeling to-day, if that deed of yesterday -had blinded or killed some of your schoolmates!</p> - -<p>“A thorough investigation has been ordered, and -no effort will be spared to find out and to punish -the guilty persons, <em>unless</em> they confess their guilt. -If any boy will confess his share in the matter, I -will do my best to lighten his punishment, but anyone -who will not confess and who shall be proven -guilty need look for no mercy.”</p> - -<p>While the professor spoke, some of the boys -shifted uneasily from one foot to the other, and -some cast furtive glances at Henderson, who stood -leaning against a desk, with a hard look in his -eyes and his lips close shut.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, Professor Keene turned towards him. -“Henderson, what do you know about this affair?” -he asked.</p> - -<p>Henderson looked full into the professor’s searching -eyes, and answered calmly, “Nothing whatever, -sir.”</p> - -<p>“You had nothing to do with it in any way?” -pursued the professor.</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” said Henderson.</p> - -<p>With a disappointed look and a half sigh, the -professor turned from him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[110]</span></p> - -<p>“Boys,” he said, “you have heard Henderson’s -denial—now I call upon you. If anyone here -knows anything about this matter, I beg him, for -his own sake, to speak now. Do not let any school-boy -notion against telling of another keep anyone -silent. This is a very grave affair, and it is your -<em>duty</em> to tell whatever you know about it.”</p> - -<p>As the professor paused, Baum lifted his head -and took a step forward, but the professor did not -see him, and a threatening look from Henderson -made him drop his eyes and keep silence.</p> - -<p>“So,” said the professor sadly, “you all deny any -knowledge of this thing? Boys, you don’t know -how heartily I wish that I could believe you, but I -am sorry to say that there is evidence against some -of you, and some of you have not given your -teachers reason to put implicit faith in your statements. -I sincerely hope, however, that in this case -you have told the truth. You will remain here -until I return.”</p> - -<p>He left the room, closing the door after him.</p> - -<p>The boys did not talk much after his departure. -Henderson tried to laugh the matter off, but no one -responded to his flippant remarks, and, after a little, -he sauntered to the window and stood there looking -out in silence.</p> - -<p>Meantime, the professor questioned Crawford, -but, like the others, he steadily denied any knowledge -in regard to the affair.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[111]</span></p> - -<p>“You may join the others in the class-room,” -said the professor, and, as Crawford left the office, -he turned to Freeman. Freeman’s face was pale -and disturbed, and as he stood before the professor -his eyes were downcast, and he looked as if he -might himself be the guilty one.</p> - -<p>“Freeman, will you answer truthfully the questions -that I am going to ask you?” said the professor.</p> - -<p>He was feeling greatly disheartened, for he did -not believe that the boys that he had questioned -were all of them innocent or ignorant, yet every one -had declared himself so.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.” Freeman’s voice was low, and he did -not look up as he answered.</p> - -<p>“Do you know who called out the wrong order to -Company B last Thursday?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Do you know who threw the cracker at Company -D yesterday?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Have you any knowledge whatever about these -doings—who suggested them, or who had any part -in carrying them out?”</p> - -<p>Lower yet dropped the boy’s head, and his voice -was almost inaudible, but again the answer was “No, -sir.”</p> - -<p>The professor’s tone changed then. There was a -ring of contempt in it as he said curtly:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[112]</span></p> - -<p>“You may go.” And Freeman went.</p> - -<p>Then the professor turned to Clark.</p> - -<p>“Clark,” he said, sadly, “I can forgive anything -sooner than a lie. Will you tell me the truth?”</p> - -<p>“If I can, sir. I will certainly tell you nothing -<em>but</em> the truth,” replied the boy. His eyes met his -teacher’s as boldly as Henderson’s had done, but -with a very different expression in their clear depths.</p> - -<p>The professor gave a sigh of relief. He was skilled -in reading boys’ faces, and he felt instinctively that -he could trust this boy.</p> - -<p>“Tell me what you know about this miserable -business,” he said.</p> - -<p>“I know very little,” replied Clark. “I had been -afraid that there might be trouble because of the -strong feeling in regard to the prizes; and while -Company D was drilling, I saw a lot of the rougher -fellows whispering together. Then I saw one of -them leave his seat and speak to a boy—not a high-school -boy I am sure, certainly not a Central boy—and -give him something, and then this boy walked -to the back of the stand. He waited a moment, and -then I saw him light a match, and it flashed across -my mind what he was going to do. I ran across to -try to stop him, but the stand was so crowded that -I couldn’t reach him in time. He saw me coming, -and I think that that made him throw the cracker -before he was quite ready, and maybe that is why<span class="pagenum">[113]</span> -he threw it as he did, so that it did not explode -towards the boys.”</p> - -<p>“He was gone, I suppose, before you could get to -him?” said the professor.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he disappeared. I think he dropped from -the back of the seats to the ground.”</p> - -<p>“Should you know him if you should see him -again?”</p> - -<p>“I cannot tell, sir,” replied Clark.</p> - -<p>The professor mused for a few minutes, then he -asked, “Can you tell me the name of the boy who -talked with this fellow, and gave him something?”</p> - -<p>Clark hesitated.</p> - -<p>“I know who it was, Professor,” he said at last, -“but the boys of section D have more than once accused -me of telling tales, though I have never once -done so. In this case I think that you ought to -know who this boy was; but, sir, won’t you try to -find out some other way first? If you fail to find -out by other means, I cannot refuse to tell you, but -please do not ask me now.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, my boy, I will not ask you to-day, -but I think likely it will be necessary for me to ask -you again later. I want to thank you, Clark, for -what you have told me. It is a relief to question a -boy upon whose word I can rely. I need not ask -you to keep silence as to what has passed this -morning. I know you will do so.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[114]</span></p> - -<p>He rose, and held out his hand, and Clark grasped -it and departed with a breath of relief that that ordeal -was over.</p> - -<p>Crawford, Henderson and Freeman left the school -together, but Freeman turned off at the first cross-street. -He was in no mood for Crawford’s careless -gaiety and Henderson’s sneers and flings. He was -going along with his hands in his pockets and his -eyes on the ground, when, turning a corner, he almost -ran into his cousin. He would have passed on -without a word, but Clark put his arm affectionately -across his shoulders, and fell into step with him.</p> - -<p>“I was just going around to your house, Ray, to -see if you would go with me for a tramp over the -hills,” he said; “I don’t feel like settling to work to-day, -and I don’t believe you do. Come on—won’t -you?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I don’t know,” said Freeman, wearily.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you feel equal to it?” Clark asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I’m well enough; ’tisn’t that,” replied the -boy.</p> - -<p>Clark thought that he looked very far from well, -but he had his reasons for urging his request.</p> - -<p>“You go on home, then, and tell Edith, so she -won’t be worrying about you, and I’ll go home and -get some luncheon to take along with us, and then -I’ll stop for you. We can take the cars up to the -end of the line, and walk the rest of the way.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[115]</span></p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t care. Suppose I might as well go -as to mope ’round at home,” said Freeman, and with -a cheery “That’s good, I’ll be at your house within -twenty minutes,” Clark hurried away.</p> - -<p>It was cool and restful in the open car, and Clark, -seeing that his cousin was disinclined to talk, left -him to his thoughts, with only a word now and -then. Even after they left the car, and struck into -the woods, they spoke but little.</p> - -<p>Clark led the way to a cool, shady spot where he -knew there was a spring of clear, cold water.</p> - -<p>“There!” he said, “sit there and rest, Ray. That -big tree trunk makes a splendid support for a tired -back. I brought some lemons and sugar, and now -I’m going to make some lemonade with this spring -water. It’s almost as cold as ice. You can take -out the rest of the stuff while I’m gone.”</p> - -<p>But when he returned with his kettle of lemonade, -the lunch-basket stood, unopened, where he had left -it, and his cousin sat with his eyes on the distant -hills—his thoughts evidently far away. Clark -made no remark, but set out the luncheon himself.</p> - -<p>“Come now, pitch in, Ray,” he said, “I’m as hungry -as a bear, and I hope you are too. I don’t want -to have anything to lug home but the basket and -kettle. Here—try my lemonade,” and he filled a -glass, and passed it to his cousin.</p> - -<p>“I’m not hungry,” objected Freeman, but Clark -laughed at him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[116]</span></p> - -<p>“Well, you ought to be. Take hold and keep me -company, else I shall be ashamed of my healthy appetite.”</p> - -<p>With merry talk and gay jokes he beguiled Freeman -out of his despondent mood, and presently the -little fellow found himself eating and drinking, and -felt much the better for it. When the meal was -finished, Clark threw himself down on the grass, and -again a silence fell between the two. Clark was -wondering how he could win his cousin’s confidence, -and Freeman had fallen again into troubled thought.</p> - -<p>“Ray, you don’t look happy,” said Clark, suddenly.</p> - -<p>“Happy!” echoed the other, “I’m too miserable -to live.”</p> - -<p>“Can’t you tell me all about it, Ray?” said Clark, -in a voice so full of sympathy, that, in spite of himself, -Ray’s eyes filled with tears, but he choked them -back.</p> - -<p>“I’ve nothing to tell,” he said, coldly.</p> - -<p>Silence again, and once again Clark broke it.</p> - -<p>“Ray,” he said, “do you remember your father?”</p> - -<p>Freeman looked up in surprise at the question.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I remember him well,” he said. “I was -eight, you know, when he died. Oh, Stanley, I <em>wish</em> -my father had lived. I believe I’d be a better fellow -to-day, if he had.”</p> - -<p>“I remember him so well,” said Clark, slowly. -“Mother used to tell me stories about him when he<span class="pagenum">[117]</span> -was a boy. He was her twin brother, you know, -and she was as devoted to him as Edith is to you. -I used to think that if I could ever be such a boy as -Uncle Raymond was, I should be about right.”</p> - -<p>Freeman’s eyes were shining now. He had forgotten -all about himself, and was thinking only of the -father whose death he had never ceased to mourn.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” he said eagerly, “almost the first thing I -can remember is walking in the street with him, and -feeling so proud because he was so grand and handsome, -and even now, it seems to me that he must -have been nobler and finer than most men. It -makes me proud to think I bear his name.”</p> - -<p>“Raymond,” said Clark, earnestly, “are you bearing -it so that he would be proud of <em>you</em>—if he were -here now?”</p> - -<p>The boy threw himself down, and burying his -face in his hands, broke into bitter sobs.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, Stanley, no,” he cried; “I’m ashamed—ashamed, -when I think how I’ve dragged his dear -name in the dirt. Oh, what <em>shall</em> I do, what shall -I do!”</p> - -<p>The agony of shame and bitter sorrow in that -woeful cry, wrung his cousin’s heart. He laid his -hand lovingly on the bowed head as he said:—</p> - -<p>“Turn right about, Ray, and make a new beginning. -Determine that from this time on you will never do -or say one thing that you would be ashamed to have -Uncle Raymond know.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[118]</span></p> - -<p>“Oh, but you don’t know how bad I’ve been. Why, -Stanley, I lied to Prof. Keene this very morning. I -<em>did</em> know about that cracker. I carried the message -from Henderson to Baum, myself.”</p> - -<p>“I knew you did, Ray.”</p> - -<p>Freeman sat upright and stared in blank amazement.</p> - -<p>“<em>How</em> did you know it?” he said.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps I ought to say I guessed it, for of course -I did not know <em>what</em> message you carried to Baum, -but I saw Henderson speak to you, and then I saw -you go to Baum, and I thought you gave him something. -Afterward, when I saw him hand something -to the rascal that fired that cracker, I guessed at -once that Henderson had sent you to do the abominable -errand for him.”</p> - -<p>“Did you tell all this to the professor?” questioned -Ray.</p> - -<p>“No, Ray, I gave the professor no names, but I -may have to tell him about Baum. I cannot tell -him about you.”</p> - -<p>Freeman’s head went down on his hands again -and he groaned out:—</p> - -<p>“That isn’t all, either, Stanley. It was I that -snapped the marble that broke Raleigh’s glasses, -and I lied about that, too.”</p> - -<p>“Did you do that, Ray? I was afraid it was you, -but I hoped I was mistaken. Why didn’t you own<span class="pagenum">[119]</span> -up when Mr. Horton gave you the chance? He -wouldn’t have been hard on you. He knew it was -an accident,” said Clark.</p> - -<p>“But it wasn’t, Stanley. At least, I meant the -marble to hit Raleigh’s head, though of course, I -didn’t think of his glasses. I’ve had a hand in all -the mischief that has been done in the room these -last two terms, and I’ve lied like a trooper right -straight through it all. Stanley—I don’t believe I -can <em>help</em> lying now.”</p> - -<p>“Nonsense, Ray!” Clark spoke sternly, now. -“Don’t be so weak as to give up trying to make -a man of yourself. I tell you, Ray, your father’s -son <em>must</em> be a true, honorable man. You have to -take his place in the world—fill his place to your -mother and Edith.”</p> - -<p>“Oh I wish I could, Stanley. You don’t know -how much I wish it sometimes. You think I don’t -try, but I do. Lots of times I’ve made up my mind -that I would break with Crawford and all that lot, -and then he’d come and coax me to go for a drive or -a sail, and I’d give in and go and do anything they -wanted me to, though I knew all the time I was -breaking mother’s heart and Edith’s. I’m just a -weak good-for-nothing—I never shall amount to -anything in the world,” he added, hopelessly.</p> - -<p>“Raymond,” said Clark, solemnly, “I believe that -you have come to a turning-point in your life.<span class="pagenum">[120]</span> -You’ve been going down hill—you acknowledge it. -Now, if you will, you can turn right about, and go -up. It will be hard at first, I know, but I’ll stand -by you, and Hamlin will too, I’m sure, and when -Gordon and the rest see that you mean to do the -right thing, they’ll back you up too.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Stanley, I wish I could. I do so wish I could,” -cried the boy. “But you forget about the drill. Prof. -Keene will find out that I lied to him, and he’ll expel -me—and mother”—he broke off, and groaned.</p> - -<p>“Ray, if things at school could be made all right -for you, would you really break with Crawford -and that crowd, and try to live down this year’s -doings?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I would, I would so gladly,” cried the boy, -“but it can’t be. It can’t be made right about the -drill.”</p> - -<p>“It can in one way, Ray. If you will go to Prof. -Keene and tell him what you have told me, and how -sorry you are for it all, I’m sure he will forgive -you.”</p> - -<p>Freeman fairly gasped. “Go to the professor? Oh, -I never could in the world!” he said, “and -Henderson—he vowed he’d kill me if I told a soul, and -you must never let him know that I’ve told you, -Stanley.”</p> - -<p>“Ray, you <em>must</em> go to the professor. He told me -that he was determined to get to the bottom of the<span class="pagenum">[121]</span> -affair, and what he sets out to do, he does. He suspects -Henderson, I am sure, and I believe that he -will ferret out the whole business. Then you would -be punished <em>sure</em>; but if you go and confess of your -own accord, it will make all the difference in the -world to him; I am certain of it.”</p> - -<p>“But Henderson, Stanley. I’ve no right to tell on -him,” said the boy.</p> - -<p>“I think you have, in such a serious business as -this. I think he deserves heavy punishment. But, -Ray, you need not mention his name. You can tell -what you did without implicating anyone else. Oh, -Ray, do it. Your father would tell you to do it, if -he could speak to you.”</p> - -<p>Freeman turned his face away, and sat silent for -many minutes. When he spoke again, his voice was -low and firm.</p> - -<p>“I’ll do it, Stanley,” he said, “but I must do it -right away. Will you come with me?”</p> - -<p>“Gladly,” and without another word, Clark picked -up the basket and led the way homeward.</p> - -<p>An hour later, Professor Keene was informed -that two boys wanted to speak to him, and going -down to his library, found Clark and Freeman -awaiting him there. Clark stayed only until Freeman’s -confession was made; then he quietly left the -room and waited on the sidewalk for his cousin.</p> - -<p>It was a long time that he had to wait. Indeed,<span class="pagenum">[122]</span> -it was nearly dark before Freeman joined him, and -the two walked on together in a silence that Clark -dared not break and Freeman could not.</p> - -<p>“Not going home, Ray?” Clark said, inquiringly, -as his cousin turned another way.</p> - -<p>“I must see Mr. Horton before I go home,” -Freeman answered. “I told the professor I would.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton was quite as much surprised as the -principal had been, when he heard what Freeman -had to say to him; but he, too, was very kind, and -most heartily glad to know that this one, at least, of -his troublesome pupils would henceforth cease to be -a trial in the class-room.</p> - -<p>When Freeman left Mr. Horton’s house, he looked -worn and weary, yet there was an expression of -relief—of peace even, in his pale face. He looked -as if he had laid down a heavy burden that he had -long been bearing; and this, indeed, was just what -he had done.</p> - -<p>“Now I can go home,” he said. “But, oh, Stanley, -I can’t be thankful enough that you persuaded -me to own up to it all. You saved me from being -suspended, if not expelled, for Professor Keene and -Mr. Horton had found out all about it.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so?” exclaimed Clark, in surprise. -“Why, how had they found it out so quickly?”</p> - -<p>“Mr. Horton sat where he could see both Henderson -and our fellows in the bleachers.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[123]</span></p> - -<p>“Queer that the boys didn’t see him,” said Clark, -wonderingly.</p> - -<p>“His eyes were troubling him, and he wore dark -glasses that day. I suppose that’s why we didn’t -notice him. And, Stanley, he even knew that I -threw the marble that smashed Raleigh’s glasses, -and if I hadn’t acknowledged it to-night, he was -going to call me up before the school next Monday. -So you see, Stanley, I owe it all to you that I am to -be let off so easily.”</p> - -<p>“Without punishment, Ray?” questioned Clark.</p> - -<p>Freeman’s sensitive face flushed, even in the -darkness, as he answered in a voice that he vainly -tried to steady, “No—I’ve got to make acknowledgment -before the whole school, and apologize to -Mr. Horton.”</p> - -<p>Clark flung his arm affectionately across the boy’s -shoulders.</p> - -<p>“It will be a tough job for you, Ray, but I’m sure -you’ll brace up and be a man about it; and if you -do it in manly fashion, no fellow that amounts to -anything will ever cast it up to you again.”</p> - -<p>Freeman made no reply, and presently, at his -own gate, he bade his cousin “good-night,” adding -only, “I’ll never forget this day, Stanley.”</p> - -<p>Before Freeman slept, he had to tell his story -once more, to his mother and Edith; but he knew -them too well to shrink from their verdict, and he<span class="pagenum">[124]</span> -knew, too, that they would but too freely forgive -and forget all his wrong-doing in the gladness of -the assurance that henceforth he would do his best -to make up to them for all that he had made them -suffer.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_125" class="pagenum">[125]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER X.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">A PUBLIC APOLOGY.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The interest and excitement over the drill had by -no means died out when the school assembled on -Monday morning. Nothing else was discussed by -the pupils who were there early, and all sorts of -reports as to the punishment of those who had been -guilty of such flagrant misdeeds were current.</p> - -<p>Eager eyes watched for the appearance of Henderson -and the members of his company, but when -nine o’clock struck, none of them had been seen, -and Freeman’s seat was also vacant.</p> - -<p>Crawford did not appear until the last moment, -and then he dropped into his seat with an evident -desire to avoid notice.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton looked grave and troubled, and his -brief morning prayer was so full of deep feeling -that it impressed even the most careless of his -pupils. As soon as the opening exercises were over, -he told the class to form in line and march to the -hall, and much more silently than usual, and in -perfect order, the boys passed up to the hall, where, -in a few minutes, the whole school was assembled.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[126]</span></p> - -<p>All the teachers except Professor Keene were on -the platform, and every face was grave and sad.</p> - -<p>Never had those nine hundred boys and girls -gathered there on an occasion like this, and never -had such a breathless silence reigned in any of -their gatherings as reigned now during the few -moments while they awaited the appearance of the -principal.</p> - -<p>They had not long to wait. He came upon the -platform, followed by Freeman and eight of the -members of Company C, but Henderson was not -among them.</p> - -<p>Professor Keene’s words to the school were very -brief, but very grave and earnest. Then he turned -to the boys on the platform, and gave them such -a severe reprimand as he had never before given in -public to any of his pupils.</p> - -<p>Turning again to the assembled school, he said: -“To perform such a duty as this, is almost as hard -for me as for those whom I am obliged thus publicly -to reprimand, but I am very glad to be able to add -that every one of these schoolmates of yours has made -to me private acknowledgment of his wrong-doing, -and has promised henceforth to do his duty in the -school, and to try, by his conduct in the future, to -efface from all our memories the dishonorable doings -of last week; and similar acknowledgment will -now be made before us all.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[127]</span></p> - -<p>As the professor took his seat, Freeman stepped -forward. His face was colorless, and his voice so -low and husky that only those near the platform -could hear him at first. Then he caught sight of -Clark’s face, full of loving sympathy and encouragement. -He seemed to gather strength from that -look, and drawing himself up, he made a frank, -manly apology to his teachers and to the school, and -earnestly declared that it should be his purpose in -the future to do his duty in the school as faithfully -as he possibly could. As he dropped into the -nearest chair, the professor held out his hand, and -said in a low tone, “You did well, Freeman, and I -am sure that you will live up to what you have -promised.”</p> - -<p>Baum was the next to speak, and perhaps to no -boy in the school could the ordeal have been more -trying than to him. He was one of the most silent -of boys, never speaking unless spoken to, and then -replying in the fewest possible words. He never -originated any mischief in the school-room, and -would certainly not have done what he did at the -drill, but for his intense and bitter mortification -over his blunder, and Henderson’s angry, scathing -censure before the company. Desperate over all -this, he snatched at the opportunity to redeem himself -in his captain’s estimation, without stopping to -think about the right and wrong of the services required -of him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[128]</span></p> - -<p>But in the two days past, he had had time to -think the matter over, and he was sincerely ashamed -now of what he had done. As he stood there facing -the school his tongue clove to the roof of his mouth, -and his heart beat so that he could scarcely breathe, -while the perspiration stood in great drops on his -forehead.</p> - -<p>“Go on, Baum,” said the professor, in a low tone, -and the boy burst out, “I don’t know how to speak, -boys, but if I should talk all day, I couldn’t begin -to tell you how I despise myself for what I did, -and for lying about it afterwards. If I ever cut -up so again, hope I may be shot.”</p> - -<p>Had the boys dared, they would have given a -hearty cheer for Baum, but they knew better than -to attempt it; but when, feeling sure that he had -made a fool of himself, he dropped into his seat -with flushed face and trembling hands, he had really -risen many degrees in the estimation of his classmates—though -he would not have believed it had -any one told him so.</p> - -<p>The other seven boys made their apologies with -more or less sincerity, and then the classes were -sent to their separate rooms. But the intense feeling -of the morning had unfitted them for study or -recitation, and both teachers and scholars were glad -when the bell gave the signal for recess.</p> - -<p>“Say, Gordon, let’s go and speak to Baum. He<span class="pagenum">[129]</span> -came out like a man in the hall this morning,” said -Hamlin. “There’s too good stuff in him to be -wasted on that rough crowd he goes with.”</p> - -<p>“That’s what I was thinking this morning,” said -Gordon, as he followed Hamlin. Baum was leaning -against the fence watching the various groups. He -looked surprised when the two boys approached -him, and when they stopped and spoke to him, his -plain face lighted up with pleasure. To be thus -publicly sought out by the captain and lieutenant -of the prize company was an honor that Baum -knew how to appreciate, and from that hour he -ceased to find pleasure in the companionship of the -Antis, and privately resolved that, if possible, his -name should be on the list of L. A. O.’s next quarter.</p> - -<p>“Where’s Freeman?” asked Hamlin, as he and -Gordon joined Clark.</p> - -<p>“He’s gone home. Horton told him to. He was -not fit to come to school to-day, anyhow, but he wanted -to be in the hall this morning,” answered Clark.</p> - -<p>“He spoke well there,” said Hamlin, “and it must -have been an awful hard thing for him to do.”</p> - -<p>“So he did,” said Gordon, “and,” he added, “I -hope that you and he will both join the L. A. O.’s -next fall. We want your help, Clark.”</p> - -<p>Clark was so taken by surprise, that for a -moment he could not speak, and in that moment -Gordon and Hamlin passed on.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[130]</span></p> - -<p>“I’m glad you said that, Gordon,” Hamlin said, -as soon as they were out of hearing; “Clark deserves -it, and if the other fellows in the society will only -treat him as they ought, he’ll be glad enough to -join us, I know, and he’ll be a big help, too. There -won’t be more than one meeting of the society this -term, will there?”</p> - -<p>“That’s all,” answered Gordon, “and I want to -give all the Antis one more chance to join us. They -are subdued now, and some of them, I think, might -join if we ask them now—but if we wait till fall, -they will have gotten over all this, and perhaps, be -as bad as ever.”</p> - -<p>“I’ve not much faith in Green’s promises,” said -Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” said Gordon. “He looked to me as if -he apologized to escape being expelled, and not because -he was really sorry for having had a hand in -this business.”</p> - -<p>“They say Henderson has cleared out. Have -you heard anything about it, Gordon?”</p> - -<p>“I heard so. Somebody said his father was so -furious over his disgrace that he had turned him out -of doors.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it’s a bad business,” said Hamlin, “but -one thing I’m sure of, and that is, that there’ll be a -heap less trouble in section D next year if Henderson -is not here.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[131]</span></p> - -<p>“I think so, too, though if Crawford is here -there’s sure to be trouble enough.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, he and Green are a bad team. I hope -Freeman will keep away from them now.”</p> - -<p>“Clark thinks he will,” said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“I hope he’s right,” replied Gordon; “I believe -there’s good stuff in little Freeman.”</p> - -<p>The school year was nearly ended now, and for -the next two weeks written examinations were held -almost every day.</p> - -<p>When the last reports were given out, the -L. A. O.’s all stood well, and some had excellent -records. Clark and Gordon each had a hundred for -the quarter, while Henderson and one or two others -were well up in the nineties; but in spite of all this, -the class record was a very poor one.</p> - -<p>At the last meeting of the L. A. O.’s, this was the -first subject discussed. Parliamentary methods had -not, as yet, been introduced into these meetings to -any extent, and all the discussions were perfectly -free and informal.</p> - -<p>It was Raleigh who began. “I’m about sick of -this old school,” he began gloomily. “Just see how -we’ve worked and dug these last two terms, and, in -spite of it all, section D stands no higher than it did -the first quarter. We’re still at the bottom of the -heap, and still known in the city as the ‘tough section.’ -I’ve made up my mind to cut it all next<span class="pagenum">[132]</span> -year and go to a private school. My father says -I may.”</p> - -<p>“And my father says I must,” said Bates, who -had long since joined the L. A. O.’s. “After the -doings at the drill, he said I shouldn’t come back -here next year.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, come, now, fellows, that’s too mean—to -back out that way,” said Hamlin. “My father told -me I could go somewhere else, if I wanted to, and I -said, ‘No, sir-e-e! I’m not going to desert the old -Central in that fashion.’ I’m coming back next -year, and I’m going to do my best to make D the -finest section in the school.”</p> - -<p>“Good for you, Hamlin,” said Gordon’s clear, -quiet voice. “My father was a high school-boy, and -he says that in his time the school stood higher than -any private school in the city, both as to scholarship -and character. I mean to come back next year, and -do all I can to bring the reputation of the school up -to that point again.”</p> - -<p>“But we <em>can’t</em> do it,” grumbled Raleigh. “See -how it is now. After all our hard work, a dozen -mean, lazy cubs have spoiled our class record, and, -worse than that, made section D the talk of the -town.”</p> - -<p>“I know—it has been mighty rough on us this -year,” admitted Gordon; “but, Raleigh, we won’t -have quite so much to fight next year. Henderson<span class="pagenum">[133]</span> -won’t be here, and I hope we can win over most of -the Antis, and break up their society altogether. -Freeman, I’m sure, will join us, and I reckon Baum -will, and Ridley. There won’t be so many of the -tough fellows left, and they’ve all had a lesson that -I think they’ll not have forgotten by next fall.”</p> - -<p>“Henderson won’t be back, of course,” said -another, “but Crawford will, and Green and Coyle, -I suppose, and they can keep us from making any -decent class record.”</p> - -<p>“Crawford has behaved himself since he came -back,” said Hamlin quickly, “and nobody need say -anything against his scholarship now. He came -near a hundred this last report.”</p> - -<p>“He does well enough in class,” admitted Raleigh -rather reluctantly, “but he and Henderson have put -the Antis up to all sorts of tricks this last quarter. -They didn’t deserve the marks they got for deportment.”</p> - -<p>“I admit all that, Raleigh,” said Gordon, “but, as -I said before, the Antis have had a pretty severe -lesson, and I can’t believe that they’ll dare to do -much to make trouble next year; and they’re most -all bright enough, so, if they <em>do</em> make up their -minds to work—I mean, if we can any way -arouse their ambition and awaken a feeling of pride -in the section and the school—we can make a -splendid record without any question.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[134]</span></p> - -<p>“Ambition!” echoed Raleigh scornfully. “I’d -like to see Green or Coyle show any pride or ambition -in the school.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I hope you will see it. Stranger things -than that have happened,” said Gordon, and Hamlin -added:—</p> - -<p>“<em>I’ve</em> too much pride to be willing to give up the -fight, and let half a dozen mean fellows run the -section and ruin it. I know that both Professor -Keene and Mr. Horton are heartily on our side, and -I’m pretty sure that if Green or Crawford or any of -the rest of that set should undertake to cut up as -they have done this year, they’ll find themselves -bounced without much ceremony, and I do hope -that all you nice fellows will make up your minds -to come back and help us make such a record next -year as the Central has never had yet.”</p> - -<p>“We never could beat A section, no matter how -hard we might work,” said one.</p> - -<p>“Pooh! Don’t you believe it,” replied Hamlin. -“<em>I’m</em> not going to admit that a girl’s section can go -ahead of us, if we really set out to win.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you see they’ve got first rank, and it’s a -sight easier for them to hold it than for us to win it -away from them,” said Reed. “Possession is nine -points of the law, you know.”</p> - -<p>“There spoke our future chief justice,” laughed -Hamlin, for Reed’s predilection for the study of the<span class="pagenum">[135]</span> -law was well known. “But the girls of section A -will find themselves ousted from their possession of -first rank in the Central next year, or I miss my -guess.”</p> - -<p>When this last meeting of the L. A. O.’s adjourned, -Gordon and Hamlin felt pretty well assured -that all the members except Bates would return in -the fall, and they discussed between themselves -many and various plans for the enlargement and -improvement of the society the coming year.</p> - -<p>The graduating class was so large that it was impossible -for the members of it to take part in the -commencement exercises. Once or twice in recent -years, one member had been selected to deliver an -oration, or in some other way to represent the class, -but it was a difficult matter to select one from -among so many without awakening much hard feeling, -and so now the class took no part in the exercises -except to sit on the platform and receive their -diplomas from the hand of some distinguished man -who had been invited to honor the occasion. This -distinguished gentleman, or some other, was also -asked to address the graduates, and such was the -program on this year.</p> - -<p>But, as the two schools numbered over twelve -hundred, they and the friends and relatives of the -graduates made a very large assemblage, so that the -exercises were always held in one of the great opera -houses.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[136]</span></p> - -<p>As our boys in section D were to be themselves -among the graduates the next year, they were all -present on this occasion, it being to them in the nature -of a rehearsal.</p> - -<p>The girls in their white dresses and ribbons, with -the beautiful flowers they carried, made a pretty picture -on the platform; but this time, our boys were -more interested in the other portion of the graduating -class. They watched the boys as they went -forward to receive their diplomas, and wondered if -they themselves would be able to make as graceful -a bow as some did, or if they should be as stiff and -awkward as other poor fellows who became sadly -embarrassed when they found themselves in such a -conspicuous position.</p> - -<p>“Now for a good time,” said Hamlin, as he left the -opera house when the exercises were over. “Where -are you going to spend the vacation, Clark?”</p> - -<p>“Right here,” said Clark.</p> - -<p>“No!” exclaimed the other. “That’s too bad, -Clark. You need a rest, and it’s awful hot here in -summer.”</p> - -<p>“Expect it is,” replied Clark, “but I’ve no choice, -Hamlin. Where are you going?”</p> - -<p>“Up in the mountains. We have a summer cottage -in the Catskills. I wish you’d go up with me -for two or three weeks, Clark—can’t you?”</p> - -<p>“No, I can’t possibly, Hamlin, though it’s awfully<span class="pagenum">[137]</span> -good of you to ask me,” Clark replied. “But I hope -you’ll have a grand time, and come home in prime -condition for work.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll try to,” laughed the other, “and don’t you -forget that we count on you as an L. A. O. next -year,” and with a friendly hand-grasp, he said, “good-bye,” -and ran to overtake Gordon.</p> - -<p>A day or two later, the doors of the Central high -school were closed, and the boys and girls gathered -there no more, but some at the seashore, and some -in the mountains, they sought rest and pleasure, -while many others—unable to leave the city, soon -found themselves looking forward to September, -when they might take up again the school duties -that, after all, have so much that is bright and -pleasant, mingled with the hard and tiresome round.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_138" class="pagenum">[138]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XI.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">NEW PUPILS IN SECTION D.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>School reopened the second Monday in September, -and long before nine o’clock the boys and girls -began to gather about the steps, waiting for the janitor -to open the doors.</p> - -<p>Hamlin had overtaken Clark and Freeman, and -when the three reached the schoolhouse gate they -found a goodly number there before them, and many -voices called out greetings, especially to Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“There’s a newcomer,” Clark said; “up there near -the door.”</p> - -<p>“The chap with the rosy locks?” answered Hamlin. -“Yes, he’s new, but he seems to be making -himself very much at home. He’s talking away -with the old fellows as if he had known them all -his life. There! Jimmy’s opening the doors. Let’s -wait here a bit. I don’t care to hustle through that -crowd.”</p> - -<p>“Evidently, he of the rosy locks doesn’t either,” -remarked Clark, noticing that the red-haired boy -had not passed in with the throng, but remained on -the upper step with two or three other boys.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[139]</span></p> - -<p>“Look at him, will you! Well, if he isn’t a cheeky -cad!” exclaimed Hamlin a moment later, as the boy -they were watching pulled off his hat and made a -low bow to a group of girls passing to the other -door. Among these girls was Gordon’s sister, and -Grace Harlan, a cousin of Hamlin’s.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to punch his head for him. He doesn’t -know those girls—not one of them spoke to him,” -Hamlin added.</p> - -<p>“Wonder if he’ll be in our section,” said Clark, as -the three boys passed up the steps.</p> - -<p>“Hope not,” replied Hamlin. “We don’t want -any of his sort in section D.”</p> - -<p>A shout of welcome met them as they entered -their own class-room, and Clark felt happier than he -had ever felt before in that school-room as one and -another called out a friendly greeting. Several took -pains to speak to Freeman, whose sensitive face -showed his appreciation of the kindness.</p> - -<p>“Wonder if Green isn’t coming back,” said Gordon, -noticing his vacant seat.</p> - -<p>“No,” volunteered Coyle, “he’s gone to work.”</p> - -<p>Gordon and Hamlin exchanged glances of satisfaction -at this information, and both thought, “One -less of the Antis.”</p> - -<p>Green had been one of the most disagreeable boys -in the class, and very few felt sorry that he would -come among them no more. Several other seats<span class="pagenum">[140]</span> -were vacant, but only one of the L. A. O.’s had failed -to return. That one was Bates, who had gone to -boarding-school.</p> - -<p>Soon after the opening exercises were over, Prof -Keene appeared with four new boys, and Hamlin -threw a doleful glance at Clark, for the first of the -new-comers was the red-headed boy whom they had -seen on the steps. The second was a tall, handsome -lad of perhaps seventeen, and the other two were -ordinary looking boys of ordinary ability, not destined -to have much influence one way or the other -on the standing of section D.</p> - -<p>Of course the school could not get into smooth -running order that first day, and the recess was prolonged -to nearly twice its usual length. A group of -the L. A. O.’s quickly got together in a corner of the -playground, and, as Hamlin, Gordon, Raleigh and -Sherman were among the number, the talk soon -drifted to the subjects dear to all their hearts—the -L. A. O. and the standing of D section.</p> - -<p>“Say, fellows,” Hamlin began, “with Green and -Henderson gone, seems to me we might get the few -Antis left to join us now. If they’d only do their -best, we could easily put old section D at the top -this year.”</p> - -<p>“There’s Crawford left—and Coyle,” remarked -one, doubtfully.</p> - -<p>“Coyle’s a bad lot, I know, but he’s only one; and<span class="pagenum">[141]</span> -somehow, I’ve a notion that Crawford has come back -with different ideas, this term,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Why—what makes you think that?” questioned -Raleigh.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know really,” answered Gordon, thoughtfully, -“only somehow there’s a different air about -him. There he is over there, now.”</p> - -<p>Every eye in the group followed Gordon’s glance -to where Crawford stood leaning against the fence. -There was no one near him, and something in his -attitude, and in the expression of his face, convinced -more than one of the boys that Gordon was right, -and that Crawford was changed somehow.</p> - -<p>“Suppose there’d be any use in asking him to join -the L. A. O.?” questioned Sherman, after a moment’s -silence.</p> - -<p>“I should say ask him, by all means. He can’t do -more than refuse,” said Gordon; “and we must ask -the new fellows, of course. Hamlin, will you interview -Rosy or the black-eyed chap?”</p> - -<p>“Neither. I’ll take the other two fellows,” said -Hamlin, promptly.</p> - -<p>“All right, then I’ll see to the black-eyed fellow; -and Sherman, you might interview Rosy. I’m going -to speak to Crawford, now.”</p> - -<p>Crawford looked greatly surprised as Gordon approached, -and yet more surprised when the latter -made known his errand. He dropped his eyes, the<span class="pagenum">[142]</span> -color mounted in his dark cheeks, and for a moment -he was silent. Then he looked Gordon full in the -face and said slowly:—</p> - -<p>“Do you really want me, Gordon?”</p> - -<p>“I certainly do, or I would not have asked you,” -was the quiet reply.</p> - -<p>“And the other fellows?” questioned Crawford.</p> - -<p>“I think we shall all be glad to have you join us, -Crawford,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Gordon—I don’t suppose you know what it is -to be ashamed of yourself through and through. I -do—and I don’t enjoy the feeling.” There was a -ring of pain in Crawford’s voice as he spoke, and -Gordon could not question his sincerity. He held -out his hand saying, heartily:—</p> - -<p>“The best of us go wrong so often that we can’t -afford to be hard on anybody who is honestly sorry, -Crawford. I want you on our side this year to help -us make the old Central proud of section D.”</p> - -<p>Crawford grasped the offered hand and then turned -away without another word, but Gordon felt that the -look on his face was more eloquent than any words -could have been.</p> - -<p>When he went back to the group in the corner -and reported his success, some of the boys looked -doubtful. They found it hard yet to believe that -Crawford was in earnest, but at least they were glad -to be able to hope that he would no longer lead the -idle and troublesome element into fresh mischief.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[143]</span></p> - -<p>“If Coyle could only be gotten rid of, now,” remarked -Raleigh, “we might hope to make a fine -record this year, so far as deportment goes. It remains -to be seen what kind of students these new -fellows are.”</p> - -<p>“That black-eyed chap looks as if he had brains,” -remarked Reed.</p> - -<p>“Looks to me as if he thought he had the monopoly -of brains,” put in Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“He does have rather a high and mighty air,” said -Sherman. “May be only shyness, though. Some fellows -put on airs like that when their hearts are in -their boots.”</p> - -<p>“<em>He</em> isn’t troubled with shyness—anything but,” -retorted Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Neither is Rosy, for that matter,” remarked Clark -laughingly.</p> - -<p>“You’re right there, Clark,” said Hamlin; “but -there goes the bell. Say, Gordon,” he added, as -they moved towards the door, “can’t we have a -meeting of the L. A. O. to-morrow, to let these new -fellows get an idea of what we want to do this year?”</p> - -<p>“All right,” responded Gordon, “we’ll say after -school to-morrow, then.”</p> - -<p>When, the next day, Gordon called the meeting -to order, his face beamed with satisfaction as he -looked around and saw that almost the entire section -was present. The only exceptions were Coyle,<span class="pagenum">[144]</span> -Barber, one of his special friends, and the black-eyed -boy whom Gordon was to have invited to join them.</p> - -<p>This was the first of these meetings at which -Clark, Freeman or Crawford had been present, but -certainly no one in the room was more interested -than these three, who for such different reasons had -hitherto been absent.</p> - -<p>Gordon was usually very quiet and rather reserved, -but he was very fond of the Central high school, as -his father had been before him, and he had come -back full of the desire that it should stand as high, if -not higher, this year, than in the old days when his -father was so proud of its reputation. So, to-day, -he was so eager and so full of enthusiastic plans for -raising the standard of the class, and gaining for it -first rank in the school, that before long the other -members of the L. A. O. caught something of his -spirit, and all sorts of plans and propositions were -made. It was unanimously resolved that every -member should do his very best in class, and that -not even the drill or ball games should be allowed -to interfere with the great object.</p> - -<p>Three of the new boys were present at this meeting, -but only Dixon, or “Rosy,” as he was already -dubbed in the class, made any remarks. He was -on his feet half a dozen times, asking questions, -making suggestions, or offering amendments.</p> - -<p>When the meeting was over, and all but Gordon<span class="pagenum">[145]</span> -and Hamlin had left the room, the latter threw -himself into a seat exclaiming, “Well, I reckon -we’ll get enough of that Rosy before the year is -ended! He’s of a retiring disposition, isn’t he?”</p> - -<p>Gordon laughed. “He won’t have so many questions -to ask next time,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Won’t? Don’t you believe it. He’ll <em>always</em> have -a raft of ’em to reel off. He <em>may</em> be a very nice -chap, but deliver me from having anything to do -with any more of the sort. But how about his -royal highness with the black eyes? Wouldn’t he -condescend to accept the invitation?”</p> - -<p>“No,” said Gordon quietly, though his face -flushed at the question.</p> - -<p>“Oh, come, Gordon, you might as well out with -it. Your face gives you away. What did he say?”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Gordon with a half laugh, “he drew -himself up and looked at me as if I were a toad or a -snake, and remarked that he had come here to study—not -to fool away his time in clubs or any such -nonsense, and that he would thank me to leave him -alone.”</p> - -<p>“Whew!” whistled Hamlin, “he’ll be pretty popular -here, won’t he?” Then he added, indignantly, -“Well, if he <em>isn’t</em> a cool customer! I reckon he’ll -<em>be</em> let alone emphatically, hereafter.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Gordon, “but there’s one good thing. -If he’s a fine scholar, and I fancy that he is, he’ll<span class="pagenum">[146]</span> -help the section that way, in spite of himself; and -certainly, that sort of a fellow won’t be cutting up -or getting others into mischief, so he won’t work -<em>against</em> the L. A. O.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” answered Hamlin; “but what a -chump he is to take such a stand as that, and lose -all the good times he might have here.”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” assented Gordon, “but see here, Hamlin, -let’s not tell the other fellows anything about this. -It would turn them all against him, and I don’t -think he’s likely to make many friends anyhow.”</p> - -<p>“Evidently he does not care to make any,” said -Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“It seems not, but you know if the fellows get -set against him, some of them will do their best to -make it hot for him. You and I don’t want to have -any hand in that sort of thing, so we’ll keep mum -about this—shan’t we?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I suppose so,” grumbled Hamlin. “I feel as -if I’d like to kick him myself, and I reckon most of -the boys would feel the same way. We’ll let his -royal highness severely alone, since that’s his pleasure. -By the way, what <em>is</em> his name, anyhow?”</p> - -<p>“Somebody said it was Everett St. John. Perhaps -it’s on the strength of his aristocratic name -that he puts on so many airs,” replied Gordon.</p> - -<p>On the outer steps a group of boys stood talking -and laughing—among them, Rosy. He stepped<span class="pagenum">[147]</span> -forward, and slipped his arm familiarly through -Hamlin’s, as the latter came down the stairs with -Gordon.</p> - -<p>“I say, Hamlin,” he began, not in the least disconcerted -at Hamlin’s straightening out his arm -like a poker, “I wish you’d introduce me to Grace -Harlan. She’s a cousin of yours, isn’t she?”</p> - -<p>“<em>Miss</em> Harlan is my cousin,” answered Hamlin -coldly, “but I never introduce boys to her except at -her own request.”</p> - -<p>“Ho, ho, Rosy—got squelched that time,” snickered -Coyle, as Hamlin and Gordon passed on.</p> - -<p>“Oh, that’s nothing. I’ll get somebody else to introduce -me. <em>Miss</em> Harlan is the prettiest girl I’ve -seen in an age,” responded Rosy serenely, while -Hamlin was growling in Gordon’s ear, “Introduce -him to Grace, indeed! I think I see myself doing -it.”</p> - -<p>Being a little late next morning, Hamlin took a -short cut to school, passing through a side street -where he seldom went. He was going along at a -rapid pace when he saw Dixon come out of a door -half-way down the block. When Hamlin reached -the place he glanced up at the still open door. It -was a low saloon.</p> - -<p>“Dear me,” he thought, “I wish that fellow had -never come near the Central. It was bad enough -before, but now that I know that he goes into such<span class="pagenum">[148]</span> -holes as that—what am I to do about it? He’ll -probably get other fellows in there, too. Wonder if -I ought to tell Bobby.”</p> - -<p>But to “tell on a fellow,” even in a case like -this, was very repugnant to Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“I can’t do it yet a while,” he decided, “but I’ll -keep a sharp eye on him, and if I ever see him in -such a place again, I’ll warn him that I’ll report -him unless he stops it.”</p> - -<p>Dixon was standing by the school gate, and -greeted Hamlin with the utmost cordiality, seeming -not to notice the coldness with which the other responded. -It was impossible to freeze Dixon—he -simply would not be frozen.</p> - -<p>On this morning the regular recitations were to -begin, and Gordon, Clark and Hamlin were eager to -hear the new boys recite, that they might judge -whether they would be helps or hindrances in that -which our boys were so anxious to accomplish this -year—to make D the banner section of the school.</p> - -<p>They knew that two other sections, at least, were -as eager and as determined as they to hold the first -place, and one or two poor scholars might bring the -record down in spite of all that could be done by -others in the class. So eyes and ears were alert -that morning in section D.</p> - -<p>The first recitation was that of the Latin class. -Clark had easily held first rank in this, though<span class="pagenum">[149]</span> -Hamlin, Gordon and Sherman were all excellent -scholars. The lesson this morning was from Virgil, -and according to the usual custom, the class was -seated, each boy standing only during his own recitation.</p> - -<p>“Reed, you may begin,” Mr. Horton said, “and -when you have read five lines, the next may continue.”</p> - -<p>One after another, the boys rendered the lines, -and, though some had blundered, nobody had failed -when it came to Clark. Clark never had been -known to fail in Latin translation. The others -attended to his recitation only because it was sure -to be better than their own; but to-day they wanted -him to get through so that they might listen to -Everett St. John, who was the next in order.</p> - -<p>The lesson was from Virgil, and Clark’s lines -ended with the words of Æneas, which he translated -thus:—</p> - -<p>“By its own fortune, a tempest drove us, carried -over different waters, to the Libyan shores—if by -chance, the name of Troy has come through your -ears. I am the pious Æneas, known by fame above -the air, who carry with me in my ship the Penates -torn from the enemy. I seek Italy, my country, and -a race from greatest Jove.”</p> - -<p>As Clark took his seat, St. John rose and said -coolly:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[150]</span></p> - -<p>“Those last lines were very roughly rendered, -Mr. Horton. It is much better this way:—</p> - -<p>“A tempest, by its own chance, drove us, borne -from ancient Troy (if, perchance, the name of Troy -has reached your ears), over various waters, to the -African shores. I am the pious Æneas, known by -fame above the sky, who bear with me, in my fleet, -the Penates snatched from the foe. I seek Italy, -my fatherland, and an ancestry that sprang from -sovereign Jove.”</p> - -<p>Then, without noticing in the least the astonished -and indignant glances of the boys, who resented the -criticism on Clark, not so much because it was -Clark, but because it was the finest Latin scholar in -the class, St. John proceeded with his own five -lines, translating not only very correctly, but into -choice and elegant English.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton’s face expressed his satisfaction at -such an acquisition to the classical department. He -even forgot the rudeness shown to Clark, who had -come to be one of his favorite pupils, so greatly did -he enjoy the thought of teaching such a scholar, and -he turned with a sigh to the next boy, whose lame, -halting sentences formed so great a contrast to St. -John’s.</p> - -<p>Nobody except the one reciting paid much attention -then, until Dixon arose. It was impossible to -ignore Dixon anywhere. Already he had succeeded<span class="pagenum">[151]</span> -in making both friends and enemies, and -now the eyes of all the class were fixed on him.</p> - -<p>“Good!” thought Gordon, as Dixon read smoothly -on. “He won’t pull us down, and if St. John’s as -good in other things as he is in Latin, he’ll help us -up in spite of himself. Guess he’ll go ahead of -Clark. I’m sorry for Clark, though.”</p> - -<p>And much the same thoughts were in the minds -of many of the boys when the recitation was over. -Slowly, but surely, the feeling that had been so -strong against Clark was dying out. Some few of -the boys still stood aloof from him, however, and -recalled, at intervals, the charges made against him -early in the previous year. But Hamlin’s strong -friendship for him, and his own quiet, steady doing -of his duty, and holding himself apart, yet without -any show of enmity or ill-feeling, had had their -effect upon his schoolmates, and most of them were -ready now to be friends with him; while all, -whether friends or not, were proud of his scholarship, -and had come to look upon him as the leader -of the class in that line. So they were inclined to -resent St. John’s arrogant assumption of superiority, -and to wish that Clark could “dig in and get ahead -of him,” as Reed expressed it.</p> - -<p>In mathematics it was much the same, though -here Hamlin and Gordon stood almost as high as -Clark; would have stood quite as high, if they had<span class="pagenum">[152]</span> -had Clark’s power of concentration and application.</p> - -<p>“I’ve <em>had</em> to learn how to study,” he had said -once to Hamlin. “If you and Gordon had been -obliged to do it, as I have, I shouldn’t be a bit -ahead of you.”</p> - -<p>With Everett St. John, it was not necessity, but -the instinct of a born student that gave him the -power to grasp and master whatever he studied. In -the geometry class, his clear, concise demonstrations -awakened at once the despair and the admiration -of most of the class, while they aroused in our -three boys an eager determination to work as they -never had worked before over those lines and -angles.</p> - -<p>Gordon drew a long breath, as he joined Clark -and Hamlin at recess.</p> - -<p>“Well, one thing is certain, and that is that St. -John is bound to help our record, if he keeps on as -he has begun,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Yes, and carry off all the prizes, too,” grumbled -Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” said Freeman, who was standing by. -He spoke sadly, for his only chance of a college -education lay in his gaining one of the scholarships -offered as prizes to the senior class.</p> - -<p>“Well,” laughed Hamlin, “he may win all the -scholarships, but he certainly can go to but one<span class="pagenum">[153]</span> -college, so somebody else is bound to have a -chance.”</p> - -<p>“That reminds me,” said Clark, “I heard last -evening that two new scholarships had been offered.”</p> - -<p>“Where?” asked half a dozen voices.</p> - -<p>“One to Lehigh, and one to Jamestown College, I -believe.”</p> - -<p>“Good!” said Hamlin. “That makes six scholarships, -and if his royal highness—Mr. Everett St. -John—<em>should</em> come out No. 1, as likely as not he -would not go to any college that offers us a scholarship. -He’s so high and mighty that he’d probably -go only to the toniest and most expensive college in -the country.”</p> - -<p>“Rosy came out pretty well, too,” said Reed.</p> - -<p>“Yes, better than I thought he would,” said Gordon. -“Anyway, I’m glad that neither of ’em is -likely to pull us down. I believe old section D has -a fair chance to come out No. 1 this year.”</p> - -<p>“Certainly looks like it,” responded Hamlin, -“and nobody has worked harder to bring it about -than you have, Gordon.”</p> - -<p>“I’m so glad that Raleigh concluded to come -back this year,” was all Gordon answered.</p> - -<p>For several weeks things went smoothly in section -D. Mr. Horton was delighted, for a more -orderly class-room could not be desired. Once in a<span class="pagenum">[154]</span> -while, Coyle and Barber would try to start some -mischief, but they were in far too great a minority -for anything of that sort to prosper. By the first of -November, they and St. John were the only members -of the class who were not also members of the -L. A. O.; and to be a member of the L. A. O. this -year meant to be not only pledged to use all one’s -influence for good order in the class-room and -gentlemanly deportment in all places and at all -times, but it also meant now to be fully determined -that no effort should be spared on the part of each -member to place section D at the head of the old -Central.</p> - -<p>In short, Gordon and Hamlin had succeeded in -imparting their enthusiasm, in greater or less degree, -to every boy in the class with the exception of -the three mentioned; and this enthusiasm received -fresh impetus at the weekly meetings of the L. A. O.</p> - -<p>Besides, the duller boys of the class were continually -watched and helped by the class leaders, and -helped in such friendly fashion, and so thoroughly, -that their pride was not hurt, and a healthy ambition -to help themselves was being awakened in them.</p> - -<p>Decidedly the most unpopular boy in the class -was Everett St. John, but this fact troubled him not -at all. So long as his schoolmates let him alone, he -cared not the least what they thought of him, and -they <em>did</em> let him severely alone, for, after a week or<span class="pagenum">[155]</span> -two no one ever spoke to him. Those who had ventured -to do so had been met so coldly, not to say -rudely, that they had no desire to repeat the experience. -But however much they might dislike him, -they could not fail to appreciate and admire his -ability. Never before had section D had such fine -recitations as St. John’s in Latin and English literature.</p> - -<p>The inevitable result was that those who had -stood highest in the class heretofore were stimulated -to fresh effort, and soon found themselves -doing much better work than they had supposed -themselves capable of doing—to Mr. Horton’s great -satisfaction.</p> - -<p>Nor was the spirit of ambition limited to section -D. It spread to other sections, and other teachers -began to be encouraged by increased application, and -consequently, better recitations in their classes.</p> - -<p>It was a singular fact, that this most unusual improvement -in the spirit of the school should have -been so largely due to a new scholar who cared -nothing whatever about the school, and was solely -interested in himself and his own work; but so it -was.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_156" class="pagenum">[156]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">WHO SHALL BE CAPTAIN OF COMPANY C?</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>In October, there came a sudden stir of interest -and excitement of a different sort, namely, the appointment -of Henderson’s successor in the battalion.</p> - -<p>Gordon was now major, and Hamlin had taken -his place as captain of Company C.</p> - -<p>The appointments had heretofore been made by -Prof. Keene, and the liveliest interest was awakened -when he announced that, this time, the captain was -to be elected by vote of the officers of the battalion -and all the members of Company C.</p> - -<p>No one was eligible for the captaincy except those -members of the senior class whose average during -the previous years had been ninety or more, and of -these there were but eight, and of these, two—one -of whom was Clark—had not been in the battalion -at all, and so of course could not be candidates. -The names of the remaining six were put on the -bulletin board, and Prof. Keene announced that the -vote would be taken after school on Friday of that -week.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[157]</span></p> - -<p>Graham and Raleigh stood highest on the list, -each having averaged ninety-four for the previous -years. Then came Griffin, the first lieutenant of -Company C, with an average of ninety-two; then -Fry, Cole and Edson, with averages of ninety-one -and ninety. The last three belonged to another section.</p> - -<p>Prof. Keene had supposed that the choice would -lie between Graham and Raleigh, and as he was -perfectly willing that either should hold the position, -he had decided that the one that the boys preferred -should be captain. He had not imagined that -any one of the other four would be considered at all, -and was wholly unprepared for the strong feeling -and sharp rivalry that was soon developed. Neither -was he fully aware of the character of some of the -boys in Company C. There were a few fine fellows -in the company, but there were more who were idle -and indifferent to everything but “fun,” and a few -who were really bad, and who would not hesitate to -sacrifice the best interests of the school to carry out -their own schemes. Some of these last had been -friends of Henderson, and these had by no means -forgotten the occurrences at the competitive drill. -They resented Henderson’s enforced departure, and -the disgrace that had fallen upon the company -rankled in their minds. To these, the idea of having -Graham or Raleigh for a captain was most distasteful.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[158]</span></p> - -<p>Coyle was second lieutenant of Company C, and -he and Barber, who belonged to another company, -quickly made up their minds that, if possible, these -two should be defeated on Friday.</p> - -<p>Monday was “drill day,” and when the drill was -over, Coyle privately asked all of Company C except -the first lieutenant, who was a particular friend of -Graham’s, to stop and talk the matter over. The -discussion was held with closed doors, and a lively -one it was.</p> - -<p>Coyle was the first speaker.</p> - -<p>“I say, fellows,” he began, eagerly, “we’ve got a -chance now to choose our captain, and I move that -we boom Griffin. I, for one, don’t want any such -prig as Graham or Raleigh put over us. Griffin -here is worth a dozen such chaps.”</p> - -<p>All eyes were turned on Griffin as Coyle sat down, -and somebody called, “Speech, speech.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not much of a speechifier,” said Griffin, rising, -“but I appreciate the honor you have done me, and -if I’m elected, I’ll do my best to help you win the -red ribbons next June.”</p> - -<p>Then Barber sprang up.</p> - -<p>“Griffin hasn’t got quite such high marks as those -other fellows,” he said, “but he’s no end better up -in tactics, and I’d rather have him for captain if he -wasn’t.”</p> - -<p>Coyle started vigorous applause at this, but now -another spoke up.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[159]</span></p> - -<p>“I haven’t a thing to say against Griffin,” he began. -“He’s well up in the drill, and understands -the duties of a captain; but the same is true of Graham, -and I’m sure that most of the officers will vote -for him. I don’t believe we could elect Griffin.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, shucks! We can elect him if we all hang -together,” cried Coyle, springing to his feet again. -“Now see here—there are twenty-two officers, and -in Company C there are forty men. Now if the -company will go solid for Griffin, even without a -vote from a single officer, we shall elect him by a -big majority.”</p> - -<p>Carr, a boy with a quiet, resolute face, now rose -and said quietly, “I shall vote for Graham, because -I believe that he can do more for Company C than -any other on the list.”</p> - -<p>Barber hissed then; whereupon another boy -sprang up and cried, “I move that any fellow that -hisses be put out. If we can’t discuss this matter -like gentlemen, we’d better adjourn right now. -Every fellow here has a right to his own opinion, I -take it—and I’ve just as much right to vote for -Graham as Barber has to vote for Griffin, and I intend -to do it.”</p> - -<p>Barber, seeing that the tide of feeling was with -the last speaker, jumped up, and, with a good-natured -laugh, exclaimed, “Don’t lay that little hiss up -against me, boys. It was only a whistle that slipped -up on my front teeth.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[160]</span></p> - -<p>The laugh that followed scored one for Barber -and the candidate that he favored.</p> - -<p>But Coyle’s quick eyes had been watching the -faces of the boys, and now he sprang up again.</p> - -<p>“It’s getting late,” he said, “and I move that we -adjourn, and meet again Wednesday after drill. -That will give us all time to think the matter over, -and make up our minds whom we’ll vote for. But -see here,” as a general movement expressed the approval -of the motion to adjourn, “don’t forget that -Griffin stands A No. 1 in tactics, and we all want -to win the gold medal and red ribbons next June.”</p> - -<p>“Three cheers for Coyle and Griffin,” shouted -somebody, and in two minutes the room was empty; -but as the boys hurried homeward, the talk was all -about the election.</p> - -<p>Coyle and Barber were the last to leave the room.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to punch the heads of some of those fellows,” -growled Coyle. “If the company would only -go solid for Griffin, it wouldn’t matter how the officers -voted.”</p> - -<p>“No, we’d have nearly two-thirds majority,” -answered Barber, “and I’d give something to see -Graham and Raleigh defeated. I believe I care -more for that than to put Griffin in. They’re all -so mighty high and tony in section D this year, a -fellow can’t have a bit of fun. Might as well be in -a reform school, and done with it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[161]</span></p> - -<p>“Right you are,” responded Coyle. “Gordon and -Hamlin have managed somehow to get hold of about -all the section except you and me, and they’ve set -’em all to digging. Not much like last year, is it? -Who’d ever have believed that Crawford would go -over to the L. A. O.! He’s as meek as Moses now-a-days.”</p> - -<p>“So he is,” echoed Barber, “an’ if we have Graham -or Raleigh for captain, the drill will be as bad -as the school-room. They’ll make the fellows toe -the mark and be down on ’em like sixty for the -least thing wrong.”</p> - -<p>“We <em>just won’t have</em> Graham or Raleigh,” cried -Coyle, positively. “You and I must see the fellows -we’re sure of before to-morrow night, and find some -way of putting Griffin in.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see how we’re going to do it, if some of -the company vote for Graham, and you see they -will, from what they said to-day,” replied Barber.</p> - -<p>“I see that they mean to now,” said Coyle, “but -it does not follow that they will be of the same -mind next Friday. It’s our business to make ’em -change their minds. Now go home and think hard, -Barber, and I’ll set my wits to work, and see if we -can’t fix up some plan that will win the day for ‘we, -us and Company’ C,” said Coyle, as he stopped at -his own home.</p> - -<p>Usually Coyle was asleep two minutes after his<span class="pagenum">[162]</span> -head touched his pillow, but that night he lay -awake more than an hour or two, his thoughts busy -with plots and plans to accomplish his purpose.</p> - -<p>He was at Barber’s door soon after eight o’clock -next morning, and that young gentleman, swallowing -the last of his breakfast with most unhealthy -rapidity, joined him in response to his impatient -whistle.</p> - -<p>“I’ve thought of a way to spike Graham’s guns,” -Coyle began, and while his companion listened with -eager interest, he proceeded to unfold his scheme.</p> - -<p>“That’s fine,” Barber exclaimed, slapping Coyle on -the shoulder, as the latter ceased speaking. “I’m -sure our crowd will catch on to that little game, and -I believe we can rope in most of the Grahamites -without much trouble.”</p> - -<p>Coyle looked pleased at the other’s hearty approval.</p> - -<p>“You and I must let the fellows we’re sure of -into our scheme, and then we’ll tell the doubtful -ones enough to secure their votes, and no more,” he -said.</p> - -<p>Before school, at recess, and after school that -day, Coyle and Barber were busy boys. Barber -gathered in a corner of the playground, at recess, all -the members of Company C whom he knew to be -strongly in favor of Griffin, and to them unfolded -Coyle’s plan.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[163]</span></p> - -<p>Meantime, Coyle joined another group of the -members of Company C. After listening for a few -minutes, to what one and another had to say, he remarked -casually, “I’ve been thinking it over, and -I’d about made up my mind to let Griffin go, and -vote for Graham. He’s a prime fellow if he is a -little too stiff—but something I heard this morning -made me rather inclined to stick to Griffin.”</p> - -<p>“What was it you heard?” questioned several of -the group.</p> - -<p>“Why, that Gordon and Hamlin are working for -all they are worth, to get self-government into the -battalion.”</p> - -<p>“Self-government? What do you mean by that?” -queried one, while all listened for the reply.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you know how they manage in some of -the military schools? The boys elect a judge and -jury from their own number, and if any boy does -anything contrary to rules, they try him and pronounce -sentence themselves, subject of course to -the principal’s approval.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s the matter with that? We’d have -it all in our own hands, and we could make our -punishments as light as we pleased,” laughed one.</p> - -<p>“Not much—if Graham or Raleigh was captain, -and Gordon judge, as he would be. Those fellows -are both right under Gordon’s thumb, and he thinks -it’s a sin to smile in school hours. He’s crazy on<span class="pagenum">[164]</span> -the subject of the reputation of the Central, and he’s -got every fellow in our section, except Barber and -me—and his royal highness, St. John—to work -for honors. You can see how it will be if his candidate, -Graham, is elected—no more jolly times for -Company C. All but three or four of the officers -are ready to back Gordon and Hamlin, whatever -they propose, and if they put their self-government -scheme through, we fellows in Company C, that like -a bit of fun now and then, won’t have any show at -all. Cigarette smoking will be a capital crime, and -if a fellow happens to say ‘by ginger’ he’ll be in -disgrace for a month. <em>We’ll</em> get no favors—you’ll -see. It will be the fellows that dig into Latin and -geometry day and night, that will be favored, and -those of us that like to see a little of life and have a -good time now and then, will get sat upon every -time.”</p> - -<p>“But are you sure that Graham favors this self-government -scheme, Coyle?” questioned one.</p> - -<p>“Heard Graham himself say to Hamlin that if he -was elected, that’s the thing he’d work for—another -form of the L. A. O. they’re so proud of in our -section,” replied Coyle.</p> - -<p>“If that’s so, I’m inclined not to vote for Graham. -How about Raleigh? Is he of the same mind?” -questioned another.</p> - -<p>“Like as two peas in a pod,” replied Coyle, -promptly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[165]</span></p> - -<p>“Well, then, I’ll vote for Griffin. He’s as good -in the drill as either of the others, and who cares -for two or three credits less in his average?” said a -third.</p> - -<p>“<em>That</em> for his average,” cried another, snapping -his fingers. “This is our last year in the old battalion, -and I’d rather Company C would carry off the -prizes in the next annual drill than to come out -number one in the school myself.”</p> - -<p>“Well,” said Coyle, “You know Griffin can’t be -beat as a drill-master, and he’s a jolly good fellow -besides, and not the one to be always snooping -around to see if a man happens to have a cigarette -or a pack of cards in his pocket. We don’t want a -straight-laced parson like Graham put over Company -C. Why not all vote for Griffin and done with it? -I think it would be fine, anyhow, to carry the -election against Gordon’s candidate. Gordon thinks -he’s a bigger man than Professor Keene himself, and -it would take him down a peg or two to see Griffin -put in place of his shadow, Alec Graham.”</p> - -<p>“’Twould be a good joke on Gordon, wouldn’t it!” -remarked one.</p> - -<p>“Make him open his eyes a little.”</p> - -<p>“And show him that somebody else in the school -besides himself has a little influence,” added Coyle, -cunningly fanning the flame that he saw he had -kindled.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[166]</span></p> - -<p>Before the bell rang, all in the group had agreed -to vote for Griffin. This made thirty so pledged, -besides Griffin himself, Coyle and Barber, and one of -the other captains, thirty-four in all, which would -give Griffin the majority. Coyle and Barber were -outwardly quiet, but inwardly jubilant.</p> - -<p>The next morning, Coyle went to school with a -new suggestion, over which he and Barber chuckled -delightedly before they talked it over with the -Griffin faction.</p> - -<p>After drill that day, a meeting was held to talk -over the election, the officers being anxious to get -an idea of what the boys of Company C meant to -do. Their surprise was unbounded when Coyle -announced that he could speak for thirty-three who -would vote for Graham.</p> - -<p>“For <em>Graham</em>,” repeated Hamlin, incredulously, -“Why, that’s fine. Looks as if Graham would have -a unanimous vote.”</p> - -<p>“No, sir, I’m going to vote for Raleigh,” cried one, -and three or four others shouted, “So am I.”</p> - -<p>But at this Raleigh, who was the only one of the -candidates present, sprang to his feet.</p> - -<p>“I’m awfully obliged to you,” he cried, “but I -came in just on purpose to say that I’d rather -remain lieutenant of Company D; honest, I would. -I fit in there pretty well, I believe, and I’m not sure -that I’d make a good captain; and anyhow, I’ve made<span class="pagenum">[167]</span> -up my mind to have my name withdrawn, and I do -hope that those of you who would have voted for -me, will vote for Graham as I’m going to do. I’d -be just <em>pleased</em> to have a unanimous vote for him.”</p> - -<p>“Three cheers for Lieutenant Raleigh,” shouted -one of his friends, as Raleigh, very red in the face, -dropped into his seat.</p> - -<p>Then Gordon arose. “You see how it is,” he said; -“Raleigh absolutely refuses to be a candidate for -promotion, and the matter seems to rest between -Graham and Griffin; or at least, I supposed it did, -until Coyle made his statement just now. I think -with Raleigh, that it would be fine to have a unanimous -vote for Graham. He would be sure then -that he would have the support of Company C, and -I know how much it means to a captain to feel that -his men are all friendly, and ready to back him up -in whatever he plans for the good of his company.”</p> - -<p>Here Coyle winked at Barber, and scowls and -grins were noticeable among Griffin’s friends. -Hamlin’s quick eyes noted this little by-play, and a -vague feeling of distrust and uncertainty began to -trouble him. He sprang up and said, “You all -know, I am sure, that it is because the school has -taken a higher stand this year, that Professor Keene -decided to let us choose the captain of Company C, -and he’s sure to be satisfied if we elect Graham, for -you all know that we haven’t a finer all-around<span class="pagenum">[168]</span> -fellow in the school. For myself, I’ve only one -objection to him as captain of Company C, and that -is, that I’m awfully afraid that, under his training, -you will be so perfect in drill that you’ll get the red -ribbons away from Company D next June.”</p> - -<p>“You bet we mean to,” shouted a coarse voice -from Company C, as Hamlin sat down, and there -was something in the rude tone that stirred the -anger of more than one of Graham’s friends.</p> - -<p>When the meeting was over, Hamlin said to -Gordon, “Do you suppose Coyle meant what he said, -or is there some trick under it?”</p> - -<p>“Why, how could there be any trick? He said -positively that thirty-three of them were pledged to -vote for Graham, and none of the rest denied it.”</p> - -<p>“I know he did,” said Hamlin doubtfully, “but I -was watching the faces of those fellows while you -were speaking, and I believe there’s something -underhanded going on. I don’t trust Coyle. He’s -tricky.”</p> - -<p>“I know he is,” responded Gordon, “and he’d as -soon lie as tell the truth any time; but if he’d been -lying to-day, some of those fellows would have contradicted -him, I’m sure.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I hope it’s all right, but somehow I don’t -feel sure of it,” was Hamlin’s response.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_169" class="pagenum">[169]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">THE ELECTION.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The next day, Thursday, when Hamlin reached -the school-room, he found there a group of boys -eagerly discussing the election and the sudden and -unaccountable change in the sentiments of Company -C.</p> - -<p>“I can’t see through it,” Raleigh was saying as -Hamlin entered. “Yesterday morning one of the -boys told me that thirty-three of the company were -pledged to vote for Griffin, and in the meeting after -drill you know that Coyle declared that thirty-three -were pledged to vote for Graham. There’s something -snaky about it all, I believe.”</p> - -<p>“So do I,” declared Hamlin. “Coyle’s up to -mischief. You know he hates all of us who have -tried to put down disorder in the class, and I don’t -believe he means to vote for Graham any more than -he means to vote for his royal highness, St. John.”</p> - -<p>“So I say,” cried Reed. “Coyle’s awful slippery, -and he’ll stop at nothing when he’s made up his -mind to put a scheme through.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[170]</span></p> - -<p>Freeman, though not in the battalion, was as -deeply interested as those who were, in the matter -under discussion. As he listened to the talk, he -was idly turning the leaves of a copy of the school -catalogue which was lying on his desk.</p> - -<p>Suddenly he sprang up and held the book open -before Hamlin’s eyes, while he pointed excitedly to -a name in the list of senior pupils. Hamlin looked -at it in a perplexed way for an instant, then he -cried out, “I say, fellows,” but stopping suddenly, he -looked keenly around the room, and then ran and -shut the door into the hall.</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s the matter with Hamlin? Evidently -he’s <em>not</em> all right,” cried one wonderingly, as -Hamlin began:—</p> - -<p>“There’s not one of Coyle’s crowd here, so I’ll tell -you what’s the matter with Hamlin. I believe -we’ve got hold of Coyle’s scheme, thanks to Freeman. -Look here!”</p> - -<p>He held up the catalogue and pointed to one of -the names. It was Thomas Graham Griffin.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you see?” he went on. “Coyle and his -crowd are going to vote for Graham, as he said, but -it’s Graham Griffin, not Alec Graham. He counted -on our not remembering that Griffin’s middle name -is Graham.”</p> - -<p>“That’s it, sure as sneezing!” exclaimed Reed, -“and Coyle said it to keep us from trying to get<span class="pagenum">[171]</span> -votes for Graham. Well, I call that a right down -mean trick.”</p> - -<p>“Here comes Gordon,” cried Freeman, as the door -opened, and at once Gordon was surrounded by the -excited group, all trying to tell him the story at -once. He listened with a troubled face.</p> - -<p>“Oh, it’s too bad,” he said, when the clamor subsided -a little. “If this is so, Graham won’t be -elected at all, and Griffin is no kind of a fellow to -be captain of Company C.”</p> - -<p>But now the boys came trooping in, as it was approaching -nine o’clock, and with a hasty word of -caution to let no hint get to Coyle of their understanding -of the real state of things, Gordon took his -seat.</p> - -<p>It was not easy for him and some others, however, -to give their usual attention to their studies, -and they were glad when recess set them free to -think and speak of all that was in their thoughts.</p> - -<p>Gordon asked permission for a few of the boys to -remain in the school-room during the intermission, -and then the situation was earnestly discussed. The -list of members of Company C was carefully -scanned. Some, they knew, would vote for Griffin; -some, they were sure, would not. But there were -twenty doubtful ones.</p> - -<p>“We must manage to see every one of these -twenty,” Gordon said. “Some of them, probably,<span class="pagenum">[172]</span> -are pledged to Griffin, but some, I’m sure, would -rather have Graham over them.”</p> - -<p>“Unless Coyle has managed somehow to set them -against Graham,” interposed Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“How <em>could</em> he set them against Graham?” said -Gordon.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know how, but he’s capable of lying to -any extent to do it. We all know that,” answered -Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” cried several voices.</p> - -<p>“Why can’t we go to some of the nice fellows in -the company and ask them point-blank about it?” -suggested Clark.</p> - -<p>“Yes, why not? Seems to me that’s the thing -to do,” said Reed.</p> - -<p>“Who’s the best one to do it, then?” questioned -Gordon. “If Coyle has told ’em a lot of stuff to set -’em against Graham, likely he’s said as much about -Hamlin and me, and all the rest of us.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but all the same, some in Company C are -real good fellows, and if they found that Coyle had -been lying to them about Graham, they wouldn’t -stand by him or his candidate,” said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“I should think four or five of us could do the -business. Each one of the four, say, might see five -of the twenty fellows between now and school -time to-morrow and try to get to the bottom of this, -and at the same time try to get as many as possible -of the twenty to vote for Graham,” said Sherman.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[173]</span></p> - -<p>“It’s the best thing we can do,” said Gordon, -“though, if they’ve promised Griffin their votes—” he -added doubtfully.</p> - -<p>“If they’ve promised because of false statements -made to them, they have surely a right to change -their votes,” said Clark.</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” said Raleigh; “but see here, can’t we -keep this thing quiet, so that if we do succeed in -making enough fellows change their votes to elect -Graham, that Coyle and his crowd shall not suspect -it?”</p> - -<p>“It <em>would</em> be fine if we could keep them in the -dark and turn the tables on them to-morrow at the -election,” laughed Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Wouldn’t it, though!” chuckled Reed. “Let’s -try for it, do!”</p> - -<p>“I’ll be only too thankful if we can put Graham -in, anyhow,” said Gordon in a troubled voice. -“Griffin’s influence is bad—a good deal worse than -Professor Keene suspects, or he’d never in the -world allow him to be a candidate.”</p> - -<p>“If that is so, Professor Keene ought to know it,” -said Clark.</p> - -<p>“Nobody in this crowd goes in for telling tales,” -cried Lee, with a look at Clark that pointed the -remark.</p> - -<p>Clark colored and turned away, but instantly -Hamlin’s arm was thrown across his shoulders, and -Hamlin’s clear voice rang out indignantly:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[174]</span></p> - -<p>“For shame, Lee,” he cried. “We all know that -Clark does not deserve that. I’d like to know if -you consider it more honorable to keep still and let -a bad fellow lead a dozen others into evil ways, than -to warn the professor and so save them. For my -part, I’d rather be called a telltale than to feel that -I’d had a hand in any boy’s downfall.”</p> - -<p>Lee’s face darkened, and he muttered something, -under his breath, about “cowards and cheats.”</p> - -<p>It was Gordon who broke the silence that followed.</p> - -<p>“<em>I</em> can bear witness that Clark was anything but -cowardly in that affair last year,” he said; “and since -I’ve become better acquainted with him, I’ve been -convinced that there was some underhanded work -about that pony business. I mean that somebody -else, and not Clark, was the one to blame.”</p> - -<p>“And I know who it was,” added Reed.</p> - -<p>At this, all eyes were turned on him, and half a -dozen voices cried out:—</p> - -<p>“Who, who?”</p> - -<p>For a moment Reed hesitated, then he said, “Henderson -had a hand in it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, who else? Why don’t you out with it?” -questioned Hamlin, eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Bet a cooky ’twas Crawford,” cried Raleigh. “It -was, it was!” he added, as Reed colored, and remained -silent.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[175]</span></p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m sorry,” said Gordon. “It’s too bad to -have anything more come out against Crawford, now -when he’s trying to live down last year’s record.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” said Reed, earnestly, “and I’m sorry -I spoke, but I’ve felt for a long time that it wasn’t -fair to Clark to keep still about that. Say boys, if -I tell you the whole story, will you all promise not -to repeat a word of it to anyone?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, yes,” cried every boy except Clark and Gordon. -The latter, less excitable and more thoughtful -than most of the others, said:—</p> - -<p>“Hold on—I don’t promise till I’ve thought it all -out. If we’ve been wronging Clark, we owe it to him -to let the truth be known.”</p> - -<p>But now Clark spoke. “Boys,” he said, “you have -been wronging me, for I never saw that pony until -Mr. Horton held it up before me; but if all of you -here believe me, I’m perfectly willing to let the -matter rest. Crawford is having a hard enough time -as it is, this year. If he had a hand in this thing, -I’m only too glad to forget it all, if the rest of you -will do the same.”</p> - -<p>“Three cheers for Clark!” cried Reed, but Clark -interposed quickly:—</p> - -<p>“No, no, don’t! We’ll have a crowd in here to -know what it’s all about.”</p> - -<p>Gordon walked over to Clark and held out his -hand as he said:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[176]</span></p> - -<p>“I, for one, have perfect confidence in Clark’s -honor, and I <em>know</em> he’s no coward.”</p> - -<p>Clark’s eyes were not so clear as usual as he -wrung the offered hand, but he knew that from -that hour no shadow would rest on his name in the -minds of those present. No shadow? Ah yes—even -in that the happiest hour of his school life, -the shadow of his father’s sin fell upon him—and -the light faded from his eyes and his lips took their -old sad curve, as he turned to Reed, and said:—</p> - -<p>“Reed, you <em>know</em> that someone put that pony in -my desk without my knowledge?”</p> - -<p>“I do,” said Reed, promptly; “I heard the whole -thing planned.”</p> - -<p>“Well then, for my sake, I beg that you will -never tell anyone anything more about it. And -boys, once more for my sake, don’t let what Reed -has said make any difference in your treatment of -anyone in the school. Will you all promise?”</p> - -<p>Very reluctantly was the promise given, but it -was given.</p> - -<p>After school it was decided that Gordon, Hamlin -and Reed should see that day as many as possible -of the twenty boys referred to, in Company C. Then -the three were to meet at Hamlin’s house to compare -notes and see if there was any chance of Graham’s -election. If not, they must decide whether or not -they should refer the matter to Prof. Keene.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[177]</span></p> - -<p>At ten o’clock that night, Hamlin was walking -impatiently back and forth in the library, listening -for quick footsteps or a whistle outside. He heard -the steps at last, and had the door open before the -whistle had fairly sounded, and in another moment -he had pushed Gordon and Reed into a couple of -easy-chairs, and was saying, eagerly:—</p> - -<p>“Well, what luck did you have? I’m dying to -know, as the girls say.”</p> - -<p>“Prime luck,” cried Reed, while Gordon added, -“We’ll put Graham in, unless I’m much mistaken.”</p> - -<p>“But what did you find out?” questioned Hamlin, -impatiently.</p> - -<p>“I saw six of the best fellows in Company C. -Two of them were going to vote for Graham, anyhow. -The other four were determined <em>not</em> to vote -for him,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Because Coyle had told them that Graham wanted -to get the captaincy in order to work up a new scheme -that they called self-government?” broke in Hamlin, -rapidly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, that was it,” assented Gordon. “If they did -but know it, that self-government scheme is just -about the best thing that I’ve heard of for boys; but -they’ve gotten the idea that it means all work and -no play—no freedom or good times of any sort—and -when Coyle stuffed ’em up with the idea that -we, you and Graham, and I, had got a goody-goody<span class="pagenum">[178]</span> -sort of plan all fixed and ready to spring on them as -soon as Graham was elected, they all kicked, of -course, and agreed to vote for Griffin—those that -didn’t favor Raleigh.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, that’s what I found out, too,” said Hamlin, -“and that cad of a Coyle had actually told them -that he heard Graham and me talking the thing -over, and, true as you live, I hadn’t heard a word of -it until to-day.”</p> - -<p>“Well, Gordon talked some of them over,” put in -Reed.</p> - -<p>“And Reed talked more of them over,” added Gordon. -“He got all the four he interviewed to promise -to vote for Graham, while I only secured three votes.”</p> - -<p>“And I, two. That’s nine out of their thirty-three,” -said Hamlin, exultantly. “So we’ll put Graham -in, won’t we!”</p> - -<p>“Don’t be too sure. There’s many a slip, you -know,” quoted Gordon; “but I hope the election -will go all right now.”</p> - -<p>“And won’t Coyle and Barber be mad,” laughed -Reed. “I want to sit where I can see ’em when -the vote is announced.”</p> - -<p>“If the fellows only keep their word, and don’t let -on that they’ve changed their minds, it will be a big -surprise for Coyle. He’ll be caught in his own trap, -for the boys will vote for Graham as he said, only it -will be the other Graham,” said Gordon, rising.<span class="pagenum">[179]</span> -“I’ve got to study till midnight to make up for the -time I’ve spent electioneering,” he added, “but I -won’t grudge it if we put in our candidate. I -shouldn’t wonder if, before we get through with this -business, Coyle should find himself doubly caught -in his own trap.”</p> - -<p>He would not stop to explain his words, but -hurried off with Reed, leaving Hamlin, also, to “burn -the midnight oil,” lest he be found wanting in the -class next day.</p> - -<p>Lessons suffered the next day, always excepting -St. John’s. He, serenely unmoved by the excitement -about him, rendered his Virgil as smoothly and -poetically as ever, while Hamlin and Gordon listened -ruefully, and even Clark felt less ready than usual -to take his turn. But Mr. Horton, whose keen eyes -and quick ears kept him better informed than the -boys realized, was very lenient that day. He could -not help enjoying such recitations as St. John’s, but -he realized that character and influence were of far -more importance than mere scholarship, and he -knew which boys he had to thank for the change in -section D.</p> - -<p>When school was dismissed that afternoon, there -was a rush for the hall. Only those belonging to -the battalion were allowed to enter there, but so -great was the interest in the election, that very few -of the boys who were not in the battalion went<span class="pagenum">[180]</span> -home. They hung about the corridors and class-rooms, -waiting to know the result.</p> - -<p>In the hall, an intense interest was manifested as -the boys assembled there. Coyle and Barber looked -exultant, but Griffin was nervous and uneasy, and -many of Graham’s friends were nervous and uneasy -too. Even Gordon, Hamlin and Reed, who had -most reason to be confident, were not yet assured of -success. They knew not what unexpected turn -affairs might take at the last moment.</p> - -<p>Slips of paper and pencils were distributed, and -as soon as all were ready, the slips were collected, -and Gordon appointed Hamlin and two other -captains as tellers. The slips were divided into -three piles, and each pile was counted by one captain, -and then passed over to a second to be recounted.</p> - -<p>Nobody talked while the tellers worked, and -when one of them stepped forward and handed -Gordon a slip of paper, many eyes watched Gordon’s -face, seeking to read there the result. But Gordon’s -face told no tales. There was an intense silence as -he rose with the paper in his hand.</p> - -<p>“It gives me pleasure to announce that, by a -majority of ten votes, you have elected Captain Alec -Graham,” he said slowly.</p> - -<p>Coyle sprang to his feet, with flushed face and -angry eyes.</p> - -<p>“It’s no such thing!” he shouted; “I charge -fraud.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[181]</span></p> - -<p>“<em>You</em> are hardly the one to make such a charge,” -said Gordon, quietly; then he added, “Will all those -who voted for Captain Graham, please stand and be -counted?”</p> - -<p>At once forty-one boys rose.</p> - -<p>“Will Lieutenant Gray please call the names of -those standing, and all who choose can count as the -names are called,” said Gordon.</p> - -<p>Not even Coyle could deny that forty-one boys -acknowledged that they had voted for Graham. He -dropped into his seat looking furiously angry; nor -was this feeling lessened when Gordon quietly remarked:—</p> - -<p>“It is singular that you should be so surprised at -this result when, a few days ago, you yourself announced, -right here in this room, that thirty-three of -Company C were pledged to vote for Graham.”</p> - -<p>Coyle cast a vindictive glance at nine of those -thirty-three who had stood to be counted a moment -before, but his reply was muttered too indistinctly -for any but Barber to hear.</p> - -<p>The moment the doors were thrown open, the -room was filled with a crowd of eager boys, and the -cheers that greeted the new captain were as gall and -wormwood to Coyle. He had burst into a flood of -angry blame against the nine whose change of vote -had carried the election so differently from what he -had planned and expected.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[182]</span></p> - -<p>“But, Coyle,” one of these said, as soon as he -could make himself heard, “we promised to vote for -Graham, and we did.”</p> - -<p>“Much you did!” shouted Coyle; “I call it right -down sneaky to go back on your word like that.”</p> - -<p>“And what do you call it to lie about a fellow as -you did about Graham?” asked another. “Hamlin -says there wasn’t a word of truth in it.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Hamlin!” retorted Coyle scornfully. “You -fellows’ll get enough of Hamlin, and of your precious -new captain. <em>Won’t</em> he make you toe the -mark, though—and <em>I hope he will</em>!” he added, -viciously grinding his teeth as he thought how the -tables had been turned on him.</p> - -<p>But how completely his boomerang had rebounded, -he did not know until two months later.</p> - -<p>From the very beginning, Graham won favor with -the majority of his company, but the minority that -had wanted Griffin for captain did all in their power -to make it hard and unpleasant for Graham. In -this they were ably seconded, or, more truly, led, -by Griffin, who was lieutenant of the company. -He tried in every way to set the men against -Graham, and instigated them to all sorts of trying, -vexatious blunders and disobediences, hoping thus -to force Graham to resign. But they did not know -their man. All this fretted and rasped Graham, but -never for a moment inclined him to resign. Instead,<span class="pagenum">[183]</span> -the more the boys rebelled against his authority, the -more determined he became to compel their obedience.</p> - -<p>From Company C, the spirit of insubordination -began to spread until it could no longer be ignored, -and at last Professor Keene called a special meeting -of the officers to consider what should be done.</p> - -<p>During the summer vacation, Gordon had visited -a cousin of his who attended a military school where -the self-government plan had been for some time in -force, with great success. Gordon had been several -times on the point of speaking to Professor Keene -about this method, but the remembrance of Coyle’s -story, and the effect it had had upon Company C, -had restrained him.</p> - -<p>But at this meeting the professor himself introduced -the subject, saying that he had been talking -with the principal of one of the large military -schools where this plan was employed, and had -been so much interested in what this gentleman had -told him, that he was strongly inclined to try the -method in the battalion.</p> - -<p>“One thing is certain,” he said, “and that is, that -unless there is a great improvement in the order -and discipline of the companies, something must be -done speedily, even if that something is the disbanding -of the battalion. To disband it would be a disgrace -to the school, and especially to those in the<span class="pagenum">[184]</span> -battalion, many of whom, I know, have done all in -their power for order and discipline. It is a shame -for a few, comparatively, to work so much harm to -all; but you can see for yourselves that the present -state of things cannot continue.”</p> - -<p>“Professor,” said the captain of Company A, “I’ve -heard something about that self-government plan, -and I’d like to know more. Can’t you tell us all -about it?”</p> - -<p>“I could,” answered the professor, “but I prefer -to let you know about it from someone better informed. -Suppose I send a committee, composed of -officers of the battalion, to the school I have mentioned. -There you can see and hear for yourselves.”</p> - -<p>Here Gordon stepped forward and said a few -words in a tone too low to reach any but the professor’s -ears. The professor nodded, and Gordon returned -to his seat.</p> - -<p>Then the professor dismissed the boys, saying -that he would appoint the committee the next day.</p> - -<p>“I’d like to be on that committee,” said Graham. -“I never heard of that self-government plan until -the day before I was elected. The talk about it -then set me to inquiring about it, and I’ve heard a -good deal of it lately.”</p> - -<p>He spoke clearly and distinctly, so that Coyle, -Griffin, and several of the men of Company C, who -stood near, could not help hearing him. One of the<span class="pagenum">[185]</span> -latter looked at Coyle significantly, and whispered, -“Regular boomerang—that scheme of yours, -Coyle.”</p> - -<p>Coyle scowled, and muttered angrily, “You hush -up, Black, if you know when you’re well off!”</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_186" class="pagenum">[186]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIV.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">NEW METHODS IN THE BATTALION.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Professor Keene had no need to ask for attention -when, the next day, he was ready to announce -the names of the committee. There was great surprise -and some disappointment among the officers -when it was found that only two of them were of -the number, the other two being privates of Company -C. These last were Knox, one of the most -troublesome fellows in the battalion, and Carr, one -of the most faithful and reliable.</p> - -<p>Knox, after the first shock of surprise, was immensely -elated at having been selected. He would -not have been quite so jubilant over it if he had -been present at a conference between the professor, -Gordon and Graham the night before.</p> - -<p>Gordon’s whispered words to the professor had -been a request for a talk with him before the -names of the committee should be announced, a request -which was readily granted. The hour that -the two lads spent at the professor’s house that -evening had given him a clearer understanding<span class="pagenum">[187]</span> -than he had had before of the state of affairs in -Company C, and indeed in the whole battalion. He -saw that these two boys had given very serious -thought to the situation, and he appreciated the -wisdom of Gordon’s suggestion that Knox, who, -though one of the most troublesome in the company, -was really one of the most soldierly boys, and -one who, if his enthusiasm could once be aroused, -might do perhaps more than any other to raise the -standard of feeling and purpose in the battalion, -should be one of the visiting committee. Carr was -appointed partly to make it pleasanter for Knox -than it would have been had the other three been -officers.</p> - -<p>Graham had wanted very much to be on the committee, -as, owing to the trouble he had had with -his company, he was extremely anxious to see for -himself if the new method was one likely to work -well in the high-school battalion; but he saw that it -might not be best for three out of a committee of -four to be taken from Company C. So Hamlin and -one other captain were appointed.</p> - -<p>There was a good deal of grumbling over the proposed -innovation, and many of the boys declared -that they would not stay on if any such scheme was -carried out; but all the same, the four members of -the committee were regarded with not a little envy -and scarcely a boy but wished that he had been<span class="pagenum">[188]</span> -lucky enough to be selected, especially as the fortunate -four were to be excused from recitations and -given perfect marks for the time of their absence. -Coyle and Griffin, even, would have liked to visit -that school, even though they scoffed at the idea of -the plan proposed.</p> - -<p>Before the departure of the committee, Professor -Keene wrote a long letter to his friend, the principal, -explaining to him the reason for the sending of -this committee, and for the selection of Knox as a -member of it, and asking him to give the boys every -possible opportunity to learn all about the working -of the system under consideration. Also he begged -the principal to make the visit of the boys as enjoyable -as might be, and proposed that, a week or two -later, a similar committee from the military school -be sent down to return the visit. “And be sure and -put on that committee some of your most enthusiastic -boys, who will talk the thing up, and make our -boys wild to try it,” the professor had added.</p> - -<p>A royal good time indeed those four boys had -during the two days they spent at the Institute.</p> - -<p>The principal was one who knew how to get hold -of boys and win their affection as well as secure -their obedience. Understanding thoroughly the situation -of affairs at the high school, he told his boys -just enough to interest them, and incline them to -further Professor Keene’s plans. The boys needed<span class="pagenum">[189]</span> -only a hint. In the first place, they were exceedingly -proud of their school and their military discipline, -and, in the second, they were always ready -to respond to any appeal from their principal.</p> - -<p>So they gave our committee of four a cordial, -boyish reception that swept away in a moment -every shadow of stiffness or shyness. They treated -them like comrades and old friends, and took them -into class-room and drill, gave them a dinner, and, -in short, filled every hour of the two days with -something that would please and interest their -guests. Of course, they interlarded all this with -information about their method of government and -its eminently satisfactory results, until even Knox, -who had intended to have a good time on the trip -and laugh the new plan to scorn when he returned -to the Central, became so interested that he found -himself asking eager questions, and admitting to -himself that perhaps it wouldn’t be a bad thing to -try at the Central, after all.</p> - -<p>When, on the last day of the visit, the principal -told the assembled school of Professor Keene’s invitation, -and asked those who would like to accept it, -and visit the Central school, to rise, instantly every -boy in the room was on his feet.</p> - -<p>The principal smiled as he turned to Gordon, and -said, “You have taken the citadel by storm, you see. -I think you will have to select your committee for -yourselves.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[190]</span></p> - -<p>“Very well, sir,” was Gordon’s quick response, -“we shall be satisfied if the committee includes all -the gentlemen that are now standing.”</p> - -<p>A cheer broke from the students at this reply, but -at a sign from the principal every boy took his seat, -and in an instant the most perfect order prevailed.</p> - -<p>But nearly the whole school accompanied the -high-school boys to the station that night, and the -cheers that followed them as the train moved off -could have been heard for a mile around.</p> - -<p>The visitors supposed that was the end of it, but -when they reached the next station, there were -a hundred or more students drawn up in line on -the platform. In perfect order they stood till the -train started on, when again the night resounded -with the Central high-school cry, followed by that -of the Institute. That <em>was</em> the end, for there was -no such short cut to the next station as there -had been to this.</p> - -<p>Was it any wonder that our committee returned -overflowing with enthusiasm for the methods that -turned out such boys as these? Even Knox gave -up all thought of carping criticism and opposition, -and instead, gave his comrades such a glowing -description of the drill he had witnessed and the -splendid results of the self-government plan, as -shown at the Institute, that they looked at him -in amazement and thought there “must be something<span class="pagenum">[191]</span> -in it to convert Knox so completely,” and -they began to look forward with eager curiosity and -interest to the coming of “those Institute chaps.”</p> - -<p>So full of interest and enthusiasm was the committee -of four, that Professor Keene decided to have -them give their report before the entire school. At -first the boys objected strongly to this. They did -not so much mind speaking before all the boys, but -the girls too—that was another thing!</p> - -<p>But after all, it was not so bad, for their interest -soon made them forget the gentler portion of their -audience, and when they had each spoken of the -points that had most impressed them, and told of -the cordial hospitality they had enjoyed—they could -not help speaking of that—the professor said that -the committee would answer any questions that -might occur to any one.</p> - -<p>A storm of eager questions followed, and not all -of them were asked by the boys.</p> - -<p>Many of the pupils saw at once the advantages -of the method proposed, and many were eager to -have it adopted, at least in the battalion, but some -still fought against it, and none more bitterly than -Coyle and Griffin.</p> - -<p>A week or two later, a delegation came from the -Institute, and the four members of the committee -had an opportunity to return the hospitality that -had been shown them; an opportunity which they<span class="pagenum">[192]</span> -were not slow to improve. Either there was an -exceptionally fine class of boys at the Institute, or -else the principal had shown great wisdom in -his selection, for they made friends of everybody, -from Professor Keene down to the roughest and -rudest boys in Company C. Even Coyle and Griffin -were forced to acknowledge that they were “good -fellows enough.”</p> - -<p>But amid all the good times crowded into these -two days, the boys did not forget the purpose of -their coming. They were always ready to talk self-government -to anyone who was interested, but -they did it so wisely that nobody was bored or -offended, while most were so convinced of the -advantages of the system that, to the great satisfaction -of the Institute boys, the battalion voted by a -large majority to try the plan for the remainder -of the year.</p> - -<p>Of course, the entire battalion escorted their -guests to the depot when the visit was ended, and -though they could not be in waiting at a station -further on, they did the best they could. They engaged -a brass-band to meet the committee at the -station nearest the Institute, and give the boys a -welcome home with all the martial music that they -could render.</p> - -<p>It is needless to say that the most friendly relations -continued between the two schools from this<span class="pagenum">[193]</span> -time on, each manifesting a strong interest in the -doings of the other.</p> - -<p>At the Central, after a spirited meeting, an election -was held, resulting in the appointment of -Gordon as judge, with a jury of twelve boys, two -from each company.</p> - -<p>Singularly enough, the first offender brought -before this court was Coyle himself, and his disgust -at this was in no wise lessened by the knowledge -that he himself had actually been the one largely -instrumental in bringing this new court of justice -into being, in the Central.</p> - -<p>Coyle had deteriorated steadily as the weeks -passed. He was a thorn in the flesh to Gordon, -Hamlin and Clark, for his frequent failures in class -brought down the record, in spite of the good work -of the majority. Coyle rejoiced that this was so. -In no other way could he have so effectually -annoyed and tormented these three, whom he hated -more and more as he saw how their influence was -growing in the school. They had even succeeded in -arousing a feeble ambition in Barber, and consequently, -Barber was “no fun at all,” these days. -He insisted on pegging away at his lessons, and -wouldn’t, half the time, help Coyle “make things a -bit lively in class.” In short, Coyle considered -himself decidedly aggrieved because the boys of -section D were working for honors, or for solid<span class="pagenum">[194]</span> -acquirements, this year, instead of wasting their -time in foolish tricks, or idling the hours away -without accomplishing anything. True, there were -still in Company C a few jolly chaps who went in -for good times, but most of the fellows had taken -up with that fol-de-rol about self-government, and -wouldn’t so much as wink or “crack a smile” in -drill, nor answer back, no matter what ridiculous -order an officer might give them. All this was contrary -to Coyle’s ideas, and he came to the conclusion -at last that he would let them all see that he, for -one, had a little spirit and independence, and didn’t -choose to be ordered about by any of them. Wasn’t -he battalion quartermaster, ranking as high as any -of the captains? Long he pondered and planned, -but he could not hit upon any way of asserting his -independence and humiliating his brother officers at -the same time.</p> - -<p>He not only neglected his studies and fell steadily -behind the class, but he attended so poorly to his -duties as quartermaster that Gordon was finally -obliged to speak to him on the subject, and though -he took pains to speak privately, and in the most -courteous way possible, Coyle was very angry, and -answered so insolently that Gordon had hard work -to control his temper.</p> - -<p>A few days after this, the quartermaster’s accounts -were sent to Gordon for approval, and finding<span class="pagenum">[195]</span> -several errors in them, he sent them back for -correction. Without stopping to look over the accounts, -Coyle went directly to Gordon and angrily -accused him of picking flaws in the accounts on -purpose to bring him—Coyle—into disgrace.</p> - -<p>“The accounts are right to a penny, and you know -it,” he shouted furiously. “You’ve been trying to find -something against me all this year, and now you’ve -hatched this up. If there is any error in the books -you’ve changed the figures yourself, that’s all.”</p> - -<p>Gordon turned fairly white in the strong effort he -made to control himself, while Hamlin started to his -feet with an indignant exclamation, and another officer -who was standing by clenched his fists and -took a step forward, looking as if he longed to knock -the impudent fellow down.</p> - -<p>There was a moment of silence, then Gordon -turned to his adjutant, and said very quietly, “You -will consider Mr. Coyle under arrest.”</p> - -<p>“I’d like to see you try to arrest me,” blustered -Coyle, who had lost all control of himself by this -time. As he spoke, Prof. Keene entered the room.</p> - -<p>“What is that, Coyle?” he said, sharply, “please -repeat what you said.”</p> - -<p>Coyle shrank a little before the professor’s stern -eyes, but he repeated still angrily, “I said that I’d -like to see Gordon arrest me. He’s finding fault -with me about—”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[196]</span></p> - -<p>“Silence, sir,” interrupted the professor; “if <em>Major</em> -Gordon has ordered you under arrest, he must have -had good reasons for so doing, and your case will be -tried by court-martial.” And without another word, -the professor left the room.</p> - -<p>So it came about that Coyle was the first offender -tried and sentenced under the new rules. Prof. Keene -was not present during the trial, but a full account of -the proceedings, in shorthand, was submitted to him, -and he fully approved the sentence, which was that -Coyle be degraded to the ranks or permitted to resign, -whichever he chose. He chose the latter, and -did not appear again in the school, which was altogether -the most satisfactory ending to the matter, -since, with such a boy, there was no hope of any -real reform.</p> - -<p>This affair of Coyle’s had a good effect upon the -worst element in the battalion. The boys saw that -the majority were determined to put down disorder -and insubordination, and that Prof. Keene was ready -to second their efforts at reform. They did not want -to be suspended from the battalion or the school, or -told that their permanent absence was desired—and -so they concluded that it would be wisest for them -to obey orders and do their best, instead of worst, in -drill and class-room, and the result was soon seen in -better recitations, and much more orderly class-rooms, -and a steady improvement in the drill.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_197" class="pagenum">[197]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XV.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">WHO IS THE THIEF?</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“You fellows in the battalion have all the good -times. I just wish I’d entered the high school first -year, then I’d have been an officer by this time,” said -Dixon to Reed, one day, with an admiring glance at -the other’s neat uniform and shoulder straps.</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes,” said Reed, “it’s <em>such</em> fun to drill three -times a week, especially when the thermometer -climbs up among the eighties—say about next -May. We generally have a hot wave along that -time.”</p> - -<p>“It’s no fun to carry those heavy muskets,” put -in Freeman. “I joined the cadets first year, but the -guns were too heavy for me, and I had to quit.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, well, you’re a little chap,” and Dixon glanced -half-contemptuously at the slender lad. Freeman’s -cheeks flushed at the look.</p> - -<p>“Well, I never fainted, anyhow,” he said; “and -some fellows a good deal bigger than I fainted more -than once that year.”</p> - -<p>“That was when we had heavy guns. We use -lighter ones, now,” said Reed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[198]</span></p> - -<p>“I’d like to wear that uniform,” went on Dixon; -“I notice how the girls watch you fellows; girls -like a uniform, you know.”</p> - -<p>A shout of laughter greeted this remark, and one -boy said:—</p> - -<p>“Too bad you can’t wear a uniform, Rosy. You -might try to get on the police force next year. Maybe -the girls would watch <em>you</em>, then.”</p> - -<p>Rosy joined in the laugh that greeted this suggestion. -He was never backward about acknowledging -to an interest in the girls, and was forever begging -some boy to introduce him to one or another girl of -his acquaintance. Sometimes his interest in the -feminine portion of the school got him into trouble, -as was the case a little later on this same day.</p> - -<p>When school was dismissed, the boys formed in -line, and were expected to go through the corridors, -and down the stairs in this order.</p> - -<p>But there are always disorderly boys, and noisy -ones too, and very often Professor Keene would be -on the stairs, or in one or other of the corridors, to -take note of any such; and not seldom would he -send a boy back to his class-room, there to wait until -all the others had passed out.</p> - -<p>On this occasion, as the boys were standing in -line in the upper hall, waiting for the signal to -move on, “Rosy” noticed that the door of one of the -girls’ rooms, near which he stood, was ajar. He<span class="pagenum">[199]</span> -glanced quickly to right and left. The professor -was nowhere in sight, so he leaned over and softly -pushed the door open a little farther so that he -could look in. As he did so, a hand dropped heavily -on his shoulder, and the professor’s voice sounded -in his ears.</p> - -<p>“Dixon,” he said, “I see you are anxious to make -the acquaintance of Miss Bent and her class. Step -right in, and I will introduce you”; and with his -hand still on the boy’s shoulder, he threw open the -door, and led him to the platform.</p> - -<p>“Miss Bent,” he said, “this young gentleman was -so very eager to meet you and the young ladies of -your class, that I took the liberty of bringing him -in. Allow me to introduce Mr. Dixon.”</p> - -<p>For once, Dixon was too confused to be equal to -the occasion. His face was as red as his hair, and -the bow with which he acknowledged the introduction -was not a model of ease and grace. No wonder—when -forty girls sat there enjoying his discomfiture, -and laughing at the haste with which he -departed.</p> - -<p>Shouts of “Here comes Rosy!” “Did you have -introductions enough, Rosy?” “Say, which was the -prettiest girl?” “Why didn’t you stay longer?” -greeted him, as he reached the playground, where -most of his own classmates were waiting for him; -but, by this time, he had recovered his self-possession,<span class="pagenum">[200]</span> -and only laughed good-naturedly at the sallies -of the boys.</p> - -<p>When he entered the school-room next morning, -two or three voices called out, “Wrong room, Rosy. -The girls’ room is on the other side.”</p> - -<p>Dixon grinned, as he perched on the top of his -desk, and looked about, saying:—</p> - -<p>“Some of you chaps must have gotten up before -breakfast this morning. Never saw so many here -at half past eight, before.”</p> - -<p>“Written exam. to-day, sonny,” said Barber.</p> - -<p>“Looks as if ’twas house-cleaning, to-day,” replied -Dixon, glancing at the pile of books and papers -Barber was hauling out of his desk.</p> - -<p>“Does look rather that way,” said Barber. Then -he glanced about the room, and added:—</p> - -<p>“Say, if any of you fellows have jagged my notebook, -give it back, will you. It’s a new one, and I -know I left it here last night.”</p> - -<p>“You’re dreaming, Barber,” somebody remarked. -“Nobody’s been near your desk.”</p> - -<p>“But somebody has, though,” persisted Barber; -“an’ ’tisn’t the first time, either. My knife vanished -last week—the third one I’ve lost this quarter.”</p> - -<p>“Better have your mother sew up the holes in -your pockets,” suggested Raleigh.</p> - -<p>“Or you might fasten a string to your knife and -tie it into your pocket,” added another.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[201]</span></p> - -<p>“I tell you, the things are taken out of my desk,” -insisted Barber, “and somebody does it after school. -I like fun as well as anybody, but I’m sick of this -kind, and I think it’s time now for whoever did it -to hand over my notebook.”</p> - -<p>“Is it so, for a fact, Barber?” said Hamlin, walking -over to the other’s seat. “Have you been losing -things out of your desk—honest Injun?”</p> - -<p>“I have so,” replied Barber.</p> - -<p>“And I, too. I left a gold pen in my desk last -week, and the next morning it was gone,” said Lee.</p> - -<p>Upon inquiry, it proved that nearly all the boys -present had lost something from their desks within -a few weeks, and several had lost small change or -car-tickets from the pockets of overcoats left in the -dressing-room during school hours.</p> - -<p>“We must tell Mr. Horton,” said Hamlin. “It -won’t do to have this sort of thing going on.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I say!” broke out Dixon, “you don’t really -believe that anybody’s been thieving here, do you? -I’m always thinking I’ve lost something, and finding -it a week or two later, where I’d poked it away, an’ -forgotten all about it.”</p> - -<p>Barber shook his head.</p> - -<p>“I poked my new notebook into my desk yesterday -just before I went home,” he said, positively. -“I can’t be mistaken about that.”</p> - -<p>“Crawford, you look melancholy. Have you lost -something, too?” called out Dixon.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[202]</span></p> - -<p>“No,” said Crawford, shortly.</p> - -<p>“Not even your temper,” suggested Dixon, who -seemed to be in a tormenting mood that morning.</p> - -<p>Crawford was standing with his hands in his -pockets, and looking moodily out of the window. -He made no reply to Dixon’s last remark.</p> - -<p>“Clark seems to be the only one who has lost -nothing,” remarked Lee, with a significant emphasis -that implied more than the words themselves.</p> - -<p>Clark looked up inquiringly, while Hamlin exclaimed -quickly:—</p> - -<p>“What do you mean by that, Lee?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, nothing,” said Lee, carelessly, “only some -things that happened last term have never been -really cleared up.”</p> - -<p>Before the words were fairly out of Lee’s mouth, -Crawford had wheeled around and caught him by -the shoulder. Lee never flinched, and, for an instant -the two boys stood gazing angrily into each -other’s eyes.</p> - -<p>Hamlin, too, had started towards Lee, but stopped -as he caught sight of Crawford’s white, set face.</p> - -<p>“Well, what are <em>you</em> going to do about it?” demanded -Lee coolly of Crawford.</p> - -<p>“I am going to knock you down if you accuse -Stanley Clark of doing anything mean or underhanded -since he’s been in this school,” said Crawford, -while Clark looked from one to the other in<span class="pagenum">[203]</span> -blank amazement, and the rest of the boys gathered -about the two.</p> - -<p>“So?” said Lee, tauntingly. “Perhaps, then, <em>you</em> -know more than the rest of us about some of these -underhanded performances.”</p> - -<p>The perspiration gathered on Crawford’s forehead -in big drops, and the hand that still clutched Lee’s -shoulder, trembled perceptibly, but he faced the -wondering group, and said slowly, and distinctly:—</p> - -<p>“I <em>do</em> know something about at least one underhanded -performance that concerns Clark. I’ve been -longing to make a clean breast of it for weeks, and -now I’m going to do it. <em>I</em> put that pony in Clark’s -desk last year. The letters S. C. were the initials of—someone -else, and Clark told the truth when he -said that he had never seen the book until Mr. Horton -held it up before him. I hated Clark last year, -and I wanted to do anything I could to injure him. -Clark,” he left Lee and turned towards the other, -“Clark, it isn’t much to say I’m sorry—but that’s -all I can say.”</p> - -<p>Clark instantly held out his hand, and said cordially:—</p> - -<p>“It is all forgotten from this moment, Crawford,” -and then, catching sight of Mr. Horton, who had entered -the room while Crawford was speaking, Clark -added quickly, “It can end right here, can’t it, sir?”</p> - -<p>But Crawford spoke before the teacher could reply.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[204]</span></p> - -<p>“No,” he said, “I want all the class to know the -truth. Then perhaps I can respect myself a little -more.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, Crawford,” said Mr. Horton, “it shall -be as you wish. I think you are right, and one who -can so frankly and manfully acknowledge his fault, -cannot fail to win back the respect of his classmates.”</p> - -<p>Crawford dropped into his seat with a flush of -pleasure at these words, and the boys separated, but -more than one glanced coldly at Lee, and Hamlin -could not refrain from saying, as he passed Lee’s -seat:—</p> - -<p>“I hope you are satisfied now, and will stop hounding -Clark for the future.”</p> - -<p>Lee made no reply, but he thought to himself, -“Clark didn’t cheat that time, it seems, but he’s the -son of a defaulter; and no <em>Southern</em> boy would take -a blow as he did last year.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton was much disturbed when he learned -of the petty stealings that had been going on in the -school. Soon, not from section D alone, but from all -over the school came complaints of losses of greater -or less value. The teachers were very much troubled -over the matter. They could not bear to suspect any -pupil in the school, but no one else had access to -class-rooms and dressing-rooms except the janitor, -and he had been in charge of the building for years,<span class="pagenum">[205]</span> -and nothing of this kind had ever before occurred. -A strict watch was kept over the dressing-rooms -through the day, and no scholars were allowed to -enter the class-rooms until the teachers came in the -morning, or to remain after the departure of the -teachers in the afternoon. In spite of these rules -however, the losses continued.</p> - -<p>One wet day, Raleigh, who lived a long way from -the school, was obliged to walk home because the -car-tickets he had carelessly left in his overcoat pocket, -were missing. The next morning, he appeared -wearing an old shabby overcoat in place of the new -one he had had the day before.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter, Raleigh? Has your new coat -been jagged?” questioned Barber, overtaking him -near the school gate.</p> - -<p>“No,” said Raleigh, “but if you’ll keep mum, I’ll -tell you why I wore this.”</p> - -<p>“Mum’s the word,” said Barber, promptly, and -Raleigh went on:—</p> - -<p>“My car-tickets vanished yesterday. Served me -right, I suppose, for being such a ninny as to leave -them in my overcoat pocket; but it made me mad -to have to foot it all the way home in the wet, so I -planned a little scheme to put a mark on the stealer. -My sister has some shoe blacking that stains like -fury—worse than any ink I ever got hold of—and -I’ve soaked a sponge with it, and put it in my side -pocket, here. See?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[206]</span></p> - -<p>“Well,” said Barber, “how’s that going to mark -the thief?”</p> - -<p>“Why, I’ve put half a dollar—a counterfeit one, -you understand, that somebody shoved off on my -mother—I’ve put it into that same pocket, and if -anybody puts a hand in to haul out that half-dollar, -he’ll get a mark on his fingers that he can’t scrub off -in one day, now I tell you.”</p> - -<p>“Well, that <em>is</em> a scheme,” laughed Barber, “but -you ought to let one fellow in every room into it, -for you and I can’t examine all the paws in the -school, ourselves.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so; I never thought of that,” said Raleigh.</p> - -<p>So the two decided upon one boy in each room -who should be the one to keep an eye on the hands -in his class-room in case that fifty cents should be -missing later in the day.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton having given Raleigh permission for -himself and Barber to remain in the room that -morning, during recess, as soon as the other boys -had gone down to the playground, the amateur detectives -began operations. They borrowed from the -dressing-room a mirror which they hung on the wall -in such a way that it reflected the hall and the door -of the dressing-room to them, while they, having set -open the door of the class-room, were out of sight -behind it.</p> - -<p>Five minutes of the recess had slipped away—ten, -and not a person had passed through the hall.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[207]</span></p> - -<p>“I don’t believe,” began Barber in a whisper, but -at that instant Raleigh gave him a poke, and pointed -to the mirror. Through the hall a boy was passing -quickly, glancing furtively about him as he went.</p> - -<p>While they looked, he slipped noiselessly into the -dressing-room and softly closed the door behind him.</p> - -<p>Raleigh and Barber looked at each other with astonished -faces.</p> - -<p>“I can’t believe it,” whispered Barber, and:—</p> - -<p>“I never would have believed it,” said Raleigh, in -the same breath.</p> - -<p>Then he added:—</p> - -<p>“His going in there is no proof, though it’s against -the rules now.”</p> - -<p>In silence then the two sat, their eyes fixed on -the telltale mirror.</p> - -<p>“There goes the bell,” whispered Barber. “He’s -probably going to wait there and drop in at the end -of the line. We must get out of this corner before -the boys come up.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s go out and wait near the stairs; then we can -see him when he comes out, without his suspecting.”</p> - -<p>This they did, and without seeming to look, saw -Dixon suddenly and silently fling open the door of -the dressing-room as the last boy passed by, and -follow quickly to the class-room.</p> - -<p>Then Raleigh hurried into the dressing-room, -slipping an old glove on to his right hand as he<span class="pagenum">[208]</span> -went. He rejoined Barber in a moment, saying:—</p> - -<p>“It’s gone.”</p> - -<p>“The half-dollar?” questioned Barber.</p> - -<p>Raleigh nodded, and the two went into the class-room. -Each cast a quick glance at Dixon as they -passed his seat, and both saw that he was rubbing -his right hand with his handkerchief.</p> - -<p>As they took their seats, Barber glanced at -Raleigh with a quick gesture towards St. John. He, -too, was rubbing his handkerchief over his right -hand, and eyeing with a disgusted expression some -black stains that showed conspicuously on his slender -white fingers.</p> - -<p>Presently, Raleigh went to the desk, and told Mr. -Horton, in a tone too low for any other ears, the -result of their watch.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton was greatly disturbed.</p> - -<p>“There <em>must</em> be some mistake,” he said. “I cannot -believe it of either of them.”</p> - -<p>Then placing Gordon in charge of the room, he -went to confer with Professor Keene. The result -was that when the class was dismissed, St. John, -Dixon, Raleigh and Barber were told to remain.</p> - -<p>Then Mr. Horton took St. John into the dressing-room -alone. The boy followed him with evident -bewilderment, and when the teacher said:—</p> - -<p>“St. John, will you tell me how you got those -stains on your hand?” he looked as if he thought<span class="pagenum">[209]</span> -himself the victim of some practical joke, and drawing -himself up, answered haughtily and coldly, -“That is my affair, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Ordinarily, it would be your affair, St. John,” -answered Mr. Horton patiently, “but, unfortunately, -to-day I must insist upon an answer to my question.”</p> - -<p>The boy bit his lip and hesitated, evidently half -inclined to refuse to answer, but there was something -in Mr. Horton’s face that puzzled and rather -awed him, and after a moment’s silence he said -sulkily:—</p> - -<p>“The janitor did not fill my inkstand, and I had -to go down to that beastly old cellar and fill it myself, -and I got the ink on my hand. I never went -to a school before where I had to do servant’s -work,” he added with his haughtiest air.</p> - -<p>“Did anyone see you filling your inkstand?” -asked the teacher.</p> - -<p>“The janitor was muddling around there,” answered -the boy. “I told him it was his business to -do it for me, and he had the impudence to tell me -that it was as much my business as his.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton half smiled, understanding that St. -John’s overbearing manner would not be likely to -incline the somewhat crusty old janitor to save him -any trouble; but remembering the serious question -at issue, his face grew grave again.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[210]</span></p> - -<p>“Have you been in the dressing-room to-day?” -he asked.</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” said the boy.</p> - -<p>“Very well; you may go,” and, as St. John went -down the stairs, Mr. Horton returned to the school-room, -where he found the three boys sitting in a -sort of embarrassed silence.</p> - -<p>“Dixon,” he said at once, “I see you have stained -your hand. How did you do it?”</p> - -<p>Dixon glanced at his fingers, and the color suddenly -flamed in his freckled cheeks.</p> - -<p>“I—I—hit it against something black,” he stammered.</p> - -<p>“Evidently,” said Mr. Horton. “Dixon, were -you in the dressing-room at recess?”</p> - -<p>The boy hesitated, glanced half appealingly at the -teacher, and then at the boys.</p> - -<p>“Would you rather see me alone?” asked Mr. -Horton, and as the boy nodded, he signed to Raleigh -and Barber to leave the room. Then he said:—</p> - -<p>“Dixon, it will be best for you to tell me the -whole truth frankly; best for your own sake, I -mean.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I’m not thinking about myself, you know,” -said Dixon. “It’s—” then he stopped.</p> - -<p>“Well?” said Mr. Horton, inquiringly.</p> - -<p>“Oh, dear!” said Dixon desperately, “I <em>don’t</em> know -what to do,” and putting his head down on his desk, -he actually sobbed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[211]</span></p> - -<p>The teacher’s hand was laid kindly on the rough, -red hair, as he said:—</p> - -<p>“A fault confessed is half forgiven, Dixon, and -though this is more than a fault, for it is a most -grave and serious matter, yet a frank and full -acknowledgment will incline us to deal as leniently -as possible with you.”</p> - -<p>Dixon raised his head. There was a bewildered -expression in his blue eyes which changed to one of -indignant astonishment as the meaning of his -teacher’s words dawned upon him. He started up, -dashing the tears from his freckled cheeks as he exclaimed:—</p> - -<p>“You don’t mean that you suspect <em>me</em> of stealing!”</p> - -<p>“Well, really,” said Mr. Horton, actually moving -back a step before the indignant flash of those blue -eyes. “Well, really, I begin to think I do not, -though I must confess that I did a few moments -ago. Tell me all about it, Dixon. Evidently you -know something about the matter.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; I wish I didn’t,” and again the freckled -face was hidden by the stained fingers. After a -moment’s silence, he went on:—</p> - -<p>“Mr. Horton, if I can promise you <em>sure</em> that -nothing else will be taken, won’t that do?” he asked -imploringly.</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid that won’t do, Dixon. I see that you<span class="pagenum">[212]</span> -are trying to shield the guilty person, but it is not -fair to those who have been robbed, nor do I believe -that it would be best for the one who deserves punishment -to go scot free. It would encourage him to -repeat the crime. Yes,” as Dixon started at the -word, “it <em>is</em> a crime, and one that will put the guilty -person behind the prison bars, if continued.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, Mr. Horton, you won’t put him in prison, -will you? Promise me you won’t, or I’ll <em>never</em> tell. -I’ll go to prison for it myself first,” he cried excitedly.</p> - -<p>“Easy, easy, my boy,” and Mr. Horton laid his -hand on the boy’s shoulder. “If you do not tell -what you know, we shall surely find out for ourselves -who is the guilty person, and then it may be -too late for any word of yours to be of any benefit to -him. Be persuaded, Dixon, and tell me all you -know about the matter, now.”</p> - -<p>“Well—I will,” said the boy, after a moment’s -thought; “only, Mr. Horton, I shall depend on you -to save him from prison, if you anyway can. You -see he’s a little fellow, only thirteen, and it will -break his mother’s heart if he’s sent to prison. His -mother is an old friend of my mother’s, and when I -came in to the city to go to school, last year, I went -to her house to board. She’s a widow, and keeps a -boarding-house ’way up town. Well, sir, the very -day after I went there, I was taken sick with typhoid<span class="pagenum">[213]</span> -fever, and my mother was sick at home, so -she couldn’t come to me, and Mrs. Gray took care of -me just as if I had been her own boy. She sat up -nights with me, and oh, I can’t tell you how good -she was through all those weeks. The doctor told -mother afterwards that I owed my life to Mrs. -Gray’s care and nursing, so you see, I can’t help -thinking a lot of her, and I’ve tried my best to keep -Willie straight; but lately, he’s got to going with -one or two bad fellows in the school, and I think, -Mr. Horton, that they make a cat’s-paw of him, and -make him do things that he’d never think of doing -himself, for he <em>isn’t</em> a bad boy really—Willie isn’t—and -he’s all his mother has left.”</p> - -<p>Again the rough red head went down on the desk, -and the boy’s low sobs proved the depth of his sympathy -for the widowed mother.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton’s own eyes were dim as he looked -down at the lad.</p> - -<p>“You haven’t told me how you came to be in the -dressing-room at recess,” he said gently, after a little -silence.</p> - -<p>“Why, I hunted all over the playground for -Willie, and when I found he wasn’t there, I felt -somehow that I <em>must</em> find him, and be sure he -wasn’t doing anything wrong. You see, I only -found out about this a few days ago, and he had -promised me solemnly that he’d never take another<span class="pagenum">[214]</span> -thing that did not belong to him. You know there’s -another dressing-room adjoining ours, and the windows -of the two are only a foot apart. As I came -through the hall, I saw Willie slip into that other -room, and I got to the door just in time to see him -climb up on the window sill. I didn’t dare speak, -for fear he’d fall, but I waited till he’d climbed -from one window to the other, and slipped down -into our dressing-room, and then went in, and shut -the door after me. Willie had his hand in the -pocket of an old overcoat, one I never saw before. -I snatched his hand as he drew it out, and it was -all wet with what looked like ink, and that’s the -way mine got daubed.”</p> - -<p>“And Willie kept the half-dollar he found in the -overcoat?” said Mr. Horton.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no, I made him give it up, and I put it back -in the pocket.”</p> - -<p>“And then?” questioned the teacher.</p> - -<p>“Then he cried, and said that those fellows had -threatened to tell Professor Keene that he was a -thief, unless he’d keep on taking things. He hasn’t -kept a single thing himself, Mr. Horton. They lent -him some money a while ago, and because he -couldn’t pay it back, they kept at him, telling him -that he could easily pick up loose change enough in -the dressing-rooms to pay the debt, and after he had -taken one piece of money, then you see, they held -that over him to make him keep on.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[215]</span></p> - -<p>“And these boys; who are they?” said Mr. Horton -sternly.</p> - -<p>Again Dixon hesitated, but in his heart he knew -that such boys were too dangerous to be suffered to -remain in the school to lead weak boys astray, and -so he gave the names.</p> - -<p>When at last Raleigh and Barber were called in, -they were glad enough to learn that their classmate -was not the thief; and Dixon, his mind relieved by -having passed the responsibility over to Mr. Horton, -could even laugh at his stained fingers, while he appreciated -Raleigh’s ingenious plan.</p> - -<p>“Funny what became of that coin, though,” the -latter said, as he took his old coat from the nail -where it hung.</p> - -<p>“I rather think there’s a hole in this pocket, -Raleigh,” said Mr. Horton, feeling at the bottom of -the coat “See here!” and he held up the side -where the coin could be plainly felt between the -outside and the lining.</p> - -<p>Dixon told the two boys enough of Willie Gray’s -story to explain his own connection with the affair, -and awaken their sympathy for the widowed -mother.</p> - -<p>There were no more losses that year, in the -Central school.</p> - -<p>Willie Gray’s interview with Professor Keene, -and his suspension from the school for a month -proved a lesson that he did not care to have repeated,<span class="pagenum">[216]</span> -but his severest punishment was in seeing -his mother’s bitter shame and sorrow when she heard -the story. He wore very shabby clothes the rest -of that year, and so did his mother, but by the end -of the school year every scholar’s loss had been -made good, and from that time on no more scrupulously -honest boy than Willie Gray could have been -found in all that city.</p> - -<p>As to Dixon, Raleigh and Barber conceived a new -respect and regard for him after this affair, and even -his openly expressed liking and admiration for “the -girls,” awakened amusement instead of scorn.</p> - -<p>“For you see, boys,” Dixon said one day confidentially -to the two, “You see, boys, I’ve got a lot of -sisters at home—half a dozen of ’em—and a right -pretty lot they are too. You wouldn’t think they -were any relation to a freckled carrot-head like me. -But, bless you—they have never found out how -homely I am, and, as I’m the only brother they’ve -got, I’ve been kind of spoiled, I reckon. Anyhow, -you wouldn’t believe how I miss those girls, and I -like <em>all</em> girls for their sakes, don’t you see?”</p> - -<p>St. John never found out that a suspicion had -rested upon him. Indeed, it is doubtful if he knew -that there had been any losses, since, as it happened, -nothing had been taken from his desk; and -Hamlin never again saw Dixon hanging about a -saloon, since he no longer had to look for Willie -Gray in such places.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_217" class="pagenum">[217]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVI.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">A SNOWBALL FIGHT.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Just after New-Year came a very heavy snowstorm. -It lasted two days, and when the boys went -to school on the third morning, they had to wade -through drifts in some places as high as their -shoulders. Even on a level the snow was up to the -knees of the smaller boys.</p> - -<p>It was a huge frolic to most of them, and the -best part of it was when they found that, owing to -some trouble with the furnace, there would be no -school in the boys’ department that day.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah for a holiday!” shouted half a dozen -voices, as the boys tumbled pellmell down the stairs, -not considering it necessary, under the circumstances, -to keep in line as usual.</p> - -<p>“Won’t the girls envy us, though,” chuckled -Dixon, lifting his cap with great politeness as he saw -two or three girls looking out of one of their windows. -“I’ve half a mind to go and smash <em>their</em> -furnace, so they can get out too.”</p> - -<p>“I would,” said Hamlin, dryly. He had long since -arrived at the conclusion that “Rosy” had “plenty<span class="pagenum">[218]</span> -of good points,” but even yet Dixon’s frequent -references to “the girls” were apt to vex him, and -he had never been willing to introduce his red-haired -schoolmate to his cousin Grace or any other of his -girl friends.</p> - -<p>“Say, fellows, why can’t we build a fort and have -a snowball fight instead of going home,” cried Reed. -“The snow’s in prime condition. Just see what balls -it makes,” he added, catching up a handful of snow -and hastily fashioning it into a ball which he flung -at Hamlin, who dodged just in time to avoid it, and -it landed full in Dixon’s mouth, as he opened it to -speak. He spluttered and gasped for a moment, but -as soon as he could get his breath, he dashed at -Reed and rolled him in the snow, rubbing a handful -of it into his mouth.</p> - -<p>“Ouch! ouch!” yelled Reed; “help, help, boys!” -whereupon two or three ran to his rescue, and the -next moment, Dixon was treated to a dose of his -own medicine. He took it very good-naturedly; he -always did take everything good-naturedly. Even -the boys that disliked him could not deny that.</p> - -<p>“Say we <em>do</em> have a snowball fight. We may not -have another chance this year,” said Sherman.</p> - -<p>“Professor would order us off. The girls couldn’t -recite if we were yelling outside here,” suggested -Graham.</p> - -<p>“That’s a fact! I forgot about the girls,” murmured -Rosy, at which somebody remarked:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[219]</span></p> - -<p>“First time in your life you ever forgot ’em, ain’t -it, Rosy?” and there was a general laugh at Dixon’s -expense.</p> - -<p>“Well, let’s go out on the vacant lots, then. No -hospital or old ladies’ home around there, is there?” -said Barber.</p> - -<p>“Never heard of any. Come on, then,” cried -Hamlin, leading the way. Presently he turned, and -inquired:—</p> - -<p>“What’ll we do for shovels and brooms? We -can’t build a fort without ’em.”</p> - -<p>“So we can’t,” said Reed, ruefully. “I forgot all -about them.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s borrow some,” suggested Graham.</p> - -<p>“Where?” said Lee, with the touch of scorn in -his voice that always irritated the boys.</p> - -<p>“Right here on this block,” retorted Graham -promptly.</p> - -<p>“As if the people in these houses would lend us -their snow shovels,” said Lee.</p> - -<p>“If I get the shovels, will you agree to pay your -share of the price?” asked Graham.</p> - -<p>“Of course; don’t I always pay my share of anything -that’s going,” said Lee, haughtily.</p> - -<p>“All right,” said Graham as, with a grin at -Hamlin, he ran up the steps of the nearest house -and rang the bell.</p> - -<p>“Want your walk cleared?” he inquired of the -servant girl who opened the door.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[220]</span></p> - -<p>“How much do you charge?” said the girl; “And -where’s your shovel?”</p> - -<p>“Where’s yours? Have you one?” replied -Graham.</p> - -<p>“Ye—yes,” said the girl, doubtfully.</p> - -<p>“Well, tell your mistress that we’ll clear the steps -and walk in fine style, if she’ll lend us her shovel -for an hour afterward.”</p> - -<p>“Get along with ye,” said the girl, “we’d never -set eyes on the shovel again!”</p> - -<p>At this, the crowd of boys on the sidewalk set up -a shout of laughter, but Graham persisted:—</p> - -<p>“Ask the lady to come to the door a minute, -please do! We’ll clear the walk; honor bright, we -will.”</p> - -<p>As Graham spoke, the mistress appeared in the -hall, and inquired of the girl what the boys wanted. -Graham’s face lighted up as he caught sight of her, -and he stepped forward, with his cap in his hand, -saying:—</p> - -<p>“I didn’t know that you lived here, Mrs. Hayes, -but we boys want some shovels and brooms to make -a snow fort on the vacant lots over yonder. We’ll -clear off all the steps on this block, and the sidewalk -too, if we can have the use of half a dozen shovels -for an hour, to build our fort.”</p> - -<p>“You can have ours, and welcome,” said Mrs. -Hayes, “and I’ll give you a note to the other people<span class="pagenum">[221]</span> -on the block. Of course you won’t forget to bring -back the shovels,” she added smiling. “You see I -have several brothers, and have known <em>them</em> to forget -such things, now and then.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll return them, sure, before we begin our -snowball fight,” Graham answered; and soon, thanks -to Mrs. Hayes’ note, half a dozen shovels had been -handed out to the boys, who took turns at using -them, and so quickly had the walks beautifully -cleaned. Lee did his share under protest, but he did -it, and some of the boys would have done twice as -much themselves for the fun of seeing the Southern -lad obliged to handle the shovel.</p> - -<p>Then the boys trooped over to the vacant lots, and -set to work to build their fort. The many hands -made short work of it, even though the fort they -fashioned was of goodly dimensions; and as soon as -it was finished, Graham and another lad carried back -the borrowed shovels. Then the two came racing -back, to take part in the choice of leaders for the -two parties.</p> - -<p>A dozen names were proposed by different boys, -but finally, Hamlin and Griffin were selected. They -at once proceeded to choose their followers by first -one, and then another, calling out a name.</p> - -<p>In Hamlin’s party were Clark, Gordon, Freeman, -Graham, Raleigh, Sherman and Reed, while Griffin’s -included his own friends, with Lee, Dixon, and a few<span class="pagenum">[222]</span> -others. In all, there were sixty boys. The leaders -tossed up a penny for choice of position, and it fell -to Griffin and his party to hold the fort.</p> - -<p>Then he and his men were allowed ten minutes to -make and carry into the fort as many snowballs as -they could, for ammunition. Meantime, Hamlin’s -party was similarly employed, while he was discussing -with one or two of them the best plan of attack. -It was decided to first make a rush all together, and -try to scale the walls all along the line. This was -done, but the attempt was a failure. The walls were -too high to be readily scaled, and such a storm of -snowballs was showered down upon the attacking -party, that Hamlin was forced to call off his men, -amid exultant shouts from those in the fort.</p> - -<p>Then Hamlin divided his men into two parties, -ordering one, under Clark’s leadership, to attack one -end of the fort, while he himself led the other half -against the other end, thus obliging Griffin to divide -his force to repel the attack.</p> - -<p>The two parties advanced all together against the -fort until they were quite near, then suddenly dividing, -half turned to the left and the other half to -the right. Griffin hastily sent half of his men to -repel Clark’s party, while he, with the rest, beat -back Hamlin and his followers. Again and again -the boys outside would succeed in climbing almost -to the top of the wall of snow, only to be met by a<span class="pagenum">[223]</span> -shower of balls that filled eyes, ears and mouths, -while strong hands pushed and shoved them down -the slippery walls, shouts and yells of derision following -them as they descended.</p> - -<p>At last, Hamlin again called off his men to rest -and gather a new stock of ammunition.</p> - -<p>“’Tisn’t much use, though, for us to snowball -them,” grumbled Reed, trying to get some of the -snow out of his neck. “They can throw right into -our faces when we’re climbing their walls, but we -can’t hang on to those slippery snow banks, and -throw up into their faces. They can dodge and we -can’t.”</p> - -<p>“Dodge! I should say we couldn’t,” echoed Freeman. -“Much as ever I could hang on at all while -Lee was dashing snow into my face for all he was -worth.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll never take that fort by direct attack,” said -Hamlin. “We’ve got to use stratagem.”</p> - -<p>“Any sort of gem you say, so long as it’s a taking -sort,” responded Reed.</p> - -<p>“We might tunnel under, and so let them down -unexpectedly,” suggested Clark.</p> - -<p>“But they’d see us doing it,” objected Graham.</p> - -<p>“Mustn’t let them,” answered Clark.</p> - -<p>“What’s your idea, Clark? How would you do -it?” asked Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“I’d make another attack at two points, so as to<span class="pagenum">[224]</span> -divide their force, and make such a desperate fight -that Griffin would need every man he has, at those -two points. Then, while the fight was going on, one -fellow might drop down at the bottom of the fort, -and keeping below those who were climbing the -walls, so that those above in the fort couldn’t see -him, he might dig under the bottom of the wall. It -wouldn’t take many minutes for him to dig out a -hole that he could crawl into. Then he could loosen -the snow above him, so that a little extra stamping -or pushing would break the wall through and let -some of those fellows down where we could capture -them. And then we could pile up through the -opening, and so into the fort.”</p> - -<p>“What do you say, Gordon? Think we could do -it?” cried Hamlin eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Looks as if we might, if we can find the right -chap for that burrowing trick.”</p> - -<p>“If we only had a big mole here, now,” remarked -Reed.</p> - -<p>“I’ll be the mole, if nobody else cares to try it,” -said Clark.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe that plan will hold water,” remarked -one boy, scornfully.</p> - -<p>“It’s snow we want it to hold, not water,” was -Reed’s quick response.</p> - -<p>“We’ll give it a trial anyway,” said Hamlin. -“Now then—are you all ready? Well then, we’ll -go for those walls again. Forward, march!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[225]</span></p> - -<p>On went the attacking party at a full speed, while -those in the fort braced themselves to repel the -charge. Fast and furious flew the balls, and in the -cloud of snow, and amid the shouting, squirming, -struggling crowd trying to climb the walls, it was -easy for Clark to drop unnoticed at the bottom, -where he had taken care to kick out an opening as -he approached the wall. Now, using his hands in -decidedly mole-like fashion, he began to burrow -under, throwing the snow out behind him as he dug.</p> - -<p>Meantime, above and around him, the struggle -went on, and so many hard knocks were given and -received, that some of the boys began to get angry. -The fun was changing to earnest.</p> - -<p>Finally, Hamlin again called off his men, and as -they gathered about him, out of earshot of those in -the fort, he said to Clark:—</p> - -<p>“Couldn’t carry out your plan—eh, Clark? I -was afraid it wouldn’t work.”</p> - -<p>“But it did work,” said Clark, quietly.</p> - -<p>“Do you mean that you succeeded in undermining -the wall?” cried Hamlin, eagerly.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Clark, “and it would only take a little -more digging to make it mighty unsafe for those -fellows to dance any more jigs up there.”</p> - -<p>“But I don’t see any opening,” said Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“No—I kicked some snow into the opening so -they wouldn’t discover it if any of ’em should come -outside the fort.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[226]</span></p> - -<p>“Good for you, Clark,” cried Reed joyfully. “I -tell you what, Hamlin, I began to think I was getting -tired of plain fighting up there. Some of those -chaps don’t fight fair. They whack altogether too -hard about a fellow’s head.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so,” assented several.</p> - -<p>“Yes, I think myself they pommeled us too -severely this last time,” said Hamlin; “but if Clark’s -plan is a success, we’ll snake ’em out of their snug -quarters before long. How do you think we’d better -go at it, Clark?”</p> - -<p>“I should think it would be best to make an attack -at each end as we did last time, and while you -keep them busy so, I’ll go through my tunnel again -and pull down a little more snow under the middle. -Then I’ll back out and give a signal to let you know -I’m ready, and then both parties might drop down -and make a dash for the walls in the middle. Of -course Griffin and his men will rush there, and the -sudden rush and weight will break through what’s -left of the wall and down they’ll tumble, and up -we’ll scramble and swarm over the walls before -they can pick themselves up.”</p> - -<p>“Tiptop plan,” said Gordon, and Hamlin added:—</p> - -<p>“Yes, and we’ll carry it out, too. Now, boys, remember—pitch -in and carry the walls if you can, -but keep your ears open for a whistle from Clark, -and when you hear it, follow me to the center.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[227]</span></p> - -<p>Derisive hoots and yells from Griffin and his men -greeted the approach of Hamlin and his party, but -the latter went steadily on in silence. Not a shout -or a cry answered the taunts of the defenders, and -again the struggle was renewed, the boys scrambling -up the walls, fighting their way inch by inch, only -to be thrust and pushed back as they neared the top. -Two did succeed in scrambling over the wall, but a -dozen strong arms seized them, and promptly rolled -them over the slippery barrier to the ground below.</p> - -<p>In the midst of the struggle, a clear whistle -sounded, and at the signal, Hamlin’s voice rang out -calling his followers to retreat. They slipped down -the walls and joined their leader, but instead of retreating -as before, they instantly made a dash for -the walls in the center.</p> - -<p>Griffin shouted to his men, and all but two rushed -to the threatened spot to repel the enemy. As they -did so, the walls gave way, and more than half of -the defenders rolled through the breach to the -ground, while yells and shouts of a different sort -announced their surprise and disgust at their unexpected -descent.</p> - -<p>The few who had not gone down in the slump, -fought bravely, but they were quickly overpowered -by numbers, as over the walls scrambled Hamlin -and his men. It was their turn now to shout exultantly, -as they seized and made prisoner every boy<span class="pagenum">[228]</span> -that they could catch. Griffin’s men looked rueful -enough as they found themselves so cleverly trapped, -and some were not only rueful, but bitterly angry.</p> - -<p>“Where’s Griffin,” cried Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“There he is. Catch him—catch him!” shouted -Lee, pointing to a white figure just crawling out -from under the mass of fallen snow.</p> - -<p>“Surrender! Surrender!” shouted a score of voices, -as the boys surrounded Griffin.</p> - -<p>“Oh, well, of course we must surrender, since -you’ve got possession of the fort; but you had to -take it by trickery—not in fair fight,” Griffin said, -sullenly.</p> - -<p>“All’s fair in love and war,” quoted Graham, -gaily. “It was a perfectly fair stratagem, and certainly -a successful one, I think.”</p> - -<p>“Who cares what <em>you</em> think! Take that for a last -shot!” and Griffin, losing all control of his hot temper -at these words from Graham, whom he had -never forgiven for winning the election, suddenly -raised his arm and flung a snowball he was holding -in his hand—straight at Graham’s face.</p> - -<p>Clark was standing near Griffin, and as his quick -eye saw the look on the latter’s face and the sudden -movement, he sprang forward, and struck up Griffin’s -arm, and the ball, instead of knocking Graham over, -went crashing through a big window in a fine house -across the street.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[229]</span></p> - -<p>A change came over every face, as the rattle of -the falling glass was heard.</p> - -<p>“You’re in for it, now, Grif,” said one.</p> - -<p>“’Twasn’t my fault. ’Twas Clark’s. What did you -knock my arm up for?” he added, turning angrily on -Clark, and looking more than half inclined to strike -him.</p> - -<p>Clark did not flinch, as he answered gravely:—</p> - -<p>“That ball might have hurt Graham pretty badly, -Griffin.”</p> - -<p>“Hurt him! I should say so!” cried Hamlin. “A -ball that would break a window at this distance -would have killed a fellow, sure. You must have -thrown it with tremendous force, Griffin.”</p> - -<p>Griffin dropped his eyes and said, sulkily:—</p> - -<p>“Well, what’s to be done about it? I’ve no money -to pay for plate-glass windows, and anyway, I think -Clark’s the one to foot the bill—unless we bluff it -out. Here comes the man, now.”</p> - -<p>The gentleman who was coming quickly towards -the group might have been excused for feeling that -the limit of patience was reached in his case, since -this was the third time that season that his windows -had been broken by boys playing on the vacant lots. -He was plainly very angry, as he began abruptly:—</p> - -<p>“Which of you broke my window?”</p> - -<p>For a second, nobody answered, and the man was -about to express his opinion pretty freely, when -Clark stepped forward.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[230]</span></p> - -<p>“I am partly responsible for it, sir,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Oh, you are—are you? Well, are you going to -pay for it?”</p> - -<p>“It shall certainly be paid for,” Clark replied, “but -I can’t pay for it to-day.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, I understand that,” said the man. “You -can’t pay it to-day, and if I let you off, you <em>never</em> will -pay it. I’ll see your father about it. Where is he?”</p> - -<p>Clark’s face grew suddenly white, and his clear -eyes fell, while many of those rough boys felt a -most unusual thrill of pity and sympathy for him. -But he recovered himself quickly, and answered in -a low voice:—</p> - -<p>“I have no father to pay my bills, sir, but if you -will not take my word for it, I will give you a note -to the firm I work for, and they will see that you -are paid.”</p> - -<p>By this time the man’s anger had begun to cool -off a little. He was a shrewd reader of faces, and -Clark’s straightforward glance and manly air began -to make an impression on him.</p> - -<p>“What’s your name?” he asked gruffly.</p> - -<p>“Stanley Clark.”</p> - -<p>“Well, Mr. Stanley Clark, I suppose I’m a fool, -but I’m going to trust you. How long do you -expect me to wait for my money?”</p> - -<p>“How much will the glass cost?” inquired Clark.</p> - -<p>“Five dollars; the glass and the putting in. It’s -a big window, you see.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[231]</span></p> - -<p>“Yes, I see,” said Clark. “Well, sir, you shall -have the money before the first of February. Will -that do?”</p> - -<p>“That will do,” and without another word the -man turned away, saying to himself, “I may be -mistaken, but I believe that young chap is honest. -Anyhow, if he doesn’t keep his word, I’ll see the -principal of the high school. They were high school -boys, and I could pick that one out among a thousand.”</p> - -<p>As the man departed, all eyes were turned on -Griffin, and Hamlin voiced the feeling of many -when he said:—</p> - -<p>“I call that right down mean and sneaky, Griffin. -It is really you who ought to pay that bill.”</p> - -<p>“Here’s the man coming back again,” said Reed. -And sure enough, the man was returning, looking -at something he held in his hand, as he came.</p> - -<p>Facing Clark, he demanded:—</p> - -<p>“Did you throw that snowball?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir,” said Clark, “but if it hadn’t been for -me, it would probably not have gone through your -window.”</p> - -<p>“Ah!” said the man, “I’m glad <em>you</em> didn’t throw -it, and if it was aimed at any boy’s head, that boy owes -you a debt of thanks, at least. See here; this was -inside the ball. I was so mad before that I forgot -to show it to you,” and he held out a rough, jagged<span class="pagenum">[232]</span> -piece of brick. “That would have knocked the -breath out of a boy, if it had hit him full in the -face”; and leaving the brick in Clark’s hand, the -man again departed.</p> - -<p>There was more than scorn and contempt now in -the eyes that turned towards Griffin, who, for the -life of him, could not help cowering under the fire of -indignant glances and the words that followed.</p> - -<p>“You’d better blame Clark for knocking up your -arm,” said Hamlin, and the man crossing the street -smiled grimly as the clear, ringing voice reached -even his ears. “You might have slept behind -prison bars to-night, if it had not been for Clark’s -quick eye and hand.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t have believed there was a fellow in -the Central mean enough to do a thing like that,” -added Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Well, see here now, fellows.” It was Graham -who said this. “Are we going to let Clark pay that -debt for Griffin? I can’t, for one,” and the look he -gave Clark said what his tongue could not say -before all those listening ears.</p> - -<p>“No! No!” shouted a score of voices.</p> - -<p>“I <em>can’t</em> pay it, ’n that’s all there is about it,” -said Griffin, his hands in his pockets and his eyes on -the ground.</p> - -<p>There was a moment of silence. Many of the -boys knew that Griffin belonged to a family that had -no money to spare.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[233]</span></p> - -<p>“Well,” said Graham, “if Griffin really can’t pay -it, <em>I’m</em> the one to do it, and I will, though I can’t -do it just now. Christmas cleared me out entirely.”</p> - -<p>“And me, too, of course,” said Hamlin; “that and -the school dues that I paid yesterday.”</p> - -<p>“See here, boys, neither Clark nor Graham ought -to foot that bill, and I reckon we’re all pretty short -just now. Say we all chip in and earn it to-day,” -was Reed’s suggestion.</p> - -<p>“Earn it, how?” cried several voices.</p> - -<p>“Shoveling snow,” was the prompt reply. “This -snow is so heavy that the fellows that usually go -around to clear walks can’t begin to cover the -ground that they generally do. You see they -haven’t cleared anywhere about here yet. What’s -the matter with our borrowing shovels again over -yonder, or anywhere we can get ’em, and each of us -clearing one sidewalk. At ten cents each, we’d -raise six dollars that way in a jiffy.”</p> - -<p>“Three cheers for Reed. His head’s level!” called -out one; and in two minutes not a boy was to be -seen on the vacant lots; not one except Griffin. He -stood there biting his nails, and scraping a hole in -the snow with the toe of his shoe. When the boys -passed the lots with their borrowed shovels, Griffin -was gone.</p> - -<p>Late that afternoon, somebody left at Hamlin’s -door twenty-five cents done up in a bit of paper, on -which was scrawled the one word, “glass.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[234]</span></p> - -<p>“Griffin left that, I’m sure,” Hamlin said as he -read the word. “I’m glad he had grace enough to -do that much.”</p> - -<p>He did not know that the boy had earned that -quarter clearing off snow with a shovel that he had -manufactured himself out of a broom-handle and a -piece of a soap-box. Even Griffin was not all bad.</p> - -<p>A much astonished gentleman was the one who -was called to his door that evening to meet a delegation -of high-school boys, one of whom handed him -a five-dollar bill to pay for his broken window.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_235" class="pagenum">[235]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">HONOR TO WHOM HONOR IS DUE.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>One morning, St. John, on his way to the class-room, -stopped before a bulletin-board on which had -been written the names of the institutions offering -scholarships to the pupils of the high school.</p> - -<p>He had overheard an occasional word about these -scholarships, but really knew very little about them. -So he stood there reading the list.</p> - -<p>Then up the stairs behind him came half a dozen -boys of section D. As they caught sight of St. -John, they, too, stopped to see what he was reading. -St. John, who seemed never to want any boy within -a yard of him, turned to go, but, with a mischievous -glance at the other, Reed stood still, and the others -pressed closely together, penning St. John in to the -little space between them and the board. Seeing -their purpose, St. John’s face took on its haughtiest -expression, and leaning against the board, he waited -in angry silence for them to move aside and let him -pass. But they, enjoying his discomfiture, stood -laughing and chaffing one another, but never saying -a word to him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[236]</span></p> - -<p>More and more boys joined the group, and, each -one taking in the situation, stood there as if he had -no intention of going farther that day.</p> - -<p>Finally Dixon called out:—</p> - -<p>“Say, boys, who’s going to take these prizes?” -glancing at the board.</p> - -<p>“Gordon—Clark—Hamlin—Raleigh,” shouted -the crowd.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Reed, thoughtfully, “they’re the only -ones that have the ghost of a chance.”</p> - -<p>“But they can’t take ’em all,” somebody suggested.</p> - -<p>“Well, the girls have a go at two of them. -Aren’t you going to give the girls a chance?” said -Dixon.</p> - -<p>“We didn’t say that those fellows would accept -the scholarships—but they’ll <em>win</em> ’em sure.” This -from Barber.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Reed, with one eye on St. John’s -angry face, “they’ll win ’em sure, and they ought -to. They’ve worked hard enough for them, and -they deserve all they’ll win. The rest of us must -play second fiddle this year. Not but what second -fiddle is pretty fair, when it puts a chap up in the -nineties.”</p> - -<p>“Here comes Bobby!”</p> - -<p>The word ran through the crowd, and the group -dissolved like magic, leaving St. John free to enter -the class-room.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[237]</span></p> - -<p>Of course he knew that the boys had only been -trying to tease him, for his high rank in the class -could not be denied; but all the same it made him -furiously angry to be ranked with the “second -fiddles,” and counted out entirely in the prize competition.</p> - -<p>All but one of the six scholarships were to be -given to the pupils having highest averages in all or -in certain studies, during the three years’ course; -but one, and that the highest prize—or the one -so considered in the school—was offered to the boy -who should rank first in the classical course during -the senior year, and should also write the best Latin -essay. If, as had sometimes happened, two or three -boys should stand equally high on the year’s average, -then the quality of their essays would decide -to whom the prize should go. But if one boy -should stand first in the class, and another not -ranking as high should hand in a better essay—for -any boy who chose was free to compete—then the -prize would not be given at all that year.</p> - -<p>“I’ll win that scholarship if it kills me to do it, -just to make that crowd mad. It <em>would</em> make them -mad enough to see their precious four worsted in -the fight. And they <em>shall</em> see it, sure as fate!”</p> - -<p>So ran St. John’s thoughts during that morning’s -exercises. From that day, this one thought and purpose -ruled him. He had never cared for athletic<span class="pagenum">[238]</span> -sports, and riding and driving were all the exercise -he ever took, but now, the time spent in going to -and from school was all that he was out of doors; -and almost every moment of his waking time was -given to study. Long after midnight he worked, -going over and over what he already knew, lest -possibly, some point might have been forgotten or -slighted.</p> - -<p>The other four boys were working hard too, but -they were so accustomed to out-of-door sports -and exercise, that it never occurred to them that -they could give them up. So they kept their brains -and bodies in good working order, while St. John -grew, week by week, more worn and weary.</p> - -<p>“His royal highness looks rather seedy—eh,” -Reed said one day to Clark, and the latter answered:—</p> - -<p>“I think he’s working too hard.”</p> - -<p>St. John’s ears, sharpened by his nervous anxiety, -caught both question and answer, and resented anyone’s -thinking that he needed to work harder than -any of the others. Up to this time he had been -coldly indifferent to his classmates, but now he began -to hate them all. He told himself that they -were all banded against him, and that not one of -them wanted him to win. And this was true. He -had made not the slightest effort to gain their friendship, -while the others were all prime favorites.<span class="pagenum">[239]</span> -Even Clark was happily conscious that the boys -were friendly to him now; all except St. John -and Lee. Lee’s Southern prejudice had not yet -died away, and in his heart he still regarded Clark -as a coward.</p> - -<p>The competition for the prize scholarships was -not confined to section D. There were two girls’ -sections, and one other boys’ section in the senior -year, and in each of these there were scholars who -were quite as eager to win the prizes as were the -boys in section D.</p> - -<p>And in section D also there were other competitors -besides the five who stood highest in the class. -These were what Reed had called the “second fiddles,” -and their chance lay in the fact that neither -St. John, Gordon, nor Hamlin would accept the -scholarships, should they win them, as all three of -them were planning to enter some of the larger and -more prominent colleges. They wanted the honor -of winning the prizes, but it was generally understood -that the prizes themselves would go to the -next lower in class, while the whole class to a boy, -always excepting St. John, was now determined -that D should be the banner section this year. -None were more eager for this last than Crawford -and Freeman. Both of them were trying to live -down the previous year’s record. They could hope -to win no prizes, but they could do their share<span class="pagenum">[240]</span> -towards raising the general record, and this they -were trying to do.</p> - -<p>As the sunny May days slipped away and examination -time approached, the strain of the competition -began to tell upon many of the pupils. Four in -section D stood so nearly together that Mr. Horton -himself could not see that one had any better chance -than the others.</p> - -<p>“I never had four such students in one class,” he -said to Professor Keene one day. “So far as perfect -recitations go, there is nothing to choose between -them. When St. John first entered, he was away -ahead in Latin, but the other three have been -steadily overtaking him, and now it all rests on the -examinations.”</p> - -<p>“And the Latin essay,” added the professor.</p> - -<p>“Yes. That, of course, decides one prize.”</p> - -<p>“St. John going to win there?” questioned the -professor.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton shook his head doubtfully:—</p> - -<p>“I’m afraid the lad is not well,” he said. “I notice -that he doesn’t think as quickly as he did, and one -of the others may write a better essay. His will be -couched in elegant Latin, but the matter of it may -not be equal to some one of the others. There’s no -telling; anyhow, it is going to be a very close contest, -and I shall be glad when it is over.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, so shall I,” responded the professor. “There’s<span class="pagenum">[241]</span> -always more or less ill-feeling, and too great strain -in these prize competitions.”</p> - -<p>A carriage stood before the schoolhouse gate when -school was dismissed that day. A lady and little -girl sat within it, watching the throng of boys passing -down the steps.</p> - -<p>“There’s Charlie, Mamma! Charlie! Charlie!” -called the child’s clear voice, as Reed, with Hamlin -and Clark, came down the steps.</p> - -<p>Reed hurried to the carriage, but his mother was -looking not at him, but at one of the other two.</p> - -<p>“Who is that boy, Charlie—the one that you -were talking to?” she cried breathlessly.</p> - -<p>Reed paused, with his hand on the carriage door.</p> - -<p>“That’s Clark—Stanley Clark. You’ve heard me -speak of him times enough,” he answered, wonderingly.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Charlie, that is the boy that saved Nellie’s -life. Don’t let him get away. Bring him here -quick. I <em>must</em> speak to him.”</p> - -<p>With a mixture of delight and amazement on his -face, Reed raced after the two boys, and seizing -Clark by the arm, cried:—</p> - -<p>“Come, Clark, my mother wants to see you. You -<em>must</em> come,” he added imperatively, as Clark held -back, unwillingly. “I’ll tell you what it’s all about -to-morrow, Hamlin”; and he began to pull Clark -toward the carriage.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[242]</span></p> - -<p>Clark knew why he was wanted, for he had -recognized the two, but he would far rather have -risked his life again than to have been marched up -to that carriage. But there was no help for it, so he -submitted with the best grace possible.</p> - -<p>Mrs. Reed seized both his hands, and her eyes -were dim as she said:—</p> - -<p>“To think that it was you who saved my little girl, -and all this time we have never suspected it! You -<em>must</em> have seen our advertisements?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes,” said Clark, looking mightily uncomfortable, -“but I didn’t want any more thanks, you -know. Any fellow would have done what I did on -the impulse of the moment. If I’d stopped to think, -I should probably have stood still.”</p> - -<p>“Not a bit of it,” said Mrs. Reed promptly. “A -boy who acted on such an impulse as you did, -<em>couldn’t</em> be a coward. It is not in him. But step -in; we’ll take you home. I must know where you -live, for I want to call on your mother. I know she -was proud of her boy that night.”</p> - -<p>Clark laughed a little. “No,” he said, “she -never knew anything about it, except what she read -in the paper.”</p> - -<p>“Well, she <em>will</em> know about it to-morrow,” said the -little lady decidedly.</p> - -<p>When the carriage stopped at Clark’s door, she -again took the lad’s hand.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[243]</span></p> - -<p>“Think what a shadow would be upon our home -to-day, but for you,” she said, with a glance at her -little daughter. “It is a debt that we can never repay, -but, at least, let us have the pleasure of seeing -you and your mother sometimes, at our home. I -have often asked Charlie why you never came to -our house, as so many of the other boys do; I know -the reason, now.”</p> - -<p>Mrs. Clark wondered a little when her son told -her that Charlie Reed’s mother would call upon her -the next day. She was not at all pleased, since she -was living in the utmost seclusion, feeling almost as -keenly as did her son the cloud of disgrace that -rested upon them. But when she learned from Mrs. -Reed what Stanley had done, when she saw the -tears of deep feeling in the eyes of her visitor, and -felt the warm pressure of her hands, how could she -help being proud and happy?</p> - -<p>Clark would have liked to stay away from school -that next day, but it would never do to bring down -his record by an absent mark. He went as late as he -dared, however, but the instant he entered the room -he saw that the boys were waiting for him, and in -spite of the fact that Mr. Horton was already at his -desk, a shout broke from the whole class at sight of -the schoolmate, whom they were now as eager to -honor as a year ago they had been to hurt and -annoy.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[244]</span></p> - -<p>“Three cheers for Clark!” shouted the irrepressible -Reed, actually jumping up on his seat in his -excitement, and the cheers were given with a will, -while Clark, blushing and confused, bowed his -thanks and dropped hastily into his seat.</p> - -<p>“Well,” remarked Mr. Horton, looking slowly -about the room, “may I ask what this means? -What have you been doing, Clark, to awaken all -this enthusiasm?”</p> - -<p>“Nothing at all, sir. It’s just the boys,” stammered -Clark.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Mr. Horton dryly, “I’m quite aware -that it was just the boys.” But now Reed, trying to -keep his enthusiasm within bounds, told the story -in a few graphic words.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton listened with as great an interest as -even Reed could desire, and when the story was -ended, said only:—</p> - -<p>“Boys, you are perfectly excusable for this -once; only remember that this is not a precedent,” -but the look he gave the quiet lad whom he had -learned to love, assured the boys that their teacher -was in fullest sympathy with them.</p> - -<p>From this time, Clark’s popularity in the school -was very great. Even hot-headed Lee blotted from -his memory that unreturned blow, the year before, -and not even in the depths of his own heart did he -ever again call Stanley Clark “coward.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[245]</span></p> - -<p>Before that day was over, section D had another -sensation.</p> - -<p>As usual near the close of the year, the rules were -relaxed, especially in the senior class, and often some -of the boys would remain in the room during part of -the recess, talking over their work and surmising -about the questions likely to be asked in the examinations. -Half a dozen or more were busily talking -about the dreaded Latin essays, when Reed came -rushing upstairs, exclaiming:—</p> - -<p>“I say, you fellows, you missed a picnic, staying -in to-day. Didn’t you hear us all yelling outside?”</p> - -<p>“Why, yes, we heard you, but it’s nothing unusual -for you little chaps to be noisy,” said Hamlin, loftily. -Then he added, “but if you’re very anxious to tell us -what it was about, this time, we can listen, I suppose,” -and with an air of patient endurance, he -dropped into his seat.</p> - -<p>Reed picked up a book and flung it at him, but he -was too full of his story to pursue the mock quarrel, -especially as two or three voices called out:—</p> - -<p>“Go on, Reedy—tell us what ’twas all about.”</p> - -<p>“Why, we were all out there on the sidewalk—a -whole crowd of us,” said Reed, “when a fellow came -along driving a heavy cart with the worst-looking -old rackabones of a horse you ever laid eyes on. The -creature didn’t look as if it had had a good meal in -six months, and it was so weak that it could hardly<span class="pagenum">[246]</span> -crawl. Just before it got opposite our gate, the horse -stopped, and the big brute that was driving began to -lash it unmercifully—to get past us, I expect.</p> - -<p>“Some of us yelled at him to ‘hold up,’ but, bless -you, before the words were fairly out of our mouths, -Crawford had dashed out and was pitching into that -driver, and giving him as pretty a pommeling as -you’d want to see; put him right down there in -the street and licked him well. Then he yanked -him up, and ordered him to take the horse out of -the shafts. The fellow refused at first, and threatened -to ‘have the law’ on Crawford; but that didn’t scare -Crawford a bit, and then the rascal began to whine -and swear by turns; and finally asked how he could -get his cart home without the horse.</p> - -<p>“‘I’ll fix that,’ said Crawford, ‘but that horse is -going to have a rest for one week, and all he wants -to eat, and he’s going to have ’em in the stable where -my horses are kept.’</p> - -<p>“‘An’ phwat will I be doin’ ahl that week, with -niver a hoss to me cart?’ said the man.</p> - -<p>“‘I’ll hire a horse for you to use that week,’ said -Crawford.</p> - -<p>“The man looked at him.</p> - -<p>“‘An’ phwat if I say No?’ said he, looking as if -he would like to give Crawford a black eye, if he -dared.</p> - -<p>“‘Then I’ll go this moment, and enter a complaint<span class="pagenum">[247]</span> -against you. Any officer of the Humane Society -would order that poor brute killed rather than see -him driven as he is now, to say nothing of seeing -him beaten as shamefully as you beat him just now,’ -said Crawford.</p> - -<p>“The man looked around at us all. Of course, -we’d crowded ’round to see the thing out—and then -he began slowly to unfasten the poor old nag. It -was so weak that I thought it would have to be -propped up against a fence or something, but it did -manage to stand.</p> - -<p>“‘Now phwere’ll I take him?’ said the man, and I -know he added some hot words under his breath.</p> - -<p>“‘You’ll come along with me,’ said Crawford. -‘I’m not going to trust that horse out of my sight’; -and I just wish you’d seen ’em going up the street -together, almost holding up that poor old skeleton -between ’em, with a crowd of street boys who had -gathered, tagging on behind, hooting and yelling.”</p> - -<div class="figcenter"> -<img src="images/i253.jpg" alt="Confrontation over horse." /> -</div> - -<p>As Reed stopped to take breath, Gordon exclaimed:—</p> - -<p>“Well, I’d never have believed that of Crawford. -I didn’t think he was that sort at all.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, he loves horses,” broke in Freeman. “You -ought to see him pet those ponies of his. I heard -him say once, that his ponies were all the <em>folks</em> he -had, for his nearest relative is a cousin that he hasn’t -seen in ten years.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[248]</span></p> - -<p>A sudden silence followed Freeman’s words, and -more than one boy’s thoughts flew to his own home -and those who loved him there, and a new feeling of -sympathy for Crawford was awakened.</p> - -<p>“Section D should be proud of Crawford, to-day,” -said Clark. “Let’s show him that we are.”</p> - -<p>“So we will,” said one and another.</p> - -<p>“But won’t Mr. Horton mark him off for breaking -bounds?” said Dixon, as the bell sounded.</p> - -<p>“Not he; trust Bobby to do the fair thing when -he hears the story,” said Graham, and Reed added:—</p> - -<p>“Bobby’s all right. Crawford asked me to tell -him, and he said it would be all right.”</p> - -<p>But for Mr. Horton’s warning in regard to a precedent, -Crawford would have received almost as enthusiastic -a greeting when he returned half an hour -later as had been given to Clark that morning; but, -as it was, he slipped quietly into his seat, and the -boys only showed their appreciation of the stand -he had taken, by surrounding him after school, and -asking all sorts of questions about the affair. From -this time however, Crawford was “counted in” to -whatever was going on, as he never had been before.</p> - -<p>In the midst of the strain of approaching examinations, -and essays to be prepared, came the annual -drill, and though our senior boys had felt, a few -weeks before, as if they could hardly spare the time -for the extra drilling, yet, after all, Company D <em>did</em><span class="pagenum">[249]</span> -want to keep those red ribbons one more year, and -every other company wanted just as much to capture -them and that beautiful gold medal; and so, when -the great day came, lessons took a second place for -once, and the boys in blue came to the front.</p> - -<p>This time, there was no disorder, and no unfair -dealing. The judges gave high praise to the battalion -as a body, and Company D retained the red ribbons. -It was the last company on the list, and when, with -the little silken badges fluttering in the breeze, it -marched off the field, all the other companies united -in a cordial cheer for Company D; which unexpected -demonstration from the disappointed competitors so -pleased Captain Hamlin that, the next day, every -boy in the battalion received an invitation to a -steamboat trip down the bay, with a shore dinner—all -at the expense of Company D, though Hamlin -himself paid the bill. And if he thereby deprived -himself of a special pleasure trip that his father had -promised him, the boys never knew it, and Hamlin -was content.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_250" class="pagenum">[250]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">GLADNESS FOR CLARK.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Who enters here, leaves hope behind.”</p> - -<p>This legend, in huge, shaded letters, adorned the -blackboard one morning, when a written examination -in geometry was to take the place of the usual -recitations.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton glanced at Dixon with a smile as he -read the sentence, for Dixon was apt to get badly -tangled up over those perplexing lines and angles, -and was always in the depths of melancholy when -an examination in geometry was impending.</p> - -<p>Just then Dixon was saying:—</p> - -<p>“Wish I could borrow your head this morning, -Clark. You wouldn’t mind lending it, would you?”</p> - -<p>Clark, buried in the depths of a big lexicon, answered -in an absent-minded way:—</p> - -<p>“Certainly not. Help yourself.”</p> - -<p>The shout of laughter from the boys who had -heard both question and answer brought Clark back -to his surroundings, and he joined in the laugh -against himself, while Dixon grumbled:—</p> - -<p>“Only wish I could hold him to his word.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[251]</span></p> - -<p>When inkwells had been filled, pens and paper -distributed, and the boys were taking last, lingering -peeps at the knottiest theorems before their geometries -should be collected, as was the custom, they -were taken entirely by surprise, for, instead of telling -two boys to bring the books to the desk, the -teacher said:—</p> - -<p>“Boys, we are going to carry the self-government -principles into the examinations this year. If you -will all promise to be perfectly fair and honorable -in this examination, your books may remain on -your desks, and I shall leave the room without a -monitor until the examination is over. As many as -would like me to do this will please rise.”</p> - -<p>It seemed to Mr. Horton that every boy in the -room was on his feet the next instant. In reality, -several rose slowly, and only because they were not -willing to say that they preferred not to be so -trusted.</p> - -<p>Mr. Horton looked much pleased, as he bade the -boys be seated.</p> - -<p>“I am <em>very</em> glad to have such an unanimous -response,” he said, “and I shall leave you without -the slightest doubt. I know that my boys can be -trusted this year, and it is a pleasure to me to show -you how thoroughly I do trust you. Now, has any -one any question to ask about the examination -before I leave the room?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[252]</span></p> - -<p>After answering a few questions, Mr. Horton -went out, and the boys settled down to work. To -many of them, it seemed strange to be left so. -These were the boys who had been used to whisper, -and take sly peeps at bits of paper which they had -tucked into various pockets. More than one had -such aids to memory about him at that very moment, -but they were ashamed, now, to use them.</p> - -<p>As the boys looked over the list of questions, -many a sigh or frown showed that that list contained -precisely the questions that one or another -had hoped would not be there.</p> - -<p>But most of the boys settled down at once to -steady work, and for a while nothing was heard but -the scratching of pens and the rattling of paper, or -the uneasy movements of some lad who was trying -in vain to recall a forgotten theorem.</p> - -<p>As Gordon laid aside a written sheet, he happened -to glance towards a seat occupied by Blake—one of -the boys who had entered that year, and he saw -Blake softly lift the lid of his desk, and peep at -something on the inside.</p> - -<p>Leaving his seat, Gordon marched directly to -Blake’s, and, without a word, suddenly lifted the lid -of his desk, in spite of the other’s efforts to prevent -it On the inside of the lid was pinned a brief explanation -of several of the toughest problems in the -geometry.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[253]</span></p> - -<p>With a look of scorn in his blue eyes, Gordon -snatched the paper and tore it into bits; then, still -without a word, he returned to his seat. As he did -so, several boys, whose quick eyes had taken note of -the whole performance, clapped their approval, and -at this, Blake, who had started up angrily, dropped -back into his seat, and went on with his work in -sulky silence.</p> - -<p>One or two other boys attempted to cheat that -day, but their attempts were put down by the rest as -promptly as Blake’s had been.</p> - -<p>Blake tried to slip out of the room unnoticed -after the examination was over, but Gordon had -kept an eye on him, and speedily overtook him in -the hall.</p> - -<p>“Blake,” he said, “I’m sure you are glad, now, that -you did your work honestly. You wouldn’t have -liked Mr. Horton to know that you went back -on your word.”</p> - -<p>“He wouldn’t have known it, if you’d minded -your own business,” growled Blake, “and I should -have had a hundred on the examination, and now I -shan’t get above eighty, thanks to your meddling.”</p> - -<p>“I’m sorry for that, Blake, but I’d rather have an -honest eighty than a dishonest hundred, and I’m -sure Mr. Horton would say so, too.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, you’re too high-toned in this school,” said -Blake. “I never was in a school before where we<span class="pagenum">[254]</span> -didn’t cheat in examinations. The teachers wink at -it. They know we do it.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t believe in it,” said Gordon. “I -mean to be honest after I leave school, and I don’t -see why I shouldn’t be honest in school, too. I -couldn’t respect myself, if I did mean, underhanded -things.”</p> - -<p>“Respect your grandmother!” muttered Blake, -walking off at such a pace that Gordon did not attempt -to keep up with him, but turned back to wait -for Hamlin, who came down the stairs a moment -later.</p> - -<p>Hamlin was looking very happy.</p> - -<p>“Such a relief to get that exam. over,” he said, as -he joined Gordon; “and I knew every problem like -a book. Wasn’t it fine, though, to have Bobby put -the class on honor so!”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Gordon, “though two or three didn’t -live up to it.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, of course not. There are always a few -sneaks in every crowd, but on the whole they did -splendidly, I think. But what’s the matter with -St. John?”</p> - -<p>“Matter? What do you mean?” asked Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Why, he’s still pegging away up there, and -usually he’s one of the first to finish up,” replied -Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“Haven’t you noticed how much slower he’s been<span class="pagenum">[255]</span> -lately than he was the first of the year? I think -the fellow’s worked out,” said Gordon. “Too bad, -too, for it will spoil his whole year’s record, if he -doesn’t get through these exams. in good shape.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, he’ll get through all right enough,” said -Hamlin, carelessly.</p> - -<p>“Who else was up there when you left?” asked -Gordon.</p> - -<p>“Only Dixon, Freeman, Lee and Clark. Clark had -handed in his paper and was waiting for Freeman. -Here they come now.” And the two boys stopped -and waited for the other two.</p> - -<p>“Bobby certainly is working the self-government -plan for all it is worth to-day,” said Freeman, as he -and Clark joined the others.</p> - -<p>“Anything new?” asked Hamlin.</p> - -<p>“He’s left those three, St. John, Lee and Dixon, -up there in the room to finish, and told ’em to put -their papers in the lower drawer in his desk when -they get through; and the last one is to lock the -drawer and give him the key in the morning.”</p> - -<p>“He certainly is putting them on honor,” said -Gordon; “but I guess it’s safe enough with those -three fellows.”</p> - -<p>The three boys left in the class-room worked on -in silence for half an hour. Then Lee had finished -his work, and putting his paper in the drawer, he -departed, followed a few minutes later by Dixon.<span class="pagenum">[256]</span> -Both boys cast wondering glances at St. John, who -was usually among the first to pass in his papers, -but he paid no attention to them, not seeming even -to notice when they left the room.</p> - -<p>He had finished all but one of the problems -given. That one he had tried in vain to solve. His -tired brain would not recall the theorem required. -As Dixon left the room, St. John dropped his head -on his desk with a weary sigh, but in a moment he -started up again, and bent over the question-paper.</p> - -<p>“Why <em>can’t</em> I think of it?” he said half aloud. -“Of course I know it. I’ve solved that problem no -end of times.”</p> - -<p>His eye fell on his geometry. He stretched his -hand towards it, then drew it back, a hot flush burning -on his cheek.</p> - -<p>“On honor!” he murmured, and pushing the book -aside, he tried again to think out the solution required, -but in vain. For half an hour he sat there -fighting against the temptation that assailed him. -Once he folded his unfinished paper, and started to -put it in the drawer; then, remembering how Gordon, -Clark and Hamlin had gone off an hour before—with -every question correctly answered, he was -sure—he dropped back into his seat with a groan.</p> - -<p>“I <em>can’t</em> let them get ahead of me, so,” he -thought. “I’m really a better scholar than anyone -of the lot. It’s just that my head is so dead tired<span class="pagenum">[257]</span>! -I really do know every page of that geometry, if I -only could think of it—if <em>only</em> I could.”</p> - -<p>But he could not, try as he would. Then the -janitor looked in at the door, and St. John knew -that he wanted to clean the room. He began -wearily to put away his papers. Suddenly he -reached forward, snatched his geometry, and hurriedly -turning the leaves, looked at the theorem that -he had been trying to recall. Then, flinging the -book aside, he hastily wrote out the explanation on -his examination paper, folded it, and flung it carelessly -into the drawer, and, forgetting entirely that -he was to lock the drawer and keep the key until -morning, he picked up his cap and left the room. -His paper was all right, he was sure, but already -he felt that he had paid too high a price for it.</p> - -<p>The examinations that followed were conducted -on the same principle as this first one, and Mr. Horton -was so well satisfied with the result that he -determined that he would never go back to the old -watching method again. The Latin examination -was held the next week, and, so far as was known, -not one boy attempted underhanded methods.</p> - -<p>St. John was so thoroughly at home in Latin, that -he was among the first to complete his work, and -he left the room with a sigh of relief that one more -task was over, for he had reached that stage of mental -and physical exhaustion when the smallest task<span class="pagenum">[258]</span> -seems a load too heavy to be borne, and he was -gathering all his energies to finish the Latin essay -that was to decide who should hold first rank in the -class.</p> - -<p>For weeks he had been working at that essay, -writing and rewriting; one day pleased with his -work, the next so dissatisfied that he would throw -it aside and begin anew. But now, the time was -short, and in a few days the essay must be handed -in to the judges.</p> - -<p>Gordon, Hamlin and Clark were also more than a -little concerned about their essays.</p> - -<p>“It isn’t the putting it into Latin; it’s getting the -ideas in English that sticks me,” Hamlin said to -Clark one day. “I’ve been cudgeling my brains, and -it does seem as if I haven’t an idea worth writing -down, on any subject whatever.”</p> - -<p>“Queer, how a fellow’s ideas do vanish the minute -he tries to write ’em out on paper,” said Clark. -“I couldn’t get to sleep the other night for thinking -about that essay, and while I lay awake, I thought -of a subject, and one idea after another came to me, -till I jumped out of bed and went to scribbling. -Then I went back to bed and to sleep, and in the -morning, when I read over my bright ideas, they -seemed just about as near nothing as anything I -ever read. So I flung the whole thing into the -waste-basket, and began over again.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[259]</span></p> - -<p>“I’ve begun about a dozen times, and all my -efforts, thus far, seem to me to be fit for the same -receptacle,” laughed Gordon; “but there’s so little -time left, that all I can do is to pick out the best of -the lot—if there is any best—and make a smooth -copy of it, and let it go at that.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes, that’ll do for you to say,” grumbled -Hamlin; “but all the same you’ll hand in an essay -all trimmed up and polished off in tip-top style. -That’s what you’ll both do. I know you two chaps; -seen you before.”</p> - -<p>Any boy in the Latin class was free to hand in -an essay in competition for the prize scholarship; -but it was well enough understood who were the six -sure to stand at the head of the class, and there was -small likelihood that any other boy could produce a -better essay than any one of these six could write. -Nevertheless, a few made the attempt, and nine essays -were given to the judges. The decision was -not to be made known, however, until Commencement -day; so, when their papers had been handed -in, the boys tried to forget all about the matter -until the decision should be announced.</p> - -<p>The day before Commencement was always one -of intense interest, because then the results of all -the examinations were announced, and not till then -could the scholars know their marks on the whole -year’s work, and for those who had been in the<span class="pagenum">[260]</span> -school through the entire three years, their standing -for the whole period. Those who hoped to win -one of the scholarships were especially anxious to -know their standing, to see what their chances -might be.</p> - -<p>Rules were relaxed on this day. There were no -more recitations. The work of the senior year was -ended, and this last day was really more in the nature -of a final friendly meeting as a class, than anything -else.</p> - -<p>When Mr. Horton, who had been down to Prof. -Keene’s office, returned to his class-room with a -paper in his hand, the merry chatter ceased, and -the boys dropped into their seats, prepared to give -him their undivided attention.</p> - -<p>He began by telling them that never since he -had been teaching had he had a class that had done, -on the whole, so satisfactory work as this class had -done during the past year. He spoke of the marked -improvement, both in scholarship and moral character -of the class as a whole, and told them that their -influence had not been confined to their own section, -but had extended to the whole school, so that Prof. -Keene declared that the school stood much higher -in reputation than it had done a year ago. “And he -attributes this,” said Mr. Horton, “to the influence -of the Law and Order Society of section D.”</p> - -<p>A round of applause greeted this, but it was quickly -hushed, as the teacher went on:—</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[261]</span></p> - -<p>“It gives me much pleasure to say, as it will give -you to hear, that section D is the banner section of -the Central, this year.”</p> - -<p>The applause that followed this announcement was -so enthusiastic and prolonged that it reached the ears -of Prof. Keene, in his office, but he only smiled as he -listened.</p> - -<p>But Mr. Horton raised his hand, and silence instantly -succeeded, for the boys were longing to know -what was written on that paper which he held, and -now he unfolded it, and read the result of the examinations.</p> - -<p class="il1"> -Number 1. Stanley Clark.<br /> -Number 2. Hugh Gordon, and Everett St. John.<br /> -Number 3. David Hamlin.<br /> -Number 4. Alec Graham, and so on.<br /> -</p> - -<p>Each name was greeted with a round of cheers, -and as soon as the list was ended, the boys crowded -around the prize-winners with congratulations. Only -St. John sat apart, and spoke to nobody. To stand -second was nothing to him. If he could not stand -first, he said to himself that he might as well be at -the bottom of the list; and besides, deep in his heart, -he knew that he had not gained honestly even the -second rank. So he answered coldly, even rudely, -the congratulations of Clark and Hamlin, and intimated -so plainly that he wanted to be let alone, -that no one else ventured to approach him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[262]</span></p> - -<p>In the midst of the hubbub of talk, Mr. Horton -called Reed to the desk.</p> - -<p>“You are wanted in the professor’s office,” he said.</p> - -<p>Wondering “what was up,” Reed hurried down to -the office. When, half an hour later, he returned, his -face was fairly radiant. A tall, fine-looking gentleman -followed him, and the whisper went around that -that was Charlie Reed’s father.</p> - -<p>Reed did not go to his own seat, but slipped into -one beside Clark, and, as he did so, he seized Clark’s -hand and wrung it till the latter fairly winced, as -he whispered:—</p> - -<p>“Whatever is the matter, Reed?”</p> - -<p>But Reed, with that same happy smile, answered -only:—</p> - -<p>“Father’s going to make a speech. You just listen.”</p> - -<p>At this moment Mr. Reed, who had been talking -to Mr. Horton, rose and faced the boys.</p> - -<p>“I have a story to tell,” he began; “a story in -which, I am sure, you will all be interested, as it -deeply concerns one of your number. It is a true -story—true in every detail.</p> - -<p>“In a neighboring city there lived, not long ago, -a man who stood very high in the community. He -was wealthy, he held positions of trust—of honor, -and no man in the land seemed less likely to fall -than he; yet he <em>did</em> fall. Not satisfied with the<span class="pagenum">[263]</span> -wealth and station he had gained, he wanted to -double his millions. He speculated—risked all -that he had, and lost. Then he used the trust-funds -in his hands, and again he lost.</p> - -<p>“Then, with wealth gone, with honor gone, he -would have taken his own life, but for one thing. -His wife was very, very ill, and she had no one in -the world but him, for they had no children.</p> - -<p>“While he sat in his office, trying to decide -whether he could leave his dying wife alone in the -world, and commit this last great crime, there came -to him one who was associated with him in business, -one to whom he had years before given a helping -hand. This man had never forgotten the help -he had received, and the other knew that he could -count upon help and sympathy from him in this -hour of his shame and trouble.</p> - -<p>“He told his friend the whole story, and asked of -him what I believe no man has a right to ask of another. -It could be made to appear to the world as if -this other were the one who had betrayed his trust, -and the guilty man proposed to let the world believe -this. He asked his friend to bear in his stead the -shame and dishonor that rightfully belonged to himself.</p> - -<p>“‘It is only for a few days,’ he pleaded. ‘You -know how <em>very</em> ill my poor wife is. The doctors -say it is a question of but a few hours now. It is<span class="pagenum">[264]</span> -only for her sake—that she may die in peace—and, -as soon as she is gone, the world shall know the -whole story, and your name shall be fully cleared.’</p> - -<p>“That was an awful sacrifice to ask of an upright, -honorable man.</p> - -<p>“At first the man refused utterly, but the other -reminded him of past kindness received not only -from himself, but from the wife whose life was so -near its end—and at last he yielded. He agreed -to bear the blame and the shame for the little time -she had to live, only making the condition that his -own wife should know the truth.</p> - -<p>“Think, boys, what it was to that man to have -the papers full of the story, to see friends pass him -coldly by—even when he believed that in a few -days all would be made right again!</p> - -<p>“But, contrary to all expectations, the apparently -dying woman rallied, and slowly, very slowly, began -to recover.</p> - -<p>“Then, what was to be done? The guilty man -selfishly refused to own the truth, and clear the -name of his friend, and that friend was obliged to -leave the country, or go to prison and serve a sentence -for a crime he had never committed.</p> - -<p>“He went to another land, and there devoted his -time and strength to winning back enough to repay -all that had been lost through his partner’s sin.</p> - -<p>“A few days ago, the invalid wife died—died in -blissful ignorance of the sad truth. When she was<span class="pagenum">[265]</span> -gone, all interest in life for her husband was ended. -He felt that he could no longer bear the burden of -his own guilt, and the knowledge of what another -was suffering through him. He told the whole -story, gave up every dollar he had left, and only -asked that the name of the noble man who had suffered -shame for his sake be cleared at once.</p> - -<p>“The papers, to-night, will tell the story to all the -world, and from this day forth no shadow will ever -rest on the name of Stanley W. Clark.”</p> - -<p>There was a moment of intense silence as Mr. -Reed ceased speaking. Then came a perfect burst -of cheers.</p> - -<p>Clark’s face was buried in his hands, and when he -lifted it to see Mr. Reed standing beside him, the -glad tears were rolling down his cheeks, and more -than one boy found his own eyes dim.</p> - -<p>As for Charlie Reed—he declared that he was -“’most too happy to live.”</p> - -<p>All through the year Clark had been winning his -way into the hearts of his schoolmates, and now -they went wild over him, and shook his hands till -his arms were lame, and showed so much sympathy -and gladness for him, that, at last, he broke down -entirely, and cried like a baby for pure joy.</p> - -<p>From that day no shadow rested on his strong -young face, and never again did he need to shrink -from others, or dread a reference to the father who -was, more than ever, his ideal.</p> - -<hr class="chap" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span id="Page_266" class="pagenum">[266]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">CHAPTER XIX.<br /> -<span class="cheaderfont">COMMENCEMENT.</span></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The next day was Commencement.</p> - -<p>A brief, informal session was held in the morning, -but it was a session from which none wished to -be absent, for then the names of the prize-winners -were to be announced.</p> - -<p>There were many anxious hearts, and a few hopeful -ones, for though the rank-list read the day -before told each boy his standing in class, it did -not settle the matter of the prize scholarships.</p> - -<p>It is safe to say that only one boy grudged Stanley -Clark the first rank that he had so fairly won by -his steady, thorough work. That boy was Everett -St. John. He would not have been present at all, -that morning, but for the Latin essays. He had -still a lingering hope that his might be adjudged the -best.</p> - -<p>But now Mr. Horton was writing on the blackboard, -and every boy gazed eagerly forward to read -what was written. In his clear hand, they read the -names of the six colleges offering the scholarships. -Then, with the chalk in his fingers, he faced the -school.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[267]</span></p> - -<p>“You all heard the rank-list read yesterday,” he -said, “so you know that Clark, St. John and Gordon -would have the first claim on the second, third and -fourth of these scholarships, but as these three are -to enter other colleges, these scholarships go to the -next in rank, Graham, Griffin and Bent; the two -last named being members, as you know, of section -A.</p> - -<p>“The last two scholarships on the list have, I am -happy to say, been won by girls. And now there -remains but one—the first—which will be -awarded to the boy whose Latin thesis has been -considered by the judges to be the best. That -thesis I hold in my hand, but I do not know what -name it bears, as it was handed to me in this sealed -envelope.”</p> - -<p>Every eye watched as he tore open the envelope -and read the name of Stanley Clark, and hearty -cheers expressed the satisfaction of his classmates -at the result.</p> - -<p>As soon as he could secure silence, Mr. Horton -went on:—</p> - -<p>“The judges desire me to say that they have -awarded the prize to Stanley Clark because of the -high character of his essay, and they also wish me -to state that, in elegance of style and choice of words, -the essay submitted by Everett St. John is decidedly -superior.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[268]</span></p> - -<p>It was Clark who led applause for St. John, but -the latter only scowled in response to it. His pride -and ambition were too bitterly hurt to appreciate any -expression of kindly feeling.</p> - -<p>“There is one more prize to be given this year,” -Mr. Horton went on, taking a small case from his -desk. “It is a gold medal which has never been -given before, but the donor has made it a perpetual -gift from this time. It is to be given to the boy in -the senior class who has made the greatest advance -in moral character during the year. Of course, we -can only judge from what we see, and therefore this -is the most difficult prize to award; so you, to whom -the decision is left, must think carefully before you -decide. This is to be awarded by vote of the class. -I should have added that, by express desire of the -gentleman who gives this prize, it is to be, this year, -awarded to some member of section D. After this -year, it is not to be so limited.”</p> - -<p>The boys looked wonderingly at one another. -They did not quite like the responsibility laid upon -them.</p> - -<p>“May I speak to some of the boys, sir?” Clark -asked, and as Mr. Horton gave assent, he quickly -turned to Hamlin, and whispered:—</p> - -<p>“I think Crawford ought to have it, don’t you?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” said Hamlin, promptly. “I had thought of -Freeman, but though he has improved immensely<span class="pagenum">[269]</span> -this year, he hasn’t made such a jump as Crawford, -because he never got so far down.”</p> - -<p>“And I’m sure it will help Crawford to know how -we feel about it,” suggested Clark.</p> - -<p>From one to another the suggestion passed, and, -when Mr. Horton called for the decision, it was almost -an unanimous one for Crawford. He was taken -utterly by surprise. Not one thought of the possibility -of its being awarded to him had entered his -mind, and he was prepared to vote most heartily for -Freeman; but he was honestly pleased to know that -his efforts to “do the square thing,” as he would -have expressed it, had been appreciated, and that -shining gold medal was a constant incentive to fresh -effort thereafter. It was many a year before he discovered -that it was his stern guardian, Mr. Chase, -who had given this prize, earnestly hoping that -Crawford would be the winner.</p> - -<p>The Commencement exercises were held in the -evening in one of the largest opera-houses.</p> - -<p>Never had the decorations on such an occasion -been so beautiful as this year, for never before had -so many outside friends lent a helping hand. There -was Gordon’s father, so proud that the old high -school was regaining its old reputation, and so -proud and happy because of the share his boy had -had in bringing this about; and there was Reed’s -father, who was but too happy to spend some of his<span class="pagenum">[270]</span> -abundant means to make the occasion a memorable -one, not only for his own boy’s sake, but also for the -sake of Stanley Clark, whom he had taken right -into his big heart. And, by the way, he had carried -matters with a high hand, and when he made arrangements -for his boy at Yale, he had made arrangements -for Stanley Clark to go with him, and no -refusals would he listen to for a moment. Clark -had been obliged to give in, and accept the generous -provision, though he did it with a mental vow that -he would pay it all back one of these days.</p> - -<p>Then there was Mr. Chase, who was so relieved -and delighted at the improvement in his ward, that -he, too, insisted on “lending a hand” at these Commencement -arrangements. And so it happened that -no graduating class had ever had such beautiful -decorations, such perfect stacks of flowers, or such -fine music as graced this occasion.</p> - -<p>And it was Clark who, much against his will, delivered -the oration for the class. He did his best -to get out of it, declaring that it should be given by -Gordon, or Hamlin or St. John; but it was Clark -himself that his classmates now delighted to honor, -and it seemed as if they could not do enough to -make up to him for what was past.</p> - -<p>His story had spread through the school, and he -was the unanimous choice of the senior class, so -there was no escape for him, and he was obliged to -be the orator of the evening.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum">[271]</span></p> - -<p>He performed his duty well, as was testified by -the applause that followed, and so many floral tributes -were sent to the stage, that Reed laughingly -told him that he’d have to hire an express wagon to -“tote ’em home.”</p> - -<p>But the boy’s glad eyes sought out the spot where -his mother sat with a tall man beside her, a man -whose strong, noble face bore the marks of the sufferings -of the past years.</p> - -<p>When it was whispered about that Clark’s father -was there, every boy was wild to see him, and not -one who looked into his face that night but felt -that he was a father to be proud of.</p> - -<p>The exercises were over at last. The address to -the graduating class had been made by an eminent -lawyer. The diplomas had been received with more -or less grace and ease, or more or less shyness and -awkwardness.</p> - -<p>“Rosy” had distinguished himself by darting out -of the line, as the boys passed forward to receive -their diplomas, and picking up Grace Harlan’s handkerchief, -which he presented to her with his most -fascinating smile.</p> - -<p>Then the benediction closed the exercises, and in -a burst of martial music from the orchestra, the -crowd began to disperse.</p> - -<p>But the boys of section D lingered still. They realized -now that they could never be all together<span class="pagenum">[272]</span> -again, and Mr. Horton, as he clasped one after another -by the hand, found it harder to say “Good-bye” -to this than to any class he had ever before -taught.</p> - -<p>“I am afraid I shall dread to go back next year,” -he said, holding Hamlin’s hand, while he laid his -arm affectionately across Clark’s shoulders. “You -boys are going into new scenes, and you will soon -forget the old high school, but I shall be there with -all new faces. Boys—you don’t know how I am -going to miss you.”</p> - -<p>They crowded about him then, realizing, as they -had not done before, how real and true was his -interest in them—his friendship for them—realizing, -too, that the great days of our lives, though full -of sunshine, have yet their shadows.</p> - -<p>But they were boys, strong, healthy, happy boys, -and life was all before them, with ever new heights -to reach, new prizes to win, and no shadow could -rest long on their young hearts on that glad day.</p> - -<p>In the years that followed they made no mean -record in college and in the world, and often Mr. -Horton would read with a happy smile of what one -and another of his boys—the boys of section D—had -accomplished out in the great world.</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="transnote"> -<h2 style="margin-top: 0em">Transcriber’s Notes:</h2> - -<p>Illustrations have been moved to paragraph breaks near where they are -mentioned.</p> - -<p>Punctuation has been made consistent.</p> - -<p>Variations in spelling and hyphenation were retained as they appear in -the original publication, except that obvious typographical errors have -been corrected.</p></div></div> - - - - - - - - -<pre> - - - - - -End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Boys of the Central, by I. T. Thurston - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOYS OF THE CENTRAL *** - -***** This file should be named 63156-h.htm or 63156-h.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/1/5/63156/ - -Produced by Demian Katz, Craig Kirkwood, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net -(Images courtesy of the Digital Library@Villanova University -(http://digital.library.villanova.edu/)) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - - - -</pre> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/63156-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/63156-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6f46b88..0000000 --- a/old/63156-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63156-h/images/i002.jpg b/old/63156-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9325605..0000000 --- a/old/63156-h/images/i002.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/63156-h/images/i253.jpg b/old/63156-h/images/i253.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 543f66c..0000000 --- a/old/63156-h/images/i253.jpg +++ /dev/null |
